Home

PV4E V4.1 - RiT Technologies

image

Contents

1. Links Notes Type chotce Time Allocated choice Due Date link oO Due Time Description Break Link Install Remove Location A Locaton B O Faur Figure 278 Add Edit Work Order Task dialog In the Description box type a description of the task 6 The Location field is disabled for Links Break Links as the system inserts it automatically 7 In the Assigned to field click the 7 button to view the list of technicians or users This list is created in Permissions in the Setting module Select the name of the user who is to perform the task 8 Change the Due Date and Time optional 9 Click OK to add the task to the Work Order task list Add Edit Work Order Task Webpage Dialog E3 General Links Notes Type choice Time Allocated Status Assigned To Due Date E 09107 2009 Due Time Description Start Date Start Time Date Comp Time Comp Location A Time Elapsed Location B 6 a Figure 279 Adding a Link Break Link Task to a Work Order RiT Technologies Ltd 364 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Working in the Links Worksheet The devices that are to be linked are selected and dragged and dropped into the Links Worksheet The ports that are to be linked are aligned and selected Note As the procedures to either create or break links are almost identical the following instructions will refer only to creating links gt To select and bring the devices into
2. cccccssececcecceeceeeneaaeeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaasasaaseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeqaaas 500 Location Access Permission sirpunsseriririsiparoriner irar Nepra PEEP EN EEPE A EP EFAN EPEAN E REPNA E Er KEP EPAR E NEPEAN E Erani 501 OS E o E T A E EA A E AT A A S A A A A A E E E A E E 501 Con Ty eraen E E sinue lan dehsveninnbaniaaantnuns 501 Individual User Leve Lessrecnie oa aeron E A a a EEO TEUAS 501 Setting the Location Access Permission seececeeecccsssssseeeescececceccccccccsssssssscceeccocccoccssssssssscececcecccssosssssssscceeooo 501 TICA CCSS TaD oreson ear EEEE E EE EN 502 Access Permissioi s eisrereerererissreoi nasetan Sae N ENE EEEE EREE REA SISENE SEESE 503 Location Tree Checkbox arcs tren naga nstisesnts anannatansnecnneobaostnianepibasadebaeadmonm EEEN E REREN SOSEA N EAA ESSERE ST TESIEN SEES 503 Validating User Access Permissions cccccccccccsssssssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaseesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaesssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeqaaas 504 FUG TVG ee E T E E TE E TE E TS 504 Move Kack TOC AU tg orrs Ea aE EE i 505 Croate a New Rac k LOCA ON cinips ennen a rna eR R a n aiea 506 Tapon LoC a e E E yagunieneakenasmaonaenens 506 CHAPTER 14 PV4E GENERAL INFORMAT ION ccscceseceeeeneeeeeeeeneees 507 Active Directory IntegratiOi s scscssssrssncsccisesssernnendcoss ont cbk endann eonan oo aA isszeeessutestvesnecessera cecsveteseseateseecsvevounes 507 Sy lem Mor malon sss a E a E a 510 SA
3. Category E Batch Completed Successfully T g Batch Completed with Errors Batch Process Started Catalog Item Added Catalog Item Deleted Catalog Item Updated Demo Time Expired Device authorized for existing device Device found without a specific location Ei Gi ci Gi Gi Si i mio ui amp HREERBEEREEEaRE Figure 10 Pop up Msg Filtering Window By default the events Pop Up fields are empty Click the box of the events that you want to appear as a pop up message Scroll down using the scroll bar to view all events Click Apply and OK RiT Technologies Ltd 26 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Pop up Example le Event Detail Webpage Dialog K General Event Code Catalog Item Deleted Date Time 09 06 2009 14 05 Source PV4E Client User Administrator Computer 127 0 0 1 Description Catalog Item Deleted Name Comm Room Lace Figure 11 Pop up Example If a pop up message Is displayed before a previous pop up message Is closed they appear on the screen together To close pop up click Close Click Close All to close all open pop ups Selecting the Hardware Environment Based on the hardware environment you are using you should select the appropriate option gt To select a hardware environment 1 From the Settings menu select PatchView Elements The PatchView property pane opens RiT Technologies Ltd 27 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PatchView Settings Figure 12 PatchView Proper
4. Swap operation failed for device station O1 port 01 in location room 360 Recommended link to device station 01 port O1 in location room 360 not found Free slot not found for device station O1 in rack 200 Insufficient power in rack 200 for device Required VLANs 123 for switch port to device station O1 in location room 360 is not available Device 01 action could not be performed recommended link could not be allocated PatchView could not generate a route between an outlet to a switch port this may happen because there are insufficient panels in the same connectivity zone The operation could not be performed due to an error in one of the devices in the chain Station O1 could not be swapped from its source location to its target location PatchView has generated links for port O1 of device station O1 in room 360 but could not be assigned to the station The reason for this is due to insufficient resources A slot cannot be allocated to station O1 due to lack of rack space A slot cannot be allocated to station 01 because there is not enough available power The switch port with the required VLANs list could not be found in the communication room General error message for the provisioning module RiT Technologies Ltd 354 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 8 Work Order and Managing Links Work Order Overview A Work O
5. Add Edit Catalog Station Webpage Diala General Settings Modules Cooling Slot No Catalog Name Module Type Connectivity The new connectivity module has been added Click OK 6 Whenever you add new connectivity module the system will automatically offer you the next available slot number 7 If you attempt to place two connectivity modules into the same slot number the following error dialog box appears RiT Technologies Ltd 453 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Windows Internet Explorer l x A Unable to insert the item The requested slot is currently being used 8 Change the connectivity modules using the drop down menu to assign a new slot After you have made the changes click Apply M Add Edit Catalog Station Webpage Dialog General Settings Modules Cooling Slot No Catalog Name Module Type HP Ethernet Pass Through Module Connectivity HP Ethernet Pass Through Module Connectivity E HP FC Pass Through Module Connectivity 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 Bay Assignment 9 Repeat these steps for each connectivity module Linking Bays to Connectivity Modules Note This section applies only for chassis with a Pass through connectivity type PV4E helps you to document the internal links between connectivity modules and bays The connectivity between connectivity modules and bays is hard wired and has to be set once in the catalog Usually every bay is fed with links from se
6. After the Replace function has been performed the PVMax Server synchronizes the PVMax Security Controller with the database i e setting the ports to ON or OFF updating the I O ports mask downloading the configuration file and sending scheduled pulses Remove Removing an assigned PVMax Security Controller is the same as with any other PVMax device gt To Remove a PVMax Security Controller Right click on a PVMax Security Controller that is related to an inventory from the System View Topology tree in the Physical branch context menu Select Remove from the context menu Selecting OK un assigns the Security Controller in the PVMax topology from the Inventory and changes its status to a ghost It does not delete it from Inventory The PVMax Server sends the PVMax Security Controller a command to reset to its factory defaults The Search function can be used to search for a PVMax Security Controller This option is added to the Search For menu in the PatchView Equipment branch in the PVMax Controller item RiT Technologies Ltd 162 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The PVMax Security Controller has additional criteria fields in addition to the general fields that appear for every PatchView Equipment search The additional fields are Device Device location Include sub location check box for the device location Include ports check box Indude Sub Location Indude Sub Location Indude Ports Port Port Type Appliance
7. Edit Link Adding Cables to an open Worksheet gt To drag and drop a cable into an open Worksheet 1 Open an Edit Link Worksheet if one is not already open 2 Switch to Telecommunication Infrastructure view 3 Select the Cable s that you would like to add to the Edit Link Worksheet and position the cursor over the icon or one of the icons of the selection Click on the item or selection 4 Drag to the Edit Link Worksheet and drop in the required cell The ports of the cable s will be added to the Edit Link Worksheet in the selected cells Alternatively to add an Item into an open Worksheet 1 Open an Edit Link Worksheet if one is not open and click on empty cell 2 Locate relevant ports cables etc 3 Right click on the item port and choose edit link View Links The View Link displays a joint picture of the inventory tree and also the telecommunication tree A new function View Cable has been added that displays an illustrated view of the location points of where each cable passes Pathway gt To view a link for a pathway do the following 1 Stand on the pathway and right click Select View Link from the context menu RiT Technologies Ltd 269 PV4E User Manual V6 0 f P 4E Windows Internet Explorer WORK ORDER TOOLS Y SETTINGS Location Topology Users D Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure 7 Location Ae UK E Atlanta A MYC O e Floor 1 Hall 1 Hall 2 Add requests Hall
8. PV4E User Manual V6 0 e 25 pair cable e 50 pair cable The new cables can be found under Telecom Infrastructure gt Horizontal and Vertical Adding a Pathway gt To adda pathway do the following From the Location tree stand on the location and right click the mouse From the context menu select Pathway See the following Location Topology Users Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Leal r g Cable Z Y 5 e Cable 2 6 E tat Pathway 1 The following screen opens at the General tab RiT Technologies Ltd 188 PV4E User Manual V6 0 General Tab A Add edit Inventory Pathway Webpage Dialog General Name Functional Type Class Catalog Name Material Type Maximum Capacity Capacity Start Point End Point Location Enter the following Name Functional Type Class Catalog Name Material Type Maximum Capacity Location Dimensions Cables Branching Pts Notes Florence BLDG Z Florence BLDG 7 Florence BLDG 7 Enter name Completed by default from context menu selection Use the drop down list to enter class Use the drop down menu to select Use the drop down list to enter catalog name Use the drop down menu to select Metal is entered by default from the Functional Type field The maxim number of Recommended Suggested number of cables ona pathway user defined cables that can be placed ona pathway Indicates the pathwa
9. PVMax Scanner Exclusive Remedies PVMax Security Controller PVMax Splitter PVMax RiT s Dashboard SDK Secure Link SiteBuilder SitePro Sitewiz SMART Cabling System SMART CLASSix SMART Giga SMART Patch Panels SMARTen The PVMax Scanner System Work Order WO The remedies provided herein are the Buyer s sole and exclusive remedies RiT Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages including but not limited to lost profits In no event shall RiT s liability exceed the purchase price of the RiT product RiT Technologies Ltd PV4E User Manual V6 0 Assistance For any assistance contact your nearest RiT Sales and Service Office or your local dealer For further information on technical support and seminars please visit out web site or email us Web Site http www rittech com RiT Technologies Ltd iii PV4E User Manual V6 0 Table of Contents Section Page CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION be vsisvscedesivede cs savecevccsvedscvicsudessiuseversisuusevsiavusevesssusscuaseuss 1 Produet DCS CUED oxissesscecesstvczwaceteecensat sas eoaaiansswssiveseauesycuuasausaseacutecssesctveuse catsavessscssveewssoacsuneveeaadscsiauaasesacuutnanessctes 1 BRGY ING WB Ca UGS s E 2 PRS ASM Seg section E dream Paanbas Paeetoars S 4 CHAPTER 2 PV4E OVERVIEW cscsucutesesecedueus aces iseSessesetuiutesusasuddsssesstdsasesudccusccusucusess 8 Paleh
10. The results of the Search columns depend on whether the Include Ports box is checked RiT Technologies Ltd 163 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Include Ports box not checked The following screen is displayed Catalog Name Location P Max Indicator Controller lAmber Inc PVMax Security Controller Amber Inc Total Records 2 Include Ports box checked The following screen is displayed Catalog Name Locaion Pot PortTyre PVMax Indicator Controle Amber Inc Rack Indicator PVMax Indicator Controlle Amber Inc Rack Indicator PVMax Indicator Controlle Amber Inc Rack Indicator PVMax Indicator Controlie Amber Inc Rack Indicator PVMax Indicator Controlle Amber Inc Rack Indicator PVMax Indicator Controlle Amber Inc Rack Indicator PVMax Indicator Controlle Amber Inc Rack Indicator PVMax Indicator Controlle Amber Inc Rack Indicator A e ee n aa ee ee a oan anuwewWNn es Total Records 40 Adding a Security Controller to the Inventory gt Add To Add a new PVMax Security Controller 1 Right click on a specific location from the Location tree or right click on the No Location field 2 Select Add PatchView Equipment in the context menu 3 Select PVMax Controller RiT Technologies Ltd 164 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Location Topology Users Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Location 3 Amber Inc E ee Search Add Location Add Rack Equipment Add Terminal Equi
11. Before you can perform the automatic discovery step you must make sure that all switches are in the inventory Ensure that all outlets are in the inventory and are linked to where the Access Points are located See the following section How to View Links going through an Access Point To start the discovery hardware device operation you must first run LAN Mapper and then the LAN server This process discovers all IP driven devices in the network After the Discovery Module has run all switch ports are identified and if necessary Access Point inventory items are automatically created and linked to the relevant switch Auto Insertion of an Access Point If there are more than two MAC addresses connected to a switch port via a single outlet port then PV4E automatically creates an Access Point and places it between the outlet port and the discovered MAC addresses RiT Technologies Ltd 430 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note If only two MAC addresses are discovered and one is an IP phone then an Access Point will not be created The default Access Point name is Access Point followed by the outlet name for example AP outlet name However this name can be changed Auto Deletion of an Access Point If at anytime the number of MAC addresses associated with an Access Point is below two once detected the system will automatically remove the Access Point A MAC addresses will no longer be associated with an Access Point when a d
12. CE e eacececveea see ts angi eneevaseuesvascdesvessederssanstenvivecdeeeececweaese soe 373 Changing the Status of a Link Task cccccccccccssssseseseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeasaeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeessseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeqaaas 375 TeL OM ON PAC ccs Seccose samc E E E 376 Closing a Work OTC oc ctsacsaiccnsaaivnctectdsmomeeanceseensumonandienoveos innieasnanctnnctenebtooucaalonemusdbaekaacstmosennteeoueauseoutuesdeadtuees 378 PY MAX Scheduled Unschiedtiled Events sss isssisssceseswssscivsansicsnesedevnietisnsessavacasacbcnosnsiaaassesitsoasavasevonesteensanaessners 380 Unscheduled Links osiris aE T AE E Ea 380 Scheduled Work Order Links 20 ccccesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeesees 380 Scheduled Edit Link Apply Links eeeeeeesssessssssseseeeeersrssssssssssssseetreessssssssssssssesssseeeereresssssssssssseresesessssssssees 381 CHAPTER 9 DISCOVERY MODULE P LET nasnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 383 Discovery Module OV CR VICW sicssennn seuseecuasstacncscetwoseieassnscscesestveusthsnasveseaveceenseaseeseassceeeers 383 LAN Mapper assis 383 LAN Mapper SCtUI GS saan wisanesterccowen vontaushunecanbsanecamnsdaacousaeaadenundsieainsbasedebes tsbvowasugudanshdsucdensuwnddieadaiieneeieasddneddecanees 385 LAN Mapper Manual Scann ccccccssseccccccececeeeeeaeessssssesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeseaaseeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaassssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeaaags 388 LAN Mapper SCC AUN CE
13. If PBXs reside in the network their internal map of extensions can be imported manually to PV4E to update its connectivity Additional maintenance tasks include security measures Chapter 10 Security on page 306 updating the PBX data Chapter 12 Importing PBX Data on page 341 performing backup and restore procedures RiT Technologies Ltd 15 PV4E User Manual V6 0 defining and maintaining secure links generating reports and monitoring the Event Log RiT Technologies Ltd 16 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 3 Getting Started Please refer to the RIT Enterprise Solutions Installation Guide for system Specifications and requirements for PV4E The guide contains the following PV4E System Requirements PV4E Minimum Requirements PV4E Deployment Server Requirements PV4E Client Requirements SQL Server Configuration SQL Remote Configuration Installing PV4E Also contained in The RIT Enterprise Solutions Installation Guide are the pre requisites and requirements together with all other essential information required to install the following modules Extended Driver Pack only relevant for customers who have purchased the extended driver pack CAD PV360 Dashboard SitePro Information about backing up and restoring the PV4E database can be found in Appendix A at the end of this document It contains the following important information Backing up and restoring the PV4E database Stopping the PV4E service Backin
14. PatchView for the Enterprise PV4E User Manual Version 6 0 Released September 2009 Copyright 2009 RiT Technologies All rights reserved No part of this book shall be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without written permission from RIT Technologies No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Although every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book RIT Technologies assume no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein RiT Technologies Ltd i PV4E User Manual V6 0 Trademarks All terms mentioned in this book that are known to be trademarks or service marks have been appropriately capitalized RiT Technologies cannot attest to the accuracy of this information Use of a term in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark The following are propriety trademarks of RiT Technologies and may not be used or reproduced without the permission of RiT Technologies CenterMind Control Pad Device Locator LAN Mapper LAN Server PatchView for the Enterprise PatchView P LET Provisioning PV4E PV PowerMax PVMax Expander PVMax Indicator Controller PVMax Local Scanner PVMax Master PVMax Master Expander
15. RiT Technologies Ltd 289 PV4E User Manual V6 0 1 In the Location or Topology Tree locate and drag and drop the item s you want to link into the Edit Link worksheet or select the item and click on the Edit Links button Ensure that the ports are correctly aligned Use only the manual flip option on the selected port as Auto flip will position like to like See Auto or Manual Flipping of Links Select the cells containing the ports that are to be linked Click on the Link button The Link Status Symbols change from H to 4 Create a Work Order optional Click on the Apply button to nn E The Link Status Symbols change from Secure Links Links can be defined as Secure Links Secure links allow you to define one or more vital links in the organization PV4E closely monitors information on any change or problem that occurs on the secure link or on its end devices station and switch port This gives a higher level of control and management for vital links in the network alerting you of any change in the secure link and minimizing the ability of unauthorized persons to make modifications to the connectivity You receive an immediate indication on changes to secure links A secure link is defined as a link that has a switch port on one side and terminal equipment on the other side and does not contain elements of an existing broken secure link One or more links in the organization can be defined as secure links An ale
16. Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure frem n Bair ep EB pc 76196 a Office 6 El ge Floor 2 p EH Building B ae age 3A DG 14 ff Bune 27 ae oor 2 E ee Floor 3 Room 22 cabinet 1 El Bl cabinet 4 m Blade Center E 21 a HP Chasss HE Pane Station 1 lg USA Ho Location FS Panel 2 Printer 1 Router 1 Station 4 Switch E Telephone 20 Figure 77 Auto Naming Location tree dialog The following Auto Naming screen opens at the Template 1 tab by default RiT Technologies Ltd 106 PV4E User Manual V6 0 r E Auto Naming Webpage Dialog Templatei Template 2 Panel No of Items Row No of Items No of Items Panel A 3 5 Row B 1 10 Figure 78 Auto Naming template 2 dialog In the Text field enter the name of the panel Note that the Text fields are static meaning entered text will apper in all the generated names The rest of the fields are dynamic and will change according to the set citeria In the From field enter the initial value A has been used in the above example This value is dynamic meaning the generated names will have different viaues In the Step field the default increment is 1 To change use the 4 buttons The purpose of this field is to define how the value that was set in the From field will be increased For example if the value set in the From field is A and the step set for 2 then the generated values will be A
17. Windows Internet Explorer WORK ORDER Location Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Location Amber Inc 3 Belgium Ff Demo amp Comm Room E cabinet 1 FI Demo Rack PP OPR 3 PP SPR Dlink Switch Scanner 1 rT Masteri M 10 100 20 22 amp Room 201 f Outlet 1 gt Outlet 201 Station 1 amp Room 205 E Demo2 h Florence eY BLD 1 BLD2 Y BLD3 Fi BLDA ff BLDB Topology Users TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY Outlet 201 General Notes Front ID Back 01 Show Link Test Results Events Date Time Event Code 09 10 2009 16 02 Export Process Completed 09 10 2009 16 02 Export Statistic Information 09 10 2009 16 02 Export Process Started 09 10 2009 15 38 PVMax Device Disconnected 09 10 2009 15 38 PVMax Server is Offline 09 10 2009 15 33 Export Process Completed Bek FOR THE Enterprise Back Name Back 01 Event Category DB DB DB PVMax PVMax DB 999 gt 999 5 09 10 7009 15 33 Fxnort Statistic Information one E copernic Figure 191 Ports tab Note The Show Channel Test Results option is only available for switch and outlet ports These are the only two places where this option is available The option is not enabled from the Connecting HW Search Show Panel and Show Rack If the cable test result is disabled the menu will not display the cable test result options The menu will not be shown at all in the view link Show Port C
18. k AA i Le Figure 141 Switch Properties Edit Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 198 PV4E User Manual V6 0 To attach the Switch to an Interconnect panel check mark the box next to Interconmect the Interconnect field Click OK One of the following error messages appears if m The Switch Port is not linked The Switch Port is linked to an item which is not an Interconnect Panel m The Back of the Interconnect Panel is linked to an item other than the selected switch If any of the above errors are displayed edit the offline links and check that the have been implemented Note The Switch and the attached Interconnect are now presented as one unit constructed of the switch body and the Interconnect Panel front port Detaching a Switch from an Interconnect Panel To detach the Switch from an Interconnect panel uncheck the Interconnect field in the Settings tab See the following E A Add Edit Inventory Switch Webpage Dialog E 5 E a a General Modules VLAN O Settings Notes SNMP Setongs verson Timeout ms Reties Ponito Monitor Traps interconnect EE Sed ee ee ee E E t i wi Lute b r Sart sere rae daria Li waaa Figure 142 Switch Properties View Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 199 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Edit Link To edit the Switch links perform the following steps 1 From the Location tree stand on the Switch and right mouse click gt Edit Link Loca thon T
19. A warning will be generated for a conflict that can be ignored and does not affect the rest of the process A conflict is generated in the following cases m CSV line has the wrong number of fields according to its type If a field is omitted it should be represented by consequent commas m item Type has an invalid value Valid values are Location Connecting HW Rack Equipment Network Equipment Link information m Inventory item name and catalog functional type is not unique in its location m Catalog Name is not defined in the PV4E catalog Location Name is not defined previously in the CSV file or does not exist in the PV4E database E Item Name cannot contain more than 50 characters RiT Technologies Ltd 246 PV4E User Manual V6 0 m Parent Location must contain a location according to PV4E Location Tree policies Example It is illegal to define a room as a parent location to a floor or a panel inside a shelf Slot No contains an invalid or occupied slot no in its container Parent child functional type must meet PV4E policy according to the following table Valid Parent Child I tems The following table lists all the items and the valid parents of the items Child Item Parent Item RiT Technologies Ltd 247 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Child I tem Parent Item PBX Module PBX All Items All Locations except root location Location Record Validity Test Location Type must contain a valid lo
20. Adding Editing and Deleting Classes eescccoocsoecccccccceccecccccocosoccccecccceccececcccoososseccceccccececccocsosssececcececcececeeceossssss 41 PN a e e N E E A E EE E EEA E 41 PMU ce AS e terse sa E EA S E A E E E E can E EOE A EA 42 Be E e E E E A A A EA A EA TEA AANA A NE A 43 Adding Editing and Deleting Items ccccecceecoccosssssssscceceeccccccosssssesseccccccccccossssssesecsescecccccccscssssseececeecessssssssssse 44 P E EE a AEO eases osc wen EI tat E A E T T I E ENI A IE OET A E 44 Eora ae E E N 48 Be a e E E E E E ecard nate oue ene uesaionde pentane 48 Addos Se CLIC Moms tome CAC sreci ni E E E E eea 50 Addine a Vondortothe Ge 1021 one nner eter S E E E ENEE E ere T ern rT 50 Adding Cable Patch Cord Horizontal and Vertical to the Catalog cccccccccssessssesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 51 Adding Trunk Cable to the Catalog cccsssssssssssssseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaasaaeesseaseseceeeeeeeeeeaaas 53 Adding a Pathway to the Catalog ccccccccccsssssssssssssseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaesesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaaas 55 Dimensions FAG csc caosenossaoteescasecnosteateveccesscnacmasee E E E a ENA 57 Adding a Connector to the Catalog neesssssssssssssssseeetteeerssssssssssssseerereersossssssssssesectrererreressssssssssseeeeeeeeeo 57 Adding Rack Equipment to the Catalog ccccccccsssssseeecceceeeceeeeaaeeeaaaeesenseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaaaaseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaqaas 59
21. Adding Software to the Catalog cccccccccccccccccsssssssssssssseseecccccceseesaaauaessssseeeeeeececeeeesessaaeeessssseeeeseeeceeeeeeqaaaas 60 Adding an Adapter to the Catalog ccccccccccccssssssssssssseeeeccceceeeeeeseaasassessseseeeeeeeeeeeesesaaeaeaaaaaaassseeeeeeseeeeeaaags 62 Adding Terminal Equipment to the Catalog cccccccccccccccccecccceceeaaeessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaags 64 Adding an IP Phone to the Catalog cccccssssssssseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeessseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeaeaaaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 64 Adding a KVM Device to the Catalog ccccsccsssssseeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeseesessseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanaaas 66 Adding a Printer to the Catalog ccccccccccssssssssssessssseeecceeceeeeeeeeaeesessnsseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaesesseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeqaaas 69 Adding a Station to the Catalog ccccccccccccssssssssssssseeeeeccceeeceeeeeanaessssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaasasseesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaas 71 Adding a Telephone to the Catalog p suscasnaseocetainnouand at silachusnadeanteneheianbeastabnadehelespdentadeneanheunawastinienienhaeaninnssetines 73 Adding Network Equipment to the Catalog cccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeaesesesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasaseeesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaaaas 75 Adding Switches to the Catalog oa dset os aesndn taredoion ho snataaceetetennethadtacetelsatcinnta ua sw hatsepdeatanie ika iaieiiea ieai 76 POTS a PE X tothe Catalog sasaisti dsena i
22. Amber Inc Belgium Brussels City Towers ee F St Reset Apply Figure 92 Add Edit Location dialog 5 Add the Description optional 6 Select the OK button or one of the other options to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 122 PV4E User Manual V6 0 105 Open Plan 104 single Tat a Ki ro Loe Lo CMe tu l q Th g nos on K i CHMA CAA cor 101 Reception DU _ hJ Co 3 3 5 ani 5 3 on ej a Figure 93 Example of a Cad Drawing for one floor in a Building Window Adding Rooms to the Location Tree Five Rooms will be added to Floor 01 Each room will be named individually according to this example of a CAD drawing A similar map of a layout can be used Whatever is used it is advisable to have it available before beginning the floor layout in the Location Tree gt To add a Room 1 Select and right click on the desired floor in the Location Tree In this example it is Floor 01 A pull down menu will appear Move the cursor over the Add Location and a second menu appears 2 Select and click on Room The Add Edit Location dialog will open Type in the name of the room 4 Add the Description optional RiT Technologies Ltd 123 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog x Room 101 Reception General Inactive Device Environmental Name Room 101 Reception Type Desopton
23. Bix 4 Positions select service Figure 53 Add Edit Catalog Telephone Ports Tab 7 Type in the name and select one of the options available in the Connector window by clicking on the 7 button 8 Click on the Add button to insert more ports if required 9 To remove a port click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 10 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding Network Equipment to the Catalog In order to ensure an end to end management system it is necessary to define all the Network Equipment in the enterprise Network Equipment has been divided into 4 Functional Items These are Switches PBXs Routers Hubs Devices have been predefined by the PV4E Version 6 0 system in the Switches Functional Type These devices are most commonly used by PV4E and it is therefore unnecessary to add further devices RiT Technologies Ltd 75 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Switches to the Catalog A comprehensive list of switches has been included in the database All these Switches are compatible with the PV4E system and can be detected by the P LET using the Switch s IP address In addition when detecting a supported switch through the Maintenance tab it will automatically create the relevant chassis and modules in the Catalog For unmanaged switches e g no SNMP supported the switch may be manually defined in the catalog Switches may
24. C E etc In the No of items field enter the number of items using the buttons See the following example Once you click Test the following formula is displayed in the Preview field The following example is based on the above see fig 109 Panel From A Step 3 No of Items 5 Row From B Step 1 No of Items 10 The return string is based on the numbers entered in the Number of items to create field The number in the first field is mutliplied by the number in the second field and so on For example 5 x 10 50 If the third row is populated and the number in the items created field is 5 then the return string will be 5 x 10 x 5 250 Click Test to check results Then click Apply RiT Technologies Ltd 107 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The Preview screen displays the information i Auto Naming Webpage Dialog x Templatei Template 2 Panel From No of Items From No of Items Text From No of Items Formula Panel A 3 5 Row 6 1 710 Name Panel A Row 7 Panel A Row K Panel M Row K Figure 79 Auto Naming Template 1 dialog RiT Technologies Ltd 108 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Template 2 Template 2 has a specific format and is only used to create panels according to the number of ports as well as rename ports 1 From location tree select a port and right click Select Duplicate from the context menu see fig 108 The following Auto Naming screen opens Auto Naming Webpag
25. Click on the Ports tab to insert the Ports for the Hub RiT Technologies Ltd 83 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FY Add Edit Catalog Hub Webpage Dialog General Pc rt EE ae Service Connector choice eae ee a oe wen es TAn choice 110 1 pair 110 2 pairs Br 4 Positions Bix 8 Positions Remove select service Port Naming Port Duplicate Figure 62 Add Edit Catalog Hub Ports tab 6 Type in the name and select one of the options available in the Connector window by clicking on the 7 button Click on the Add button to insert more ports if required 8 To remove a port click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 9 Select OK or another of the options to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 84 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding PVMax Equipment to the Catalog Note As these components are vital to the running of your Enterprise they are included in the database during the installation process The PVMax Equipment needed to operate RiT s PatchView System consists of the following components Masters Expanders Master Expanders Scanners Local Scanner PVMax controller including Indicator Controller Security Controller Control Pad Master The PVMax Master manages the physical layer network The Master controls all underlying PVMax Scanners managing the scanning algorithm The Master is always the apex of the hierar
26. Defining new catalog items is the first task required in setting up a project Defining the classes and items in the Catalog is usually a one time operation The Catalog contains a detailed list of all available components that will be assigned to a specific Location in the enterprise During the installation process PV4E installs a comprehensive predefined list of items necessary to operate an enterprise New Items can be added to the Catalog at any time and Items can be edited and deleted The hierarchy of the Catalog Tree has been predefined into Item Type Functional Type Class and Item Catalog Window The Catalog window is divided into three areas These are m Catalog Tree This is located on the left hand side of the screen and all Items can be accessed via this tree m Data Area This is located on the upper right hand side of the screen Data changes to reflect the information of the item selected on the tree m Events View The application s standard events view which is in Always on top mode RiT Technologies Ltd 36 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To open the Catalog Window Select and click Catalog from the Settings pull down menu The Catalog window opens Pee Windows Internet Explorer EE ziaja PPLE Alarm Fia Refredh ii L rapper Aziraniatrabor MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER REPORTS Y HELP fon Me Enterprise Catalog Vendor Catalog 1 3 Yeo Temerin infrastructure Connector 1 ql Rac
27. Duplex Duplex 3 To add cables click Add The following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 193 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Cables Webpage Dialog Add Cables To Pathway Cables Indude Sub Location l Catalog Name ELE _ Functional Type Class _Catalog Name Location Cable A B 1 Horizontal and Verl F O Duplex Florence BLD A Cable A B 10 Horizontal and Verl F O Duplex Florence BLD A Cable A B 11 Horizontal and Verl F O Duplex Florence BLD A Cable A B 12 Horizontal and Verl F O Duplex Florence BLD A Cable A B 2 Horizontal and Veri F O Duplex Florence ELD A Horizontal and Veri F O Duplex Florence BLD A e om oo a E m E mu om i 1i 2 Page 1 of 2 Pages Total Records 85 4 Enter the search criteria in the above fields To search for all related items use an asterisk See above Click Search Now A list of all cables will be returned according to the search criteria 5 Select the relevant cables and click OK Notes Cables should have already been added to the inventory You can select cables from the same page However you cannot multi select cables from different search results When the amount of cables exceeds the recommended cables per pathway the user is prompted with a message When the amount of cables exceeds the maximum allowed cables t hen adding cables is blocked until the maximum value is increased Measurements You can work with either metric meters and centimeters
28. Email Server IP Address Email Server Hostname IP Address 0 0 0 0 Fort 25 Figure 342 Edit Notification Setting dialog 3 Click the Email Server IP Address button and enter the IP address of the email server in the IP Address field Or Click the Email Server Hostname button and enter the host name of the email server in the Hostname field 4 Enter the sender s email address in the Email From field Enter the subject of the email in the Subject Message field Optional 6 Click the OK button Assigning Event Notification This tool allows you to assign which events are sent to users and to modify or cancel already assigned events There are two ways to assign event notification m Assigning Event Notification by Event on page 484 E Assigning Event Notification by User on page 486 RiT Technologies Ltd 483 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Assigning Event Notification by Event To assign event notification by event 1 From Settings menu select Event Notification The Events window opens VA Epy ae Fee pee E PY4E Windows Internet Explorer P PVMAX PV R Refresh W Logout ee MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY A FOR THE Enterprise Events Batch Completed Successfully S S General BN Sarin gt Batch Completed Successfully Batch Completed with Errors Batch Process Started Catalog Item Added Catalog Item Deleted Catalog Item Updated Demo Time Expired Device authorized for existi
29. Gl RowA El f RowB E Rack 5 El amp Rowe El E Cabinet 5 El fl ci Bi pciwic ppi0 DcHic 518 DCH1C 519 1 DCHIC S13 You can search for a consolidated host server PC Click Search For from the Terminal Equipment menu and choose Station Rack Equipment User Software Adapter Telecommunication Infrastructure Terminal Equipment IP Phone Network Equipment KVM Device PatchView Equipment Printer Connecting HW Station Work Order Telephone Data Center Equipment Location Global Use the search parameters as follows Station Name Location Indude Sub Location Gg Class Virtual Station v User ID IP Address 5 S Catalog Name Virtual Host Station User First Name Secure Link MAC Address User Last Name Note The Search for works for physical servers PCs only Un Consolidated Virtual Machine As long as the virtual machines are not consolidated they appear in the location tree with the following catalog items as described below RiT Technologies Ltd 443 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A VMWare station is identified in the Location tree by the Location Topology Users Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure NYC DC1 g Floor 1 Halli 3 RowA amp RowB RowC S Cabinet 5 1 c i DC1H1C PP 10 DCH1C S18 DCH1C 519 4 DCH1C 513 DCH1C 514 4 DCH1C 515 An MS Virtual Location Topology Users Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure
30. H1A2SRV233 Add Station Add Station H1A2SRV233 to USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Halll 2 Add r Outlet port to device H1A2SRV237 port Port 01 in location USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 2 Add requests Row A A1 not found Outlet port to device H1A2SRV237 port Port 02 in location USAWNYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 2 Add requests Row A A1 not found Figure 270 Provisioning Screen Error Error Messages Table The following table lists all errors from the Provisioning functionality Outlet port to device station O1 port 1 in location Either there are no available free outlets in room room 360 not found 360 or all outlets in the room are reserved Switch port to device station O1 port 1 in location Switch ports in the communication room are room 360 not found either in use or reserved Required service red for switch port to device station O1 port 01 in location room 360 is not available Switch ports with the required service could not be found in the communication room Required service red for outlet port to device station O1 port 01 in location room 360 Is not available Outlet ports with the required service could not be found in room 360 RiT Technologies Ltd 353 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Route to device station O1 port 01 location room 360 not found Chain operation failed for device station O1 port O1 in location room 360
31. Location IE UK USA F Atlanta 7 Bldg A 4 Bldg B NYC lf DCi a Floor 1 Halli f RowA E RowB f RowC J Cabinet 5 E c FE pc1nic PPi0 pcHic sis DCH1C S18 General Functional Type Class Catalog Name Status CPU Monitor Arm Side No of Slots Serial No Location DCH1C S18 Functional Type Class Catalog Name Status CPU Monitor Arm Side No of Slots Serial No Location Events ICON Adapters Virtual Devices Station Virtual Station gm VMware Virtual Station Manual Last Activity Date Intel Xeon RAM Power W Weight KG USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 1 Row C C1 Station is identified in the Location tree by the alee icon Adapters Virtual Devices Station Virtual Station i MS Virtual Station Manual Last Activity Date Intel Xeon RAM Power W Weight KG USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 1 Row C C1 Users can search for an un consolidated virtual machine Click Search For from the Terminal Equipment menu choose Station Use the search parameters as follows Station Name Class Virtual Station Catalog Name MAC Address Location User ID User First Name User Last Name Indude Sub Location Iv IP Address amp B Secure Link Note The Search for works for unconsolidated virtual machines only RiT Technologies Ltd 444 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 10 Blade Servers PV4E V6 0 introduces enhanced support for
32. Og at cL m i fs Td a RiT Technologies Ltd 461 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 11 Security PV4E contributes to the security of your network PV4E can respond immediately to any unauthorized changes on the physical layer of the network Device Locator You can detect the precise and on the fly physical location of devices on the network There are essentially two main scenarios for using the device locator E Responding to an intrusion detection system IDS alert An IDS may alert of the existence of an unauthorized device in the network The IDS provides the IP address of this device Using the Device Locator you can pinpoint to the precise location of this device Verifying the location of an existing device For a device that is already defined in the Inventory and you suspect that it may have recently been moved in an unauthorized manner you can search in real time for its actual physical location For example a user has moved offices without prior coordination with the administrator and the administrator wishes to determine the new location of the Station You need an additional license to use the Security Module If you presently do not have this license please contact your local RIT representative gt To locate a Device You can locate any end device terminal equipment in the Inventory If you are aware that a device has moved location use this option to find the actual locat
33. PV4E User Manual V6 0 Topology of PVMax Subnet is explained in the Viewing the Subnets on page 392 Topology is defined according to the logical hierarchical structure of the essential equipment needed to operate PV4E It differs from the Location Tree that shows the logical hierarchical structure of the network If a Master Scanner has been defined in the location tree it automatically appears in the PV Topology Master Scanners Security Controllers Patch Panels and Terminal Network Equipment that have been assigned to locations in the Location tree are added into the Topology Tree from the existing list and placed in their logical order If a Master has been defined in the location tree it automatically appears in the PVMax Topology Masters Expanders Master Expanders Scanners Patch Panels and Terminal Network Equipment that have been assigned to locations in the Location tree are added into the Topology Tree from the existing list and placed in their logical order Items can be added directly to Topology without assigning them first to Location These are then assigned by default to No Location or if specified to their specific location gt PV4E Windows Internet Explorer Il 1 PVMAX P LET Alarm n Refresh O Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY gt FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users PVMAX Topology PatchView Subnet General PVMAX Topology Mode E P
34. PV4E User Manual V6 0 patch panels then between patch panels and switch ports with names and locations This includes the rooms where the outlets are located racks panels and switches E Build Your Network Topology Once the assets have been populated into the PV4E repository you need to define the initial connectivity All of your work is logged and can be referenced for future use Executing a Work Order triggers the LEDs on the patch panels to show the field technician exactly which ports must be connected or disconnected A control pad connected to a scanner allows the technician performing the actual on site changes to activate the physical link change process At this point the connectivity between outlets and switch ports is defined m Prepare to Run the Discovery Module and realize the Entire Network The Discovery Module is a network tracking system that discovers and recognizes connectivity changes in the network and informs the user of the changes In order to run the Discovery Module you must first configure the LAN Mapper settings The LAN Mapper is a Discovery Module that discovers all active devices in the network and their subnets After defining the appropriate LAN Mapper Scheduler and LAN Server settings you should also ensure that software switch trap settings are enabled on all network switches and in the PV4E settings Chapter 9 on page 383 Run the Discovery Module The Discovery Module discovers and m
35. PVMAX P LET Alarm KY Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY Sy NUS REPORTSY HELPY Paren Vis w l FOR THE Enterprise MAC Address Location IP Address i Indude Sub Location Host Name Location Security Authorized fd Global Check Box MAC Address IP ost Name Ang ine Location 00 00 0C 07 AC 01 10 100 40 21 xi No Location 00 00 74 7D 22 8E 10 100 10 22 00 01 6 2C C5 4E 10 100 10 3 NA This operation selects all items in all the pages 00 02 78 55 25 7F 15 1 1 125 00 02 B3 E9 AB 39 10 100 40 22 00 03 47 16 9C 85 0 0 0 0 00 03 47 48 72 59 10 100 30 19 00 03 47 4F 54 35 10 100 40 61 TSTTLAB162 v d gt gt gt gt gt gt gt d 00 03 47 63 AC 54 10 100 40 111 OMRI TESTS x x x x x x x x 2 3 Page 1 of 3 Pages Total Records 146 Figure 321 Edit Authorization MAC Search A global checkbox enables the selection of all MACs returned by the search in all of the search results pages A confirmation dialog box appears when you check the global check box see above screen Click Export to export the search results to a file Wildcards can also be used To manually add MACs click Add Devices the following box opens RiT Technologies Ltd 413 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E Authorize devices Webpage Dialog xj Authorize MAC Address Enter the MAC address and click Add or Remove The MAC address is verified when you click Authorize To authorize a MAC select the
36. TESTLABIS SQL Server 9 0 1395 Databases T C System Databases ig PV4E Lj Database Snapshots TESTLAB15 Databases P 4E 8 Item s E G5SClean GSPV4E60 GSPV4E6FULL bak z Database Diagrams PV4E60 C Tables P 4E61004 GE Views P 4E61004_ 12 Ga Synonyms oa are CI Programmability CI Server Objects ao Broker Replication Eo ecurity CI Management CI Notification Services SQL Server Agent Agent XPs 5 Expand the Databases section of the tree until you arrive at PV4E Stand on the PV4E folder and right click From the context menu select gt Tasks gt Backup Database aa Pem ae m ni New Query Script Database as ae se Diagrams Detach F Rename Take Offline Delete Bring Online i m Security Refresh Shrink d Server Properties Sur back Wp Replication E Management Mirror Ship Transaction Logs Notification Services SOL Server Ogent Generate Scripts Import Data Export Data Copy Database Figure RiT Technologies Ltd 515 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The Back Up Database PV4E screen opens The screen opens by default at the General tab F Back Up Database P 4E Oy x select 2 EN Script Te Help Source Database Recovery madel Backup type Backup component f Database Files and filegroups FE __ Backup a Name FV4E Ful Database Backup Description oo OS Backup set will expire After booo H
37. The PV4E GUI contains options to view these results using a PDF FLW viewer Note The Fluke viewer for flw files is not part of the PV4E installation and must be installed on the client machine Overview Cabling test results exist for the following Link Channel components a Panel port to Panel port connected Back to Back link b Outlet port to Panel port connected Back to Back link c Switch port to Panel port connected to panel back link d Switch port to Outlet channel A Fluke file viewer FLW viewer or PDF viewer must be installed on every client machine using this feature The run option of the ActiveX viewer must be enabled The PV4E Server has read access to the file system where the cable test results are stored PV4E will only read data from the directories tree where the cable test results are stored You cannot set cable test results for items in No Location These items by definition must be moved to their correct location PV4E does not manage files in storage Example of Use A storage place is created for the cable test result files PV4E is then set to this storage path When you wish to view a cable test result of a specific port PV4E will automatically search for it in the storage place Once it has been located you are then able view the results via an ActiveX viewer If the specific port does not have any cable test results PV4E will search for alternatives If an alternative is fou
38. When the Edit Link Worksheet is opened from the Information Pane gt Ports Tab only a single port will appear in the first column of the worksheet gt To open the Edit Link Worksheet from the Ports tab 1 Select and highlight the Item in either the Location or Topology Tree 2 Click on the Ports Tab The selection indicator El wil appear at the first port Select the required port s use the scroll bar to locate it if necessary and click on the gray box next to the required port The indicator triangle will appear next to the correct port Multiselect can be used lt Alt gt for consecutive list and lt Ctrl gt for non consecutive list 3 Right click on the selected port s and select Edit Link from the pull down menu The Edit Link Worksheet opens with the port s in the first column RiT Technologies Ltd 278 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FS P 4E Windows Internet Explorer K Refresh W Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLS v SETTINGS Y REPORTS v HELP v i 3 FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Connectors oom 100 annem Front Back E Cabinet 1 Name ID Name Port 01 Back 01 Back 01 Port 02 Back 02 Back 02 Port 03 Back 03 Back 03 Port 04 Back 04 Back 04 Port 05 Back 05 Back 05 Port 06 Back 06 Back 06 Any Servii Port 07 Port 07 Back 07 Back 07 Any Servii Port 08 Port 08 Back 08 Back 08 Any Servii Port 09 Port 09 Back 09 Back 09 GETE TomT
39. check the box in the upper left corner of the Tasks tab and click OK on the confirmation screen 3 Click the 7l next to the choice field to open the drop down menu and select Send to Scanner Work Order Location W0O 07 09 2009 00005 All General Operations Tasks ID Engineer a Description Operation Status Assigned To oe 1 Connect Panel Panel 01 P Created W0 06 08 2009 00001 2 Connect Panel Panel 01 P Created W0 07 09 2009 00003 09 07 2009 3 Connect Panel Panel 01 P Created WO0O 07 09 2009 00004 Created 09 07 2009 WO0 07 09 2009 00005 Created 09 07 2009 Name a Assign To assign Status v Perform status Delete New Edit In Progress Work Order Figure 289 Changing the Status of a Link 4 The Status of that task changes to Send to Scanner 5 Click the Perform button to send the information to the scanner Work Order Location W0O 07 09 2009 00005 All General Operations Tasks ID O Engineer oe _ a Desaiption _ Operation Status Assigned To 1 Connect Panel Panel 01 P Send To Scanne W0 06 08 2009 00001 08 06 2009 2 Connect Panel Panel 01 P Send To Scanne W0 07 09 2009 00003 09 07 2009 3 Connect Panel Panel 01 P Send To Scanne WO0 07 09 2009 00004 09 07 2009 WO 07 09 2009 00005 09 07 2009 Name a Due Date Priority 5 status Perform Edit Work Order Figure 290 Changing the Status of a Link
40. connectivity data from the Scanners It consolidates the data and updates the PV4E management station on connectivity changes reported by the Scanners under its control RiT Technologies Ltd 10 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The Master is connected to Scanners located in the same building and also to scanners in other buildings The Master can monitor up to 8 sites Each port of the Master is considered a separate site The Master can also be connected to Expanders which are connected to Scanners PVMax Expander Expanders increase the capabilities of the Master You connect PVMax Scanners to the Expanders which are connected to the Master This allows the Master to connect to a multitude of PVMax Scanners at various sites You can connect up to 8 PVMax Scanners to each Expander and Expanders can be connected to other Expanders in a cascading method This increases the number of PVMax Scanners connected to the Master PVMax Master Expander The Master Expander is a combination of the Master and the Expander It is used when there is only one site in the enterprise Like the Expander the Master Expander increases the capabilities for scanning Unlike the Master only a single site may be defined when a Master Expander is used A Master Expander cannot be connected to a Master PVMax Scanner PVMax Scanners are located in wiring racks at various sites The Patch Panels are connected to the PVMax Scanners which are connected to Expa
41. in the same building or in different buildings on the campus Only one Master is necessary to poll and save connectivity data collected from all the PVMax Scanners Through cascading Expanders an unlimited number of PVMax Scanners can be connected to a Master in one site Each PVMax Scanner functions as a relay station for connectivity data for up to 2410 Patch Panels Each Patch Panel can contain 16 24 or 32 or 48 ports An unlimited number of Masters can be managed by PV4E For example the Master can be connected to an Expander which in turn is connected to 8 Expanders Each of these 8 Expanders is connected to another 8 Expanders Each final level of Expanders is connected to 8 Scanners each of which monitors up to 24 patch panels From this configuration the Master Scanner at one site is monitoring 12 288 patch panels PatchView reports the connections down to the level of the patch panel port When there is a malfunction in the system PatchView quickly identifies the physical routing of the link between the user work outlet and the corresponding wiring rack located at the site SMART Patch Panels There are over one hundred models of intelligent data communications patch panels manufactured by RiT and suited to almost any wiring system and application Patch panels provide a compact cabling environment for interconnection inside a LAN A special flat cable connects each patch panel with a PatchView scanner The scanners collect
42. or imperial measurements feet and inches for the cabling entities length To change to your preferred system do the following 1 From the Settings menu select Metric Specifications RiT Technologies Ltd 194 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Permissions Msa Filtering System Tables Work Order PatchView Elements PBX Mail Configuration Event Notification Cable Test Results Connectivity Zone 2 The following screen opens Metric Spec Length Units 3 To change measurements click Edit 4 Click the radio button for your preferred system and click OK RiT Technologies Ltd 195 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Interconnect Interconnect panels are managed panels in the PV4E system Unlike other managed panels that occupy physical space in the racks the Interconnect panels are attached to the front of network switches The cables connected to the switch ports are attached through an opening in the Interconnect panels that hold them in place Special cables are used with metal connectors that are in touch with the Interconnect panel and function similar to the 9th pin Detecting Interconnect Panel The Interconnect panel is detected automatically and appears in the PVMax topology tree Assigning Interconnect Panel It is assigned to an instance tn the library like other PVMax panels At present there are two Interconnect panels in the catalog Interconnect panel 24 ports and 48 ports Both are copper pane
43. the following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 419 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E O x Alarm K Refresh W Logout Administrator REPORTS Y HELP pee wat FOR THE Enterprise LAN Mapper LAN Server Switch Traps r settings A Enable station status aging Idle After 90 Day s Dormant After 90 Day s Decommissioned Never The Inactive Device module is enabled by default If you want to change this setting click Edit and uncheck the Enable station status aging checkbox Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save your changes and close the window Setting Time Limits You can set up to three time limits The following time limits are set by default Threshold Time elapsed Active to Idle 90 days 180 days From active status dormant to boas O never decommissioned Defining Time Limits Idle to dormant You can set system wide limits or alternatively set time limits per location To set time limits for the entire application do the following 1 In PV4E select Setting gt P LET 2 Select the Inactive Device tab RiT Technologies Ltd 420 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 Click Edit 4 Change the setting to any of the thresholds as illustrated in the following screen el Edit Device Status Settings Webpage Dialog Inactive Device Settings fd Enable station status aging Idle After Day s Dormant After Day s Decommissioned After Day s
44. type pass through connectivity modules Pass through module support Supports Blades with pass through configuration Provisioning supports Blade server A No Service type has been added RiT Technologies Ltd 3 Supports provisioning of Blade servers into enclosures Ports with No Service type will not be PV4E User Manual V6 0 New Feature Function considered during the provisioning process Allows you to exclude a port when performing An option to remove specific ports when performing an Add request has been added a provisioning request PV4E V6 now includes new Supported hardware Key Benefits Smart LC 8 8 panel Smart LC 144 Smart LC 96 SMART CLASSix RJ RJ UTP 24 SMART CLASSix RJ RJ STP 24 Local Master 8 Local Master 12 Local Master 24 Multi Pair Cable 25 Pairs Multi Pair Cable 50 Pairs IBM BladeCenter E Chassis IBM BladeCenter H Chassis IBM BladeCenter S Chassis HP C3000 Enclosure HP C7000 Enclosure Provisioning Fully Automated Enables you to assign system resources and services in a fully automated environment and in addition significantly improves the planning and provisioning process for data centers and work space environments RIT s Automated Provisioning supports Move Add Change Swap and Remove operations Move and Add requests can also be performed per specific port User defined tasks can be added to the automatic Work Order E Discovery Module The f
45. 07 6E 02 00 OF 10 100 20 201 10 100 40 21 00 07 6E 02 08 20 10 100 40 10 00 08 83 00 03 51 10 100 40 158 00 08 83 00 0E 8E 10 100 50 24 Default SNMP Settings 00 08 B3 1F B4 5 10 100 40 152 Version SNMPv1 00 0B 83 98 D8 AB 10 100 40 156 Timeout ms 2000 Start Scanning 00 0C 29 C1 0D 80 10 100 39 2 Retries 2 00 10 83 F 4 91 33 10 100 10 21 00 11 95 E0 EA 9A 10 100 20 21 00 15 9 85 87 1E 10 100 20 27 00 15 9 85 B7 20 10 100 20 22 00 16 76 C 1 65 97 10 100 1 15 00 16 6 73 07 6A 10 10 40 27 00 1B 3F 44 23 00 10 100 20 20 00 1E 7A 9C 8 70 10 100 40 100 f 00 50 8B CF 5F BC 10 100 1 1 00 C0 B7 2A B4 56 10 100 40 47 3 albina t42 ritdomain co il 10 100 100 58 AMIB4 10 100 100 87 amibS ritdomain co il 10 100 100 23 amitzxp ritdomain co il 10 100 100 72 Stop Scanning t 2 D amp Q au ie Q 2 07 09 2009 11 10 Lan Mapper Statistic Information 07 09 2009 11 10 LAN Mapper Scan Process Completed 07 09 2009 11 10 Router Scaning Failed 07 09 2009 11 10 Router Scaning Failed 07 09 2009 11 09 LAN Mapper Full Scan Process Started Figure 306 Topology Adding a Subnet Manually An individual Subnet can be added manually in the Topology Subnet section in maintenance Note Only one subnet can be added at a time The process needs to be repeated for subsequent subnets that are
46. 173 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Notes tab I Add Edit inventory PYMAX Controller Webpage Dialog SC 322 General Rack Indicator Activator Figure 135 Notes Tab Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller Screen View Inventory Selecting a PVMax Security Controller in the Inventory displays its properties The View enables you to control the commands and view its status The Information pane on the right hand side of the screen displays the properties The following tabs can also be found in the Information pane gt General Displays general information regarding a Security Controller RiT Technologies Ltd 174 PV4E User Manual V6 0 SC_322 General Rack Indicator Activator Functional Type PVMax Controller Class Catalog Name i y Controller Online Status Serial No Type Size U Power Wi Location RiT Technologies Ltd 175 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt Rack Indicator Displays the name and location of the rack to which the rack indicator is attached sC_ 322 General RackIndicator Activator A Port Rack Name Rack Location Rack 41 01 Belgium Building 1 Aloor 4 Room 41 Cabinet F4 Belgium Building 1 Aloor 4 Comm Room i 2 3 4 5 6 i B Activator SC_322 General Rack Indicator Activator ro Port Appliance a Location Statu Acton 1 Activator 1 AmberInc Belgun Of j Activator 7 Spain Activator 3 Activator 4 Activator 5 Activator
47. 2E C8 amp 00 11 25 43 A4 BB 00 24 81 F7 31 7D 00 1F 16 06 F3 7D NN 11 75S RS TR 7N Figure 324 List of Unmanaged Devices yarivl ritdomain co il 00 19 D1 25 43 D4 00 11 0A C3 2E C8 00 11 25 43 A4 BB 00 24 81 F7 31 7D 00 1F 16 06 F3 7D NN 11 75 RS ZR JN 4 In the Edit View Link dialog you can create a valid link for the Station 5 Select the Switch to create the valid link the correct Switch port appears with 6 Fix and comp its attached components lete the link Note RiT Technologies Ltd 424 PV4E User Manual V6 0 If you edit or create links for the Unmanaged Device it appears in the table of Unmanaged Devices until the next LAN Server run The next run updates the database and the device no longer appears as an Unmanaged Device Utilization Module The Discovery Module scans the ports of all the Switches in the network The system collects the activity information of each Switch port and identifies the last date and time the port was active Using the Utilization module you can determine not only the last activity of the device but its actual physical link information This process can determine if there are wasted resources in the switches This occurs for example if a station was moved from one location to another without the patch cord being removed The unused Switch ports are called Unutilized ports gt To view Unutilized Ports and Devices 1 Open the Maintenance Module 2 Select the P L
48. 3 Hall 4 Hall 5 rm E J L it Horizontal and Vertical 10 Pathway 5 Fl PW4 100 PW1 101 El i pwi iewLink Fl ee Pwl 103 Fl i Pwl 104 Gi No Location Duplicate Edit rai oe aP Ta H p rm m e l Edit Link Delete Show CAC Refresh 2 The View Link opens RiT Technologies Ltd 270 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A iew link Webpage Dialog A F E2 D El B E F 10 100 20 24 HC1 5TP 1000 OPR panel Port 02 End 1 Port 03 w F E2 0 E1 B oF 10 100 20 24 HC1 STP 1001 OPR panel Port 03 End 1 Port 04 3 The View Link displays a joint picture of the inventory tree and also the telecommunication tree The view link shows the links of all the cables that are placed on this pathway 4 Click on the cable icon ES Cable window opens to view the cable paths The following View a iew cable Webpage Heig i BY P 1 100 Pw 1 103 Fw 1 101 Cables 1 To view a cable link stand on the cable and right click RiT Technologies Ltd 271 PV4E User Manual V6 0 fon PY 4E Windows Internet Explorer WORK ORDER TOOLS SETTINGS Location Topology Users D Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure 7 Location a UK EL E F USA a Atlanta MYC g Floor 1 lg Hall 1 E Hall 2 Add requests all 3 Hall 4 ay tar E H am Halls EEr Horizontal and vertical 10 D_1 S7TR 1003 D_1 5TR 1004 D_1 5STR 1005 D_1 5TR 100
49. 38 Batch Process Started 07 09 2009 08 37 Batch Completed Successfully 07 09 2009 08 37 Batch Process Started 07 09 7009 OR 35 User lonned In Figure 258 Initiate Swap request Screen The following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 345 Refresh Last Activity Date W Logout Administrator FOR THE Enterprise USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Move Swap Change reque Event Category DB DB DB DB DB PV4E User Manual V6 0 gl Swap Equipment Webpage Dialog me i a USA Atlanta Bldg A Hoor 2 i USA Atlanta Bldg A Hloor 2 USA Atlanta Bldg A Hoor 2 USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Figure 259 Swap Equipment Screen Note If Swap is performed between two items and one action fails the second action will also fail 2 The Swap Equipment screen opens Check the information is correct and click Next The Swap Operation List screen opens e Swap Equipment Webpage Dialog Ho E Swap Operation List 5 WO Name Operation Operation Description W0 07 09 2009 00181 Swap Station Swap Station between IDANB2 to Jasony WO0 07 09 2009 00181 Swap Station Swap Station between JasonJ to IDANB2 Remove From List Modify Work Order Figure 260 Swap Operation List Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 346 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Click Modify Work Order to change an operation or task of the selected Work Order For more information on modifying a Work Order see Error Reference source not found Clic
50. 6 Activator 7 Activator 8 Ee n a a a Figure 136 Information Pane Activator Tab Columns The following table lists the Column name and the function in the above Activator tab of the Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller screen Applicance A user defined name for the port default Activator n Status Status of the device This is a user defined field that represents the ON status RiT Technologies Ltd 176 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Action User defined On and Off Enabled only if the command type is On Off Pulse or On Off Pulse Enabled only if the command type is On Off Pulse or Pulse and the pulse duration is greater than zero The icons are Not set ae Set 1 0 7A Add Edit Inventory P Max Controller Webpage Dialog SC_322 General Rack Indicator Activator Hotes Port Applance locaton _ gt joel Belgium 1 0 2 UK BLDG 14 1 0 3 I 04 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 Tio 29 Set Location Clear Location Columns The following table lists the Column name and the function in the above I O tab of the Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller screen Appliance A user defined name for the port default Activator n The status is user defined to Yes No RiT Technologies Ltd 177 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt Notes The Notes tab is for general remarks Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller Webpage Dialog SC 322 General Rack Indicator Activat
51. Add button to MSas add a Class if required Media Type COPPER Length Oo ft 2 T Diameter 0 02 in Vendor Name choice Vendor Part No Figure 29 Adding A Class Add Button 4 Type in the relevant information for the new item 5 Select OK or another of the options to proceed To Add an Existing Item to a Class It is possible to change the class that an item is listed under In this example the Item International Switch Manufacturer will be moved from the Class Active Equipment to Comprehensive Company Suppliers 1 Select the specific Item in the Catalog tree RiT Technologies Ltd 46 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Latalog International Switch Manufacturer Centocts Hobes RTT F Venda D DI Active Coupment 1 sates Active pepe mn EIO dnternational Sitch Manufacturer zil wwelibenational eatha a Crommctiordn Co Suc ic intemal sanh Manel chien Ee ee o o y ee AJZ Factory Fin S Derita n South Africa Figure 30 Example of Item listed under a Specific Class 2 Right click on the selected Item and select the Edit function from the pull down menu RiT Technologies Ltd 47 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 Select the Class that you wish the item to be listed under by clicking on the 7 button and select a class from the pull down list If the specific class has not been defined it can be done now by clicking on the Add button and filling in the required information for the new class Clic
52. Blade Servers and related items This version supports three types of Blade Server enclosures m Enclosures equipped with connectivity pass through modules E Enclosures equipped with switching modules E Enclosures equipped with any other type of connectivity The above Blade servers can be distinguished by the way they are connected to the network This chapter describes the Blade servers and Blade chassis support in the PV4E application Terms Chassis Enclosure A physical container of Blade servers that supplies connectivity power and management to the Blade servers Blade Blade A server machine for high density server componential environment Bay A physical area within the chassis that hosts a single Blade and are positioned at the front of the chassis Slot A physical area within the chassis which hosts connectivity and management modules depending on the chassis type And are positioned at the rear of the chassis Pass through Modules Pass through is a new connectivity type that has been added to the PV4E application It is used for both copper and fiber and acts as a connecting hardware panel which is installed within the Blade enclosure The back ports are wired through the chassis backplane to the chassis server bays Note A Pass through connectivity type cannot be seen in the location tree and will not appear on the menu for adding a pass through Adding an I tem to Pass through Class gt To
53. Building Al Normal U K London LoGat ton loor ord Piloor nigh U K boudon yal Location Room Main Conf Room High U K London A1l 3rd Floor RiT Technologies Ltd 243 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Connecting HW Record Structure The record structure is as follows Item Type Connecting HW Functional Type Panel Outlet Catalog Name Item Name up to 50 characters Location Full Path without slot no Location Type Location Rack Slot No relevant only for items inside a Rack 7 Sete Se YS Link Terminator Yes No relevant only for Panels and is ignored for Outlets All other information is derived from the catalog Example Connecting HW Panel SMART F O 48 2F PP1 P1 48 p U K London Al 3rd floor Main conf room Rack01 Rack 3 5 No Connecting HW Outlet Double 5e 1 Port STP Outlet 467 P U K London Al 3rd Floor Main conf room Location 0 No Rack Equipment Record Structure The record structure is as follows Item Type Rack Equipment Functional Type Cable organizer rack shelf Spacer Catalog Name Item Name up to 50 characters Location Full Path without slot no Parent Location Type Location Rack Slot No relevant only for items inside a Rack So ee Se E U Order Bottom Top relevant only for Racks All other information is derived from the catalog Example Rack Equipment Cable Organizer Cable organizer 1U CO 350 U Ke london Al oth Floor CR SE Location 0
54. Change Figure 237 Move Equipment Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 327 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The original and new location is displayed The following table lists each button in the Move Equipment screen and its function ee EEE Add To List The Add To List adds additional items to be moved The Remove button removes the selection from the screen Remove From List however it does not remove it from the inventory but from the Move request Teea The Change Service button allows changing the selected service and also the VLAN to another VLAN service respectively The Assign button allows you to assign another location from the Assign location tree on the right hand side In case of a location which contains outlets you can specify specific outlet to which the moved device is to be connected M Reset The Reset button changes the new location back to the original location Reset l The Reset All button changes the entire selection back to the original location 2 Click Next on the Move Equipment screen after making any required changes A Provisioning in progress message appears at the top right corner of the screen to indicate that the provisioning module is running its calculations Once the calculations are done the following screen opens e Move Equipment Webpage Dialog Move Operation List WO Hame Operation Descripbon WO 06 09 2005 00
55. Dialog Double Click on the WS5 C6509 Chassis Icon to access the Icon list General Name Functional Type Class Description Catalyst 6509 Chassis Type No of Slots Size U Power WW Arm Side Non Weight KG Vendor Name Vendor Part No Image Name Default Switch 6U Figure 69 Add Edit Catalog Switch dialog 3 Double Click on the icon The Icon List dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 93 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Icon List Webpage Dialog Name Software Spacer Staton Switch Unknown Virtual Station User Vendor Virtual Host Station VMware Virtual Station Yellow Patch Panel Figure 70 Icon List dialog 4 Inthe Icon List locate and select the icon you want The indicator moves to the selected icon 5 Click the OK button to return to the Add Edit window RiT Technologies Ltd 94 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FA Add Edit Catalog Switch Webpage Dialog WS C6509 Chassis The new Icon has replaced the previous One General Notes Name Functional Type Class Description Catalyst 6509 Chassis Type No of Slots Size LU Power VW Arm Side Weight KG Vendor Name Vendor Part No Image Name Default Switch 6U Figure 71 New icon Added 6 Click the OK button to exit this dialog RiT Technologies Ltd 95 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 5 Setting Up Projects Setting Up Projects Overview PV4E is designed specifically to manage your enterprise which is a
56. E Add Rack Equipment am Aoo 04 Add Terminal Equipment U a Hoort Add Network E ment Switch s Add Manua PMax Controler quip Hy Add PatchView Equipment PBX Add Connecting HW Router Add Data Center Equipment Hub me 7 Event Code Duplicate amp 09 09 2009 23 28 User Logge Edit Delete 2 Enter the IP address and click Detect The switch appears in the Location tree The properties can be viewed on the right hand side of the screen in the General tab Location Topology Users Dlink Switch Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure eneral Settings 7 Location J Amber Inc Switch G Belgium D Link Comm Room 10 100 90 12 E Cabinet 1 fl Demo Rack P LET Status Online P LET Supported PP OPR Serial No Type PP SPR No of Slots 1 Size U Dlink Switch Power W 0 Scanner 1 Arm Side None Weight KG Location Demo Comm Room Demo Rack Select the Settings tab The following Switch properties screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 197 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Dlink Switch General Modules Settings Notes SNMP Settings Version Timeout ms Reties Monitor Monitor Traps Interconnect Figure 140 Switch Properties View Screen Click Edit to open the Add Edit Inventory Switch screen Add Edit Inventory Switch Webpage Dialog Eal General Phodutes SNMP Settings Verson Timeout ms kemmes Monitor Traps interconnect ee i 4 T _ AS i a e a p two
57. Edit Catalog Outlet dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 5 Click on the Ports tab to define the front and back Ports for the Outlet RiT Technologies Ltd 87 PV4E User Manual V6 0 ke Add Edit Catalog Outlet Webpage Dialog Double 5 1 Port STP General Back Service Name Connector Name Connector a eT Ee aie L lt Port 01 RJ 45 STP Back 01 Termination Bi __ splect service Port Naming Port Duplicate fsa m Figure 64 Add Edit Catalog Outlet Ports tab 6 Type in the name for both the front and the back ports Type in the name and select one of the options available in the Connector window by clicking on the 7 button Click on the Add button to insert more ports if required To remove a port click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 10 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding a Panel to the Catalog A comprehensive list of panels has been included in the database All these panels are compatible with the PV4E system Additional panels can be added to the database however they might not be PatchView supported gt To add a Panel to the Catalog 1 In the Catalog tree right click on a Panel 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Panel dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 88 PV4E User Manu
58. Edit Inventory screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 156 PV4E User Manual V6 0 a Add Edit Inventory PYMAX Contro ller Webpage Dialog pal Hotes PVMax Indicator Controller Power W Amber Inc Figure 121 Add Edit Inventory Rack Screen 3 Type the name of the new Controller in the Name field 4 In the Catalog Name field select either the PVMax Indicator Controller or PVMax Security Controller option and click OK The PVMax Controller has been added Note The PVMax Indicator Controller screen consists of three tabs The PVMax Security Controller screen consists of five Once the Controller is selected from the Catalog Name the relevant screen and associated tabs appear RiT Technologies Ltd 157 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit Inventory PYMAX Controller Webpage Dialog IC 147 General Rack Indicator Name IC_147 Functional Type Class choice v Catalog Name PVMax Indicator Controller v Serial No Type Size U Power W Location Amber Inc Figure 122 Add Edit Inventory Rack Screen Indicator Controller RiT Technologies Ltd 158 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Ga Additait inventory PYMAX Controller Webpage Dialog datadi yar D T ity Controller IC_147 General Rack Indicator Activator Notes A IC_147 choice PVMax Security Controller v Power W p Recet Apply serena Figure 123 Add Edit Inventory
59. Folders x JE ig om L Component Services m Desktop H m Computer Management My Computer fd Data Sources ODBC a 314 Floppy 4 Administrative Tools i event viewer Internet Services Manager op Local Security Policy i Performance 4 Personal Web Manager iy Server Extensions Administrator figs Services ai Telnet Server Administration AS rivkab on nas Q Size 1 732 H departments on ritsrv R AEM se Services 15 x ribute ile on ZetaFaxsry U Action View l e e m EY gt jI m HE archiyon on nas Ww B Control Panel Tree Name o o o o oo i Description fotoap Service tEtHP Type LlogOnas a Administrative Tools Services Local a Print Spooler Loads files Started Automatic LocalSystem i A Fonts fe Protected Storage Provides pr Started Automatic LocalSystem Network and Dial up Cont eB aPV4E Server Started Automatic LocalSystem 3 Printers Rs PY4EEx Server Started Automatic LocalSystem Yv i Aat ncn Rares Lane slouieckars xi Peenidae m E Scheduled Tasks GF My Network Places Pal Recycle Bin A Internet Explorer Stop Other Services When PY4E Server stops these other services will also stop 21 x PY4EEx Server Do you want to stop these services ee al Figure The Status of the server will be blank 7 Close the Control Panel window 8 A red X appea
60. ID Start At field type the starting number for your work order IDs For example 0001 Work orders from the above example would be named as follows W O 0001 W O 0002 W O 0003 etc Click the OK button RiT Technologies Ltd 497 PV4E User Manual V6 0 F n PV4E Windows Internet Explorer JEJ A Administrator PVMAX PV Alarm Refresh W Logout MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY FOR THE Enterprise r Work Order ID Assignment Template WO DATE 1D ID start at 7 GA Edit Work Order Setting Webpage Dialog x Work Order ID Assignment Manual Entry Automatic Numbering Template WO DATE ID ID start at 7 Template may include any combination of the following ent Category free text DATE ID Ss Example Template RiT W O DATE ID ID start at 0001 Will result RIT W O 01 01 2002 0001 Figure 355 Work Order ID Software Upgrade Use Software Upgrade to upgrade new software versions to specific PatchView hardware devices You can choose to download the software to all the devices or only certain devices Set the software upgrade password parameters prior to downloading Note All PVMax components must be of the same version generation Ensure that you are downloading the correct versions with your local RiT technical support representative The process to follow to ensure a successful download is E Define the FTP username
61. Indicates that the VLAN is in use and Is associated with a switch board Figure 249 VLAN List Screen 5 Select an existing VLAN using the arrow icon ii and click OK 6 To edit a VLAN click Edit make applicable changes and click OK You are taken back to the VLAN list screen If you want to add a new VLAN click New The following New VLAN screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 336 PV4E User Manual V6 0 H New LAN Webpage Dialog 10 11 Figure 250 VLAN New Screen The first field marked with a pound sign can only be populated with a number and is mainly used for reference purposes Enter the name of the VLAN in the VLAN ID field and click Apply to save changes Click OK to exit the screen Click the Add To List button and repeat steps 2 through 6 to every newly added device To remove an item click Remove From List The Additional Information button is intended to specify on the fly information that is processed by user defined rules For additional information contact a RiT representative Click Next to continue or Cancel to abort the operation The following Add to Location screen opens The Add Equipment tab summarizes all information and their requirements from the previous screen RiT Technologies Ltd 337 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E Add Equipment Webpage Dialog Add To Location USA Atlanta Bidg A Floor 1 Room 102 liv Check box to select all Remove From
62. Is Provisionable Power Limit W 300 gt Recommended W Weight Limit 5 20 x Arm Side Hone Location Amber Inc Belgmum Brussels City Towers Floor 0 U Order Top to bottom Bottom to top Rack Indicator Assign Figure 100 Add Edit Inventory dialog 2 To change the location click on the B button A dialog with the Location Tree will open RiT Technologies Ltd 131 PV4E User Manual V6 0 74 Change Location Webpage Dialog 3 Amber Inc E E Belgium H Efi Brussels E City Towers Floor 01 Floor 02 Floor 03 Floor 04 Floor 05 Figure 101 Location Tree dialog Expand the tree and select the new location 4 Select the Slot No within the Rack if applicable See Moving Items within a Rack 5 Click on the OK button Deleting I tems from Location Items can be deleted from the Location Tree When deleting an Item from the Location Tree it is deleted from the inventory but not from the Catalog This Item can then be referenced at a later stage if required Note When deleting an Item ensure that no Items or other Items are defined under that specific Item e g Rack If there are then move or delete them before attempting to delete the specific Item gt To Delete an Item See Deleting a Location Note When an Item is deleted from a Rack the slot that the item occupied remains empty A new item can then be allocated to that slot gt To Delete a Multiple Selection of I tems See To Dele
63. Limi S esrenirersen renin eee enee s EEEN SEAE E erena aeeie ainte EE EEEn E KEETE NEETER 420 MV GUNG E E E T E E E A A E N E E E E E E A E A E E 422 Decommissioned DEVICES usecase ninni e aar EE E aS pastes a rE aN Ea Sa eea aaa 422 Wala el CV CCS osie Eaa ENR 422 EMAC D LOUIE sisa E 425 IP Telephony cennere 427 Th Call I CFs verse dna tn areca tees ota a EE EAE Aa EELA RE a Eaa Eaa 427 Defining the Call Manager eneesesssssssseseeeeererssssssssssssseererresssssssssssssecererreesssssssssssseeeereeesosssssssssseeeeeeresesesss 427 Enbanced IP Phone DistOy V wsececscnacscsescussvsusvecccsvenceccessusauseseveandesencaccewensccsuuuessseuvavesuceeeesewavccoceussesvssusevexesceesee 428 Marking a Subnet as an IP Phone Subnet eee eccccseeeececeeceeeceeeaeeessseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeaaeasessssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 428 MUU VV AE NMP OU een 430 POC C9 FOU cp cn teenies E E E EEE A E A A T E AE A E A A 430 Automatic Discovery of Hub and WAP Access Points ennenssssssssssooeeeeessssssssssssssseeereresssssssssssseeeererreesre 430 Auto Insertion of an Access Point sisssnesreireeenitetri i a N E EEEE SEEN S 430 Auto Deleti n of an Access Point sienicissrini aiie ETE Ea a E SEn EUEN 431 How to View Links passing through an Access POINt cccccccccccccccceeeesssseeeeeeececeeeeeeeeesaaaaeasseeseeeeeeeeeeeess 431 Viewine he Saus ora SNE ON Renner EE nre er tt ener ern mre ect tem trey mre rr nr TT wer 432 Chance ihe Sams
64. Link Disconnected The IT manager can view the log entry and trace the affected link gt To Unmark a Secure Link 1 Right click on the item and click on Edit Link The Edit Link dialog opens Using the mouse highlight at any place on a secure link Click on the Unmark Secure Link button Since the intention is to unmark the link and not break it a warning message is not issued in this case Still the unmarking event is logged Events Info Dake Tine Event Code Event Category 09 09 2009 04 36 Secured Link Unmarked Secure Link ars Figure 210 Log Entry Shows Warning Message Unmarked Secure Link Breaking a Link Breaking a link means disconnecting an existing link gt To break a Dynamic link 1 In the Location or Topology Tree locate the item or ports where the links need to be disconnected Drag and drop the item ports into the Edit Link worksheet or select the ports and click on the Edit Links button The item ports will appear in the worksheet with all the ports that it is currently linked to Select the cells containing the links that are to be broken Click on the Break Link button The Link Status Symbols change from 7T to 4 Create a Work Order optional 5 Click on the Apply button The Link Status Symbols change from 5 to HETT S only if PatchView is on line After the links have been physically HETT created on the Panels the Link Status Symbols change from to 1 r RiT T
65. List Reset Rack Cabinet Find Rack Cabinet Figure 251 Add to Location Screen Note The items in the above field are taken from the Catalog and cannot be changed To change use the Add or Modify existing catalog item functionality 12 Note that the fields under Slot No and Alternative Rack are disabled If you would like to provision the new devices into cabinets you will need to Click Find Rack Cabinet This action looks for available cabinet space which meets the provisioning criteria of each device If the search succeeds then the provisioning module will automatically allocate the cabinet with the highest grade and set an available U elevation 13 After the search has been completed the Add equipment screen lists all cabinets which are assigned to the provisioning request The Slot No and Alternative Rack fields are now enabled Alternatively you can select Reset Rack to clear all data See the following screen RiT Technologies Ltd 338 PV4E User Manual V6 0 e Add Equipment Webpage Dialog l Add To Location USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 1 Row C Catalog Name _Size U Power W Rack CabinetName SlotNo Alternative 21 v Select 12 Select Remove From List Reset Rack Cabinet Find Rack Cabinet To select an alternative rack cabinet mA a E under the Alternative Rack field The following screen opens E Rack Cabinet Selection Webpage Dialog Add To Location USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 1
66. MAC and click Authorize The icon next to the MAC will change from x to D To view the tooltip stand on the icon See the following screen E l MAC Address a TP Host Name Name Type 00 00 0C 07 AC 01 10 100 40 21 00 00 0C 07 AC 0 00 00 0C 07 AC 0 Router D ge 22 BE 10 100 10 22 RNPYD226E LUTMOnZzed A wurui to 2C 5 4E 10 100 10 35 00 01 E6 2C 5 4E To unauthorize a MAC select the MAC and click Unauthorized The will change back to unauthorized authorized icon Click Clear to clear all fields in the Edit Authorize MAC Address screen Changing a Security Zone Setting gt To change the security zone setting do the following 1 Stand on the location tree and select the item that you want to change RiT Technologies Ltd 414 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Location Topology Users UK Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Content Inactive Device Environmental Location 1 OK 3 USA No Location Security Normal oo5 j Type Country Description Panel 6 Parent Location EP Router 2 g Station 9 3 M Switch 4 2 Select the General Tab in the Properties screen In the above example the security setting is Normal To change click Edit The following screen opens M Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog Inactive Device Environmental Type Desoiption security Parent Location Eo Sera eee E ea eet tt tee 3 In the Security field select Low Normal or High
67. Main Desk 2 W5 Security Normal Workspace gq Parent Location Amber Inc Belgium Brussels Gity Towers Floor 0 P eae _ Reset E Apply Figure 94 Adding a Room Window 5 Click OK to proceed 6 Repeat the process until all 5 rooms are named Note The Auto Naming feature can be used to name the rooms if desired Adding Cubicals to the Location Tree gt To add a Cubicle 1 Select and right click on the desired Room in the Location Tree A pull down menu will appear Move the cursor over the Add Location and a second menu appears 2 Select and click on Cubicle The Add Edit Location dialog will open Type in the name of the Cubicle 4 Add the Description optional RiT Technologies Ltd 124 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E PR OTE Pon tee 5 A Add Edit Location Web page Dialog x General Inactive Device Environmental Mame col Type Security Normal Workspace Parent Location Amber Inc Belgium Brussels City Towers Floor 01 A ee Figure 95 Adding a Cubic Window 1 Click OK to proceed 2 Repeat the process until all 5 rooms are named Note The Auto Naming feature can be used to name the cubicles if desired Adding Desks to the Location Tree gt To add a Desk 1 Select and right click the prefered Cubicle in the Location Tree A pull down menu will appear Move the cursor over the Add Location and a second menu appears 2 Select and click on Other There i
68. No gt Port 01 gt Back 01 Back 01 Port 01 Port 01 gt Back 02 Back 02 Port 02 Port 01 gt Back 03 Back 03 Port 03 Port 01 gt Back 04 Back 04 Port 04 Port 01 gt Back 05 Back 05 Port 05 Port 01 gt Back 06 Back 06 Port 06 Port 01 gt Back 07 Back 07 Port 07 Port 01 4 Back 08 Back 08 Port 08 Port 01 gt Back 09 Back 09 Port 09 Port 01 gt Back 10 Back 10 Port 10 Port 01 gt Back 11 Back 11 Port 11 Port 01 gt Back 12 Back 12 Port 12 Port 01 gt Back 13 Back 13 Port 13 Port 01 Back 14 Back 14 Port 14 Port 01 4 Back 15 Back 15 Port 15 Port 01 gt Back 16 Back 16 Port 16 b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 oan nuk WN a oan nuwrt WN _ oe jt _ _ _ _ p N p N m WwW j Ww _ gt H A _ uw wi eae ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee pb b pab n o eee ce ee ce co ee ee ee ee ee ee a aa _ n _ n Adding Adapters to the Chassis Note This section applies only for chassis with a Switching or Other connectivity type Edit the chassis you want to add adapters to Click the Adapetrs tab Click Add to add the adpaters select functional type name No of ports Description Click Add Click OK Apply Adding a Blade Chassis and Blades to the Inventory Pr opi ae ee a The following section of this user guide explains how to add the following items to the Inventory E A Blade Enclosure E Blades Adding a Blade Chassis To add an enclosure to the invent
69. Overwrite media Back up to the existing media set Append to the existing backup set Overwrite all existing backup sets l Check media set name and backup set expiration Media set name Back up to a new media set and erase all existing backup sets New media set name New media set description Reliability Verify backup when finished Perform checksum before writing to media Continue on error Server Transaction log TESTLAB15 Truncate the transaction log Connection a HRE j Back up the tail of the log and leave the database in the restoring state 32 View connection properties Tape drive Unload the tape after backup Ready F Rewind the tape before unloading i Cancel 13 In the Overwrite Media section check the following radio buttons Back up to the existing media set Overwrite all existing backup sets 14 In the Reliability section it is highly recommended that you check the radio button Back up to the existing media set RiT Technologies Ltd 517 PV4E User Manual V6 0 15 Click OK 16 The backup process begins and the following progress is displayed E pecuting 0 Slop clion rire 17 The following message appears after the PV4E database has been successfully updated Microsoft SOL Server Management Studio i The backup of database PY4E completed successfully Note If the Restore Function is to be
70. PV4E Graphic User Interface RiT Technologies Ltd 20 PV4E User Manual V6 0 About the GUI The GUI is divided into two main areas The System View Area located on the left hand side of the screen In this pane the user can view and access the tree of the module selected or select other tabs e g Topology and Users Data Information is located on the right hand side of the screen This area is divided into two panes Information Pane This contains the data of the selected item in the System View Different tab options are available depending on the module that is currently being accessed The Edit option is available in this pane Event Log Pane This log records all events that occur in the application Inventory Tree The inventory Tree provides a graphic representation of the hierarchy of the database They have been designed to facilitate easy navigation through the different levels Each Functional Type and Item has its own distinctive icon for easy recognition You can add edit delete and view database items from the inventory Tree by using menu commands or shortcut menus gt To move around the trees 1 Double click an object in the tree or click the plus sign icon The next node level is displayed Click the minus sign icon to close the lower levels Clicking on any object in the tree in any level opens its Item Property screen with the relevant information 4 Select and right click on an ite
71. Port 01 Back 01 7 0 205 PortO1 Back 02 Panel Fort 02 Port 02 Panel Back 02 Pot 02 Switch 01 Figure 362 Edit Link If a user tries to Edit Link from the Location tree of the Maintenance screen RiT Technologies Ltd 504 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Location Topology Users Tree O Telecommunication Infrastructure El EN Israel E TLV E RiT Technologies E Floor 01 T wW Comm Room ar Room 101 a Room 102 rau Room 103 Room 104 ff utlet 3 j eee Pi Ha Stas 4 g View Link E of Room 1 ee ep Floor 03 Hl 3 ouK fa USA Change Catalog d Edit No Location E Station 3 Print Full Links Labels Figure 363 Maintenance Screen Location Tree The following error message is received Microsoft Internet Explorer x AN Permission is required to edit certain links Figure 364 Error Message Move Rack Location Whenever changing a rack location or moving a location the access permissions for the rack location is determined by the parent and children of the new location If all the sub locations of the parent location are checked the moved rack location is also checked RiT Technologies Ltd 505 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Create a New Rack Location The process is the same as moving rack location Import a Location The process is the same as moving rack location RiT Technologies Ltd 506 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 14 PV4
72. Rack Screen Security Controller gt Edit To edit an existing PVMax Indicator or Security Controller 1 From the Location tree select and right click either the ndicator Security Controller The from context menu select Edit Location l Topology Users Tree O Telecommunicaton Infrastructure Location Sl g Amber Inc EN Belgium 1 E PVMax Controller 2 Ek IC 3423_ Sakra Duplicate Show CAD Refresh 2 The following Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller screen opens The Name and Location field can be edited After any modifications have been made click OK RiT Technologies Ltd 159 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit Inventory PYMAX Controller Webpage Dialog x IC_ 3423 General Rack Indicator Notes Name Ic 3423 Functonal Type Catalog Name Serial No Type Size U Power W Loca ton j eee ar Wia SAVE AS MEW ele ee es ee Figure 124 Add Edit Inventory Rack Screen 3 The information has been updated in the Information pane IC 3423 General D Rack Indicator Hotes Functional Type PY Max Controller Class Catalog Name PVMax Indicator Controller Online Status Not assigned Serial No SWW Ver Type Stand Alone Size U 1 Power Wi 45 Locaton Figure 125 General Tab Information Pane RiT Technologies Ltd 160 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PVMax Security Controller Functionality Auto Recognize The PV4E Server is responsible for automatically r
73. RiT Technologies Ltd 519 PV4E User Manual V6 0 T Restore Database P 4E al General 4 Options es P Destination for restore Select or type the name of a new or existing database for your restore operation Ta database PY4E hi To a point in time Most recent possible iii Source for restore Specify the source and location of backup sets to restore From database FY 4E o Component Type Server Positic Select the backup sets to restore Connection Server TESTLABTS Connection Sa f View connection properties Progress E Carcel 5 In the Destination for restore field select PV4E from the drop down menu 6 In the Specifiy the source and location of backup sets to restore field select From Device To select the database you wish to restore click the ellipsis 7 The following Specify Backup window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 520 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Specify Backup E4 Specify the backup media and its location for your restore operation Backup media Fie Backup location C Program Files Microsoft SQL Serne sMSSQL TMS 50L Backup PY4e bak Remove Contents OF Cancel Help we 8 Click Add and select the path 9 Click OK Restore Database P 4E Select a page ia ES Script TE Help AA General AA Options ae ae Destination for restore Select or type the name of a new or existing database fo
74. Server process You can select to enable the Scheduler and the Start and End times for either every day or for a specific weekday Note RiT recommends that the LAN Server process runs at least twice a day during peak working hours when the majority of the devices are operable For example at 11 00 and 15 00 when most devices are active To define the LAN Server Scheduler From the Settings module select scheduler from the drop down menu 2 Select the LAN Server tab The LAN Server Edit Scheduler window opens Click Edit 4 Check the Enable LAN Server Scheduler checkbox to enable the Scheduler V 5 Inthe Time Frame field enter the Start and End time by selecting times from the list boxes This defines the time interval of the scheduler For RiT Technologies Ltd 407 PV4E User Manual V6 0 example from Start Time 10 00 to End Time 23 00 means that no runs will be done after 23 00 6 To run the LAN Server on a daily basis check the Daily Basis checkbox if you want to set the scheduler to run every day within the specified time interval Note When the Daily Basis checkbox is selected the selection of individual days is disabled 7 Enter the hourly interval required between LAN Server runs Z P 4E Windows Internet Explorer 0 x PVMAX Alarm Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY A FOR THE Enterprise 2 LAN Mapper LAN Server 2 Secure Link Switch Trap
75. Technical Support team in order for them to enter the information into the PatchView database Example The Discovery Module searches for a prefix suffix that matches the data information entered into the PV4E database The following table is an example of a prefix suffix table Suffix abc The following list is returned after you have scanned your network serverlabc hostnameZabc xxhostname2Z2abc After the scan has run and has compared the results with the prefix suffix table the following results are returned server hostname2 hostname2 The scan has identified that hostname2abc and xxhostname2abc belong to the same machine and will create them as a single inventory item Ranking A generic table containing ranking needs to be supplied to RiT s Technical Support team in order for them to enter the information into the PatchView database Ranking is an automatic resolution mechanism which is used to determine what will be the name of the consolidated device The prefix suffix with the highest rank is the one which sets the name of the consolidate device Example Consider a scenario where the Discovery Module detects two NIC cards 1 hostnamel Primary 2 hostnamel Secondary The following table contains two examples of ranks RiT Technologies Ltd 437 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The consolidation module will consolidate the two NICs into a single device Since main has a higher rank then the n
76. Technologies Ltd 60 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 To assign a new icon please see Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 5 Select OK or another of the options to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 61 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding an Adapter to the Catalog Adapters that are defined in the Catalog can be assigned to any Station in the Catalog The NIC Adapters enable the Stations to connect to the network Adapters have been divided into five Functional Types NIC Modem KVM SCSI Montor gt To add an Adapter 1 In the Catalog tree right click on an Adapter Functional Type 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Adaptor dialog opens Mj Add Edit Catalog Modem Webpage Dialog Name Functional Type Class thoice Description No of Ports Vendor Name Vendor Part No Figure 42 Add Edit Catalog Adaptor dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 To assign a new icon please see Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class RiT Technologies Ltd 62 PV4E User Manual V6 0 5 Select OK or another of the options to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 63 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Terminal Equipment to the Catalog In order to ensure an end to end management system it is necessary to define all the Terminal Equipment in the enterprise Terminal Equipment is divided into five Functional Types These are IP Phone KVM Device Printer Station Telephone IP Phones P
77. The parameters of these groups cannot be edited but individual members can be added to them Viewing may be done by groups including the members of the group or by the user including the groups that he belongs to Adding a New Group New groups can be added with specific permissions other than Admin which allows complete access or the Read only group For Example a Technician group that allows partial access to the system To Add a New Group 1 From Settings select Permissions from the drop down menu 2 Select the Groups tab 3 Click the New button The Add Edit Security Groups dialog opens 4 Fill in the Name of the New Group Fill in the Description optional 6 Select the Permissions tab RiT Technologies Ltd 474 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PY PLAX PY 1 LET Alarm n Refresh Logout Ackrenastrabor MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTS HELP Y o a Users Admin General Permissions j Members Foe THe Enterprise Nemes Description O O Admin System Administrator Permission Data Center Manager Data Center Manager t Administrator Settings Read onhy Read only group Report Center Report Cen 9 Add Edit Security Group Web pape Dialog Permissions Hembers Aptess Figure 335 Adding a New Group 7 The Permissions Window opens 8 Check the required parameters for this group 9 Click the OK button RiT Technologies Ltd 475 PV4E User Manual V6 0 k GA Add Edit Security Group Webpage Dia
78. V6 0 The x indicates that the Subnet is not accessible for scanning Probable reasons could be No permit for the PV4E Server IP Address to access the subnet The Subnet s router is not an SNMP agent The SNMP Get Community name is different from the one that is specified in PV4E gt To View the Subnets 1 View the Subnets in the Topology Tree 2 All the Subnets will be displayed with either a checkmark or an X 3 PV4E displays for each subnet which was succesfully scanned the 10 100 0 0 103 number of entities which are associated with it 4 Expand the Subnets to view the detected devices on each Subnet The Topology gt To view the scanned devices 5 In the Maintenance Module click on the Topology tab 6 Select the Subnet Radio Button 7 Select the Topology folder in the Topology tree 8 Expand the Subnet by clicking on the sign 9 All the devices on this Subnet that were discovered by the LAN Mapper Scan will be displayed 10 All devices that are not placed in the location tree according to their actual physical location will be indicated with an if icon RiT Technologies Ltd 393 PV4E User Manual V6 0 P 4E Windows Internet Explorer PVMAX Alarm r Refresh W Logout Administrator K ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY FOR THE Enterprise tion Toy y a c Subnet f i aa 10 100 0 0 104 P 00 00 0C 07 AC 01 10 10 40 21 00 01 6 2C C5 4E 10 100 10 3 00
79. V6 0 has the capability to override the system settings Ends Tab Specifies the type of end names and service when relevant Note The connector type is set in the Cable Properties in the catalog Add Edit Inventory Horizontal and Vertical Webpage Dialog R Cable Z X 1 General as Paths Paths Tab Displays the location points to where each cable passes through based on data entered by the user RiT Technologies Ltd 186 PV4E User Manual V6 0 cl Add Edit Inventory Horizontal and Vertical Webpage Dialog E3 Cable Z X 1 Paths HHorence BLDG Z Outdoor Cable ZY Florence BLDG Y Outdoor Cable Y X To add more points click Edit To add a path expand the Location Tree on the right hand side Select a location and click the arrow amp The Location appears in the Paths section list on the left hand side Repeat the process to add more paths You can use the up down arrows to move locations in the list To remove points Select point to be removed and click Remove To remove all points click Remove all Notes Tab Use the Notes section to add any useful notes Adding a Trunk Multi pair Cable Two new cables have been added to the Catalog These are 1 Trunk cable A cable that contains multiple cables that can be a mixture of copper and fiber optic 2 Multi pair cables for copper and fiber optic Two types have been added to the multi pair family RiT Technologies Ltd 187
80. a Sunday Thursday SA Monday Friday Tuesday Saturday Wednesday Cable Test Results Connectivity Zone P LET Call Manager Edit Software Upgrade Metric Specifications AALE Date Time Event Code Event Category 07 09 2009 11 10 Lan Mapper Statistic Information P LET 07 09 2009 11 10 LAN Mapper Scan Process Completed P LET 07 09 2009 11 10 Router Scaning Failed P LET 07 09 2009 11 10 Router Scaning Failed P LET 07 09 2009 11 09 LAN Mapper Full Scan Process Started P LET Figure 303 Setting the LAN Mapper Scheduler The Edit Scheduler dialog opens 4 Check the Enable LAN Mapper Schedule checkbox to enable the Scheduler 5 Select either Once or Custom from the Repeat Method field See the following table If you want Select Explanation Once Repeat method The LAN Mapper runs only once Once Customize Repeat method The LAN Mapper runs according to the Custom set Recurrence pattern You select the pattern by setting the weekly interval and the specific weekday for the run For example the interval can be every 3 weeks on a Tuesday 6 Enter the Start Date and At fields by selecting from the dropdown lists This defines the Start date and run time for the LAN Mapper 7 For the Custom Method select an option for the Repeat Every field that defines how often you want the detection process to run Select which days you require the Scan to run The Next Run On date will be calculated according to the d
81. a Work Order 9 In the Assigned to field click the 7 button to view the list of technicians or users This list is created in Permissions in the Setting module Select the name of the user who is to perform the task 10 Change the Due Date and Time optional 11 Click OK to add the task to the Work Order task list RiT Technologies Ltd 368 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 Add Edit Work Order Task Webpage Dialog Task General Links Notes Type Install Time Allocated Status Created Assigned To Administrator v Due Date 0907 2009 Due Time Description Start Date Start Time Date Comp z Time Comp Location A Time Elapsed Location B Figure 284 Adding Another Task to a Work Order Editing a Task gt To edit a task 1 Open the Work Order Module 2 Select the Work Order 3 Select the task 4 Click the New Task button The Add Edit Work Order task window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 369 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PV4E Windows Internet Explorer PVMAX PV MAINTENANCE TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELP Y Work Order Location Wo 06 08 2009 00001 General All Operations ID Engineer F a Description Priority a 08 06 2009 1 2 au Name Status pal Due Date gt WO 06 08 2009 00001 Created Move Server Remove PatchCord Assign To assign Delete New Add Edit Work Order Task Webpage Dialog Task 1 General Links Notes T
82. aai kae Takaia 263 Port Link Cable Test Results Search Ordet ss ccsstinssusnsonzvonhsisansdsadewshanedonnnsanabinhiisasdontosastanbosadwaawuownvenbabeanntndeannes 263 Port s Channel Cable Test Results Search Order s nnnnnnnsenssssssssseseeserreerssssssssssssseerereesssssssssssssssseerresesssse 264 Show the Port s Cable Test Results v2sssc2s nsc cress seas accannnesitosohccadusseanensadhandcinguantheesonsaderiudeadhaaaasiaeeeiuctecatesedangaees 265 Cable Test Result Storage Patiess ea O A 266 CHAPTER 6 CREATING AND EDITING LINKS nssnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 267 BRIVIS AD CF V ceccacesscacecevasccacccatcaussnasncscenenoescetaracavssseacavssasacecsassedeasacucssdanescsenscessstecucnwssacacsessuceusesrecversuseousstasts 267 PTD e cates saci rice E satin sac E E E T E eon cna EE E E E 269 Adding Cables to an open W OFKSNCEL sas casaantasee poses siowtaseeuaunrseenantecedecmnntesvowedacesauaasiddentusetieiat dowGuasdenunaiedraxteietnest 269 OTSA T ce eater T A A E A A E A A A T E A E A T A 269 Pa se A E E E E A agen 269 MANS E E E E E E E E a Gade tote A E E ET ET 271 RiT Technologies Ltd Ix PV4E User Manual V6 0 Patch V ew Monitored LINKS issasescsssnscecatcaccssoszesciandscdascosensscanstasetsatbeseecshsaseacecena sand aaa asda aaa aiaa 273 IY OI On line so sats sa sane cetecapcnee sesgenedanaianan aradanebseic aiedees eanedanaipieumiesnsanspaeunuetonedanalaseansatonessecedsaa a metorsianes manacetes 273 DECURG LIS C
83. added manually To add a Subnet Manually 1 Right click Topology and select Add Subnet from the drop down menu The Add Edit Subnet dialog opens 2 Check the Enable Subnet Discovery if you want the detection process to include detection of the subnet 3 In the Network information section fill in the ID field This information is found in the topology tree 4 In the Network information section fill in the MASK field Obtain this from the IT manager Note If Local Scan is selected verify that the PV4E server is a member of the specific subnet that you would like to scan 5 Select the Default Type This is the device type which is allocated to every device in case where the discovery module did not manage to reolve its type RiT Technologies Ltd 394 PV4E User Manual V6 0 M Add Edit Subnet Webpage Dialog 192 115 241 0 General Routers Network Information ID Subnet Discovery Settings fd Enable Subnet Discovery Scan by Router Local Scan Default Type Default Station Figure 307 Adding a Subnet Manually General tab 6 Click the Routers tab 7 Specify the information for each router which is associated with this subnet There is no limitation for the number of routers 8 The SNMP Settings like the Interface appear automatically and relate to the Router SNMP settings You can set different settings per router by clicking the Details button 9 Click Verify Ro
84. all the information relating to that particular port in a ToolTip box when the mouse is on the item RiT Technologies Ltd 287 PV4E User Manual V6 0 BUTTON FUNCTION Create Work Order Creates a Work Order directly from the Edit link Worksheet Mark Secure Link Mark the link as secure Blue lock icons will appear on the secure link Unmark Secure Link Remove the secure link The blue icons are removed Creating and Editing Links When you create a link it is displayed in the Edit Link worksheet You can edit several links in the same session When you drop an item into the Edit Link worksheet all items connected to it will appear so that the complete link can be seen Each link item is identified by its ID and associated icon Click an icon in the View Link box to view information about the item The information is displayed in the Information Panel Or right click on the item for the tool tip to appear Commands for managing Links can be accessed either from a pull down menu when the user selects and rights clicks on an item in the Edit Link worksheet or from the function buttons found in the Toolbar As soon as you have applied the instructions in Edit Link by clicking the Apply button the information is sent to the PatchView Scanners for immediate field implementation Links that have not yet been implemented can be cancelled Note If you are not creating a link for immediate online implementation RiT recommend
85. and dropped into the correct location gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer iol x PVMAX P LET Alarm K Refresh Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY 7 5 FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology 10 100 0 0 O PatchView Subnet General Routers Devices Topology 10 100 0 0 104 EP 00 00 0C 07 AC 01 10 100 40 21 E 00 01 6 2C C5 4 10 100 10 3 Network Information ID 10 100 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 J 00 07 6E 02 00 0F 10 100 20 201 Subnet Discovery Settings 1 00 07 6E 02 08 20 10 100 40 10 Ed Enable Subnet Discovery A 00 0B B3 00 03 51 10 100 40 158 00 0B B3 00 0E 8E 10 100 50 24 Default Type Deina takin 00 0B 83 1F B4F5 10 100 40 152 A 00 0B B3 98 D8 AB 10 100 40 156 00 0C 29 C1 0D 80 10 100 39 2 Q0 10 83 F 4 91 33 10 100 10 21 00 11 95 E0 EA 9A 10 100 20 21 00 15 9 85 B7 1E 10 100 20 27 00 15 9 85 B7 20 10 100 20 22 Figure 315 Auto Detection LAN Server LAN Server will locate all the terminal equipments that were detected by LAN Mapper and will complete the physical link information of each device in the database This will result in placing the terminal equipment in its correct physical location together with all its connectivity data To activate the LAN Server you have to define the LAN Server Scheduler LAN Server Scheduler The Scheduler defines the time intervals for the LAN
86. be comprised of a chassis and modules or as a standalone device Additional switches can be added to the database gt To add Switches to the Catalog 1 In the Catalog tree under Network Equipment right click on either the Functional Type Switch or one of the Classes defined for Switches 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Switch dialog opens FE Add Edit Catalog Switch Webpage Dialog Ports Motes Name Model 579 Chassis Functional Type Class choice Description Type Stand Alone O Module Chassis No of Slots 1 Size U 1 e Power W oO Arm Side None Weight KG Vendor Name International Switch Manufacturer Vendor Part No GSO 579 Image Name Default Switch 1U Figure 54 Add Edit Catalog Switch dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class RiT Technologies Ltd 76 PV4E User Manual V6 0 5 Click on the Ports tab to insert the required information Fy Add Edit Catalog Switch Webpage Dialog General Ports Notes Service ID Connector Port 01 RJ 45 STP Remove select service Port Naming Port Duplicate Figure 55 Add Edit Catalog Switch Ports Tab 6 Type in the name and select one of the options available in the Connector window by clicking on the 7 button Click on the Add button to insert more ports if required 8 To remove a port click on the relevant l
87. button will close the Edit Link Worksheet and cancel all tasks that have not been saved by the Apply function If for example you have broken a link between two items and you decide to go back and re establish the link you cannot do so until the task has been either cancelled or completed Until then the items involved in the link are reserved as pending and cannot be used for any other task gt To cancel a dynamic link Note All pending links in the worksheet will be cancelled with this process RiT Technologies Ltd 294 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PY4E Windows Internet Explorer DLA py Alarm z Refresh Logout WORK ORDER TOOLS SETTINGS REPORTS HELP aan a ron THE Enterprise Location Topology site 4 Patch iew O Subnet General Scanners PY Topoiwyy PYMAX Topology Physical Logical Pr ORS PYMAX Control Pad Enable A Link Status Pending Site l Group Info hha Site Link Control Control Pad e Cancel Current Link Process Site 3 Site 4 F Scanner 001 Port 1 Eb Panel 01 e l o a B Panel O Message from webpage Eal EP Panel 03 i j Are you sure you want to cancel the Group link change process e Be NS e DIN fon ee ee eS i a yp Ee Pot 01 Paali Back 01 A Pot 03 L E fa 2 yp E He j Back 04 Panel 01 Port Pot 02 Panel 02 Back 02 L 2 yp E E E j Back 05 Panel 01 Pots Pot 03 Panel 02 Back 03 gj Auto Fip Toatp Figure 211 Cancelling a
88. complex system of networks This network is made up of Hardware Software and Connecting Components These are defined and stored in the Project database which is divided into three sections m Location Tree which represents the hierarchical structure of the physical location of the enterprise and all assets in the locations Topology Tree that represents the hierarchical structure of the logical order of the Network Equipment in an enterprise m Users Tree which represents all the departments groups and individual users owners in your Enterprise The Location Topology and User Trees are found in the Maintenance Module of PV4E This section guides the user through the process of defining the locations and assigning Items necessary to set up a project In this section you will learn how to define the actual physical location of the building floors rooms etc and how to reference the Items that were defined in the Catalog Just as you define the network components in the Catalog so you define a network of locations Locations are defined in hierarchical order from the most general to the most specific item and there is no limit to the number of levels Any location structure that is suitable for your project s needs may be defined For example Suppose your company is located in two separate buildings in New York You occupy two floors in building 1 and three floors in building 2 You can define the location hierarchy as fol
89. das C On ae 2 sl Destination Connection CRET Server TESTLAB15 Back up to f Disk f Tape Connection Add 2d Remove View connection properties Contents Progress Ready rea Mb Figure 6 In the Database field enter PV4E since this is the database you are backing up In the Backup type field select Full from the drop down menu 8 Ensure that the Destination window is empty If not select the current database backup file displayed in the window and click Remove The Destination window will now be empty 9 Click Add to select a backup destination The following Select Backup Destination window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 516 PV4E User Manual V6 0 F Select Backup Destination E4 Select the file or backup device for the backup destination You can create backup devices for frequently used files Destinations on disk f File name Program Files Microsoft SOL Servers MSSOL WMSSOL Backup C Backup device ka cea A 10 In the File name field specify the path of the destination file and the file name of the Backup Set or click the ellipsis A Locate Database Files window opens Click the destination location on the tree the path name appears in the Selected Path field Enter a file name 11 Click OK 12 Click the Options tab Back Up Database P 4E Pal fel E3 ES Script Ts Help Select a page LAA General
90. down arrow appears in the Status field for items whose status can be changed Click the drop down list and select one of three options After you have changed the status the following warning box appears 5 Click OK to continue or click the button to cancel the action Windows Internet Explorer E X A Changing switch port status From Hub to Trunk will cause all devices connected to this port to be deleted Support for Multi NI C Server Consolidation Multi NIC Server Consolidation addresses the issue of multiple network adapters in terminal equipment devices The following sets out the basic NIC server consolidation for both manual mode and automatic mode Automatic Mode The automatic NIC consolidation into a single inventory item is performed by the Discovery Module In general the consolidation is text based meaning several NICs with a common text attribute can be merged into a single RiT Technologies Ltd 436 PV4E User Manual V6 0 inventory entity Devices of the same catalog type that share the same location are consolidated according to pre defined naming conventions The naming conventions are set in PV4E s database This section defines the required input for the Discovery Module for automatic multiple NIC devices in the application in order to reflect the network structure in a more accurate manner Prefix Suffix A generic table containing prefixes and suffixes needs to be supplied to RIT
91. entire operation New Events Export Events Along with the export started event a pop up message appears notifying you that the operation has started With the export completed event a pop up message appears notifying you that the operation has completed Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category 09 13 2009 15 38 Export Process Completed DB 09 13 2009 15 38 Export Statistic Information DB 09 13 2009 15 37 Export Process Started DB 09 13 2009 11 43 User Logged In License RiT Technologies Ltd 252 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Expert Process Started Event a E Event Detail z Webpage Dia log ID 1824 Event Code Export Process Started Date Time 09 13 2009 15 37 SOUrCE PV4E Server User Administrator Computer yarivl Description Export Process Started Root Location Belgium e E 4 Previous MO i Eo hig ty POR ket iT SP gk Sees apa L am Figure 180 Export Event Detail Window RiT Technologies Ltd 253 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Export Statistic Information Event _ al Event Deta all Webpage Dialog Al ID 1825 Event Code Export Statistic Information Date Time 09 13 2009 15 38 DOUCE PV4E Server User Administrator Computer yarivl Description Export Statistic Information Root Location Belgium No of Catalog Items 60 No of Inventory Items 38 No of Links 14 Operation Log File 2009 09 13 15 3 Figure 181 Export Statistic Event Detail Wi
92. facility for multiple names seeAuto Naming Feature The items will be updated with their names 4 Click OK The devices are added to the inventory database The devices icons no longer appear with a question mark Adding Updating and Removing Equipment in PVMax Topology In the Topology Tree Master Expanders Master Expanders PVMax Scanners and Panels can be added to the inventory database These devices can be added after the original network has been established as the network grows Expanders Master Expanders PVMax Scanners and Panels can be physically updated in the network You can move an existing device to a new physical location in the network or replace an existing device in the network with a new device You can determine if an existing device has been physically removed from the network Expanders Master Expanders PVMax Scanners and Panels that have been physically removed from the network should be removed from the inventory RiT Technologies Ltd 230 PV4E User Manual V6 0 database This will remove them from the Topology Tree but leave them in their position in the Location Tree Masters cannot be removed from the Topology Tree and can only be deleted in the Location Tree if there are no Network items connected to them in the Topology Tree Newly connected devices Masters Master Expanders Expanders PVMax Scanners and Panels that are installed after the main system has been installed are a
93. fea Add User Webpage Dialog Users g ih Emgineering 2 M George To Mark 363867 Techsupport 2 to Erie 95493 t Patrick Cancel Figure 161 User dialog 9 Expand the tree and select the User 10 Click Save to return to the Add Edit Inventory dialog The Owner s name appears in the fields RiT Technologies Ltd 223 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Inventory Station Webpage Dialog Eal General Adapters Software RAE Notes SS D FirstName latime m a Ta a Figure 162 Add Edit Inventory dialog 11 Select the Software tab to change the Software information optional 12 Select the Adapters tab to change the Adapter information optional 13 Click OK to proceed No Location Adding I tems to No Location All Items can be added to the No Location section These can later be assigned to their specific location either directly through the Location Tree or through Topology Items are added to the No Location folder in the same way as they are assigned to a specific location in the Location folder Multiple items can be named and added to No Location using the Auto Naming feature No Location is also used as an inventory of stock items that have not been assigned to a specific location Topology The Topology Tree is located in the Maintenance Module of PV4E This window has three options The PV PVMax and Subnet This section deals with the RiT Technologies Ltd 224
94. ll hn I l k I i 1 Mediae e OOT dem atau i PRB AIP PO 10 eels 1s Beat i ERTI Figure 98 Example of a List of PatchView Equipment Window Adding I tems to Location gt To add an Item to Location 1 Select and right click on the Location in the Location Tree where the Item is to be assigned A pull down menu will appear 2 Click on the required Functional Type The Add Edit Inventory Item dialog will open Type in the unique name of the Item 4 Select the Class by clicking on the button optional Or add a new class by clicking on the Add button This will open the Add Edit Class dialog Fill in the details and click the OK button to return to the Add Edit Inventory dialog 5 Select the Catalog Name by clicking on the button Or add a new item by clicking on the Add button optional 6 Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Fill in the information in other tabs if required 8 Click OK to proceed Note The unique name may appear in different locations It is defined as unique according to its parent location RiT Technologies Ltd 129 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Editing Items in Location gt To edit an Item in Location 1 In the Location tree click on the name of the Item that you would like to edit The information will appear in the Data Area 2 The Edit Inventory Item dialog can be accessed in three ways 1 Right click the selected Item in
95. network It is connected directly to the network and is able to monitor up to 144 ports up to 6 panels The Local Scanner is recognized by the PV4E system and is then presented in the User Interface as an integrated unit very much like the Master Expander unit The essence of the Master and Scanner functionality remains the same and requires no major changes The PV4E server communicates with the PV4E Master via standard 100BaseT Ethernet When the Master is a part of a Local Scanner the server recognizes it immediately by interpreting a bit in the Master MIB and concludes that the single Scanner connected to it is actually a part of a single unit constructed of the Master and the Scanner Information about the Master and Scanner as being a part of a single Local Scanner is recorded in the PV4E database so that the devices can be described properly in the User Interface and handled properly by the PVMax Server Detecting a Master Local Scanner in Topology To detect a Master Local scanner from the topology do the following 1 In the Maintenance screen click the Topology tab 2 Right mouse click PVMax Topology gt Detect Master P LET WORK ORDER TOOLS SETTINGS REPORTS HELP Location Topology Users PVMAX Topology PatchView 5 Subnet General PVBEAX Topolino Mode es Offline Logical Software Upgrade Properties Figure 119 PV4E Topology Tab 3 The following Auto Detect PVMax Master win
96. of Auto Naming e g S Scanner O1 In the From field type in the number of the PVMax which is O1 In the Step field leave the default increment as 1 or change to the desired increment using the up and down 4 buttons In this example it is left as one In the No of items field type in 1 There is a second option that can be used Click on the button and select to Type in actual label required e g 05 Not applicable in this example In the second Text field press the Space Bar as this will leave a space between the last character of the previous text field and the word Panel Type the word Panel followed by a space In the From field type in the number of the PVMax which is O1 In the Step field either leave the default increment as 1 or change to the desired increment using the buttons In this example it is left as one In the No of items field type in 64 If necessary fill in the third Text field Select and Click the Test button The system generates a simulation of the Auto Naming that has been formatted RiT Technologies Ltd 103 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E Gg Auto Naming Webpage Dialog x Hate 1 Template 2 PVMax Scanner From Step 7 No of Items Panel From Step 1 gt Na of Items From Step No of Items PYMax Scanner 01 1_ 1 Panel01 1_ 64 Apply Preview en SS e a Name 7 koo PVMax Scanner 01 Paneliti PVMax Scanner 01 Panel PVMax Scanner 01 Panel03 PVMax
97. of the values Front Back Port Number must contain a valid port number in its container 1 or greater Error Handling All conflicts encountered during the validity check are saved to build a conflict report If you choose to continue with the import process despite reported warnings every line in the CSV file that caused a conflict will be ignored Conflict Report A conflict report provides you with information regarding conflicts found in the CSV file The report states for each conflict the conflict type warning or error the line number field name and field data that caused the conflict and a short conflict description Log File The Import and Export processes logs every item transferred to a log file The Export process produces a log file for every location item catalog item inventory item and link information that was exported The Import process produces a log file for every location item catalog item inventory item and link information that were imported and every location item catalog item inventory item and link information that was ignored due to a conflict The format of the import export log file make it simple to verify that all exported items were imported Possible Conflicts for I mported File types During the import process a verification of the lines in a csv or an exp file takes place This process determines which lines are valid and which are invalid Error A conflict that cannot be ign
98. ora SN Oh a eet pee E E E aoe caine ante least jade 433 SWOT EON 2 08S A oe ee E ere ee nee ey mer ee ee een re erry ere ee tee 433 Change ecnerated by the Discovery WOU say sa cseesstauecuemssuvcnntionnisdccanetconsoadsetuancins TEETE E EER 433 Weee o ee Mo 6 ol eee E kr te ener et Ree ttre mero ret err trek n cr erent errr tT 433 Support for Multi NIC Server Consolidation sssicscccsscvesecsicstcacsnsectecegsedeetansensecauesdiacsnsesevectisteccestusetectieloscseeseds 436 AWOME M OGG senri E a E E ar EE Er AE EE E 436 Pe E a E E E E E T 437 Mee eM e AEE E adele EE E ETE PE E E T E EE N T TE T 437 JEEE aT E oT e EE diet ete T PP EE AE S A E E E EE E E 437 P a E E E E E E 437 De e O EE catered E A E A T AEE T E D concent N NET 438 Pean E ea EE E E E TE torcdaeneds 438 Manal NO ees A E E E S 438 Automatic Virtual Seryer SUpport s sssini aaea Naia 442 HO AN O E e A E ET E E T E E E 442 Virtual Machine Consolidation cccccccccccccccssssssnssseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaesssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeesssesenseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 442 Un Consolidated Virtual Machine ccccccccsccssssssssssesseeeccceeeeeeeeeaaeeeessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaaeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeqaaas 443 CHAPTER 10 BLADE SEI BRS vecsccestecsecestecsncenisecssessaiceresnnceurcusatesavesuiseusmaesies 445 ON UI S esse de pttace Meese er oh cetareaac saute acrescuePundeae ab oieeae fee baa ceesontnne dea deee uses Ghaaserqeeetcotoua treeaeasvedhaentuneeacnssaatvendeadiaeert
99. pane RiT Technologies Ltd 411 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gl Device Authorization Webpage Dialog A ara O Devices Name Functional Type choice Class choice Catalog Name Ej MAC Address a b 00 00 0C 07 AC 01 00 00 74 7D 22 8E 00 01 E6 2C C5 4E 00 02 78 55 25 7F 00 02 B3 E9 AB 39 00 03 47 16 9C 85 00 03 47 48 72 59 00 03 47 4F 54 35 00 03 47 63 AC 54 1 x x x x x x x 2 3 choice IP 10 100 40 21 10 100 10 22 10 100 10 3 15 1 1 125 10 100 40 22 0 0 0 0 10 100 30 19 10 100 40 61 10 100 40 111 MAC Address IP Address Host Name Authorized Host Name Name Type 00 00 0C 07 AC 0 00 00 0C 07 AC 0 Router RNP7D228E 00 01 E6 2C C5 4E 00 02 78 55 25 7F TESTLAB22 00 03 47 16 9C 8 newowa TSTTLAB162 OMRI TESTS Page 1 of 3 Pages Total Records 146 Location Indude Sub Location Location Security Location No Location Figure 320 Edit Authorization MAC Search v The search results contain MAC addresses from three different sources mE The inventory m Unmanaged stations some of the stations that were detected by LAN Mapper but have not yet been placed in their location These stations do not appear in the invevntory tree E The authorized MAC addresses table A MAC addresses table is a database that stores all authorized MAC addresses RiT Technologies Ltd 412 PV4E User Manual V6 0 C P 4E Windows Internet Explorer HA loj x
100. patching information and report it through the LAN The panels feature a full range of standards compliance such as m Category 6A Category 6 and Category 6 performance for copper unshielded and shielded twisted pair m SC ST LC and MT RJ for fiber optics LEDs on the patch panels indicate what the technician should do When the LEDs blink this indicates which Patch Cords should be disconnected After all the patch cords are disconnected the LEDs are lit in sequence thereby indicating which ports should be connected If you connect a patch cord to the wrong port the system alerts you and indicates that you must remove the patch cord At the end of the procedure PatchView indicates that the task has been completed Control Pad The control pad is connected to a scanner and allows the technician performing the actual wiring changes on site to activate the physical link change process The technician can activate an automatic LED scan from the control pad The automatic LED scan causes the LEDs of the ports to light in the sequence in which they are connected The LED scan is used to check that all the cable RiT Technologies Ltd 12 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Sites connections from the scanner to the panels are operating and connected in the correct order If the LEDs are lit out of sequence then the ports are incorrectly connected There is one control pad per site When a link task is sent to a scanner the Reconfigurat
101. prevent them being used by someone else Create a new task and set up the link according to your requirements but don t send it to the PatchView scanners An R appears as the link symbol of the connected Reserved items The items now cannot be used in another link until you either carry out the link or cancel it RiT Technologies Ltd 366 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note Inventory items can only be reserved for link and break link tasks Adding Additional Tasks to the Work Order Besides Links and Break Links other tasks can be assigned to the technician These categories of tasks can be to Install Remove Locate and Change either software or hardware These are assigned to a technician or technician gt To add an additional task to a Work Order 1 In the Work Order Pane select the Work Order that the tasks are to be assigned to 2 Click the New Task button to open the Work Order task Worksheet 3 The Add Edit Work Order Task dialog opens 2 PV4E Windows Internet Explorer k JE PVMAX PV Alarm K Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY A FOR THE Enterprise Work Order Location W0O 06 08 2009 00001 All General Operations Tasks ID Engineer oe ea ES a FaN ANS 7 M 4 Desaip ion Operation Status Assigned To Namea Status Due Date Priority Move Server Created idanb 1 gt W0 06 08 2009 00001 Created 08 06 2009 1 2 Remove PatchCord Crea
102. project can be a campus spanning several buildings or it could span countries Irrespective of the size of the project each location and sub location needs to be defined for PV4E to work effectively You will need to specify each building floor and rooms on each floor There are no limits to the number of locations that you can define All Users in the system are defined in the User Tree An option is available to allocate Terminal Equipment to the User when adding the items to Location Tip A Search facility is available to assist you in finding specific Items Equipment and Users RiT Technologies Ltd 97 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Planning the Project In order to accurately set up a project certain information is required As the Location Tree is organized in a logical fashion it is vital to have all relevant information available The Setting up Projects Chapter is divided into three sections Defining and naming the Locations within the Location tree In order to complete this section you will need site maps or similar drawings of the layout of buildings and floors Assigning Items that have been defined in the Catalog to their specific location In order to complete this section you will need Network Information A comprehensive list follows Defining the Topology of the network using the information that has been keyed into the Location Tree Items can be assigned directly into the Topology tree if required The follow
103. searched for items appear at the foot of the screen beneath the Search For window Search for Switch To search for a Switch do the following 1 Stand on the Search For button at the foot of the screen select gt Network Equipment gt Switch RiT Technologies Ltd 203 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Rack Equipment Demo Comm Room De User Software Adapter Telecommunication Infrastructure Terminal Equipment Network Equipment PatchView Equipment Connecting HW Work Order Data Center Equipment Location Global The following Search window opens Location os Indude Sub Location i Switch VLAN er i 7 Secure Link E Switch IP Address Service Name Indude Port Name Figure 148 Search for Switch Window 2 Enter the details of the item being searched for and select Search Now The searched for items appear at the foot of the screen beneath the Search For window Adding Network Equipment Default Switch Driver The Default Switch Driver feature lets you define and activate switches in the PV4E Immediately after adding them to the network with basic switch information necessary for the PV4E system This feature saves significant time and resources enabling the PV4E system to work properly without the need for additional development For more detailed switch information you can order a specific switch driver with extended switch support for the specific switch Defining New Switches There
104. select the type of messages you want to see Note All messages will be logged in the event log file and these can be retrieved at any time From Settings select Msg Message Filtering from the drop down menu The Message Filtering Window opens 3 Click the Edit button The Add Edit Msg Filtering dialog opens 4 Select the categories required Click the OK button RiT Technologies Ltd 490 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PVMAX Pv P LET Alarm Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY A FOR THE Enterprise Category gt Batch Completed Successfully Category i Popp wwe a specific location gt Batch Completed Successfully s gs Batch Completed with Errors Batch Process Started Catalog Item Added Catalog Item Deleted Catalog Item Updated Demo Time Expired Device authorized for existing device Device found without a specific location vent Code Event Category IBBEBEEERE EG SSS8S88 88 SES Figure 350 Message Filtering System Tables System Tables allows the option to make additions to the system These include m Additional Icons E Images for devices E Specific Work Order tasks E Location Types E Services Adding and Deleting I cons To add Icons 1 From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Tables Window opens Select the Icon Tab Click the Add button The Add Icon dialog opens 4 Type in the name of
105. the Links Worksheet 1 Click the Links Tab in the Task dialog The Link Worksheet opens 2 To ensure that the ports face the correct way for linking it is best to enable the Auto Flip checkbox The Auto Flip feature can be disabled when required optional To flip the ports manually see Edit Link Chapter 3 Check the Tooltip checkbox for Tooltips optional Tip Move the Worksheet to the bottom and slightly to the right of the screen to view the location tree 4 Click the Location Tab in the Work Order Pane 5 Locate and select the device to be linked Tip Multiple selections can be made lt Alt gt key for consecutive selection and lt Ctrl gt key for a non consecutive selection 6 Drag and drop the device s into the worksheet For more detailed instructions see Edit Link Chapter 7 If Specific ports in a device are to be linked then locate them in the Ports tab found in the Info Pane Multiple selections can be made Locate and select the port s to be linked Drag and drop the port s into the Links Worksheet into the correct column RiT Technologies Ltd 365 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PV4E Windows Internet Explorer MAINTENANCE TOOLSY Work Order SETTINGSY PVMAX PV P LET Alarm REPORTSY HELPY Panel 01 K Refresh Logout f fol Administrator Bag FOR THE Enterprise General Connectors Notes Tree Single View Double View Location Front J Israel Servic
106. the Users Tab in the Maintenance Module 2 Select and right click on the User Folder A pull down Menu will appear 3 Select and click on Add Group The Add Edit Group dialog will open fe Add Edit Grou 3 Webpage Dialog A Figure 170 Add Edit Group dialog 4 Fill in the Name 5 Fill in Description optional 6 Click OK to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 233 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding a Department Departments can be added directly to the User Folder or defined within a Group gt To add a Department 1 Select and right click on either the User Folder or the required Group A pull down Menu will appear 2 Select and click on Add Department The Add Edit Department dialog will open Add Edit Department Webpage Dialog EA Contacts Figure 171 Add Edit Department dialog Fill in the Name Fill in Description optional Select or Add a Group Click on the Contacts field to add a contact name optional Click OK to proceed NOW w Adding a User Users can be added directly to the User Folder or defined within a Group or Department gt To add a User 1 Select and right click on either the User Folder or the required Group or Department A pull down Menu will appear RiT Technologies Ltd 234 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 Select and click on Add User The Add Edit User dialog will open Ga Add Edit User Webpage Dialog x Equipment Address Hotes George Fir
107. the first time or if you want to rediscover the Network Topology Note This process will erase the old network topology RiT Technologies Ltd 385 PV4E User Manual V6 0 1 Open the LAN Mapper Screen See LAN Mapper Settings 2 Click Edit The LAN Mapper Setting dialog opens 3 Select the Initiate Topology Discovery button if the LAN Mapper is to be run for the first time or if you want to rediscover the network topology Note Once the LAN Mapper is complete and has been run for the first time it is important to select the Use Current Topology option If this is not done the process will be carried out from the beginning overriding the previous discovery 2 Edit LAN Mapper Setting Webpage Dialog Use Current Topology r O Initiate Topology Discovery r Default SNMP Settings Version Timeout ms 2000 Retries 2 L Figure 300 Defining LAN Mapper Settings 4 Select one of the options to Initiate Topology Discovery according to the following table RiT Technologies Ltd 386 PV4E User Manual V6 0 CONFI GURATI ON Default Gateway of Patchview Server EXPLANATI ON Use the default gateway of the PV4E server as its starting point If you select the Default Gateway option the LAN Mapper will detect the default gateway IP address from the PV4E server Router IP Use the Router with the specified IP address as its starting point If you select the Router IP option
108. the new icon Click the Browse button to locate graphic to be inserted gif format 6 Click the OK button to continue RiT Technologies Ltd 491 PV4E User Manual V6 0 System Tables Icon Image WO Task Location Service Ter Access Point p Adapter Back Port Blade Blade Server Blue Patch Panel Brown Patch Panel HH Building Cabinet Cable _ E M q a ow ew moo alw mml Webpage Dialog ERA p 5 a i g Fa rrr u eae we n ee i SSS ee SaaS a ee E G eee ee Figure 351 Adding and Deleting Icons 7 The new icon will be included in the list RiT Technologies Ltd 492 PV4E User Manual V6 0 To delete an Icon ils 2 oF 4 5 From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Tables Window opens Select the Icon tab Select the Icon to be deleted Click the Delete button A confirmation message opens Click the OK button to confirm Adding and Deleting I mages To add Images l From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Tables Window opens Select the Image Tab Click the Add button The Add Image dialog opens Type in the name of the new Image Click the Browse button to locate graphic to be inserted gif format Click the OK button to continue The new Image will be included in the list To delete an I mage 1 From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Table
109. thel button or add a new class by clicking on the Add button Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Click OK to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 136 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding a Shelf to Location gt To add a Shelf to Location 1 Select the Rack in the Location Tree where the Shelf is to be assigned 2 Right click the selected Rack A drop down list appears Location Topology Users Tree Telecommunicaton Infrastructure TRE Inc Functio EM T Class I Brussels Catalog M Cty Towers Size U am Foor 01 Power Room 101 Reception Power Weight Cabinet 1 Last Me Rack 01 Locat 1 E Foor 03 u orde a Foor 04 Add Rack Equipment _ Cable Organizer Belgium I Demo Demo Add PatchView Equipment Add Terminal Equipment b Shelf Add Network Equipment tf Forence Add Connecting HW 1 Al gD 1 pp S 6 BLDS A BDA Edit Add Data Center Equipment ai BDB Delete Figure 106 Add Rack Equipment from Location Window 3 Select Add Rack Equipment A drop down list appears 4 Click Shelf The Add Edit Inventory Shelf dialog will open RiT Technologies Ltd 137 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E M aire Seer oe faye AF f AB AddiEdit Inventory Shelf Webpage Dialog x items Motes Functional Type Catalog Name Size U Location Amber Inc Belgium Brussels City Towers Floor 0 Figure 107 Add Edit Inventory Shelf dialog 5 Select the Catalog Name by cl
110. then you need to put in the specific IP address of that Router Local Scanning Scan the PV4E server subnet only The LAN Mapper information will only be collected from this specific subnet Note Ensure that your PV4E server has a static IP address If this is not a static IP contact your system administrator 5 Obtain the default SNMP settings from the System Administrator DEFAULT SNMP SETTINGS PARAMETER EXPLANATION Get Community Public The string used as the community name in SNMP Get and Get Next requests Timeout 2000 The number of milliseconds after which the mseconds LAN Mapper stops if no contact is made with the Router Retries 2 The number of times within the timeout period the system will attempt to receive an answer to a request from a Router before reporting a communication error 6 Click Verify This finds the particular device and determines if it is alive and the parameters are correct in order to perform the scan If verification was successful a message will be given If the particular device cannot be verified the Discovery Module will not work Click OK or Apply 8 The Manual LAN Mapper Scan can be run at this point optional Note Since a network discovery with multiple community strings has a substantial impact over the scanning duration RiT suggests the following solutions 1 Use a single SNMP community string as a system wide parameter 2 Each device with SNMP settings different
111. this location 6 Click the OK button to continue RiT Technologies Ltd 494 PV4E User Manual V6 0 system Tables Image WOTask Location Service Jon is i ri A Add Location Category Webpage Dialog Event Category Figure 353 Adding and Deleting Location Category Type 7 A box opens showing the new name of the location and the icon 8 Click the OK button to continue 9 The new location category will be included in the list To delete a Location Category 1 From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Tables Window opens Select the Location tab Select the Location to be deleted Click the Delete button A confirmation message opens Click the OK button to confirm ey se a oY Adding and Deleting Service To add Service 1 From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Tables Window opens 2 Select the Service Tab 3 Click the Add button The Add Service dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 495 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 Type in the name and description of the new Service 5 Click the OK button to continue The new service will be included in the list System Tables Icon Image WO Task Descripton ae E Add Service Webpage Dialog Name Description Event Category Figure 354 Service List To edit a Service 6 From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System T
112. to that switch port From this view we can see if the IP address for a specific device is missing If so refer to the LAN Mapper Without the IP address the Discovery Module will not be able to detect this device If the IP is there continue to select the ports to be viewed or edited 1 Select each Unmanaged Device separately or shift click for multiple selection 2 Right click and select either Edit or View link from the drop down menu 3 Edit Link will allow you to view and edit the link and View link will allow you to only view it Switch Module ID Port ID 3F 44 23 00 Port 040 Device Device Name sagivg hp RITDOMAINA IP Address a VLAN VLAN 100 MAC Address 00 1C C4 CE 6F DA Location IP Address No Location 00 1B 3F 44 2 10 100 100 30 10 100 20 20 10 100 20 20 10 100 20 20 10 100 20 20 3F 44 23 00 Port 041 0U 15 3F 44 23 00 Port 042 00 18 3F 44 23 00 Port 043 00 1B8 3F 44 23 00 Port 044 00 18 3F 44 23 00 Port 045 00 18 3F 44 23 00 Port 047 fN 1R 2F 44 37 ON Part NSN VLAN 100 VLAN 100 VLAN 100 VLAN 100 VLAN 100 VLAN 100 VI AN inn No Location 00 1B 3F 44 2 10 100 100 38 No Location 00 1B 3F 44 2 0 0 0 0 No Location 00 1B 3F 44 2 0 0 0 0 No Location 00 1B 3F 44 2 0 0 0 0 No Location 00 1B 3F 44 2 0 0 0 0 No Location 00 1B 3F 44 2 0 0 0 0 Na I acatinn N 1R 2F 44 7 An AN Page 1 of 2 Pages Total Records 58 00 21 86 60 FB AC 00 19 D1 25 43 D4 00 11 0A C3
113. tree under Terminal Equipment right click Station 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Station dialog opens e M Add Edit Catalog Station Webpage Dialo aaa Standard Workstation General Adapters Software Name Standard Workstation Functional Type Class Workstation Description Intel Pentium 4 CPU 3 0 GHz RAM Weight KG oO Power W Arm Side Monitor No of Slots Size U Type Vendor Part No Vendor Name choice Image Name DefaultStationHil Figure 49 Add Edit Catalog Station dialog 3 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class RiT Technologies Ltd 71 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 Click on the Adapters tab Optional Standard Workstation General Adapters Software Notes a Slot Functional Type Name No of Port Description 10 100 Base T Remove SS ge ee el a al Connector Figure 50 Add Edit Catalog Station Adapters Tab Click on the Add button to insert the adapter information 6 Select one of the options available in the Functional Type and Name windows by clicking on the J button Type in a description if required 8 To remove information from this slot click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 9 Click on the Software tab Optional RiT Technologies Ltd 72 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Standard Workstation General Adapter
114. 0 07 GE 02 08 20 10 100 40 10 00 06 83 00 03 51 10 100 40 153 00 06 83 00 0E SE 10 100 50 24 00 0B B3 1F B4F5 10 100 40 152 00 068 83 98 D8 AB 10 100 40 156 00 0C 29 C 1 00 80 10 100 39 2 00 10 83 F4 91 33 10 100 10 21 00 11 95 E0 EA 9A 10 100 20 21 00 15 9 85 B7 1E 10 100 20 27 00 15 9 85 B7 20 10 100 20 22 00 16 76 4C 1 65 97 10 100 1 15 00 16 6 73 07 6A 10 100 40 27 00 1B 3F 44 23 00 CEUTE Delete 00 1E 7A 9C E8 70 10 100 40 100 Insert 00 50 86 CF 5F BC 10 100 1 1 Peek arabica a E 00 00 87 24 64 56 10 100 40 47 albina t42 ritdomain co il 10 100 A Properties AMIB4 10 100 100 87 amib 5 ritdomain co il 10 100 100 23 The switch is inserted into the inventory under No Location gt To insert and copy structure The Insert and Copy Structure procedure allows you to copy the structure of a switch already in the inventory to a switch that has been scanned but not yet inserted Once the switch is inserted into the inventory it will have the Same structure as the selected switch 1 Select Insert and copy structure from the right click menu of a switch device i e not in the inventory RiT Technologies Ltd 401 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Location Topology O Patchview Subnet Topology 10 100 0 0 104 i 00 00 00 07 AC 01 10 100 40 21 00 01 6 2C C54E 10 100 10 3 00 07 6E 02 00 0F 10 100 20 201 00
115. 04 Belaium Buildina 1 Floor 4 Room 41 E Total Records 17 Figure 132 Assign Rack to Rack Indicator Screen 3 Select the Rack and click Assign Click OK to save selection RiT Technologies Ltd 170 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 Click Remove to remove the association of the Racks to the selected Rack Indicator 5 The assigned Rack displays the rack name and location in the Rack Indicator tab gt Activator tab Command B ports 5 Additcit Inventory PYMAX Controller Webpapc Dialog X p AdditEdit inventory PYMAX Controller Webpage Dialog SM 22 M 22 tA g e Command Type On Off Pulse On Off Pubsc On Ott Pulsc On Ott Pulsc On Ott Pulsc On Ott Pulsc On Ott Pulsc On Ott Pulsc d E 2222223 0 Cn On o On c On C On c On o On o On a On c See bn bog bel bel cit 3 3 888888 22222222 wh toh bs be ied bof Eel 22222222 Figure 133 Activator Tab Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller screen Columns The following table lists the column name and function in the above Activator tab of the Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller screen Column Default port index Appliance A user defined name for the port default Activator n On Status Status of the device This is a user defined field that represents the ON status Off Status Status of the device This is a user defined field that represents the OFF status Command Type The status can be either On Off Pulse or On O
116. 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Process Started DB H a Foor 3 Add request demonstrations 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Completed Successfully DB 7 Bldg B 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Process Started DB Bie me 07 09 2009 08 37 Batch Completed Successfully DB _ No Location 07 09 2009 08 37 Batch Process Started DB eee Panel 6 07 09 7009 08 25 User lonned In i rm ane oF tan Figure 261 Work Order Screen Initiate Remove request 2 The following Remove Equipment screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 347 PV4E User Manual V6 0 e Remove Equipment Webpage Dialog From USA Atlanta Bidg A Hloor 2 Move Swap Change requests demonstrations Room 200 Remove From List Figure 262 Remove Equipment Screen 3 You can add items from the list by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting with the mouse Simply click on any arrow Click Remove From List The selected item items are removed from the list 4 To add an item click Add To List The following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 348 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Equipment Webpage Dialog Add Equipment To Request Equipment Name Functional Type Class Catalog Name Location Indude Sub Location I Name Functional Type Catalog Name Location Figure 263 Add Equipment to Request Screen 5 Enter details of the item you wish to search for and click Search Now The following screen opens A Add Equipment Webpage Dialog Add Equipment To Req
117. 07 5E 02 08 20 10 100 40 10 00 06 83 00 03 51 10 100 40 158 00 068 63 00 0E 8E 10 100 50 24 00 068 63 1F 64 F5 10 100 40 152 00 06 83 98 D8 AB 10 100 40 156 00 0C 29 C 1 00 80 10 100 39 2 00 10 83 F4 91 33 10 100 10 21 00 11 95 E0 EA 9A 10 1100 20 21 O0 15 E9 85 B7 1E 10 100 20 27 00 15 E9 85 87 20 10 100 20 27 00 16 76 C 1 65 97 10 100 1 15 00 16 E6 73 07 64 10 100 40 27 00 18 3F 44 23 00 10 100 20 2 Delete 00 1E 7A 9C E8 70 10 100 40 100 Tnsert 00 50 8B8 CF 5F BC 10 100 1 1 00 00 68 7 24 84 56 10 1100 40 47 Properties ff re ff i i ff ff if albina t42 ritdomain co il 10 100 100 The Insert and copy structure dialog is displayed 2 Click Search Now A new dialog opens with a list of all inventory switches and a list of their modules RiT Technologies Ltd 402 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Insert and copy structure Webpage Dialog A Locaton choice Indude Sub Location Go choice ha IF Address E Switch Name Catalog Name TP Address Status Lotion 00 11 95 E0 EA 9A Default Switch 10 100 20 21 Scan Failed USA NYC DCI Floor 1 H z 00 15 F9 85 B7 20 Default Switch 10 100 20 22 Online No Location 00 15 F9 B1 D8 AD Default Switch 15 1 1 150 Online USA Atlanta Bldg A Floo 10 100 20 24 Default Switch 10 100 20 24 Scan Failed UK London DC1 Floor 1 Al SWwi WS 6509 Chassis 11 00 Nat Scanned WRAN
118. 10 Port 07 Port 01 Es Total Records 19 Figure 242 Alternative Link Screen Select the new alternative link and click OK The previous Recommended Link screen is displayed with the new alternative link The system automatically adjusts the tasks to the newly selected link Click OK again to return to the summary screen of the Provisioning operation RiT Technologies Ltd 331 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Modifying a Work Order The output of a provisioning request is a work order You can either let the system generate its own work order or alternatively you can use an existing one Take the following steps to change the work order 1 Click Modify Work Order from the Results screen to modify an operation or task of the selected Work Order The Modify Work Order dialog box is displayed A Modify Work Order Webpage Dialog Modify Work Order Priority Target Date Figure 243 Modify Work Order Screen 2 Select the Work Order from the Name drop down list box or click Search Now The Work Order list is displayed RiT Technologies Ltd 332 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Modify Work Order Webpage Dialog Modify Work Order _ Work Order Name choice Status choice Priority Stat Target Date W0 05 08 2009 00164 O Geaa 05 08 2009 wWo 05 08 27009 00167 05 08 2009 WO0 05 08 27009 00169 05 06 2009 WO 17 08 27009 00170 12 08 2009 WO 17 08 27009 00171 12 08 2009 Wo 29 06 2009 001
119. 12 09 PY4E Ser Service started e 0s OOo oa O A u 005 07 04 02 09 08 27 u p 4 07 04 02 09 045 u 003 07 04 02 07 30 00 a 002 07 03 02 04 534 O01 07 03 02 04 50 2 Ee 2 Do you want to stop the PY4E Server Figure 3 A box opens requesting confirmation Click the Yes button to stop the PV4E Server Wait for the Stop button to Grey out 4 Click the Hide button 5 A red X appears on the PV4E Server Icon in the Status Bar indicating that the service has been stopped The j RiT Technologies Ltd 512 PV4E User Manual V6 0 To stop the PV4E Server from the Control Panel 1 From the Start Menu select Settings and choose Control Panel The Control Panel window opens with a list of components Double click on Administrative Tools 3 Double click on Services The Services window opens 4 Inthe list of services select PV4E Server Click the Stop Service button The Stop Other Services dialog opens 6 Click the Yes button to stop the PV4E Server N Administrative Tools File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Back gt A Search Folders As Os XxX A Ee 6 Local Disk C E LOCAL DISK D amp Compact Disc E data on ritsry Ns transfer on ritsrv 0 programfiles on ritsry Ps T A A Services Shortcut Starts and stop services Modified 2 5 2002 4 21 PM Address Administrative Tools
120. 175 Ha tatio Move Station sharonk from USA Atanta Bidg A Floor 1 Room 1 Click hyperlink to Click hyperlink to General description view equipment view tasks of the operation properties Remove From List Figure 238 Operations Screen In the Operations screen window you have several different options available such as RiT Technologies Ltd 328 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Modify the Work Order for each operation View device details View a list of tasks for each operation Modify add or remove tasks for each operation To modify a Work Order in the Operations screen click Modify Work Order the following screen is displayed fe Modify Work Order Webpage Dialog Modify Work Order _ Work Order Target Date Figure 239 Modify Work Order Screen Click Search Now to filter and display existing Work Orders You can narrow the search by specifying a Work Order name as well as a specific Work Order Status RiT Technologies Ltd 329 PV4E User Manual V6 0 To view the equipment properties for the selected user click the Item name beneath the Name column The following View Inventory screen opens at the General tab Adapters Functional Type Station Class Default Station Catalog Name Default Station Status Manual Last Activity Date CPU RAM Monitor Power Wi Arm Side Weight KG No of Slots Serial No Location USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 1 Room 101 Figure 240 View
121. 4 Installation directory Server Tools The typical location is C Program Files RiT Technologies PatchView for the Enterprise Server Tools To build a new Tree Utility perform the following steps 1 Specify the connection settings to the server SQL 2 Specify a name of an existing folder in which the subfolders would be created 3 Press the Build Tree button and wait for a message saying that the folders were created RiT Technologies Ltd 259 PV4E User Manual V6 0 HE Cable Test Results Build Tree Utility Connecton Cerner User name Password Database Cable test results path Tree path fits and Settings erezs DesktopFluke Results Build Tree Figure 186 Build Tree Utility Usage Set Cable Test Results Storage Root Path A new option Cable Test Results has been added to the PV4E GUI in the Settings Tab See the following screen SETTINGS REP Permissions Msg Filtering System Tables Work Order PatchView Elements PEX Mail Configuration Event Notification Call Manager Software Upgrade Metric Specifications RiT Technologies Ltd 260 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Figure 187 Cable Test Results Settings Tab Once the Cable Test Results option is selected the following screen is displayed and allows you to define the path of the root directory of the Directories Tree Cable Test source path specification Cable Test tree path CA Figure 188 Cable T
122. 47 Location Record Validity Testseite iaia ai AAEE ieia 248 Connecting HW Record Validity Test cccccsssssssssseeccceeeeeeeeeeeaeseeessseeesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaaasssssseeeseseeeeeeeess 248 Rack Equipment record Validity Test ccccccsssssssseeeccceceeeeeeeeaaeesssseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaauesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaas 248 Network Equipment Record Validity Test ccccccccceccceccccsscccessssssseeesecesececccessencecscssesseeeeceeeeeeeaenaes 248 Network Equipment Module Record Validity Test cc ccccsssssssseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaesesesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaas 249 Link Information Record Validity Test isciscccscnnsciccasteveecasesnantecsdactastusvawiaacdeawaaseddacdensduswasdadeavdeavsnasedecctesesnent 249 Me ek OR TEA AMD ccc secrecy tac sw scsi icant lo sere an tein mae olea ste op G paced Kw ott scence E R A 249 COECK COU ogee oecersrciccteery saison E ce cana spas E E E T E 249 Wp BN aac cee os sees sauce E cee sass cen cetacean ose ceees T E T AA A TEE A E 249 Possible Conflicts for Imported File types cccssssssssseecccceeeeeeeeeaaaeaessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesassasseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 249 INGW FV GUUS 2 sccscescoccstassssssausssveducasssssecsstesaeaboseusesesdonessmacensacvalausgabebanausosdsunsanecenduabesesasaversenanassustsensesateessssedenscunacs 252 15 4018 4 E T EE E eer tern enter re nae nen ener nner ner eer eee er eer ae eee ee 252 PPO TEOG S S CzIM U E E enter en ene een rE E E tenrer trent nn ete
123. 51 29 06 2009 WO 79 06 27009 001 5 eat 79 06 2009 Total Records 7 Name a Figure 244 Modify Work Order 2 Screen 3 Select the Work Order you wish to modify and click OK Make the desired changes and click Finish to view all Work Orders e Move Equipment Webpage Dialog Move Operation List o ti WO Name Operation Operation Description Move Move Station Move Station sharonk from USA AUanta Bldg A Floor 1 Room 1 Remove From List Modify Work Order Figure 245 Modify Work Order Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 333 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 To complete the move operation click Finish The system stores the operations and reserves the ports The following Work Order screen is displayed WO 12 08 2009 00170 General Operations Tasks a Descipton Operaton status Assigned To H Disconnect F2CR2 PP OPR 1 Move Station Created Connect F2CR2 PP OPR Pi 1 Move Station Created Move Seank from USA 1 Move Station Created Resources F3CR3 SW1 M 1 Move Station Created Assign To assign Status status 2 Perform Delete i Edit Edit Work Order Figure 246 Work Order Screen Add Request The Add feature allows you to automatically generate a Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for adding single or multiple devices You can add devices to an area location i e building floor room outlet etc and prepare the relevant services based
124. 6 D_1 5STR 100 DC1 5TP 1008 D_1 5STR 1009 HC1 STP 1000 Edit Link Hil1 STP 1001 Duplicate Hl1 STP 1002 Edit View Link 7 SHUR Hee ey E wy 7 No Location athway 5 Delete Show CAD Refresh The View Link screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 272 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A iew link Webpage Dialog xi ZTA Tol HH Fae SO piap pee F 10 100 20 24 HC1 STP 1000 OPR panel Port 02 End 1 Port 03 2 The View Link displays a joint picture of the inventory tree and also the telecommunication tree 3 Click on the cable icon E to view the cable paths A View cable Webpage Dialog Ma FP 1 100 Displays a graphical view of the location points of where each cable passes PatchView Monitored Links PV4E must be on line in order to monitor links Working on line If your system is currently off line then it is recommended that you change to on line for monitoring Dynamic links Note To change PV PVMax to on line open Maintenance Module The following diagram shows the steps needed to work on line gt To work on line with PV RiT Technologies Ltd 273 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A PV4E Microsoft Internet Explorer PYMAX PY Alarm K Refresh W Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELP Y A FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology PV Topology Patch iew Subnet General PY Topology Mode PYMAX Topology Physical Logical Events Info D
125. 6 08 2009 00001 Created 08 06 2009 1 2 Remove PatchCord Created Administrator Name a Assign To assign v Status status Perform Delete New Edit Edit Work Order GA Add Edit Work Order Task Webpage Dialog x General Notes Type Time Allocated Created Assigned To Due Date 08 06 12009 Due Time Description Move Server Start Date v Start Time Date Comp Time Comp Location A Time Elapsed Location B Figure 276 Editing a Work Order Deleting a Work Order A Work Order can be deleted under the following conditions Its status is Closed Its status is Completed Its status is Created but there are no tasks assigned to it Its status is Created and all the tasks assigned to it still have the created Status gt To delete a Work Order 1 Select the Work Order that is to be deleted 2 Click the Delete button in the Work Order Pane 3 Click either OK or Cancel in the alert message The Work Order will be deleted RiT Technologies Ltd 361 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Tasks A Work Order is made up of a task or several tasks that are assigned for implementation These Tasks are assigned to an technician who executes them on site Tasks can be created edited and cancelled Creating a New Task Each individual task has its own status When a task is opened it receives the status Created This status is changed to In Progress or Send to Scanner depending on the task and then to Completed
126. 7 Select the date that you want the Work Order completed by Close the calendar Change the Due Time optional RiT Technologies Ltd 359 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note The Work Order dialog will show that the Status is Created It will also show who created the Work Order the date and time The system uses the login name as the default for the Created By field 10 Click the OK button to close the dialog or one of the other options The new Work Order is now listed in the Work Order Pane a WO0 06 09 2009 00002 Description Priority 1 w Due Date 09 06 2009 Due Time status Created By Date W close Figure 275 New Work Order Created Editing a Work Order gt To edit a Work Order 1 Select the Work Order that is to be edited 2 Click on the Edit Work Order button in the Tasks Pane 3 Edit the ID Description Priority and Due Date and Time as required 4 Click the OK button to close the dialog or one of the other options RiT Technologies Ltd 360 PV4E User Manual V6 0 j f Le ES PV4E Windows Internet E xplorer l Ea PVMAX PV j Alarm K Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY 4 FOR THE Enterprise Work Order Location W0O 06 08 2009 00001 General Operations Tasks Engineer WM Desciption Operation Status Assigned To Status _Due Date _ __ Priority A Move Server Created idanb gt WO 0
127. Adapters Software Notes Functional Type Class choice Description CPU RAM Weight KG Power W Arm Side Monitor No of Slots size U Type Vendor Part No Vendor Name _ _choice Image Name Default KVM Device Figure 45 Add Edit Catalog KVM Device dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 5 Click the Adapters tab optional RiT Technologies Ltd 67 PV4E User Manual V6 0 c wl 10 11 12 13 14 L5 Software Hotes lot Functional Type Name No of Ports Description EVM EVM Remote Remove h es eee eee Service Name Connector Figure 46 Add Edit Catalog KVM Device Adapters Tab Click on the Add button to insert the adapter information Select a KVM adapter in the Functional Type window by clicking on the 7 button Select one of the options available in the Name window by clicking on the 7 button Type in a description if required To remove information from this slot click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button Click on the Software tab Optional Click on the Add button to insert the software Select one of the options available in the Functional Type and Name windows by clicking on the button To remove information from this slot click on the relevant line of information The indicator mo
128. Back 02 Back 02 3 Any Servi Port 03 Port 03 Back 03 Back 03 4 Any Servi Port 04 Port 04 Back 04 Back 04 Beir alk aA j iew Link tH a Floor 02 Edit am Floor 03 Building T B Delete Events oo Building T C Labels i Building T D E Russia 4 UK A usa No Location Pct Station 2 Figure 213 View Link Window from a Panel Viewing Information about an Item in the Link You can view the details about every item in a link as they appear in the Inventory dialog for that item The Items can be edited if required gt To view information about an item in a link 1 Open the View Link Window 2 Click on the Item that you require the information on The information appears in the Information Pane 3 Click on one of the Tabs or the Edit button The Add Edit Inventory Item dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 298 PV4E User Manual V6 0 P 4E Windows Internet Explorer Of x PYMAX PY Alarm x Refresh W Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTS Y HELP Y ore FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree O Telecommunication Infrastructure General Ports Connectors Location Japan ae FO Tokyo A GA eee RE AAI Building T A e Add Edit Inventory Panel Webpage Dialog a Floor 01 Room 100 Panel 01 a Cabinet 1 S CAB 01 General Connectors E Panel 01 BB Panel 02 ee Front Front Back M Rack 1 BE Service ID
129. Back 07 Any Servii Port 08 Port 08 Back 08 Back 08 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 e Edit Link Webpage Dialog Iv uto Flip a Figure 197 Blank Edit Links Worksheet Drag the required items or ports into the work sheet See Dragging and dropping an Item into an open Worksheet Resizing the Edit Link Worksheet The Worksheet can be moved around the screen allowing you to view other information as required Both the worksheet and the individual columns and rows can be resized gt To resize the dialog individual columns and rows 1 Move the cursor over the dialog until it is positioned correctly The following table shows the different shapes and functions of the cursor CURSOR FUNCTI ON Resize the width and height of the dialog Resize the columns Resize the rows Move the dialog f qP 3 EN Moves the selected Item s from cell to cell within the dialog RiT Technologies Ltd 280 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Items or Ports to an open worksheet Items and individual ports are added to the Edit Link Worksheet using the drag and drop method Tip More than one item or port can be added to the Edit Link Worksheet by holding down either the lt Ctrl gt or lt Alt gt keys and selecting the items or ports required gt Dragging and dropping an Item into an open Worksheet 1 Open an Edit Link Worksheet if one is not open 2 In Maintenance gt Location or Topology Tree select the Item s that you would lik
130. DEFINED TRUNK Module will not override these values To change the status of a switch port do the following 1 Stand on the switch in the location tree Location Topology Users AFi1SW1 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Modules Settings Location ef UK Functional Type Switch e USA Class Cisco Devices FA Atlanta Catalog Name Catalyst 3548XL Chassis T BldgA IP 0 0 0 0 ap Floor 1 MAC CRi P LET Status Not Scanned P LET Supported Rack 1 Serial No Type El Rack 1001 No of Slots 2 Size U HB AF IPP2 Power W 0 E AFIPP1 Arm Side None Weight KG M AFiswa Location USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 1 CR 1 Rack 1001 3 amp Room 100 amp Room 101 e a 2 To change the switch details click Edit The following Add Edit Inventory Switch window opens at the General tab Edit RiT Technologies Ltd 434 PV4E User Manual V6 0 M Add Edit Inventory Switch Webpage Dialog General Modules Settings Notes Catalog Name Status Sy ee Se 3548XL Module Online Slot No a Name 3 Click the Modules Tab Click Name The Add Edit Inventory Module window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 435 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FY add Edit Inventory Module Webpage Dialog General Ports ETES E e r Port 06 Port 07 Port 08 Port 09 Port 10 IE Host Name Pea 2 ee select service a wr y Se ue Save AS New Bera hae ake po bet te en 4 Click the Ports Tab A drop
131. Deea TAEOGION 116 Adding a Company to the Location Tree cccccccccccccccceccececenaeeesssseseeeeececeeeeeseesaaaaassseeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeaaaas 117 Adding Countries to the Location Tree ccsssseeeeecccecceeenanseceeeessssseeeeeccccceeeessseaaggasssseeeeeseceeeeeeeeqaaas 118 Adding Cities 10 the Location Tie Gt aisicesacactstsecentebregeussingaenisanneesthahasepbyeleesd das a Er E e ean seunas 118 Adding Buildings to the Location Tree cccccssssssssssseeeeceeeeeceeeceaaeseesseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaauaassssaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaas 119 Adding Floors to the Location TreGsssisessiscsneniiso inconciente ea aea E e aa eain 120 Adding Rooms to the Location Tree si c isaserenessiesenduedauesecasdcnntsetenendvadaceusdeteuessdecntsaseuepthtbeceudubdoueseeateoentiatanwns 123 Adding Cubicals to the Location Tree eeenseeessssseeeeeererrssssssssssssssrereerrossssssssssseereereeeossssssssssssseeeeeeessssse 124 Adding Desks to the Location Tree nnnnnneessseesssssseseeeeeresssssssssssssseecerrereeresosssssssssesecereeresssssssssseeeeeeeereo 125 te GSC Loca on TI Eising enian a A A EA EAA E RN 127 ASSISTING tems to Locations 127 Adding Editing Moving and Deleting Items in Location ssenoeeeneeesssssssssssssesssererresssssssssssssserererresesssss 128 Adding Items to Location sacniincocsceuessuvscnssickanncnsaetnossodwesanvientaclensaedacntuaeianeuge ndvmerecnsnmenqeeinnceswedaaasnatadnacedaceanees 129 Editing I
132. E indicates that there are additional devices connected to the Access Point gri view pils a many 8 ah m AP Gutlet 205 00 01 6 26 2 Port 1 Port 01 I ED Fe F o AP Outet 205 00 13 20 1E 1 Port 1 Port O01 3 F rer AP Outet 205 00 15 58 EC E Port 1 Port O01 i ai Fo F m Viewing the Status of a Switch Port The following three new port statuses have been added to PV4E Status Description Icon 1 Hub Represents a switch port that is l connected to a hub or a WAP E Represents a switch port whose rror scan failed PV4E cannot determine if a switch Undefined port is connected to a hub WAP or if the switch port is a trunk RiT Technologies Ltd 432 PV4E User Manual V6 0 For more information on viewing port status refer to the PV4E User Manual Chapter Maintaining and Editing Links Section View Items Panels Ports and Link Port Status Indicators When the Discovery Module cannot determine a switch port status the port is marked as Undefined This could be due to an outlet not being configured properly or switches not being defined properly in PV4E Manual intervention is then required Changing the Status of a Switch Port Note Changing the status of a switch port from hub to trunk will cause all devices connected to the port to be deleted Changeable ports in the Status field have a drop down list The status can be changed only from Hub Trunk or Undefin
133. E E E E E E E N E E E E N E E E E TT 511 APPENDIX A BACKING UP AND RESTORING THE PV4E DATABASE 512 Sloppine he PVAE CEC osoena aa aaa aaa a 512 Backing up SQL Database versions 2005 and 200B cccccccccccssssssssssssssssssscsscccccccccccccssssscsssssssssssssssssoooes 513 Restoring the SQL Database for Versions 2005 and 2008 ccccccccsssssssssssssssccsscccesccccccccccccccssssssssccsscseees 518 Troub shoo ooo 5 oe socececs cease scezeceusczcvavcecoeseeenuscsase T E S 523 DUO OU CE Var Gas arcmin sw creme ess wearers ator tien os E annem etd N E ET S 3523 ieor ra eae D BES gid ci r A E E EA N E E E E I A A 524 APPENDIX B OLCOSSARY camo ea wepctiencten et enatedeteneeuectenceeeeverctee 525 RiT Technologies Ltd XV PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 1 Introduction The PatchView for the Enterprise PV4E User Guide provides complete information about the operation and maintenance of the system It explains how to build your network database and operate the system in order to effectively manage and maintain your network s physical layer PV4E provides fully accurate and comprehensive documentation of all network infrastructure components as well as advanced detection and alert capabilities to allow the user full control over the environment For installation and minimum requirements please refer to the RiT Enterprise Solutions Installation Guide Product Description PV4E is a comprehensive and efficient in
134. E General I nformation Active Directory I ntegration New in version 6 0 is the Active Directory application Active Directory is basically a central repository that contains a subset of user information and passwords and identifies access to network resources After you have entered your user name and password PatchView sends a confirmation request to the Active Directory server which then confirms whether you are permitted to log onto PV4E Note Users can be defined either in the Active Directory or PatchView application but not both gt To add a user to the Active Directory application do the following 1 From the Settings menu select Permissions from the drop down menu SETTINGS Msg Filtering System Tables Work Order PatchView Elements PBX 2 Click the User tab 3 Click lt 7 at the foot of the screen on the left hand side The following screen opens at the General tab RiT Technologies Ltd 507 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Security User Webpage Dialog General Membership Email Access PatchView Active Directory Name Full Name Password Confirm Password Password Expires After Password Never Expires Change Password at Next Login Notification Only 4 To obtain specific user information click the Active Directory radio button The following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 508 PV4E User Manual V6 0 i Add Edit Security User Webpag
135. ET Module from the bottom toolbar 3 Select Utilization Module from the menu gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer O i Ioj WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY b FOR THE Enterprise _ Location JY Users DC1H1CBLD50 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Modules Data Cooling Location 3 UK Slot No a Name Catalog Name usa DC1H1CBLD50 M 1 HP Ethernet Pass Through Module fj Atlanta DC1H1CBLD50 M 2 HP Ethernet Pass Through Module ff Nyc DC1H1CBLD50 M 3 HP Ethernet Pass Through Module oc1 DC1H1CBLD50 M 4 HP Ethernet Pass Through Module Floor 1 Halli 1 RowA RowB 3 Rack 5 Rowc E Cabinet 5 g c E c2 E c3 E c4 Events E2 DCIH1CPP40 ea EE a DC1H1CBLD50 mo oee E Oae ees S cs 07 09 2009 14 50 User Logged In License 1 RowD Hall 2 Add requests Hall 3 Hall 4 Consolidate Hall 5 Unmanaged Devices Figure 325 Viewing unutilized Ports and Devices The Utilization search window opens 4 Fill in the search parameters RiT Technologies Ltd 425 PV4E User Manual V6 0 5 Fill in the Inactive days field Tip For example to see which ports devices have not been used for a period of time put in 30 days This will give a list of unutilized ports devices for 30 days or more 6 Click Search Now to find all the unutilized ports 7 MAC Address Inactive Days IP Address Show All Ports Location Path O PotD VLAN ID Locatio
136. Ea USA Atlanta Bidg A Floor 1 CR 1 Rac The full panel icon EB shows that all the ports in the specific panel are marked as part of the connectivity zone The partial panel icon H shows that one or more ports are not part of the connectivity zone The panel will still display half white and half blue even if there is one port missing You can select one or more panels to be connected within several racks cabinets so they act as a group Ports from multiple panels can be connected as long as they are within the same connectivity zone You cannot however connect panels from different connectivity zones Adding a New Connectivity Zone Select Settings gt Connectivity Zone to display a list of existing connectivity zones WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGS REPORTS YF HELP Catalog Location Topology Users Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure seers Content Inactive Device Environmental Location Ee kK ta Ft Bristol System Tables I ff London Work Order Eg oci i gp Floor 1 H m Halli 3 Hall Mail Configuration PatchView Elements PEX 1 Hall3 Event Notification THR Cable Test Results a Hals e Es Panel 6 Figure 231 Select Connectivity Zone from the Settings menu Screen a oi ne 2 Poort ih an a ih i as d a as d E RiT Technologies Ltd 316 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To add anew connectivity zone 1 Click New at the bottom of the Groups tab to add a new group The Add Gr
137. Equipment tree E PVMax Indicator Controller PVMax Security Controller A PatchView Equipment Expander 1 Local Scanner 4 Master 7 Master Expander 1 PVMax Control Pad 1 PVMax Controller 2 E PVMax Indicator Controller PvMax Security Controller FP PVMax Scanner 3 PVMax Indicator Controller Function PVMax Security Controller Function Adding and Editing PVMax Controllers The following section explains how to add a PVMax Controller to the inventory and also how to edit a PVMax Controller gt Add To insert a new PVMax Controller to the inventory 1 Right click on a specific location from the Location tree or right click on No Location Select Add PatchView Equipment gt PVMax Controller RiT Technologies Ltd 155 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Location Topology Users Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Location Printer Add Terminal Equipment Router ene Add Network Equipment Sie Add PatchView Equipment Expander Telephn Add Connecting HW Master Add Data Center Equipment Master Expander Local Scanner PYMAX Control Pad Show CAD Refresh The Action button can also be used Add Rack Equipment Add Terminal Equipment Add Network Equipment Add PatchView Equipment Expander Add Connecting HW Master Add Data Center Equipment Master Expander Local Scanner PVMAX Control Pad PYPIAX Scanner Show CAD Refresh 2 The following Add
138. For example RiT Technologies Ltd 299 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Patch Patch Network Station Outlet Panel Panel Equipment Dynamic Static Dynamic Static Link Link Link Link Figure 215 Full Link Note There is no need to include Stations when defining Full links A Station is automatically added to a link by P LET when the Station is connected to an Outlet 4 Define the P LET Settings for the LAN Server and for the LAN Mapper modules 5 Run the LAN Server The Stations appear in the Location Tree and a reference of this station will be placed in the Catalog if it was not previously defined 6 The P LET module identifies all the Stations in the network according to the following parameters Station MAC address IP Address Host Name Station Service type Active Stations are compared to the database and if a discovered Station is not part of a Full link it is identified as an Unmanaged Device Split Links Split links are supported by P LET Split links enable more than one link to be connected to the same connecting hardware item outlet or panel This allows two or more Stations to be connected to the same outlet or panel In order for you to benefit fully from all the PatchView for the Enterprise P LET features RiT recommends the following work flow with regard to the Outlets and Stations 1 After the Full links have been defined in the Edit Link Worksheet define a split link for each desired Outlet port in t
139. INTENANCE NORR TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELP Y Paten View FOR THE Enterprise Work Order I Row C Single View Double View General Content Inactive Device Environmental Name E Cabinet 5 Horizontal and Vertical 1 Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Completed Successfully DB 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Process Started DB ap Floor 3 Add request demonstrations 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Completed Successfully 1 Bldg 6 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Process Started DB FM nyc 07 09 2009 08 37 Batch Completed Successfully No Location 07 09 2009 08 37 Batch Process Started EB Panel 6 07 09 7009 08 25 User lonned In irri a o Figure 255 Initiate a Change request Screen The following Change Service screen opens note that this ample refers to an entire workspace e Change Webpage Dialog Location USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Move Swap Change requests demonstrations Room 200 EduardM USA Atlanta Blig A Hoor 2 Move Swap Change requests demonstrations Room 200 JeremyT USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Move Swap Change requests demonstrations Room 200 Trevors USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Move Swap Change requests demonstrations Room 200 Remove From List Port Name Service Any Service No Service Red Blue None Figure 256 Change Service Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 343 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 Select the item you wish to change From the Service field drop
140. Inactive Device Environmental Name City Towers Type Description HQ and Software R amp D Security Normal Parent Location Amber Inc Belgium Brussels Figure 90 Adding a Building Window 5 Click OK to proceed Adding Floors to the Location Tree Multiple floors can be added to the Location Tree In this example the Auto Naming Feature will be used to name five floors gt To add Floors 1 Select and right click on the Building in the Location Tree A pull down menu will appear Move the cursor over the Add Location and a second menu appears 2 Select and click on Floor The Add Edit Location dialog will open RiT Technologies Ltd 120 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog x si um General s Inactive Device Environmental Name Type Description Security Normal Parent Location Amber Inc Bekpum Brussels Gty Towers Figure 91 Adding Floors Window As the building has five floors the Auto Naming feature will be used 3 Click the Auto Naming button and proceed as per instructions See Auto Naming Feature 4 Select and click on the Apply button to apply the Auto Naming of multiple floors The Auto Naming dialog box closes returning to the Add Edit location dialog RiT Technologies Ltd 121 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog bal General Inactive Device Environmental Type Desoipton Security Normal Parent Location
141. Inactive Device Environmental m tE UK Name M Bristol Hall 1 fm Dc Hall 10 Hall 1 Hall 2 Hall 10 Hall 3 Hall 2 Hall 4 Hall 3 Hall 5 Hall 4 Hall 6 Hall 5 Hall 7 Hall 6 Hall 8 Hall 7 Hall 9 Hall 8 9 a Hall9 3P London USA M No Location Events Panel 6 SSS Router 2 Info Date Time Event Code Event Category CEE DE Ei SE SL DL Bi BLBE g ig B ig oP a amp D D Station 9 07 09 2009 14 12 Device authorized for existing device Device Locatc Switch 4 07 09 2009 14 01 P LET Process Completed P LET 07 09 2009 14 01 P LET Statistic Information P LET 07 09 2009 14 01 LANServer Unauthorized Devices Summar Device Locatc Figure 322 Viewing Unmanaged Devices 4 The Unmanaged Devices search window opens 5 Click Search Now to find all the unmanaged devices A table appears with details of the Unmanaged Devices You can sort the table according to each particular parameter by clicking on the header of the column by which you want to sort RiT Technologies Ltd 423 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Unmanaged Switch Name Network ID Switch IP Address Subnet Mask Switch VLAN IP Address Switch Location Location Path Device MAC Address Device Name Figure 323 Unmanaged Devices search window gt To work with Unmanaged Devices The table of the unmanaged devices is divided into two main areas m The left side has the switch port information m The right side has the device information found to be connected
142. Inventory Screen To view the tasks click the hyperlink The following Recommended Link Information screen displays the recommended link chosen by the system to for this operation Each network adapter has its own recommended link The only exception is when two devices are daisy chained like workstation and IP phone and then they will have the same recommended link The recommended link by the system is the one with the highest grade calculated by the grading links covered above To view alternative links click the Alternative Link button RiT Technologies Ltd 330 PV4E User Manual V6 0 e Recommended Link Info Webpage Dialog Port Name Ss Slot No j i Address MAC Address Service Name E l i 00 00 00 00 00 01 Any Service Outlet102 3 Port 01 Figure 241 Recommended Link Screen The following Alternative Link screen opens and displays additional links for the selected move These links have a lower grade than the link which is been presented as the candidate link To select an alternative link click the parallel bar next to the preferred link FY Alternative Link Info Webpage Dialog Select alternative link by clicking the arrow on the m Fo 68 IE cape Eea m vertical bar M 1 AF IFP AF IFP2 Outet102 3 Port 06 mora UN Port 07 Port 01 aiir a 2 rerr 3 g j ifs a F4 M i AF IPP 1 AF IPP2 Outlet102 3 Port 07 Port 01 inte fy FAP E B Cy F4 M 1 AF IPP 1 AP IPP2 Outet102 3 Port 10 Port
143. Link Window H Click to select the Topology Tab N Select the site group in the Topology Tree where the links that are to be cancelled are located 3 The Information pane opens with the General information relating to the site The Pending indicator is on 4 Click on the Cancel Current Link Process button A confirmation message appears 5 Click on the OK button Clearing the Link Edit Worksheet Note If the Links are in the pending status using the clear buttons will clear the cells in the worksheet but maintain the new link information as the task has already been sent to the panels If the clear buttons are used prior to the apply function being activated the new link tasks will not be saved There are two methods of clearing the cells in the Edit Link Worksheet The Clear button will clear selected cells and the Clear All button will clear the entire worksheet RiT Technologies Ltd 295 PV4E User Manual V6 0 View Items Panels Ports and Links A Graphical representation of all connections to and from an Item Panel Port or Link can be viewed in the View Link window The Port Status can be viewed in the View Panel window The View Link window can be accessed from many different locations For example Location and Topology Show Panels Graphic display of Racks Panels and ports Search Port Tab Port Status I ndicators The Panel Ports are color coded to indicate their current connectivity sta
144. Location Type that you would like to define The Add Edit Location dialog will open G Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog x p eens General Inactive Device Environmental Type Descnipton Security Parent Location ote Ser gs Figure 84 Add Edit Location dialog 5 Type in the name of the Location 6 Add the Description optional Tip Keep the description short and relevant as this will be used as a Sort criterion To use the Auto Naming facility See Auto Naming Feature To assign a new icon see Using Icons 7 Select OK or one of the buttons to proceed Adding a Location under a Parent Level These Locations are added to the Location Tree from the second level down The options available in the Pull down menu are different gt To Add a Location under a Parent Level 1 Select the Location Type in the Location Tree 2 Right click the selected Location Type A pull down menu will appear Select Add Location and Type 3 Click on the Location Type that you would like to define RiT Technologies Ltd 113 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note The Parent Location field will now show the name of the parent WORK ORDER TOOLS SETTINGS REPORTS HELP Location gt Topology Users Demo Tree O Telecommunicaton Infrastructure General i Content Inactive Device Environmental Location ERE st Search ty eae Add Rack Equipment Buildin Printer 1 AddiEdit Locat
145. Menu Bar includes the Navigation Indicator buttons located buttons and menus within the Menu Bar Mr ih PVMAX 1 arm K Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY x s FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Beligium Tree O Telecommunication Infrastructure General Location q3 Belgium Name Items Property Pane Router 1 EY Station 4 M Switch 1 Telephone 20 Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category system Area View Event Log Pane PV4E Toolbar Figure 72 Maintenance Screen with Location Tree Setting up the Location Tree The Location Tree is divided into two sections folders These are m Location Locations buildings rooms etc are defined Items are then assigned to a specific physical location E No Location No Location is used to store a list of Items that are in the database inventory but are not yet assigned to a specific location The following section will guide you through the process of setting up the location tree as if it was for a company RiT Technologies Ltd 100 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The examples used are based on an example company whose enterprise is located in two buildings each with five floors The first floor in building A will be defined in detail It contains a reception area a single desk office a three desk office an open plan office with 10 desks and a communication room A CAD of this floor will be used howeve
146. N Port 10 onto oe Port 02 4 gt RMON Port 2 on Ui 2 te 2 RMON Port 9 on Ui 9 RMON Port 9 on Ui 0 KD Port 03 4p RMON Port 3 on Ui 3 we Port 04 4 gt RMON Port 4 on Ui 4 jP Port 05 4 gt RMON Port 5 on Ui 5 jip Port 06 4 gt RMON Port 6 on Ui 6 Port 07 4 gt RMON Port 7 on UI 7 oe Port 08 4 gt RMON Port 8 on Ui 8 te Port 09 to Port 10 CEE DE EE DE DE ee ee 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Delete Module Ignore Port Reject Result Figure 155 Edit Port Assignment Window Lab Switch gt To change port assignment Select a switch from the tree 2 Click Edit appearing below the switch properties frame The Add Edit Inventory Switch dialog appears 3 Click Assign The Edit Port Assignment dialog appears RiT Technologies Ltd 211 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FA Edit Port Assignment Webpage Dialog Dlink Switch Port Assign Inventory Switch Port Modules gt Name Detected Name Detected Index Slot Status gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 m i Modules WM Detected Name P LET Detected Port Module Slot 0 RMON Port 10 ont 10 RMON Port 9 on Ui 9 RMON Port 1 on Ui 1 RMON Port 2 on Ui 2 RMON Port 3 on Ui 3 RMON Port 4 on Ui 4 RMON Port 5 on UI 5 RMON Port 6 on Ui 6 RMON Port 7 on Ui 7 RMON Port 8 on Ui 8 Detected Index Interface Name Slot RMON Port 10 on l 0 RMON Port 9 on Ui 0 RMON Port 1 on Ui 0 RMON Port 2 on Ui 0 RMON Port 3 on Ui 0 RMON Port 4 on Ui 0 RMON
147. Na Location No Location Figure 331 Station Properties Showing Locate Button To Run the Device Locator Run the device locator when you are loOKing the specific physical location of a device in your network For example an IDS provided you with the Suspected IP address as an intruding device The Device Locator finds the exact physical location of this device 1 From the Maintenance module click on Tools and select Device Locator The Device Locator dialog appears 2 Enter the IP address of the unauthorized device To locate more than one IP address at a time click the Add button to include additional IP addresses to be searched RiT Technologies Ltd 465 PV4E User Manual V6 0 TOOLS SETTINGS REPORTS HELP Y Auto Detect El Device Locator Webpage Dialog J x PEX Import Import from a File Export to a File Locate Device Locator m IF Address CO S System Status Device Authorization Remove Figure 332 Device Locator 3 Click the Locate button to detect the location of the device s with the given IP addresses The system informs you that the task is being performed in the background and may take several seconds The time depends on the size of the network 4 When the search finishes the results of the search for the IP address appear in an Event Detail dialog In cases where a device is connected directly to a patch panel or there is no full link the device locat
148. Name ID Name gt P k0i Room 101 ort 01 Bac Outlet 1 Port 02 Back 02 Port 03 Back 03 Room 102 P 4 amp Floor 02 ort 04 Back 0 A Port 05 Back 05 a Floor 03 Port 06 Back 06 mal Building T 6 Port 07 Back 07 fF Building T C Port 08 Back 08 Event Category a m 6 2 Q YJ View link Webpage Dialog net NO Rack na i View link Panel 01 Port 01 l Port Naming select service y p E ae er r EN a dB ee Figure 214 Add Edit Inventory Item dialog 4 Select one of the options to continue Full Links These are P LET supported links The P LET technology detects the physical connectivity of active network elements The system detects all the ports of the Switches in the network and if the ports are connected to an Outlet or not Once an Outlet is discovered as being active information about Stations connected to the Outlet is also available The Outlets location is automatically assigned to the Station In order for you to benefit fully from all the PatchView for the Enterprise P LET features RiT recommends the following work flow with regard to the Outlets and Stations 1 On installation of PV4E run the LAN Mapper Stations and their related data are discovered by the LAN Mapper and are inserted into the PV4E database Define all the Switches in the network 3 Using the Edit Link Worksheet define a Full link for each Switch port in the network A Full link is a link from Outlet to Switch port
149. None Rack Equipment Shelf Shelf 0 5U Shelf01 U K London Al1 6th Floor CR 8E RackOl gt Rack 16 5 None Network Equipment Record Structure The record structure is as follows 1 Item Type Network Equipment RiT Technologies Ltd 244 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Functional Type Switch PBX Catalog Name Item Name up to 50 characters Location Full Path without slot no Parent Location Type Location Rack Slot No relevant only for items inside a Rack IP MAC Serial No up to 20 characters ee Se a N H e O Community Name an N Timeout a si Retries 14 Monitor Yes No All other information is derived from the catalog Example Network Equipment Switch WS C6506 Chassis Sw01 U K London Al1 p 6th Floor CR Rack01 Rack 15 10 100 40 10 00 05 2B 23 40 EF 23453070 public 250 1 Yes P Network Equipment Module Record Structure The record structure is as follows Item Type Network Equipment Module Container Functional Type Switch PBX Container Name Container Location Full Path without slot no Container Parent Location Type Location Rack Container Slot No relevant only for containers inside a Rack Catalog Name Item Name up to 50 characters Se SY Se eS YE Serial No up to 20 characters All other information is derived from the catalog Example Network Equipment Module Sw01 Switch U K London Al1 6th Floor CR RackOl Rack 15 U K London Al 6t
150. Order A Task Sorting Order option has also been added to the criteria with the Same options of the WO Tasks Report Work Order Tasks Detailed View General WO ID Engineer Task Type Task Due Date Task Sorting Order Location Steps Criteria All All All All All Task Due Date TaskStatus Figure 22 Work Order Report Setting RiT Technologies Ltd 34 PV4E User Manual V6 0 AAO Te ADOT OS SSO 9 Sain eater se ca Che chine Tach Ct al Dra TES Core ket nl Adenia mami Tasks WO 1 Tack o Teeccription Engineer Status edate Created Date Task Type Lotaboo A Location E ee E Teo Pare pl Cete O07 0S I21005 CONS Le Break link o Lysin Whe Location ciii Port 0b Aari Faal pl Port ZZ O s on 2 Deconnart Panel pl Camielbed CO yt 12 08 Gases Lae Break irk Tio Lasti ito Lbonahien 000 Port 25 From Harel pL Port J Figure 23 WO Report RiT Technologies Ltd 35 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 4 The Catalog Catalog Overview PV4E is designed specifically to manage your enterprise which is a complex system of networks and related entities This network is made up of Hardware Software and Connecting Components These are defined and stored in the Project database and are the logical representation of your entire enterprise The Catalog of PV4E is located in the PV4E Settings Module of the application Item Types Functional Types Classes and Items are defined in the Catalog
151. P LET Status Not Scanned P LET Supported Serial No Type 4 Room 201 No of Slots 2 Size U J 4 Room 205 Power W 0 Arm Side None Weight KG Location No Location f Demo2 EA Florence Spain F UK View Link Show Switch X USA Edit Link No Location E Panel 1 B Printer 1 Sara Cao Info Date Ti ime Event Code Event Category l a aaO aiins 09 10 2009 11 07 Work Order Task Created Work Order Station 4 09 10 2009 11 06 Ports Disconnected Manualy System 1 M _ Switch 2 eae 09 10 2009 11 06 Ports Connected Manualy System m 3 09 10 2009 09 43 Work Order Task Created Work Order Hie rey Delete Properties Duplicate Events Show CAD Refresh 2 The Switch Detection dialog is displayed Select the display you want for the scanning process result and click Yes bh e Fae e i A Switch Detection Webpage Dialog x p Switch detection scanning process was started Select the display for the detection scanning process result Display in the Event Log only O Display in the Event log and a Popup message Do not show this message during this PV4E login session The scanning results are displayed in the Event log Note You can now edit the port assignments of the switch See Port Assignment for more information RiT Technologies Ltd 218 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding a Router to Location Routers will be detected when P LET is run gt To add a Ro
152. Port 5 on Ui 0 RMON Port 6 on Ui 0 RMON Port 7 on Ui 0 RMON Port 8 on Ui 0 Delete Module Ignore Port 4 Click Add Module to display the Add Module dialog Click Delete Module to delete the selected module Click Reject Result to reject the search results from the P LET Once you reject the results the switch status goes back to not scanned or unassigned Manually Adding and Scanning a Switch When manually adding a switch to the inventory the real physical switch structure should be defined The offline switch is then scanned gt To manually add a switch to inventory 1 From the Location tab right click on the No Location node in the tree 2 Choose Add Network Equipment gt Switch gt Add Manually The Add Edit Inventory Switch dialog is displayed RiT Technologies Ltd 212 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add edit Inventory Switch Webpage Dialop General Moduhes Settings Notes Name Pr Functional Type I Class Catalog Name IP MAC Type No of Slots Size U Serial No Power W Arm Side io Weight KG Location Figure 156 Add Edit Inventory Switch 3 Type a name in the Name field for the switch you want to add 4 Choose the class name from the Class drop down menu RiT Technologies Ltd 213 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Inventory Switch Webpage Dialog x Modules VLAN Notes m Akatel Devices ries D Link No of Slots Fobteracwe Newire lt whi
153. Ports tab in the Maintenance gt Information Pane 3 Select the Port s that you would like to add to the Edit Link Worksheet 4 The Ml indicator shows the ports that are selected RiT Technologies Ltd 281 PV4E User Manual V6 0 5 Position the cursor over the Ell indicator of the selected port s and click on the item or selection Drag to the Edit Link Worksheet and drop in the required cell The ports of the item s will added to the Edit Link Worksheet r PY4E Windows Internet Explorer BCE PYMAX PY P LET Alarm K Refresh W Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLS vV SETTINGS Y REPORTS v HELP v A FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Connectors Room 100 a Front Back z Cabinet 1 3 amie 2 Service 5 ID Name ID Name 15 B gt E 5i Any Servii Port 01 Port 01 Back 01 Back 01 S Rack 1 Any Servii Port 02 Port 02 Back 02 Back 02 pees Any Servii Port 03 Port 03 Back 03 Back 03 ate te Any Servii Port 04 Port04 Back04 Back 04 E Any Servii Port 05 Port05S Back05 Back05 am Foor C2 Any Servic Port 06 Port06 Back06 Back 06 s ERA Any Servit Port 07 PortO BackO Back07 n Any Servi Port 08 Port 08 Back 08 Back 08 aonwonwntk WN 3 Edit Link Webpage Dialog E Fack 02 Panel 01 Port 027 F ack 03 Panel 01 Port 037 gd Auto Flip Bierce Figure 199 Inserting a Port in an Open Worksheet Moving Ports around the Work
154. R Mask in Mask in Darl in Darl in E caso1 EP Panel 01 Al Rack 1 amp Room 101 amp Room 102 i Floor 02 amp Room 200 M Rack 1 f Demo Rack 02 amp PLET BB Panel 01 Outlet aa be fale he che oh ok oh ob ob ob Panel 02 Sw El Edit Link Webpage Dialog X OER Back 01 Panel 01 Port 01 Auto Flip ia Figure 196 Edit Link Worksheet with Ports Opening Edit Link using the Edit Link Button gt To open the Edit Link Worksheet using the Edit Link Button 1 Open Maintenance gt Location or Topology 2 Position the cursor over the Edit Links button in the Toolbar and click A blank Edit Link Worksheet will open RiT Technologies Ltd 279 PV4E User Manual V6 0 7 P 4E Windows Internet Explorer Jaj x PYMAX py Alarm K Refresh WO Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLS v SETTINGS v REPORTS Y HELP v 4 6 FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Connectors Room 100 zl Cabinet 1 S caso BB Panel o1 A Rack 1 amp Room 101 Room 102 fs Floor 02 Room 200 A Rack 1 Front Back Service 5 ID Name ID Name Any Servii Port 01 Port 01 Back 01 Back 01 Any Servii Port 02 Port 02 Back 02 Back 02 Any Servii Port 03 Port 03 Back 03 Back 03 Any Servii Port 04 Port 04 Back 04 Back 04 Any Servii Port 05 Port 05 Back 05 Back 05 Any Servii Port 06 Port 06 Back 06 Back 06 Any Servii Port 07 Port 07 Back 07
155. RiT Technologies Ltd 375 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The Control Pad After the Perform button has been clicked the information is sent to the scanner The Control Pad which is connected to the scanner of that site indicates that a task has been sent to the scanners now do the following 1 The Reconfig On Pending LED blinks red 2 Simultaneously press the control buttons A and B to activate the automatic scan eds S 5 oo LED SCAN RECONFIG MANUAL OM PENDHING SCAN LED is blinking red Control buttons A and B Rit er CONTROL PAD Figure 291 Activating the Automatic Scan oh Ch ee D ee bbe GE TAH 1 The Feconbe Pending LED is red MOOULAR SCANNER CONTROL PAD RiT Technologies Ltd 376 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 The Reconfig On Pending LED changes to red na y LED SCAN RECONFIG MAMUAL Of PENDING H CG arcrvew CONTROL PAD Se oe RECOHFIG RECONFIG MANUAL PENDING OH SCAN RiT PATCHVIEW MODULAR SCANNER CONTROL PAD Figure 292 Control Pad 4 The LEDs on the Panels start to indicate the order of work to be carried out for this task RiT Technologies Ltd 377 PV4E User Manual V6 0 a PR p EE e Figure 293 Panel Note The LED will either flash to show which link is to be broken cable to be disconnected or remain lit to show which link is to be created Note If you are not immediately performing the task simult
156. Row C rae Device Information Name H1A DL567 Catalog Name HP ProLiant DL360 Size U 1 Power W 120 Rack Cabinet List Name rs 8 Power W Available Power Ww gt G 60 4700 80 C4 60 6000 3280 Display total oe Display total power Cabinet Rack space allocation for Cabinet Rack Display actual power usage Figure 252 Add to Location Rack Selection Tab RiT Technologies Ltd 339 PV4E User Manual V6 0 14 Select an alternative rack by clicking the arrow icon a from the Rack List and click OK You will be directed back to the main screen The selected alternative rack now appears in the Rack Name column e Add Equipment Webpage Dialog Add To Location USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 1 Row C Add Equipment Ee o CatalgName Sae Power W Rack CabnetNane o Atemative El so 12 Remove From List Reset Rack Cabinet Find Rack Cabinet Figure 253 Add to Location Add Equipment Tab If an item is added directly to a rack the Find Rack button is disabled 15 Click Next The following Add Operation List screen opens e Add Equipment Webpage Dialog T i Name a EOE Operation Operation Description H1AIDL567 W0 07 09 2009 00178 Add Station Add Station H1A DL567 to USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 1 Row C C H1A1IBM544 W0 07 09 2009 00178 Add Station Add Station H1A1IBM544 to USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 1 Row C Remove From List Modify Work Order RiT Technologies Ltd 340 PV4E Use
157. Scanner 01 Panela PMax Scanner Mi Panes Figure 75 Auto Naming Simulation Window Select and click on the Apply button to apply the Auto Naming of multiple floors or the Clear button if the list is incorrect To exit from this dialog without any changes click on the Close button The Auto Naming dialog will close returning to the Add Edit location dialog RiT Technologies Ltd 104 PV4E User Manual V6 0 ae es an x z qn peri A Add Edit Inventory Panel Webpage Dialog x Connectors Motes Name Functional Type Class Copper Catalog Name SMART CLASSm STP 24 scanner Name Size U Link Terminator d Location Spain Madrid Buikling A FHoor 1 Coomunication Re Figure 76 Add Edit Location dialog Add the Description optional Select the OK button or one of the other options to proceed Click on the Refresh button after the Batch Completed Successfully message appears in the Event Log Auto Naming Examples There are two template options available when using the Auto Naming function Template 1 duplicates the entities as is without modifying port names Template 2 duplicates the entities but gives you the option to rename ports gt Template 1 Basic Used for creating new items port names retain the default values 1 Stand on the location tree right click a panel and select Duplicate from the context menu RiT Technologies Ltd 105 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Location Topology Users
158. Setting Links and Viewing Links to Blades To view the entire connectivity of a chassis Right click a chassis and select the View Link menu item You will be able to view the connectivity for all the Blades within the selected chassis in the View Link pane In order to view the connectivity of a specific Blade select the Blades tab of a specific chassis Right click the relevant Blade and select the View Link menu item The connectivity of the selected Blade is displayed in the View Link pane If the Blade server has pass through Connectivity modules then you will also be able to see the links routed through the relevant connectivity module For enclosures with pass through connectivity module you can also view links for the connectivity modules Select the Module tab right click the relevant connectivity module and select the View Link menu item The connectivity of the selected Connectivity module is displayed in the View Link pane Note The above steps are also supported for viewing links of multiple Blades or Connectivity modules For more information about setting and viewing links please refer to the Creating and Editing Links chapter of this document g iew link Webpage Dialog F eee p F fm gp DC 1HIB PP52 DC 1H1CBLD SO Port 01 Port 01 r He DCIHIB PP52 DC 1H1ICBLD 50 Port 17 Port 01 Too 2 er CL ce Kt u g oa a rt LL i j j 1 B F IE B B F DC 1H1B PP52 DC 1HICBLD50 Port 02 Port 02
159. T lor Egi pmet sssi a AEE E aaa ASE OEE AS Aaaa aiia 29 COLE Red T E E E E E 31 Rack Presentation U Counting Order ssesssssssssssseseeeerrrsssssssssssseeererrerrsssssssssssesetterresosssssssssssssseeeeeeero 31 Enhanced Support of U Counting Ordetr ccc cc ccccccssssseececceeceeeeeaaaeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasaseesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 31 Edit Enk KONS ses cous deanesiecesiotencnphaneeuetisoteacterasentceuenseceba abate cenenvnetiranancinnueasectbaoaatweereatianectesceaeea a 32 Connecting HW Default Tab View 0 0 ccccccccssssssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaaaseesesseseseseeeeeeeees 32 S a E A E A E E AEA EAE A S 32 VVC TROIS o ne a E E E E E E E E E E 33 WOT ERTO aea E E E E E E E 33 AD E i AA E N EE ET E O A E T A E A 34 CHAPTER 4 THE CPt Greece ccaceerc ose seccnesavessvuievecevacensctuvisvnceusteuassuntoussaueds 36 CACAO Oy CE OW sassszescseseessusssseesusecussavanctevsvanevesduansueusssesusssiesvsse0sszsdsesssissseessasusausseveiesasasiserestesssesssewvausstesieessieess 36 Catalog WV MAW seeeciecass daiccvecieese EEEE nsec neers EE 36 Catalog TEMIS esesecesssevescvasesecevasevssevacesesevasevessaieussaserstceodenseusssstatcestensuseasssatseatetsssbasseatseodatauseassnsteuadetavstedarstcestetouse 37 ES ana EWC N A E E A A T E A E A EAT E I A E A A E castes 38 Fanc ona T 1G e E E E E 38 H E E E E a A E E E EAA E E dmeceacres 40 MEES an E PE E EAT E A TA T N E TE E E E E TEE T 40
160. This could be the Master Scanner or a Satellite Scanner There are different settings for the Control Pad that are set in Topology See Topology RiT Technologies Ltd 180 PV4E User Manual V6 0 To add a Control Pad to Location Select the room in the Location Tree where the Control Pad is to be assigned Right click the selected Room A pull down menu will appear Select Add PatchView Equipment and click on Control Pad The Add Edit Inventory Control Pad dialog box opens w Ne V A Add Edit Inventory PYMAX Control Pad Webpage Dialog OPOL Functional Type Class Catalog Name Loca bon Figure 137 Add Edit InventoryConrol Pad dialog 4 Type in the name of the Control The Auto Naming feature can be used See Auto Naming Feature Select the Class by clicking on the button optional Select the Catalog Name by clicking on the button Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Adding Connecting Hardware to Location This section explains how to connect hardware to a location Adding Outlets to Location In order to assign the outlets to the correct location it is advisable to have the list of outlets and their actual physical location gt To add an Outlet to the Location 1 Select and right click on the desired location in the Location Tree A pull down menu will appear 2 Select Add Connecting HW and click on Outlets The Add Edit Inventory Master dialog will open RiT Techno
161. User Manual uses Other as the first level location Add Location Add Country Add City Add Building Add Floor Add Room Add Cubicle Add Other Add Box Figure 82 The Location Pull Down Menu Window RiT Technologies Ltd 110 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The following are the default Location Types and their Icons I tem type Icon Country City Building Floor Room Cubical Other Note Additional Location Types can be added Adding Editing and Deleting a Location A Location can be added to the Location Tree and edited at any time These Locations can be deleted as long as no other Locations are listed under them in the tree and no Items have been placed in them By default when you add a location to the tree the new entry appears one hierarchical level lower than the level you selected The level you select appears in the Add Edit Location dialog as the Parent Location level For example if you define building 1 and you want to add floor locations you Should right click building 1 and then click New to add a floor under building 1 This process should be repeated for all the levels as you define the Location Tree When adding the first level location to the tree this becomes the parent location and all other locations listed below this are part of this branch of the tree It is therefore advisable to give the parent level the name of the company This facilitates easy ad
162. VCLVICW E E EAE ones EE A A NA A say A A T E E 276 Link Statis PNG CAU ON siis E 276 POLCE WW OF KS MC erge E E 277 Opening Edit Link from Location or Topology Tree ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeseaaaaeaasseeeesseeeeeeess 271 Open Edit Link from the pull down menu esesessssssssssesseeerrrrssssssssssssserereerrereessssssssssssseeeterressssssseees 271 Open Edit Link from the Ports Tab cccccccsssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeasessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeesaasaasenseseeeeeeeess 278 Opening Edit Link using the Edit Link Button cc ccccsssseeeeecececeeceeeeaseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseesaaaaaaseeeeeeeess 279 Resizing the Edit Link Worksheet cc ccccccccscccssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaasaeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 280 Adding Items or Ports to an Open worksheet ccccccseeeccececceeeeeeaaseesssseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseasaaeassseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 281 Moving Ports around the Worksheet cccccccccssssssssssseeeececeeeeeeeeeaaaeassaesesseseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaasaesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 282 Dragging and dropping selected ports within the Worksheet cccccccccccecceeceeeaeeeesseseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneaas 282 Cutting copying and pasting selected ports within the Worksheet cccccceceeeeeeceeeeeeseseseeseeseeeeeeeeees 283 Auto or Manual Flipping of LAnkS ssc ssscasacsnnecadensntooneoneiaia vesnawsanensileaanonsbeqwansksuesnvanaseghewsatonani
163. Wednesday Figure 334 Edit Secure Link Scheduler Options 1 Selecting the Enable Secure Link Scheduler checkbox allows you to change the default schedule interval If this checkbox is not selected the application automatically checks secure link end devices every five minutes 2 You can set the recurrence pattern at a certain time every day each day of the week or on a selected day basis 3 Click OK Defining Permissions The IT Manager uses Permission Settings to define the parameters for specific groups who have access to PV4E In this process individual users are assigned to a group s inheriting the parameters set for those groups For example the Admin group will have access rights to all system resources but another group will have read only rights and are not authorized to make changes to the system The following permissions are defined a Adding and defining New Groups E Adding and defining New Users i Assigning a Group to a User D Assigning a User to a Group The Permissions Window It is in the permissions window that the groups and users are added and defined Three groups are installed by the system These are m Admin Administrator group RiT Technologies Ltd 473 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The Admin group has full access to the system Read Only group The Read Only group has only read only access m Report Center group Members of this group has access to the report center module
164. When changing the settings please pay attention to the following m If you set any of the thresholds to zero once you exit the edit mode the application will display Never m If you set Decomissioned to zero the application will never decomission any item E Each threshold refers to the time it takes to exceed the previous version For example in the above screen it takes 90 days to shift from Active to Idle and one day to shift from Idle to Dormant No auto decomisioning will take place in this example 5 Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save your changes and close the window gt To set the thresholds for a specific location do the following 1 Select your target location 2 Select the Inactive Device tab 3 Click Edit The following screen appears RiT Technologies Ltd 421 PV4E User Manual V6 0 el Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog Bldg A General Inactive Device Environmental i Override system defaults LLELLETEL Idle After Day s Dormant After Day s Decommissioned After Day s i k Auto MA TIM J 4 Check the check box marked Override system defaults to allow a different setting than that of the system s settings Set the relevant thresholds Click Apply to save your changes or OK to save your changes and close the window Events Decommissioned Devices When the status of a device is changed to Dormant Decommissioned an event is fired in PV4E The event specifi
165. YC Lh 1 Alone 11H Total Records 14 SA n SlotNo a Module Name Catalog Name Status 00 15 E9 B1 D8 AD M 0 Unknown module 10 ports Online 3 Select the appropriate switch from the list and click OK A dialog appears notifying you that the operation may take some time Note If the selected switch does not match the switch you want to insert an error message will appear RiT Technologies Ltd 403 ae ET PV4E User Manual V6 0 P 4E Windows Internet Explorer Alarm K Refresh KOJ Logout Administrator MAITEEN WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTS Y Puren View FOR THE Enterprise Location je Insert and copy structure Webpage Dialog PatchView Topology 10 100 0 0 Name Location Class i Indude Sub Location Catalog Name i IP Address Switch Name a Catalog Name IP Address mis Lest Pori UECI I emit a alen SALM D 4 Windows Internet Explorer 2 j This operation may take several minutes to complete Press OK to continue or Cancel to abort this operation cne Slot No a Module Name Catalog Name Status 00 15 E9 B1 D8 AD M 0 Unknown module 10 ports Online O T 4 Click OK to continue The switch is inserted into the inventory with the Same structure as the selected switch RiT Technologies Ltd 404 PV4E User Manual V6 0 f gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer x Refresh W Logout Admini
166. a ee et FFFTFTFTTTFTFTIFTFTTTTIET za The left hand side of the screen is the Catalog Bays Port Use the drop down menu to select the port number This sets the port for each bay that is going to be connected to the connectivity module on the right hand side The right hand side is the Catalog Connectivity Modules Ports The drop down list specifies the connectivity module that is going to be connected to all the ports on the left hand side of the screen An explanation for the arrows between the two screens is as follows Associates all ports to a the selected connectivity Associates selected ports to select ports hold the Ctrl key and select with mouse gt gt Disassaciates all ports to a the selected connectivity Disassociates selected ports to select ports hold the Ctrl key and select with Mouse At the end of this process you should have documented the chassis internal wired connections between the connectivity modules and the bays The following screen illustrates the relations between one connectivity module and the bays in the enclosure RiT Technologies Ltd 455 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gl Edit Port Assignment Webpage Dialog f l x Bay Ports Assignment Port Assign Catalog Bays Ports Catalog Connectivity Module Ports Selected Bays Port Port 01 x Modules HP Ethernet Pass Through Module Slot 1 v DE Port Name i Assigned Port Module Slot No BB Port Index Back Port Front Port Module Slot
167. able Test Results In order to display the port s cable test results PV4E performs the following two tasks 1 Searches for the directory that contains the files with the cable test results 2 Handles the results of the search Port Link Cable Test Results Search Order When you chose to view a port s link cable test result PV4E searches for the result files in a deterministic order The following algorithm is used to find the matching link result file s 1 Searches for files on the directory of the selected port 2 If no files are found step 1 searches for files on the directory of the counter side port of the link 3 The system returns the first directory that contains files if any files were found RiT Technologies Ltd 263 PV4E User Manual V6 0 For example if you have the following link il F 8 EEn F F Pee Bae H F F fea B ie F4 TESTLAB SW Panel 02 Panel 02 Panel 01 Panel 01 Outlet 201 02 Port 17 Port 01 Port 07 Port 23 Port O1 And you wish to view Panel 02 Port 01 link cable test result PV4E first searches for the result files in the directory Panel 02 Port 01 Link Step 1 lf there are no results it searches for files in Panel 01 Port 07 Link Step 2 m F B Ege afr tee AA pee e pee B B gt F4 TESTLAB SW Panel 02 Panel 02 Panel 01 Panel 01 Outlet 201 02 Port 17 Port 01 Port 07 Port 23 Port 01 If you wish to view TESTLAB SWITCH Port 02 link
168. ables Window opens 7 Select the Service tab 8 Select the Service to be edited 9 Click the Edit button 10 Edit the Name and or Description Click OK to save changes To delete a Service 11 From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Tables Window opens 12 Select the Service tab 13 Select the Service to be deleted 14 Click the Delete button A confirmation message opens Click the OK button to confirm RiT Technologies Ltd 496 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Work Order ID Work Order IDs can be allocated automatically by the system according to a pre defined template or given manually by the user when creating the work order To set Work Order ID definition mode L5 16 17 18 19 20 21 From Settings choose Work Order from the drop down menu The Message Filtering Window opens Click the Edit button The Add Edit Work Order dialog opens Under Work Order ID assignment click Manual Entry to indicate that all work order IDs are to be defined manually Click Automatic Numbering to have the system automatically assign a work order ID In this case define the template you want to use for automatic work order IDs In the Template field type the text you want to include in the work order name For example you may want to use W O ID The template must include ID and Date This is the parameter that designates a unique work order ID In the
169. add a new item type to the pass through class do the following 1 Go to the main Settings tab The Catalog tree is displayed RiT Technologies Ltd 445 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer i l Alarm x Refresh Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY b FOR THE Enterprise Catalog Vendor Catalog 4 Vendor Telecommunication Infrastructure e Connector Jl Rack Equipment Software Adapter Terminal Equipment Network Equipment PatchView Equipment J Connecting HW fF Outlet 54 E Panel 115 Pass Through 2 Bm Copper 1 Add Class HP Ethernet F ne _ 43 Data Center Equipment i Info Date Time Fig 2 Expand the Connection HW branch until you arrive at Pass through 3 Stand on Pass through right click and select Add Item from the context menu 4 The following Add Edit Catalog Pass Through screen opens e Add Edit Catalog Pass Through Webpagi J x General Notes Name Functional Type Class choice Description Vendor Name choice Vendor Part Na Image Name Default Connecting Hardware 5 Enter the following information in the General tab RiT Technologies Ltd 446 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Name Enter new item name Pass through is entered by default and cannot be Functional Type changed From the drop down menu select the class aes either Copper of fiber optic Description Ent
170. aded communication centers where the front of the wiring rack is a tangled web of patch cord chaos PV4E also provides fully accurate and comprehensive documentation of all network infrastructure components as well as advanced detection and alert capabilities to allow the user full control over the environment A full link is defined as one created between the station and switch with a series of connections These connections are either dynamic or static Dynamic Connection A dynamic connection refers to a movable connection The Discovery Module detects the devices automatically while PV4E monitors the status of the dynamic or on line links between the Patch Panels in real time E Static Connection A static connection is one that is usually fixed and connected to the back of the equipment or device As it is seldom changed it is referred to as a Static or off line connection Station Outlet _ k e __ Dynamic Static se aa Static Switch Link Link Dynamic Link Figure 1 Example of a Full Link PatchView Features m Checks patch cable connections Provides all port connectivity information No need to manually trace wires and connections Real time traps report any configuration change and discrepancies Most wiring changes are made as a result of changes in patch cord RiT Technologies Ltd 8 PV4E User Manual V6 0 interconnections on the patch panel PatchView uses SNMP traps to immediately report
171. after the validation has ended another user or the Same one modifies an item in the PV4E system that conflicts with the data being imported the problematic item is ignored and the conflict is written to the log Process Behavior E The import process is inserted to the EXP file data in the PV4E production database m If the same inventory item same name and catalog type is found both in the EXP file and in the database at the same location the Import process ignores the item m If the same catalog item same name functional type and class is found both in the EXP file and in the database the Import process will compare the two items properties If the items are the same the Import process will skip to the next item in the file If the items are different an error message appears and the entire import process is aborted RiT Technologies Ltd 241 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A duplicate catalog item with identical properties both in the file and the database is not considered a conflict EXP File Validity Tests Version Check The PV4E version that exported the data must be identical to the PV4E version that imports the data Manual Editing of exp File The exp file must not be edited manually since it is generated by PV4E Catalog Item Line Validity Test Catalog items must either be new or identical to the correlating item Same name functional type and class in the PV4E production database General A conflict i
172. ager E Room 105 E sharonk Software Upgrade E 7 n se eee Metric Specifications ants la Room 103 Figure 225 System Tables Screen The System Tables screen is displayed Click the Service tab system Tables Loon Image WO Task Location a ie EE ae fee Name _ Description Any Service p Red Blue Figure 226 Adding a Service Screen 2 Click Add The Add Service screen is displayed RiT Technologies Ltd 311 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FA add Service Webpage Dialog Name Description Figure 227 Add Service Screen Type a name in the Name field that defines the Service type and a description in the Description field to describe the Service type Click Apply Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box The new service is added to the list under the Service tab Note The Any Service and the No Service are out of the box services and can not be modified Defining Service for Catalog Items The Catalog items for which a Service can be defined are Cable Terminal equipment Network equipment Connecting hardware For example If you want to define a service for a default station after it has been defined in the system do the following 1 Select Settings gt Catalog RiT Technologies Ltd 312 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 P 4E Windows Internet Explorer PVMAX K Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY h FOR THE Enterpr
173. ajor screen and views Location Tab The Location tab in the Work Order screen is where the inventory is viewed and the different provisioning requests are generated The buttons on the toolbar are grey for inactive orange for active RiT Technologies Ltd 306 PV4E User Manual V6 0 MAINTENANCE TOOLS SETTINGS REPORTS HELP Y Work Order UK m Tree Single View Double View General Content Inactive Device Environmental DLowation TEA E wat UK Lo caton e ab Hi Bristol E USA os E i Hi London No Location H HE Panel 6 Location H Station 9 tree Figure 221 Work Order Screen Location Tab Location Tree The system Tree in the Location tab of the Work Order screen provides a graphic representation of the hierarchy of the database It has been designed to facilitate easy navigation through different levels Each device type has its own distinctive icon for easy recognition The following table describes how the mouse icon changes during a drag and drop move Icon Description PR Normal mouse icon used to select the items to be moved OQ When the items can not be dropped at the selected location in the tree When the item can be dropped to its new location in the tree Note An item cannot be moved to No Location Multiple Selections More than one item can be selected and moved To multi select a group hold down the Alt key and select using the mouse To select several ite
174. al V6 0 FY Add Edit Catalog Panel Webpage Dialog Keystone Type 16 STP Ports Motes Keystone Type 16 STP Copper Description Size U PY Supported Vendor Name choice Vendor Part No R373507X Image Name Default Connecting Hardware Figure 65 Add Edit Catalog Panel dialog Enter the relevant information 4 To assign a new icon please see Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item Click on the Ports tab to define the front and back Ports for the specific hardware device Note Ports for RiT Connecting Hardware items are included in the database and appear automatically for a selected item RiT Technologies Ltd 89 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Keystone Type 16 STP General Ports Back B ee ee T T a ET E Ta a a eT Ee aie L Service Name Connector Name Connector _ _ Port 01 Keystone Back 01 Termination Bl Port 02 Keystone Back 02 Termination Bl Port 03 Keystone Back 03 Termination Bl Remove select service Port Naming Figure 66 Add Edit Catalog Panel Ports tab 6 Type in the name and select one of the options available in the Connector window by clicking on the 7 button Click on the Add button to insert more ports if required 8 To remove a port click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 9 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding a P
175. ame of the consolidated device will be hostnamel Primary Discrepancies A discrepancy normally occurs when a NIC does not fall into single predefined prefix suffix criteria In case of discrepancy the related NICs will not be consolidated and user intervention is required See the following example Example Consider a scenario where the Discovery Module detects three NIC cards 1 hostnamel 2 hostnamel Secondary 3 hostnamel RiT com The following table contains two examples of ranks Suffix When running the Discovery Module using the result for the third NIC card the results can be one of the following Hostnamel or hostnamel Secondary The result causes discrepancies in the consolidation process of the third NIC Any discrepancy will be logged into the application s log and will require user intervention i e manual consolidation Manual Mode In certain scenarios the automatic NIC consolidation will not be applicable This is typically when a NIC of specific device does not fall into the predefined textual criteria In these instances you will be able to manually select several terminal equipment devices and merge them into one Follow steps explain how to consolidate devices manually m Select the candidate devices for consolidation from the location tree multi selection is done by holding down the Ctrl button and left clicking the hostname Note The selected devices must reside in the same location and mus
176. and is acknowledged by the controller 8 output ports These ports activate any device which meets the specifications The Rack Indicator can be connected and controlled from this port A port output is 12 volts limitation of 60 m Amp Supported Devices General Door The PVMax Security Controller has the ability to send a command to open or close a door and has the ability to receive an indicator from the door as the door s circuit opens or closes Sensor The PVMax Security Controller has the ability to receive an indication from the device as the device s circuit opens or closes Active Device PVMax Security Controller has the ability to send a command to open or close the devices circuit The PVMax Security Controller as the rest of the PVMax system uses secure Communication in order to avoid unauthorized access The PVMax Security Controller is 1U in height The PVMax Security Controller has a built in LED matrix which provides a real time indication of the ports activity PVMax Indicator Controller The PVMax Indicator Controller is a subset of the PVMax Security Controller and works independently when connected to a PVMax Master Expander or Master Expander It is used solely to activate the Rack Indicators The Indicator Controller supports up to 8 Rack Indicators RiT Technologies Ltd 154 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Catalog The following Controller functional types have been added to the PatchView
177. and password in IIS FTP E Setup the FTP username and password in PV4E E Download the software RiT Technologies Ltd 498 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Setting up the Software Upgrade To set up the Software Upgrade 1 From the Settings menu in the top navigation bar select Software Upgrade The FTP setting for software download to PVMax devices window opens FTP setting for software download to PVMAX devices User Name Anonymous Password tE G Edit Software Download Settings Webpage Dialog FTP setting for software download to PVMAX devices ier User Name Anonymous Password 22545 909 Confirm Password 555565606 E Change password Figure 356 FTP Setting for software download to PVMax devices window 2 Click the Edit button The Edit Software Upgrade Settings dialog opens 3 Define the User Name Ensure the User Name and Password are exactly the same as the settings made when defining the FTP settings previously Check the Change Password box A confirmation message opens Click the OK button to confirm Enter the new password in the Password and Confirm Password fields Click the OK button a a na RiT Technologies Ltd 499 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Downloading the Software To download software 1 Click the Maintenance button in the top navigation bar The Location Tree appears 2 Click the Topology tab The PVMax Topology Tree appears 3 Right click on PVMax Topology in the tr
178. anel to the Catalog Please refer to Chapter 10 Blade Servers Adding Datacenter Equipment to the Catalog Datacenter equipment refers to such items as environmental sensors controllers etc A basic list of Datacenter Equipment has been included in the database and additional items can be added to the Catalog This type currently has single functional type which is Environmental Control RiT Technologies Ltd 90 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding an Environmental Control to the Catalog An Environmental Control is a hub which aggregates information from multiple environmental sensors Additional Environmental Controls can be added to the database gt To add an Environmental Control to the Catalog 1 In the Catalog tree right click on an Environmental control 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Outlet dialog box opens YJ Add Edit Catalog Environmental Control Webpage Dialog Notes Functional Type Class Description Size U gt Power Ww No of Digital Sensors No of Analog Sensors No of Modbus Sensors URL choice Default Environmental Control Equipment Figure 67 Add Edit Catalog Outlet dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 5 Click on the Ports tab to insert the Ports for the environmental control RiT Technologies Ltd 91 PV4E User Manual V6 0 i Add Edit C
179. aneously press the control buttons A and B to return the status to pending The Reconfig On Pending LED blinks red again Either connect or disconnect the cable from the first port 6 The LED of the second port will be lit Either connect or disconnect the cable from this port The process will continue for all the links in that particular task When this is complete the scanner will send the notification to the Work Order 9 The status of the task changes to complete Location W0O 07 09 2009 00005 All General Operations Tasks S Sdi edn a p oe 4 Desaipton Operation Status Name a Status Due Date a Connect Panel Panel 01 P Completed WO 06 08 2009 00001 Created 08 06 2009 Connect Panel Panel 01 P Completed WO0 07 09 2009 00003 Created 09 07 2009 Connect Panel Panel 01 P Completed WO 07 09 2009 00004 Created 09 07 2009 gt WO 07 09 2009 00005 Completed 09 07 2009 Status v Perform Edit Work Order Figure 294 Updated Task Status Closing a Work Order A Work Order can be closed only when all tasks have been completed or cancelled RiT Technologies Ltd 378 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To close a Work Order 1 Open the Work Order Module 2 Select the Work Order 3 Check all tasks to make sure that they have been properly completed 4 Click Edit Work Order button to open the Work Order dialog 5 Select the Close checkbox 6 Under Closed the name of the person who completed the Work O
180. anging a User Password Deleting a Group or User When you delete a group any users assigned to that group are automatically disconnected from that group but still appear as users in the system If you delete a user the user is removed from the group and deleted from the database To delete a Group or User 1 Select the Groups or User tab 2 Select the Group or User to be deleted 3 Click the Delete button 4 A confirmation message opens Click the OK button to confirm Permissions Administrator Role Every user belonging to the Administrator group is permitted to add new users and to view and edit the system permissions for all users including m Setting user passwords RiT Technologies Ltd 479 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Viewing and modifying user profiles Adding and deleting users Password Settings Password modification is enabled in Edit mode A Change Password at next login check box has been added By default the box is checked for new users and whenever the Administrator changes a user s password When logging in for the first time after setting this option a message box notifying the user that the password has expired is displayed and enables the user to enter a new password An additional edit box to confirm the password has also been added to V5 0 Asterisks are presented for every entered character and the password is sent encrypted to the server The email settings have been removed to a new
181. anual V6 0 Topology Users nication Infrastructure City Towers Cl ge Floor 01 H a Room 101 Reception f Floor 02 El E Cabinet 1 ag Rako m a9 Fogga J Fo Show I Mee Add Rack Equipment JQ Belgium Add Terminal Equipment 5 fl Demo 48 Comm Room Seane Add PatchView Equipment Add Network Equipment E Pe Add Connecting HW Add Data Center Equipment Master Expander Local Scanner Duplicate ame Edit BME Delete Figure 113 Adding a Master to Location PVMAX Scanner PVMAX Controller 3 Select Add PatchView Equipment and click Master The Add Edit Inventory Master dialog will open a T s Gl Add Edit Inventory Master Webpage Dialog General Modules Devices Hotes Name Functonal Type Serial No Type Size U Power W Location Demo Comm Room Demo Rack RiT Technologies Ltd 145 PV4E User Manual V6 0 SS E Type in the name of the Master The Auto Naming feature can be used See Auto Naming Feature Select the Class by clicking on the button optional Select the Catalog Name by clicking on the button Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Enter the IP address if known RiT Technologies Ltd 146 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note The Ports will be filled in by the system The Panels are added automatically when they are assigned to the scanner It is advisable to leave the default Settings The MAC ad
182. any wiring changes to PV4E m Wiring Rack reconfiguration A link task is defined in PV4E and sent to the scanners via the SNMP agent When the person performing the task on site is ready the LEDs on the Patch Panels guide the user through the task m The PVMax system is made up of the following components PVMax Masters PVMax Expanders PVMax Master Expanders PVMax Scanner PVMax Local Scanner PVMax Security Controller PVMax Indicator Controller PVMax Splitters SMART Patch Panels SMART Patch Cords Web based Management System PV4E is a state of the art web based physical layer management system The system is accessed through a web browser and facilitates easy access to all information including the ability to monitor and maintain the system from a remote location This facility provides real time end to end information whereby the entire network can be monitored and maintained The network administrator is provided with real time network visibility of the physical layer including a combined view of the horizontal and vertical cabling Subsystems As PV4E is Web based the only required installation is on the server side Asset Management PV4E utilizes a comprehensive well structured Catalog to document and manage all aspects of the network inventory Profiles of each network component such as Stations PatchView Components and active LAN Equipment are available Detailed information such as Vendor informa
183. aps the different devices it finds to their actual physical locations and updates the PV4E inventory accordingly This provides a complete description of the end to end connectivity of all devices in the network After the Discovery Module has finished its initial run verify the results by checking the event log and looking for Unmanaged Devices These devices are a list of devices found that could not be assigned for various reasons Also look for each No Location in the list which indicates that a device may have been disconnected or shut down m Finish the System Setup You can define various system settings Chapter 13 PV4E System Settings on page 471 These include permissions event notifications message filtering system tables adding and deleting icons adding and deleting Work Order task types adding and deleting location category type Work Order ID names and other options Congratulations You have now finished the initial work required to setup up PV4E and define the connectivity of your system m System Maintenance After the PV4E system is initially defined any changes and modifications are part of regular system maintenance The regular maintenance Is mostly done through Work Orders Chapter 8 Work Order and Managing Links on page 355 where you make any desired moves additions or changes MACs to items in the network The change is implemented as a Work Order that automatically updates the system when it is completed
184. are three ways to define a new switch 1 Detect Automatic switch detection by the default switch driver and automatic insertion of the switch to the inventory 2 Add Manually Predefining the switch in the inventory when the PV4E system is offline and scanning the switch later when the PV4E system RiT Technologies Ltd 204 PV4E User Manual V6 0 is online Inventoryswitch ports and P LET detected switch ports may be assigned to each other randomly not necessarily according to the real switch modules structure 3 Scan by LAN Mapper Detects all existing switches and automatically inserts them into the inventory See Auto Detect for more information In most cases only the relevant information about the respective switch required for the PV4E activity will be presented It is possible to manually update the switch inventory item according to the real switch structure Automatically Detecting a Switch gt To detect a new switch 1 From the Location tab find the switch you would like to add in the location tree and right click on the No Location node 2 Choose Add Network Equipment gt Switch gt Auto Detect The Switch Detection dialog is displayed E Switch Detection Webpage Dialog General IP Address SNMP Settings Version Timeout ms Retnes Monitor Traps Figure 149 Switch Detection box General Tab 3 Enter the IP Address of the switch in the IP Address field and click Detect to start t
185. ase gt To Delete a Multiple Selection of Locations Deletion of Multiple Locations or Items can only be made if they are in the same branch of the hierarchical tree A selection of items to be deleted can be made in two ways using either the lt Alt gt or the lt Ctrl gt Keys The lt Alt gt key is used when the locations items to be deleted are in a consecutive list The lt Ctrl gt key when the locations items to be deleted are not directly under one another 1 In the Location tree locate and select the first Location that you want to delete in a list 2 Hold down either the lt Alt gt or the lt Ctrl gt button on your keyboard and make the selection The Delete command can be accessed in two ways 1 Right click on the selection and select the Delete function from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Delete button in the Location Toolbar A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion 3 Click either the OK or the Cancel button to proceed The selected Classes will be deleted from the Location tree and from the database RiT Technologies Ltd 116 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding a Company to the Location Tree It is possible to add as many companies as required to run your enterprise Tip It is advisable to start with the Company Name as the first level in the hierarchical tree even if the enterprise is not a data center as it is not possible to add it to this specific branch of the tree at a late
186. atalog Environmental Control Webpage Dialog General Connector choice Figure 68 Add Edit Catalog Environmental control Ports tab 10 Type in the name and select one of the options available in the Connector window by clicking on the 7 button 11 Click on the Add button to insert more ports if required 12 To remove a port click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 13 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Using Icons PV4E assigns each Catalog Item type a default icon in order to facilitate item identification When you create classes for an Item type these classes have the assigned icon When you add an item to the Catalog it also inherits the default icon You can change the default icons for each Item type class or Inventory item These icons cannot be deleted from the database PV4E allows you to import additional gif files to use as icons RiT Technologies Ltd 92 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Assigning I cons to a Catalog Item or Class gt To assign or change an icon In this example a Module has been added to the Item Type Switches in the catalog The system has allocated the Switch Icon which needs to be changed 1 In the Catalog tree right click on the selected class or item 2 Click the Edit function in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Switch dialog opens A Add Edit Catalog Switch Webpage
187. ate Time Event Code Event Category 09 09 2009 12 55 User Logged In License Figure 193 Working on line with PVMax The PVMax Indicator button is red indicating that PVMax is off line 1 Select the PVMax Topology folder in the Topology Tree 2 The Information pane opens with the Offline Mode checked 3 Uncheck the off line box 4 Click on the OK button The PVMax Indicator button will now be green er gt To work on line with PVMax RiT Technologies Ltd 274 PV4E User Manual V6 0 AY PV4E Microsoft Internet Explorer PYMAX PY Alarm K Refresh Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELP Y FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users PVMAX Topology PatchView O Subnet General C PY Topology Mode PYMAX Topology Li E Offine Physical Logical Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category amp 09 09 2009 12 55 User Logged In License Figure 194 Working on Line with PVMax The PVMax Indicator button is red indicating that PVMax is off line Select the PVMax Topology folder in the Topology Tree The Information pane opens with the Offline Mode checked Uncheck the off line box Click on the OK button The PVMax Indicator button will now be green PYMAX YS a a RiT Technologies Ltd 275 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Secure Links Overview Links can be defined as Secure Links Secure links allow you to define one or more vital links in the organization PV4E closely monitors
188. ation tree It is this information that is referenced each time an item is assigned to a location When an Item is deleted from the Location tree the catalog item it was based on is not deleted from the Catalog Database Items need to be assigned to a location This is done in the Location Tree Each item that is assigned to a location will be given a unique name or ID The Location Tree is divided into two branches sections E Location In Location Items are assigned directly to their specific location E No Location The No Location branch section can be used to assign Items that are part of the company stock or inventory These items can be assigned to a specific Location at any stage PV4E allows the user to name items in a variety of ways See Auto Naming Feature The Auto Naming feature allows you to name up to 1000 items at a time giving each a unique name ID Through the Location Tree you can assign existing Items that have been defined in the Catalog It is possible to delete an item that has been assigned to a Location however the actual Item will not be deleted in the Catalog New Catalog Items can be added directly through the Location tree The dialog both that will be accessed is the same as that used when adding or editing Items in the Catalog RiT Technologies Ltd 127 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note You can assign a location to any Item except Cables and Users Items can be moved from one location to anothe
189. ature can be used See Auto Naming Feature Select the Class by clicking on the button optional Select the Catalog Name by clicking on the button Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Se ee Enter the Serial No Note The Type and Size U fields will be filled in automatically when the Catalog Name is selected 9 Click OK to proceed Adding a Master Expander to Location gt To add a Master Expander to Location 1 Select the Rack in the Location Tree where the Master Expander is to be assigned 2 Right click on the selected Rack A drop down list appears 3 Select Add PatchView Equipment and click Master Expander The Add Edit Inventory Master Expander dialog will open RiT Technologies Ltd 148 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Ga Add Edit Inventory Master Expander Webpage Dialog EA Bam Devices No of downlinks Power W 0 Amber Inc Belgium Brussels City Towers Floor 03 Figure 117 Add Edit InventoryMaster Expander dialog 4 Type in the name of the Master Expander The Auto Naming feature can be used See Auto Naming Feature Select the Class by clicking on the button optional Select the Catalog Name by clicking on the button Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Enter the IP address if known Se os eS Enter the Serial No Note The Type and Size U fields will be filled in automatically when the Catalog Name is selec
190. ay specified RiT Technologies Ltd 390 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Edit Scheduler Webpage Dialog 4 Enable LAN Mapper Scheduler 01 01 2001 At v Next Run On Recurrence Pattern Repeat Every On gs Sunday en E E Figure 304 Edit Scheduler dialog 10 If you selected the Repeat method as Once the following Scheduler window appears allowing you to insert only the start date RiT Technologies Ltd 391 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E Edit Scheduler Webpage Dialog LAN Mapper w Enable LAN Mapper Scheduler Start Date 010i 2001 At Repeat Method Once Figure 305 Edit Scheduler dialog Repeat Once 11 Click Apply The Scheduler Settings are defined 12 The LAN Mapper will run on the date scheduled LAN Mapper Scheduled Scan LAN Mapper will scan the network according to the scheduler Once LAN Mapper scan is completed it places each detected device under its own Subnet Note If the first LAN Mapper scan has been activated via the Scheduler reset it now to Use Current Topology Topology Viewing the Subnets After the LAN Mapper has run either through the scheduler or manually LAN Mapper places all the discovered subnets in the Topology Tree Some of the subnets will be marked with check marks and others with x s The checkmarks indicate that the subnet was accessible for scanning and was successfully scanned RiT Technologies Ltd 392 PV4E User Manual
191. be replaced by a Settings Change password option When selected a dialog box with the following parameters appears E Current password E New Password E Confirm Password Asterisks are presented for every entered character and the password is sent encrypted to the server Upon a successful password modification the following message will appear Password was successfully updated All the parameters defined by the Administrator in the Administrator Role section will also be effective for the new password set by the user RiT Technologies Ltd 481 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Event Notification The Event Notification Setting controls which events are sent to users via email or SMS You can select the events you want to send Note All events are logged in the event log file and can be retrieved at any time Setting up the Email Server This one time procedure defines the email server for event notification To Set Up the Email Server 1 From Settings select Mail Configuration from the drop down list The Notification Window opens Notification Email From Subject Message PatchView for the Enterprise Message IP Address Port Figure 341 Mail Configuration Window 2 Click the Edit button The Edit Notification Setting dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 482 PV4E User Manual V6 0 r d Edit Notification Setting Webpage Dialog Email From Subject Message PatchView for the Enterprise Message
192. been changed and the port reserved Click Finish Swap Functionality Allows you to generate a Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for performing a swap x to y y to x Items can be from the same or different location gt To Swap items perform the following Note Selecting more or less than two items disables the swap option RiT Technologies Ltd 344 PV4E User Manual V6 0 1 From the Work Order screen gt Location tab gt Location tree gt select the items to swap Hold down the Ctrl key and select two items with the mouse Select Swap from the context menu gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer MAINTENANCE Work Order 7 USA Atlanta Bldg A l Floor 1 ap Floor 2 im CR2 amp Room 200 f Room 201 J f Outlet 1 Station 1 oy i Room 202 J ff Outlet 2 f Room 205 Room 205 Room 210 TOOLSY SETTINGSY Single View Double View a Floor 3 Add request demonstrations Bldg B NYC 7 No Location D0 g t ren Alarm K REPORTSY JasonJ General Functional Type Class Catalog Name Status CPU Monitor Arm Side Adapters Software Station Default Station Default Station Manual RAM Power W Weight KG No of Slots Serial No Location Events Info 33933339 Date Time Event Code 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Completed Successfully 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Process Started 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Completed Successfully 07 09 2009 08
193. by the technician or technician PatchView depending on the task will change the status automatically When the status of each task in the Work Order is changed to Completed the status of the Work Order changes automatically to Completed and may then be closed by the manager A task can be cancelled prior to implementation There are two main types of tasks These are either Link Tasks or additional tasks regarding the actual installation of either the hardware or software of the network These tasks are Task Function Link Used to create new links Either Static or Dynamic Break Link Used to break existing links Either Static or Dynamic Install These tasks deal with other network maintenance tasks such as NEMON e Installing network cabling system Relocate e Installing outlets and hardware e Removing or relocating equipment Change Move Used to move devices between locations Reserved for Used for resources reservation until the work order is Device Resources completed Other User can add tasks through the system table dialog Creating a Work Order task is done in two steps When the Work Order Task opens it opens in the general tab Basic information is filled in including the tasks that are not link related Only link related tasks are inserted into the Links Worksheet with specific instructions Adding a Link Break Link Task to a Work Order 1 In the Work Order Pane select the Work Order that the tasks are t
194. cable tests result PV4E first searches for the result files in the directory TESTLAB SWITCH TESTLAB SWITCH M 1 Port 02 Link Step 1 If there are no results PV4E will search for files at Panel 02 Port 17 Link Step 2 M e 8 BB e r s s e r r BB s s gt F TESTLAB SW Panel 02 Panel 02 Panel 01 Panel 01 Outiet 201 02 Port 17 Port 01 Port 07 Port 23 Port 01 Port s Channel Cable Test Results Search Order When you chose to view a port s channel cable test result PV4E searches for the result files in a deterministic order The following algorithm is used to find the matching link result file s 1 PV4E searches for files on the directory of the selected port 2 If no files are found step 1 the system then searches for files on the directory of the counter side port of the channel 3 The system returns the first directory that contains files if any files were found For example if the user has the following link Same as above RiT Technologies Ltd 264 PV4E User Manual V6 0 mT F E Pe F F fE B 86 Ha F F ea B E ie F4 TESTLAB SWI Panel 02 Panel 02 Panel 01 Panel 01 Outlet 201 02 Port i7 Port 01 Port 07 Port 23 Port O1 If you wish to view TESTLAB SWITCH Port 02 channel cable tests result PV4E first searches for the result files in the directory TESTLAB SWITCH TESTLAB SWITCH M 1 Port 02 Channel Step 1 If there are no results it will search for files at Ou
195. can be accessed in two ways 1 Right click the Class in the Catalog tree and select the Delete function from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Delete button in the lower Catalog Toolbar strip A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion RiT Technologies Ltd 43 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 A dialog box opens Click either the OK or the Cancel button to proceed The selected Class will be deleted from the Catalog tree and from the database To delete a multiple selection of Classes 1 In the Catalog tree locate and select the first Class that you want to delete For a consecutive list hold down the lt Alt gt key and select the list For a non consecutive list hold down the lt Ctrl gt key and select the individual Classes 2 The Delete command can be accessed in two ways 1 Right click on the selection and select the Delete function from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Delete button in the Catalog Toolbar A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion 3 Click either the OK or the Cancel button to proceed The selected Classes will be deleted from the Catalog tree and from the database Adding Editing and Deleting Items Items can be added to the Catalog at any time These Items can be edited or deleted as long as they are not being referenced by an inventory item ina specific Location A comprehensive list of Items is automatically installed in the database during the installation of th
196. cation Filters cccccccccccssssessssssssseeeecceeeccccessececessesesseeeeeeeeececesseeeccscsessssseeseeeeeess 488 Messine BMG BRN ass esas se poss ccccentanecsusen caus cuupeeuecoc neous T A E 490 SV SCCM UV AICS A A A A A A A A AA A E AE AAA A 491 RiT Technologies Ltd XIV PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding and Deleting ICONS crsceacaccascosedesisnacctnesatnednessionsdaaureneassananadenaaenesssececadelaadsaasaaadesnaaneoneesioneduagaoaccenadenadenndets 491 Adding and Deleting Tima Ces x icccsseocessspanatsinenasnedsessonsseriremedssananscssgdenadoossesdieapaesassniiuetgawnadnosaneinrsemaedeaadeseansadens 493 Adding and Deleting Work Order Task Types cccccccccceceeeeeeeceaaeeseseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeauaaeassseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaaas 493 Adding and Deleting Location Category Type ccccccccccccecccccceceesesssseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaesseasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 494 Adding and Deleting SEL V1 CC eons segeta ved ueanasnseuewesadavenouelercedesentsarmuentsedevectsttoqeutvedanesenetngemeeneventuadouereemiaoentatoiens 495 IVE OGG MD oocsc sorradets vies tucvecicsssncicasisussacdustocstosusecucsensasedececwaseuts eucubeettosesvsascniyscasiuossaestssusentcasessnviesvececsueiseasies 497 Dolwar UDOT ACG esn AE E sana sievsbiwansenstanshalesieaaneene E 498 Setting up the Software Upgrade ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeaeeesssssseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaueeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeaaaagaaegseeses 499 Downloading the Software
197. cation type that exists in the PV4E production database Country building floor etc Security level field must contain one of the values High Normal Low Connecting HW Record Validity Test Functional Type field must contain one of the values Panel Outlet Link Terminator field must contain one of the values Yes No Rack Equipment record Validity Test Functional Type field must contain one of the values Cable Organizer Rack Shelf Spacer U Order must contain one of the values Top Bottom Network Equipment Record Validity Test Functional Type field must contain one of the values Switch PBX Hub Router IP Field must contain a valid IP address MAC Field must contain a valid MAC address Serial No Field cannot contain more than 20 characters Timeout field must contain a whole positive number between 10 and 300 000 Retries field must contain a whole positive number between 1 and 5 Monitor field must contain one of the values Yes No RiT Technologies Ltd 248 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Network Equipment Module Record Validity Test Container Functional Type field must contain one of the values Switch PBX Hub Router Serial No Field cannot contain more than 20 characters Link Information Record Validity Test Every link element must be defined previously in the CSV file even though it exists in the PV4E database Every port element can be connected to one device only and the port must be available Port Type must contain one
198. cececccceseeccosseccecceeceececosssse 325 Moe E r E E E E E E EAE ET E E 325 Modiin VV ork Ordi arses a E 332 PROG REGUE SU ais csccececcatsansccsesaacccsevatescanccabysssesasassuesvexsnesncessinscasasissssuaenasocnaneseashguass 334 Adding Single or Multiple Items to Lo Caio ths sse cc etiesseedsscansuavsrian toc volansnvavaxs vonnnwsievengndselendeutensieedaetancdesn gees 334 Chanae FRC sara sac see scabs ee see eset ca cece nca E sa E 342 Swap Funchonality ssrin serena iparon n erone abari A nna inna A a aeaa Oae 344 Kemo Fonciona y a N beets 347 Reserved RESOUTOCS soe trae verti erro s Soondioe cssntennsaasieicsieteuSgencsaue redete US EOE ire Saapavienmaninhebeesctestredwierteeresenaneceveb eens 350 Prroni AG CS orcccevasscleccecsccsevecencecenssssssvesseususscsuesucuccecauvsensucesecaecsssessaveseos E 353 Error MeSSaces Tapie ciai saccacnsbesveds anja ieosiaad E E S ineeeme dea yeoeneds 353 CHAPTER 8 WORK ORDER AND MANAGING LINKS ccccceeeeeeeeenees 355 Work OGIO V CLV IC ststa canis tusssventsrsdesaauusscesteasaccsessscventassccinsuesatsnteasateusdecagunsdessaucsatentessaveataseadaicensensdvacasasasssts 355 THE Work Order Wii OW cscassssscosasesesassesii sete cessseccaeasvesencsnsaasasiaveiasessseioavaaseaaasaaneessusiasaioseasacaguesbonsessanediasesnsaass 356 Opening the Work Order Window cccccccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaseesseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaasaaasasssseeeeeeeeeess 356 Filtering the Work Ordea ses
199. ceceeceeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeauaaeasseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 233 Adding 3 User GrOUD wet cxisesatet remoseuesiasuvercivosinsliensicwnetsoapeustiere eriviatoueneceusnoce vouduae stews iist OuupsyonsanassGhetievsseawelteenatet 233 Adding a Departiie 1G soc cnaseseteatineretions antaressernsdenanetetatsivonedeut nadwalsaunndtematmsetyesaguedens entetaseesnatemseeintesSueretensaeddven tens 234 GINO SCL acters teyoutes un haen E tee saat unnean adaveacksenetageada ena aarageetteriadss 234 Mapori Export FeaT ee ere ee ere re 235 Pe ENDS VNC ect seine tice soared ace erect ete settee Seen en vi resent tesa E ual acauneteee dees 235 OC ON prea A E N A E A E E A E A A A E E ener seutsed E A 236 PP onn O I A E T E A AA E E een cee E E E E A A T A E E A 236 Expor toan Export Fie yess coscceceueee reco eacesssnsckeecevesceecssvectccasseesssnvoserecercceheaeauteussavsancesseosneeeessteaneruesersenteceseeseee 237 Work Flow and User Interlace 2 sxe scsironteretsc anes sacs rieri E E a a E eA ea ET 237 Poc ee BONN O aa E E E E E T E E E conemeatehconemsees 239 D port irom an Export File es secccesccceces ses eceenssy vossisceevesvececscusssuascoussvacces oes caeuscescucatsecevesneceiecsvtcceruecesensiuneunestencs 239 Work Flow and User Interface cesar saatoanneantoneemsneveg mekeni i eia a eieaa 239 Po 55 TON ore A N EE A E NE AEE EEA I 241 PAPP Way Cs Sc iae r one nase E eecsaonen 242 SO I ance scene E E E 242 Mannal Oi se File scssi a a E a E E a 242 Catalog I
200. check the box in the upper left corner of the Tasks tab and click OK on the confirmation screen Work Order Location W0O 07 09 2009 00003 All General Operations Tasks a a aree ee _ Operation Name a _Pronty Connect Switch Switch Mo wo 06 08 2009 00001 Created 08 06 2009 Connect Switch Switch Mo gt WO 07 09 2009 00003 Created 09 07 2009 Connect Switch Switch Mo Connect Switch Switch Mo x A This operation selects all items in all the pages 5tatus v Perform Edit Work Order Figure 287 Selecting all tasks 4 Select cancelled from the Status field Work Order Location WoO 07 09 2009 00003 All General Operations Tasks ID O Engineer i ee L SSS ee a Descipton 7 Operation Name _a Status Due Date Priority _ Connect Switch Switch Mo WO 06 08 2009 00001 Created 08 06 2009 1 Connect Saikh Switch Mo WO 07 09 2009 00003 Created 09 07 2009 1 Connect Switch Switch Mo Connect Switch Switch Mo Status status Perform In Progress Edit Completed Work Order Cancelled Figure 288 Canceling a task Note All the individual tasks need to be changed to Cancel before for the status in the Work Order changes to Canceled Carrying out a Work Order The processes involved in carrying out a Work Order once it has been created are as follows 1 The technician selects and changes the status RiT Technologies Ltd 373 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 The Control Pad is activated at the actua
201. chy and has the ability to view the entire system Expander EF The PVMax Expander is used to expand the capabilities of the Master Cascading Expanders from the DOWN LINK Ports of the Master achieves this Each DOWN LINK Port of a Master is connected to the Level 1 Expander of a site Master Expander FE The PVMax Master Expander is a combination of both the PVMax Master and PVMax Expander It includes all the capabilities and features of the PVMax Master and the PVMax Expander Scanner EF The PVMax Scanners are connected to the SMART Patch Panels with Scanner Attachment Cords The PVMax Scanner monitors all ports on these panels Local Scanner E The PVMax Local Scanner is a stand alone device that manages the physical layer network It is connected directly to the network and is able to monitor RiT Technologies Ltd 85 PV4E User Manual V6 0 up to 144 ports up to 6 panels PVMax Local Scanner scans and processes the panels physical connectivity information and sends it via the network to the PV4E server PVMax Controllers Security Controller The PVMax Security Controller enables control of various sensors and remote controlled devices from the PatchView Management Station Sensors such as temperature humidity floods etc and remote devices such as rack indicators door locks door switches fans can be physically connected to the PatchView system using the PVMax Security Controller I ndicat
202. circumstances may cause the event to be received Switch Trap A device is connected to a switch that generates a switch trap The switch trap triggers the Discover Module to scan the switch port to where the device is connected If the Discovery Module recognizes a device that does not have an authorized MAC address an event is received Device Locator When a Device Locator is executed and does not have an authorized MAC address RiT Technologies Ltd 416 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Switch Scan When a switch scan is executed and detected devices do not have an authorized MAC address LANServer Scan When the LANServer locates MAC addresses scanned by the LANMapper it fires events with severity according to the security level of the location MAC addresses that are not located in a specific location will not cause the firing of an event The Unauthorized MAC Station Moved When an Unauthorized MAC station moved event is received the LANServer concludes that a station with a non authorized MAC address moved from one location to another The severity of the event is decided according to the security level of the new location The LANMapper MAC Addresses Summary The LANMapper might scan unauthorized MACs However it does not necessarily associate them with a specific location therefore an unauthorized MAC event cannot be received Instead the LANMapper fires a single event summarizing E The number of authorized MACs det
203. ct the required status The specified Work Orders will be listed in the Work Order Pane RiT Technologies Ltd 357 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Work Orders Listed Under ID or Engineer The Work Orders can be viewed according to Work Order ID the default or according to assigned Engineer in which case the tree displays only Work Orders containing tasks assigned to technicians A list of all tasks assigned to each technician appears below the technician s name gt To view the Work Orders assigned to each technician 1 Click the Engineer button optional to view the list of Work Orders assigned to an technician The Engineer Tree opens Work Order Location All ID Engineer Engineer Administrator oat WiO 06 08 2009 00001 idanb WiO 06 08 2009 00001 Figure 273 Engineer Tree 2 Click the ID button to return to the original view The Work Order Note If PV4E is currently off line it is recommended that you go on line if the work order s includes Dynamic Links See Working on line Edit Link Chapter Work Orders can be created edited and deleted There are two ways to create a new Work Order These are either from the Work Order Module or from the Edit Link Worksheet The following section explains the Work Order within the Work Order Module When you open a Work Order its status of Created is automatically set RiT Technologies Ltd 358 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Creating a New Work Order Th
204. cted to one port in the Master Each PVMax Master can have up to eight sites The Master Expander has only one site Hardware Software Interaction PV4E software enables efficient and effective management of network equipment by scanning and reporting of the Patch Panel wiring configuration As PV4E is Web based the system can be managed from any station on the network including from a remote location Patch Panels are attached to Scanners which are located in the wiring racks at various locations These locations can be on different floors of a building or other buildings either in the same area e g a campus or in other areas e g different cities The Master is connected to the Scanners The organization network LAN or WAN is used to connect Masters in other buildings to create one managed system RiT Technologies Ltd 13 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The Patch Panels provide a compact cabling environment for connectivity within the LAN RiT s patch panels are equipped with LED indicators above each port that can be used to easily identify and monitor any port Each Patch Panel is connected by a flat cable to a PatchView scanner The Scanners are connected to the patch panels installed at the site Any connectivity change on the panels is collected by the Scanners and the connectivity information is reported to the Master The Master reports the information using standard SNMP protocol over the LAN to the Server running PV4E sof
205. d This is a device where the physical link information and the network identification information only MAC address were detected successfully and placed in its correct location in the database together with its physical link Unmanaged devices A device where some of the vital information is missing and therefore not allowing the correct detection of the physical location Device Authorization This feature significantly enhances the system security support functionality The Device authorization module enables the user to Approve an existing unauthorized MAC address Authorize new MAC addresses prior to the Discovery Module detection RiT Technologies Ltd 410 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Get alerts on new MAC addresses detected by the Discovery Module View all unauthorized MACs Authorize Unauthorized MAC Editor From the Tools menu gt Device Authorization PEX Import Import from a File Export to a File System Status The following Edit Authorizated Devices screen opens g Device Authorization Webpage Dialog Devices Name MAC Address Location Functional Type choice IP Address Indude Sub Location gd Class ice Host Name Location Security All Catalog Name choice Authorized E MAC Address a Pp i Host Name a Name Type Location z Figure 319 Edit Authorization MAC Enter the details in the above Devices fields Click Search to find all related items in the search result
206. d Class function from the pull down menu The Add Edit Class dialog opens E Add Edit Class Webpage Dialog Notes Figure 25 Add Edit Class dialog 3 Type in the name of the class 4 Add the Description Optional Tip RiT Technologies Ltd 41 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Keep the description short and relevant as this will be used as a Sort criterion 5 Select the Notes tab to add a note about the class Optional 6 To assign a new icon please see Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 2 Add Edit Chass Webpage Dialog Active Equipment will appear here when typed into the name box Name of Class or Item fates Notes Tab E ve Equipmen Nameinserted here ceitch Manufacturer Category Icon and Assign Mew Icon Figure 26 Adding a Class 7 Select one of the following options to proceed Button O Apply Save the new information The dialog remains open Reset Reset dialog to its previous settings Cancel Cancel the entry if Apply was not previously selected and close the dialog OK Save the entry and close the dialog Editing a Class You can edit a class at any time When a Class is selected in the Catalog tree information will appear in the Data Area There are three Tab options available General A brief description of the Class Content Provides a list of Items listed under this class Notes Contains the notes written previous
207. d click on the A button and select another slot 4 Click on the OK button The Item will have changed its location in the tree View the Rack to see the new position of the Item Continue to change the position of the Items in the Rack until they are correctly located RiT Technologies Ltd 143 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding PatchView Equipment to Location The PVMax Equipment necessary to operate RiT s PatchView system consists of the following components TYPE I CON Master Expander Ea Master Expander j Scanner Indicator Controller Security Controller B Control Pad These components are vital to the running of your Enterprise and are included in the database of the Catalog during the installation process Additional PatchView equipment cannot be added to the list nor can the existing items be edited or deleted in the Catalog Unique names can be changed Tip It is recommended to insert the Scanners and Panels in their correct order within the Rack from the beginning However you can change the position of the scanner panels within the Rack according to the slots using the location feature Refer to the List of PatchView Equipment for the order of equipment Adding a Master to Location gt To add a Master to Location 1 Select the Rack in the Location Tree where the Master is to be assigned 2 Right click the selected Rack A drop down list appears RiT Technologies Ltd 144 PV4E User M
208. d of the desk Applicable values are 1 The task refers to specific link of the device or O The task refers to the device 5 The Description column allows you to specify the exact content of the task This is a free text column where you can specify every required task However the provisioning engine supports some place holders for this column which are replaced automatically during the execution of the request Place holders supported by the system are RiT Technologies Ltd 323 PV4E User Manual V6 0 6 7 DEVICE NAME FROM_LOCATION TO LOCATION PORT NAME CURRENT_SERVICE NEW_SERVICE SECOND_DEV_NAME Relevant for swap requests only The IsActivataed column tells whether the task is activated 1 or not 0 The column gives you the flexibility to eliminate a task temporarily from the process without deleting it from the file The TaskType should always have the value 7 Editing the Offline Tasks File L 2 Locate the OffLineTasks csv file under the following path PV4E root directory RiT Technologies PatchView for the Enterprise Server Bin Double click the file to open it for editing The following message box appears Microsoft Excel x A 6 7 Excel has detected that OffLineTasks csw is a SYLE File but cannot load ik Either the File has errors or itis not a SYLKE File format Click OK to try bo open the File in a different Format Cancel Cl
209. ding Patch Panels to Location cccccccccccccsssssssssssseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaaaasssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasaaasasneseeeeeeeeeeaaaas Adding Telecommunication Infrastructure ccccsssssssssscsccccccccccccssssssssssssscscscccccccccsccccssssssssssssssssscscoooes Adding a Cable Horizontal and Vertical Patch Cord ccccccccccsssssssseeseeeecceceeeeeeeeaaaesesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas OS MS A oa Ga eset an cera cts EI EAT EEEO E a said Sats EENI EEANN AE PAS T reat sicelctre sce TE T es outa sean bataa wears eed aches E ote ee eases oneness PP MINS BAD cts eiatre occa TE T uae aan pubak eta rose EE E AEEA BNE SAD sce act tieds sass E E E E sue beastie E E E E aden sersteussees Adding a Tronk Multi pair Cable sssini eaa cosscactanssasevessnauessetecessusoaucodssasasavecevavetactec Addine A PAU WAY csa aE ara G n T E E T A EA T E E AE S Poca o a E E E T E E AE T N AE E TEE AEAT Co TD E E E E tvs TEE EA E E A T O Peor mair Pone T aD a E ET E E AE E T ROEA A E teens Susau acnon daiwa ete cates date an aauaed tate eaiea POG a Cable toa PAG W AY ccs cee socescccsecessnssstcosucececesescacecscauseuucasesncvossacecssaasacessvasseasvasiveesecceusesasecosssuse osusnasees Meast remeni S sides ssicctecouiceuvavenecasinuicndecnaverssenubcwvedwoskvieceaiceGeesvusaversuenubawsedecseadseneideGaawciendeieuicaveussiicawiaeriadacsaverssanenes nterconmeCi sss civacescsccssesss cavdersbcdsesdsiwaveedsbeswasssbousseusecswesdecossendsseesedoscdeesaca
210. dit Group Webpage Dialog General Items en Name Location ii AFIPP1 USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 1 CR 1 Rac fc AFIPP2 USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 1 CR 1 Rac Remove Port Name Port Name Do Be Es Ee a arg n 7s me i ora T r EF ee Te 9 Click Apply to save or OK to save and close the screen Panel number 3 p sc 672 01 now shows that not all ports are part of that group Deleting a Group gt To delete a group 1 Select the group you want to delete from the list in the Groups tab 2 Click Delete A dialog box is displayed RiT Technologies Ltd 320 PV4E User Manual V6 0 P 4E Windows Internet Explorer PVMAX K Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY i FOR THE Enterprise Groups BLDGA Zone A General Name Description gt BLDGA Zone A Location Z F2 CR2 USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 1 CR 1 Racl CZ F3 CR3 USA Atlanta Bidg A Floor 1 CR 1 Racl DC1 H1 Z DC1 H1 CZ B2 DC H1 CZ B5 SE DC H2 CZ71 icine ae 1 A Porto1 v A Port 17 A Port 18 Port 19 US r re you sure you want to delete BLDGA Zone 4 _ Port 20 SA Port 21 gt E oe Edit Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category 06 09 2009 11 28 User Logged In License Figure 235 Confirm Delete Action Screen 3 Click OK to confirm the action or Cancel to abort the action The group and all associated data are deleted f
211. ditions of other parents in the Location Tree In the case of multiple locations being added to the location tree an Auto Naming facility is available The procedure to add a Location to the Location Tree is basically the same for all Items from the 2nd level down RiT Technologies Ltd 111 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The following sections explain in detail how to Add Edit and Delete Locations for both the 1st level and subsequent levels of the Location Tree All Items assigned to a Location can be accessed from the Location Tree If there is more than one item assigned to the relevant location double click the location to view all of the items located there You can view the properties of each Item as well as add new items and edit existing ones from the Location Tree Adding a First Level Location gt To Add a First Level Location 1 Select the Location folder in the Location Tree The Add Location dialog can be accessed in two ways 2 Right click the selected Location in the Location tree Or 3 Click on the Action button at the bottom of the screen The Add Location pull down menu will appear in either option r E Add Location d Add Country e No Location Moy Panel 1 Add Building Printer 1 Add Floor Router 1 Station 4 Add Room Telephone 20 Add Other Figure 83 Add Location Pull Down Menu Window RiT Technologies Ltd 112 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 Select and click on the
212. does not open until tasks are added to a work order RiT Technologies Ltd 356 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PVMax and PV Indicators PV4E Windows Internet Explorer El Ve PVMAX PV P LET Alarm r Refresh O Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY A FOR THE Enterprise Work Order Location W0O 06 08 2009 00001 All General Operations Tasks ID O Engineer mamm rO lt ee eee _ a Description _Operation Status Assigned To x _ Names status Ce Date Priority 1 Move Server Created Administrator gt WO 06 08 2009 00001 Created 08 06 2009 1 gt 2 Remove PatchCord Created Administrator Work Order Pane ER Assign To assign Perform Delete New Edit Work Order Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category Lag 09 03 2009 16 20 User Logged In License Figure 271 Work Order Window Filtering the Work Orders The Work Orders can be filtered according to their status For example you can view those Work Orders which have been created but work has not yet begun on them In this case select Created Only those Work Orders with the selected status appear in the tree Select All to display all existing Work Orders gt To filter the Work Orders 1 Select the Work Orders to be viewed by clicking on the 7 next to the All field optional A pull down menu opens Location All Created In Progress Completed Closed Figure 272 Work Order Menu 2 Sele
213. dow opens RiT Technologies Ltd 151 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Auto Detect PVMAX Master Webpage Dialog x IP Address 10 100 40 164 Get Community LELLI Set Community TELLETT Timeout ms 250 Retnies 2 Figure 120 Auto Detect PVMax Master 4 Enter IP address of the Local Scanner Click Detect The following message appears Microsoft Internet Expl xj AN Master Detection started 5 Click OK 6 Click M i at the top of the PV4E screen The Scanner appears both in the physical and logical trees as a ghost with a question mark in the Topology screen Assigning To insert the Local scanner as an item in the inventory perform the following steps RiT Technologies Ltd 152 PV4E User Manual V6 0 1 Stand on the ghost item and right mouse click Select Insert Local Scanner s from the context menu 2 The Add New PVMax Local Scanner s window opens 3 Select the Ghost name you want to assign to the inventory Catalog Name Click the arrow in the drop down menu and select Local Scanner Location Click ai to change location 4 Select location from the location tree and click OK 5 The Scanner has been added to the inventory Selecting a Search Frame To perform a search do the following 1 Click SD at the foot of the PV4E screen The following context menu opens Rack Equipment User Software b Adapter b Telecommunication Infrastructure Termi
214. down the Ctrl key and select with mouse gt To Assign a PVMax Security Controller ghost 1 Right click on a PVMax Security Controller ghost from the System View Topology tree in the Physical branch context menu 2 Select Assign existing PVMax Security Controller option RiT Technologies Ltd 161 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Search The Assigned screen opens Select the Security Controller to be assigned Click Assign and OK The Security Controller is now related to the previously created Security Controller in the inventory a es A Note The status of the ports is saved within the inventory If the user relates an inventory that contains changes from the default values these changes will also apply to the ghost The inventory status is more predominate in the system than the online status Replacing a PVMax Security Controller is the same as with any other PVMax device To Replace a PVMax Security Controller 1 Right click on a PVMax Security Controller from the System View Topology tree Select Replace from the context menu The Replace Device screen opens The Replace function of a PVMax Security Controller is the same as replacing a PVMax Expander The new Security Controller will replace the old one in the PVMax Topology and place it as a ghost that needs to be assigned to the Security Controller in the inventory There is no need to change the commands and I O settings as they belong to the inventory
215. down menu select the service to be changed To Add To List or Remove From List see section Adding Single or Multiple Items to Location To change edit VLAN refer to VLAN List Screen 3 If the device to be changed is a multiple NIC device where only part of the services needs to be changed the rest should be allocated with the No Service service For example consider a scenario when a dual NIC server was provisioned and only one of its adapters was associated with a link After some time the user wants to link the second adapter to the network In this case the user would need to allocate service to the available NIC In addition he would be required to set the service of the existing link to No Service so it would not be affected by the provisioning request 4 Click Next The following Change Service Operations screen opens goa Name a WOName o Y Operation Operation Description AndyD W0 07 09 2009 00179 Chance Station Change Station AndyD from USA Atlanta Bidg A Floor 2 Move EduardM W0 07 09 2009 00179 Change Station Change Station Eduard from USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Mov JeremyT W0 07 09 2009 00179 Change Station Change Station JeremyT from USA Atlanta Bldg A Hloor 2 Moi Trevors W0 07 09 2009 00179 Change Station Change Station TrevorS from USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Mov aagal m Remove From List Modify Work Order Figure 257 Change Service Operation List Screen The item has
216. dress will be detected automatically when the system detects the Master in the on line mode 1 Click OK to proceed Adding an Expander to Location gt To add an Expander to Location 1 Select the Rack in the Location Tree where the Expander is to be assigned 2 Right click the selected Rack A drop down list appears Location Topoly Users w Tree O Teecommunication Infrastructure Location at li iT City Towers am Foor i amp Room 101 Reception 5 Moor 02 Cabinet 1 Al Rack na 2 9 Foor 03 2 Add Rack Equipment P am Row 05 wew ae wh amp WwW A Mm P 2 Add Terminal Equipment Add Network Equipment Add PatchView Equipment Add Connecting HW l Master Add Data Center Equipment Master Expander Duplicate Local Scanner PVMAX Scanner PYMAX Controller Figure 115 Adding Add Expander to Location 3 Select Add PatchView Equipment and click Expander The Add Edit Inventory Expander dialog box opens RiT Technologies Ltd 147 PV4E User Manual V6 0 n k B A Add Edit Inventory Expander Webpage Dialog co satobebh me ES HLA SLL JF Pt besedh Nid old i Serio hana 2 General Devices Nobbes Name Functional Type Class Catalog Name Serial No No of downinks Type Size U Power W i Location Amber Inc Belgium Brussels City Towers Floor 0 Figure 116 Add Edit Inventory Expander dialog 4 Type in the name of the Expander The Auto Naming fe
217. dule click the Search For button and select the class of item to be searched Rack Equipntent User Software Adapter Telecommunication Infrastructure Terminal Equipment Network Equipment PatchView Equipment Connecting HW Work Order Data Center Equipment Location Global Figure 14 Search Tool Selection A search dialog appears The search window options vary depending on the type of item being searched For example select Connecting HW gt Panel 2 If you are searching for a specific item select one or more fields for the search criteria by selecting options from the dropdown lists or typing in data For example selecting the Class as Copper and Catalog Name as SMART GIGA 24 UTP Indude Sub Location Copper v Secure Link SMART GIGA 24 UTP v PV Not Used Figure 15 Item Search dialog 3 If you doing a Global search enter data in one or more fields for the search criteria or browse for a Location You cannot search for users ina global search RiT Technologies Ltd 30 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note A wildcard feature is supported when performing a global search It allows you to increase the breadth of a search by using the symbols Enter the wildcard in the Name field asa Indude Sub Location i Figure 16 Global Search window 4 Click Search Now to begin the search The search results window opens The total number of records found appears in the bottom left co
218. e appropriate chapters of the user guide The application opens in the Maintenance module with the Maintenance toolbar activate Shortcut Menus Instead of using the menu bar to activate a command you can select and right click on an item s to activate a short cut menu The context sensitive shortcut menus provide quick and easy access to your most frequently used functions for example Add Edit Delete and Search Pop up Messages A pop up message functionality has been added for all possible events in PV4E V5 0 that allows you to view events as they happen To enable pop ups you must be logged into the PV4E application Selecting Events to Appear as Pop Ups From the main PV4E screen select Settings gt Msg Filtering RiT Technologies Ltd 24 PV4E User Manual V6 0 SETTINGS Y REP Permissions System Tables Work Order The following Msg Filtering window opens Msg Filtering Category Pop Up View E Batch Completed Successfully 1 A Batch Completed with Errors PP Batch Process Started Catalog Item Added Catalog Item Deleted Catalog Item Updated Demo Time Expired Device authorized for existing device Device found without a specific location Device located Figure 9 Pop up Msg Filtering Window Edit To select events click Edit The following Msg Filtering screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 25 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Msg Filtering Webpage Dialog x
219. e Dialog General Membership Email D PatchView Active Directory Name Domain Full Name Description Notification Only 5 Type in full or part of the user s name in the Name field You can use a wildcard when typing part of the user name 6 Click Find If the PV4E server is in the same domain as the Active Directory then PV4E displays all the user names which meet the search criteria 7 Select the relevant name and click OK PV4E automatically updates the user s name full name and the domain 8 If the PV4E server does not share the same domain as the Active Directory you will receive the following error message when you click Find Note The Email address of the user is imported into PV4E and additional mail address can be added Note2 User permission level in the active directory doesn t effect PV4E s permission level RiT Technologies Ltd 509 PV4E User Manual V6 0 System Information The System Info tab contains information about Licenses Users Ports and the status of your PV4E application The System Info tab contains information such as how many ports are in use how many are managed total ports in use and the total of managed ports in use Use the right hand scroll bar to scroll down and view the status of each application To view the System Info click the Tools tab and select System Info from the drop down menu gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer O x PVMAX PV Alarm
220. e Dialog E Template 1 mplate Use this template to indicate the port range within the item name Item Text Panel From separator Step No of Items Port Text Front Port Pi Text Back Port Example Figure 80 Auto Naming template 2 dialog 2 Inthe Text field enter the name 3 Inthe From field enter the number of the panel Click Example to view a completed template 4 Click Test to check results Then click Apply The following Auto Naming screen is updated RiT Technologies Ltd 109 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Auto Naming Webpage Dialog Ed Template 1 Template 2 Use this template to indicate the port range within the item name Item Text Panel From Separator Step No of Items Port Text Front Fort Pi Text Back Port Example Apply a eee Mame Eo Panell 32 Panel33 64 Panel65 96 Panel97 128 Paneli 79 160 Figure 81 Auto Naming template 2 dialog Location Types The Location Types in the pull down menu are in the order of the recommended hierarchical structure However it should be noted that any Location Type could be selected and inserted under a specific Parent Location For example a building could be inserted directly under the Country Add Other is used for a Location Type that is not listed as an option As it is possible to use any Location Type in any level of the Hierarchical tree you could use for example the type Other as the Company name The example in this
221. e Edit Link Worksheet gt To Enable Auto Flip 1 Check the checkbox of the Auto Flip button 2 Drag and drop the item ports into the required cell The ports will be correctly aligned gt To Disable Auto Flip 1 Uncheck the checkbox on the Auto Flip button RiT Technologies Ltd 284 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 Drag and drop the item ports into the required cell 3 If necessary select individual ports and manually flip the links Manually flipping the link s If the port of one item in the link is not facing the port you want to connect it to you will need to flip the link gt To Manually Flip a link 1 Select the link s that need to be flipped 2 Right click on the selection and select Flip from the pull down menu Tip Select complete columns by clicking on the header Right click to flip all the contents of this column PV4E flips the item so that the port is now aligned correctly RiT Technologies Ltd 285 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Link Status Symbols In the Link Edit worksheet the Link status of the ports is indicated by color coded symbol as follows SYMBOL COLOR INDICATES Black an existing static off line link Black a reserved static off line link in a work order It is reserved and cannot be used in another link task Black a request for a new static off line link prior to implementation fos Black a static off line port reserved in a work order Black a request t
222. e General tab RiT Technologies Ltd 55 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FY add Edit Catalog Pathway Webpage Dialog General Dimensions Name Functional Type Description Material Type Maximum Capaaty Vendor Name Vendor Part No choice o Recommended choice Note The Maximum capacity and Recommended fields must be populated in order to add a cable to a pathway 2 Enter the following details Name Functional Type Class Description Material Type Maximum Capacity Enter name Pathway is entered by default Use the drop down menu to change class to conduit or raceway Click Add to add a new pathway type Free text Enter description of pathway Select either plastic or metal from the drop down menu The maximum Recommended Suggested number number of of pathways user pathways that RiT Technologies Ltd 56 PV4E User Manual V6 0 can be placed defined on a pathway Vendor Name Enter from the drop down menu Click Add to insert a new Vendor Dimensions Tab Add height width and length of the cable Adding a Connector to the Catalog Connectors are added to the Catalog and are then used when defining the ports for the following Item types Adapters Cables Connecting Hardware Terminal Equipment Active Equipment The Item Type Connector has been divided into two Functional Types Copper Fiber Optic RiT Technologies Ltd 57 PV4E User Ma
223. e OK button PYMAX PY Alarm a Refresh WD Logout MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLS REPORTS HELP Y Groups ey Administrator General Membership Fon THE Enterprise Mame a Ful Hame Administrator Administrator A Add Edit Security User Webpage Dialog Administrator Administrator Administrator v System Administrator General Membership Email Access PatchView Active Drectoy Mame Administrator Ful Name Administrator Password PILL Confirm Password PETIT Password Expires After 2 Edit Password Never Expres Change Password E at Next Logi Desmiption System Administrator Event Category Notification Only E Figure 337 Adding a New User Assigning a User to Group To assign a Group to a User 1 Select the Users Tab in the Permissions Screen from the drop down menu 2 Select the User RiT Technologies Ltd 477 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 Click the Edit button The Add Edit Security User dialog opens 4 Click the Add Remove button A dialog listing available groups will open Select the group s required 6 Click the OK button PVHAN Pw P LET Alarm g Puf resh W Adrratritor MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTS HELPY Fon Te Enterprise Administrator General 9 Membership Administrator Administrator Administrator General Membership Name a eo Admin Data Center Manager 9 Eveni Categor y Figure 338 Assigning a User to a Group Cha
224. e S ID 43 UK Any Servi BidgA Any Servi a Floor 01 Any Servii Datacenter A Any Servi Rawi Any Servi E Rack 2 Any Servi E Rack 001 Any Servi m Switch Any Servi laas Panel 01 Any Gerwi Add Edit Work Order Task Webpage Dialog oon TDM ke WN eS hips peak l pa aa jek ae ae Task Notes Switch Module 01 PortO1 Back 01 Panel 01 Port 01 EEG EE 4 Switch Module 01 Port Back 02 anel 01 Port 02 Feel Hp EB 4 Switch Module 01 PortO3 Back 03 Panel 01 Port 03 HERI e Switch Module 01 PortO4 Back 04 Panel 01 Port 04 if it B RERI ol 4 Switch Module 01 PortO5 9 Back 05 Panel 01 Port 05 Auto Flip Tooltip Figure 280 Selecting devices in the Links Worksheet gt To create links in the worksheet 1 Select the ports that are to be linked 2 Click on the Link or the Break Link if required button The symbols change from to in the case of creating links and to in the case of breaking a link 3 Click the Apply button to save the instructions on the database and continue working in the worksheet 4 Click the OK button to save and close the worksheet The status of the task is now created and the links will be marked as reserved or pending See the table in Viewing a Link for the various types of symbols Note The status of the new task will be created Reserving Devices for Link Tasks If you know that you want to use a device or devices in a planned link you can reserve the items to
225. e Subnet Discovery menu item Switch Traps Switch traps provide real time indications of any terminal equipment connections link up or disconnect link down A disconnection can be a regular disconnection or a failure in the physical communication link The connection could be of an authorized or a non authorized device in the network In addition to the scheduling activation of the Discovery Module operation Switch traps provide real time updates on the connection activity of the terminal equipment This means that activating the switch trap feature on your equipment increases functionality without increasing the resource load on the system When a device s location is changed PV4E updates its location in its inventory and sends out a trap describing the disconnection or reconnection of the device If a new device is detected that is part of a full link this new device is automatically added to the Inventory The tasks you need to perform to activate switch traps are 1 Activate the switch traps link up and link down feature on your network switch Provide the switch with the IP address of the PV4E Server as the destination of the switch traps Please refer to the switch s documentation for further details 2 Activate the Discovery Module switch traps feature in PV4E Set the Discovery Module scheduler 4 Set the switch trap properties for each switch You need to configure the settings on each individual switch in the n
226. e Systems Manager or Administrator opens the Work Orders These are assigned to authorized personnel who execute them gt To create a new Work Order 1 Click the Work Order button located in the Menu Bar of PV4E The Work Order window opens In the Work Order Pane click the New button The Work Order dialog opens The system assigns the unique ID number of this Work Order If the automatic Work Order ID assignment is enabled in System Setting You can accept it as it is add to it or change it completely In the Description box type a short description of the Work Order optional In the Priority field change the priority level for the Work Order by clicking the indicators PV4E provides 10 levels in order of importance level 1 being the most important The system defaults to 1 MAINTENANCE _ Work Order All PVMAX PV P LET Alarm g Refresh W Logout Administrator TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY gt FOR THE Enterprise Location WoO 06 08 2009 00001 ID O Engineer Name a gt WO 06 08 2009 00001 Create ss Status Assigned To _ Status WO 06 09 2009 00001 Cre a Administrator ID WO0 06 09 2009 00001 Description Priority i Due Date 09 06 2009 Due Time Status Created ii Perform B d Edit Work Order Event Category Figure 274 Creating a New Work Order To change the Due Date from the current date optional click the 7 button The calendar opens
227. e Work Order Location Tree cccccccccsssssssseeseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeaeseseseeeeeees 307 BS CW seahetica sate acepe cere si guitar eee atdive lt n oucnno ie saunas ie tala nen aden tisepsb E aeeustes 308 PSV UE OS N I a asic esatesc a taic ost eso tan reatst atc saad ee S E bo ataan te tdanatinn erates 310 Working with the Provisioning VOOM si siscssasisssscscsesseiccscccrsscescnsecsnssiescenecevecenaucsesevesacivannsnssoeas seewsoenesuesesaseanenees 310 Pennine SEE CSS eseon EE ihc E ce va ecea ea arteactb lado ede eaedeaietncec hairdo sie datg edule ae teaaawomendertene Meaadaauedumaness 310 Defining Service for Catalog Items 20 0 0 cccccssssssesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 312 Defining Service for Inventory Items 2 0 0 0 cccessssssssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaasesseeeeesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeessaasesssseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaaas 314 BCTV ere a gs LOTE ene Re mm nn Oe ee ee ree 315 Adding a New Connectivity Zone cccccccccssssssssssssssssseseecccccceceseeaaaaeesssssseeeeeeccceeeeessaaaegsssssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeenaqaas 316 PSYC a FOU arses tseestenacosmnacuanaeauapaaanawaaiane tecanocueonbtiana evans E EAE EE EE EEEE SIEEN 320 Running Provisioning Request in an Interconnect Environmenl ccccccccccccccccssscscssssscsccsscssscscccssssssscees 321 SENE He ONMIN T ASKS ssis aa ea aa 322 Running Provisioning Request eesceseesseccccccccccccccosooccccccccecececcocooooseoscceccccceceeecocososso
228. e access The Location access tree is limited to the following elements Country City Building Floor Room RiT Technologies Ltd 502 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E Cubic E Other user defined m Rack Access Permission To grant permission click Edit apa ee Add Edit Security Group Webpage Dialog x Admin General Permissions Members Location Tree Re eee gE Israel Hl me uk El fs usa 7 No Location Figure 360 PV4E Screen Settings Access tab When the access permission boxes have been checked click Apply and then OK The settings have been saved and the screen returns to the Permissions tab Location Tree Checkbox When a high level box is checked in the location tree all sub elements beneath it are automatically selected The user must then deselect any checkbox where access permission is not granted When deselecting a checkbox all elements beneath it are automatically deselected No Location is treated the same as any other location Only the Administrator or a user with Administrator rights can create and modify users and can view and edit location access to users RiT Technologies Ltd 503 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The set default is the entire location tree for each user group and individual user Note All users regardless of their permissions are able to view all the organizations devices locations and links Validating User Access Permissio
229. e recognized on the switch RiT Technologies Ltd 208 PV4E User Manual V6 0 View Inventory Module Webpage Dialog i Dlink module 10 ports A General Ports i Hotes Service S U WD Name LastActivityDate VLAN Any Serv Y Port 01 09 06 2009 13 19 1 a Any Sew F Y Port 02 09 06 2009 13 19 1 AnyServF Port 03 AnyServF g Port 04 09 07 2009 10 25 1 Any Sew p Portos 09 07 2009 10 25 1 AnvServF a Port 06 O MAN HostName PMA 00 50 86 AC 26 7E oy Se l VLAN 1 5 From the View Inventory Module dialog click on the VLAN tab The VLANs that are defined on the switch are displayed RiT Technologies Ltd 209 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Gi View Inventory Module Webpage Dialog x Dink module 10 ports A General i LA i Notes Category System Detected 6 Click Close to return to the main properties view of the switch 7 From the main screen click on the VLAN tab The VLANs in use are displayed By FAE tis arm Bales reek Erpin en a ie x Ej By pr l eE a P LET E Marm 181153 FL Drie Debel System Debet Stom Detects Beb Earder ii BEF binier Expander 1 BE reii BHF Pra enerig aM seach tz Wo dwa W AANE 11 40 Cadog tiem added oo AF 1212 2008 11 37 Sitch scanning process oomi PLET D aaa 137 Inventory Ram Added Da a Waa 11 37 Irrenbors Mem aie 0A a 121272006 1d Catalog bem Saded Ei D 12 12 2008 11 36 Switch
230. e system The procedure to add an item to the Catalog is basically the same for all Items The information fields for specific Items vary and can include additional steps The following section explains in detail how to Add Edit and Delete Items in the Catalog Note The Catalog Item Types are arranged in logical order RIT recommends that you add items according to the order in the Catalog Tree Information added to the first item is available in drop down lists for later items For example if you add a number of Vendors they are available in a drop down list for use in every catalog item Adding an Item When adding items to the Catalog it is important to add them in a logical order For example when you add a Connector to the Catalog you will need to specify the Vendor or supplier of the Connector First define the Vendor or supplier before defining the Connector An Item can be added to an existing Class or an existing Item can be assigned to a different Class To Add an Item 1 Select the Item Type Class or Functional Type to which you want to add an Item RiT Technologies Ltd 44 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 The Add Item dialog can be accessed in two ways 1 Right click on the selected Item Type Class or Functional Type and select the Add Item function from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Action button in the Catalog Toolbar and Select Add Class Note The first option will be used to describe a
231. e technician is guided through the process of connecting and disconnecting the patch cords to complete the links defined in the system The LED above each port blinks to guide the technician through the process until all the changes have been made Until the actual physical link has been performed the system shows the relevant ports as having a link pending status As soon as the link is made whether a new link or a changed link the system registers this and the link status symbol changes to show the ports as linked Requirement Ports in the same row cannot be connected Ports 1 16 can only be connected to Ports 17 24 Ports in the same row cannot be connected Ports 1 16 can only be connected to Ports 17 24 25 40 or 41 48 Ports in the same row cannot be connected Ports 1 24 can only be connected to Ports 25 48 When updating the system after Catalog Items are defined and the Inventory Items are assigned to their correct locations their connectivity needs to be defined in the database RiT Technologies Ltd 268 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Tip A wiring layout showing the physical cable layout of the network should be available in order to define the links accurately in the system See Planning the Project section in the Setting up Projects Chapter Note The P LET Module discovers the Stations and the Station Outlet link If you are using the P LET Module there is no need to define the Station Outlet link
232. e that each device was found by the Discovery Module The time difference is then compared to the different time limits defined by the user When a time limit exceeds a specified threshold the time limit of the device is automatically changed and the device is moved to one of the above four stages This change is automatic and cannot be managed manually Note Every device which is detected for the first time is associated with the Active Status TO move from one stage to another the time interval that has passed since the last stage must be greater than the time defined by the user If no time thresholds are set then all devices are considered active RiT Technologies Ltd 418 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Device Status Movement A device status is bidirectional and can move from one status to another for example a device can be changed from Active to Idle and from Idle to Active However once an item moves from the dormant stage to decommissioned it is deleted from the PV4E database and will no longer exist in the application Activating the Inactive Device Module In PV4E select Setting gt P LET The following screen opens Alarm x Refresh W Logout Administrator REPORTS HELP l FOR THE Enterprise LAN Mapper LAN Server Switch Traps Inactive Device 10 100 40 271 Default SNMP Settings Version SNMPvi Timeout ms 2000 Start Scanning Retries 2 Stop Scanning Details Select the Inactive Device tab
233. e to add to the Edit Link Worksheet and position the cursor over the icon or one of the icons of the selection Click on the item or selection 3 Drag to the Edit Link Worksheet and drop in the required cell The ports of the item s will be added to the Edit Link Worksheet in the selected cells gt PY4E Windows Internet Explorer P YMAX PY Alarm R Refresh OBETU Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLS v SETTINGS Y REPORTS w HELP v FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Connectors f Room 100 E Cabinet 1 E cago HP Paneli g Rack 1 amp Room 101 E Room 102 a Floor 02 Front Back Service 5 ID Name ID Name Any Servii Port 01 Port 01 Back 01 Back 01 Any Servii Port 02 Port 02 Back 02 Back 02 Any Servii Port 03 Port 03 Back 03 Back 03 Any Servii Port 04 Port 04 Back 04 Back 04 Any Servii Port 05 Port 05 Back 05 Back 05 Any Servii Port 06 Port 06 Back 06 Back 06 sh Sere Any Servi Port 07 PortO7 Back07 Back07 B Raki Any Servii Port 08 Port 08 _ Back08_ _ Back 08 y Edit Link Webpage Dialog X ciel ie ote Back 01 Panel 01 Port 01 an mM on kw Nm Panel 01 Port 02 4 Panel 01 Port 03 E E F Panel 01 Port 7 Panel 01 Port o7 Panel 11 Part NA Auto Flip T Tooltip Figure 198 Inserting an Item in an Open Worksheet gt To drag and drop a Port into an open Worksheet 1 Open an Edit Link Worksheet if one is not open 2 Open the
234. echnologies Ltd 293 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To break a Static link ls In the Location or Topology Tree locate the item or ports where the links need to be disconnected Drag and drop the item ports into the Edit Link worksheet or select the ports and click on the Edit Links button The item ports will appear in the worksheet with all the ports that it is currently linked to Select the cells containing the ports that are to be linked Click on the Break Link button The Link Status Symbols change from TT to cial Create a Work Order optional Click on the Apply button The Link Status Symbols change from to 1 a gt To break a Mixed link d In the Location or Topology Tree locate the item or ports where the links need to be disconnected Drag and drop the item ports into the Edit Link worksheet or select the ports and click on the Edit Links button The item ports will appear in the worksheet with all the ports that it is currently linked to Select the cells containing the ports that are to be linked Click on the Break Link button The Link Status Symbols change from TT to k Create a Work Order optional Click on the Apply button The Link Status Symbols change from a to 1 r Canceling a Dynamic Link An edit link task that has been created and is part of an existing Edit Link Worksheet can be cancelled if its status is Pending This occurs after the Apply button has been clicked The Close
235. ecific I tems to the Catalog This section specifies how to enter new catalog items into the catalog The section supplies representative items per type Adding a Vendor to the Catalog A Vendor is any source from which you procure the Hardware and Software Equipment you use in your network gt To Add a Vendor 1 In the Catalog tree right click on the Item Type Vendor and then select Add Item from the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Vendor dialog opens Type in the name of the vendor 3 Type in the URL if required 4 Select a Class optional if previously defined by clicking on the 7 button and select a class from the pull down list A class can be added by clicking on the Add button and filling in the required information T Add Edit Latalig endor Webpage Dialog ii Tern oe A ee Desc ploi Use this Add bulion to ack a Class if required Figure 32 Using Add Buttons 5 To insert an Address for this item click the lower Add button Optional 6 Fill in the address es as follows RiT Technologies Ltd 50 PV4E User Manual V6 0 iaddress city state Country ZIP Description GE glr or Building name Optional Optional Optional Figure 33 Adding an Address 7 To add another address to this Item click on the Add button The indicator moves to the active address line Add the relevant information 8 To remove an address click on the address line that you want t
236. ecoaevarsaasantanaseannss 284 Using the Auto flip Feature icc tuaactutnoeniapie sondaneniocpineounoatniarnepioesadabenadionm veapieaainiesesledanbanin Uonsenenennneabanabyeeenhankelstmecnies 284 Manually flipping the HiKY S ic 0c2ssannoenvcatavoataasnecakecwaessuianspvaaannbensaienn peanuasnansesscsneanne otmnmidagsauantuaeepecensanndesmecnts 285 Link Stas SV lS serasi ron aE E tecahocbeabonnianad gnenaattaanceannesnmeoesaaamanudesaneatiacenbotmeunadsunsanaanntanedeaness 286 E BE E E T E E 287 Creatine and Editing Links iresss cece cccecececcaccececcseceseacisscsncctcceasacescssccesecencecescssuceseceatacacenancesecconccsesstacecessaacenecseaces 288 Coa aL a AE E E E E AE E E 288 eta E T r AS ee E E E A A T tT eT er er Te 290 Viewing the ntas of SCOUTS LINK PONS rariss EE EE E EE 292 Bekar or CMM a E E E AE 292 BE aL e E eae sess detects A E ened R 293 Canceling Dynamic Link sciwicssnacieesvocsvedasvenieasavedsecsdaabeossuaeavudaaeealeacencdoeocbacuetwesotdnbveoniawanestcbaiaxueeximesuectanebe 294 Clearing the Link Edit Worksheet 0 ccccccccssseeessssseeeeeecceeeecccesseecenscesssseeseeeceececccaessceceasssseeeeeeeeeeeanees 295 View Items Panels Ports and LinkS essssseeccssecccossecccossceccoscccccssececossceccosseeccoseseccssssceccssseccosssecossecccssseecossse 296 Portata NICAL ONS eean E oe EO aE r E pecan ore a Ea ae E NET AE E EE EA ES 296 View Link from Location or Topology sesesssssssssssseseerererssssssssssseeseese
237. ecognizing the PVMax devices During this phase it will automatically recognize the PVMax Security Controller and insert it in the PVMax Topology as a ghost View ghost The PVMax Security Controller ghost has only one tab in its data properties in the GUI The initial name of the device is its unique serial number and is shown in the Topology tab Inserting a Ghost adding it to the inventory Inserting a PVMax Security Controller ghost is the same as with any other PVMax device gt To insert a PVMax Security Controller Ghost 1 Right click on the PVMax Security Controller ghost from the System View Topology tree 2 From the context menu select Insert PVMax Security Controller The Add New screen opens 4 Specify the name in the Catalog Name field in the pull down menu Specify the location in the location field 6 Specify the inventory name in the Inventory field Note The Auto Naming button is used to create two or more Security Controller devices 7 Click OK The Security Controller has been added to the inventory Assign Replace and Remove a Security Controller gt Assign an Existing PVMax Security Controller Assigning a PVMax Security Controller ghost is the same as with any other PVMax device The multi select function can be used to assign or insert a Security Controller To multi select a group hold down the Alt key and select with the mouse E To select several that are not in succession Hold
238. ected E The number of Unauthorized MACs detected The LANServer Unauthorized Summary On completion of the LANServer a summary event that includes the following information is received mE Number of new unauthorized devices that could not be placed in a location E Number of unauthorized devices placed in low security locations E Number of unauthorized devices placed in high security locations E Number of unauthorized devices placed in normal security locations A New unauthorized device is an unauthorized MAC that was detected by the PV4E by the last LAN Server run GUI Indications The location tree and search results views do not present any indications for items having unauthorized MAC addresses Terminal Equipment Addition Deletion The MAC address is automatically authorized when you add terminal equipement devices and specify its MAC address When you delete a terminal equipment device the MAC address is removed from the authorized MACs list Switch Call Manager Detection Deletion When the switch or a call manager is detected by the user its MAC address is authorized automatically provided that the server determines an IP to MAC relation When it is deleted the MAC address is removed from the authorized MACs list RiT Technologies Ltd 417 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Router Scanning During subnets scanning routers MACs are automatically authorized provided that the server determines an IP to MAC relat
239. ected to your network SiteBuilder refer to SiteBuilder Manual An Excel based utility that offers an alternative way of uploading large amounts of PV4E related information onto the PV4E database Dashboard refer to Dashboard Manual Provides role oriented policy based visibility into the network infrastructure status When specific items such as asset utilization information broken links and unauthorized patches require your attention Dashboard lets you drill down immediately into the relevant details before you act RiT Technologies Ltd 6 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E SDK Designed to enable customers and integrators to utilize PV4E and implement its fully automated provisioning capabilities across their networks RiT Technologies Ltd 7 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 2 PV4E Overview This chapter presents an overview of PV4E Note This entire user guide contains links and references Use the Ctrl key and point with the mouse to view references to return to the previous position hold down the Alt key and the left arrow on your keyboard PatchView System PV4E is a physical layer network management system It provides real time information on the status of connections between users and equipment at the wiring rack reports all connectivity changes to PV4E and guides the system administrator in planning and implementing wiring changes PatchView together with PV4E makes cable management easy even in lo
240. ectivity Zone is a collection of panels ports within panels The automated provisioning module restricts connectivity only between panels ports which belong to the same connectivity zone Each panel can be defined as part of one or many groups Provisioning Rules In order to allocate the best resources according to the organization s policy the automated provisioning has several sets of rules Filtering Rules This set of rules is intended to eliminate any elements which do not comply with the specific provisioning request criteria The automated provisioning is deployed with the following filtering rules by default m Service filtering rule This rule eliminates any link item outlet port switch port etc whose service does not match the service required for the specific request For example if you want to move a device with service Red to location which has only outlets with service Green then all the outlets are disqualified and the request fails E VLAN filtering rule This rule eliminates any link switch port whose VLAN does not match the VLAN required for the specific request For example consider a scenario where the user wants to move a device with VLAN 120 to a different room If the target room can be fed with VLAN 120 then the provisioning request fails Outlet filtering rule In some cases a provisioning request will require that the newly created link should go through a specific outlet In this ca
241. ed RiT Technologies Ltd 206 PV4E User Manual V6 0 75 DVAF z a F aeaa A PV4E Windows Internet Explorer JU JEJ PVMAX P LET arm K Refresh Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY FOR THE Enterprise _ Location Topology Users Dlink Switch Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Modules Settings Notes Location Amber Inc Functional Type Switch E E Belgium Class D Link 5 2 PVMax Controller 2 Catalog Name Dlink Switch I Ef Belgium IP 10 100 90 12 Demo MAC lt 4 Comm Room P LET Status P LET Supported E Cabinet 1 Serial No Type Demo Rack No of Slots Size U Power W Arm Side Weight KG Location Demo Comm Room Demo Rack Scanner 1 T Masteri 10 100 20 22 lt Room 201 lt 4 Room 205 Events 3 f Demo2 7 Fe as Info Date Time Event Code Event Category i 09 10 2009 09 43 Work Order Task Created m Work Order Figure 152 PV4E Maintenance Screen Once the switch has been scanned the P LET Status is Online 2 Click the Modules tab 2 PVAE Windows internet Explorer J L JEJ PVMAX P LET Alarm Refresh Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELP Y 5 FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Dlink Switch Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Modules VLAN Settings Notes gt Location Amber inc ______SlotNo a Name Catalog Name Status 4 Ef Belgium s Fa 1 Dlin
242. ed The following tables summarize the change when a switch port status Is changed Switch Port Status Change Change generated by the Discovery Module The following table shows the implications of the switch port status changed by the Discovery Module After the Initial Status Discovery I mplications Module Delete Access Point and devices TRUNK that were connected to it UNDEFI NED Port status will be changed An Access Point is added and all MAC addresses associated to this switch port are connected to the Access Point TRUNK UNDEFI NED Port status will be changed UNDEFINED HUB ACCESE Point added ane link all devices connected to it Change the status of port UNDEFINED Delete everything that was connected to the port Change Generated by User The following table shows the implications of the switch port status changed by the user Changed by User I mplications Initial Status RiT Technologies Ltd 433 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Changed by User TRUNK The Haale men will not override these settings The Discovery Module re analyzes UNDEFINED the port status during its next scan HUB The Discovery Module will not override these settings Initial Status I mplications The Discovery Module re analyzes UNDEFI NED the port status during its next scan Port status changed The Discovery UNDEFINED HUB Module will not override these values Port status changed The Discovery UN
243. ee and select Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade dialog opens Location Topology PVMAX Topology PatchView Subnet General PY Topology r Mode Physical Logical Software Upgrade Detect Master Offline G Software Upgrade Webpage Dialog Software Upgrade Device Type PVMAX Master Name Location IP Address E Indude Sub Location iv E b Functional Type MasterSWVer sLocation rc E 2147484579 Master Expander 02 55 0 E Master Master 02 41 UK Show Room Demo Rack 1 0 i ae Total Records 2 File Name Figure 357 Software Upgrade dialog 4 Select the Masters or Master Expanders to whose devices you want to Upgrade 5 Optional Click the link in the Expander SW Ver or Scanner SW Ver to view the list of expanders and scanners that will be updated for the specific Master The Software List dialog opens Note The Software List dialog shows devices that are currently connected and those that are no longer connected The Upgrade process only updates connected devices RiT Technologies Ltd 500 PV4E User Manual V6 0 6 Click Close in the Software List dialog Click one of the Device Type options Masters PVMax Scanner and Expander Each device type has its own specific software and download file 8 Click the Browse button to browse to the software file you want to download Note For Masters the software file has a BIN extension For PVMax Scanners and Expanders the software
244. eeeeaaas 411 Changing a Security Zone Setting cccccccccccccccceeeeeeseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeaseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 414 FV GING n E A E 415 New Device Authorized oepa e A AEO E SE EEE EESE E E 416 Device Authorized for Existing Device ssssseseseeeeeeessssssssssssssssssetrerrresssssssssssseerereeesssssssssssseeeeeeeesssssss 416 Unauthorized Device Dette Cte scree E AEE TEER EEES 416 The LANServer Unauthorized Summary cccsceccccececccccccaaeesssssseeeeeececeeeeeeeeaaeaassseseeeeseceeeeeeeeeaaeaaaas 417 CUC AUT ONS r E EE E E E E 417 Terminal Equipment Addition Deletion cccccseeecececcceeccccaaaeessesseeeeeceeeeeeeeseeaaassesnseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaas 417 Switch Call Manager Detection Deletion cccccccccssssssssssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaseesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaaassassenses 417 Router gC AIAN E sesser erosen nna EE EES EEE E AE EEEE EN EEEE SENES 418 1 GS e E ET E A E E 418 Inactive DG VICe Module cpress siasa enne sN eer aa EES ARS ENE EEEE ERa 418 RiT Technologies Ltd xii PV4E User Manual V6 0 Deyice Status Movement os 2c522 ccncsancdcascasadennasmensnan saacthoscactan ss oaccennanneassahoneeteeededsasnaaad ees aesenaseioagdunetenceenad etaduandons 419 Activating the Inactive Device Module ccccccccccssssssssssssssscsscccccccccccccccccssssssscscccccccccccccccscscssssssssccscscscosooes 419 SCDE TU TINS LIMES sss E E O 420 Pte Time
245. eeeesaaaaaesesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 91 Usmo TO e E E 92 Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class cccccsssessseeeeceeeeeeeeeecaaaaeeesnseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaasaasssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 93 CHAPTER 5 SETTING UP PROJECTS ssnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 96 Settings Up Projects Overview ssesscvevevscesscescscesseseinssassvsvnssvevasencsdesvadsssessanassesvedsveesseavsestausvasauadavsustvasvassuabdusesteess 96 Planom De Projet berses cess vesssvau saben te auvasasvasheuecheniaceswesvies aseecssteasvecetinwesces 98 PV Hardware Previous Version cccccccceseccceseccceeecceceecsccusececaueeccuuecsscusececuuecssseeecsssunecessuecesueecsseneeseeees 99 Location VV AOSE 99 Seluna up he Location Iree sossen aaeoa aaaea a E 100 Naming Locations and Items in the Location Tr e ecccecccccssssssssccceccecocccscssssececccccccccccccsssssescccecececsseessssss 101 AMEN m Pea a E E E E E ET E E N E 101 The Auto Naming Wy OW cc eweticewe siaceiatevcsamnssate i S E EET E E 102 TOCA Ly poSI 110 Adding Editing and Deleting a Location enssesssssessssseeeeeeerresssssssssssssecteerrsesssssssssssseererrressrressssssssssseeeeeeeeo 111 Adding a First Level Locations ceinen niai aa ie ean pa aane aaae ia Eas 112 Adding a Location under a Parent Level sssssseeeeeeccececcceneaeeessssseeseececceceeessueaaegasssseeeesececeeeesenaaags 113 Fdinne a LOCA ON rraidh eden rana n E rA iT O 115
246. efault Station Manual Last Activity Date RA Power W Weight KG Default Seater USA Adanta Bldg A Floor 1 Room 101 ff hyperlink EventCode Event Category ee Phoe o o 06 09 2009 11 78 User Logged In License Figure 222 Single View Screen To view the default values of the selected device default station is used in the above example click the screen The relevant device catalog screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 308 in the General Tab PV4E User Manual V6 0 FA view Catalog Webpage Dialog Default Station Adapters Software Functional Type Station Class Default Station Description Type Stand Alone CPU RAM Weight KG Power W Arm Side Monitor No of Slots Size U Vendor Name Vendor Part No Image Name Default Station Figure 223 Default Station RiT Technologies Ltd 309 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Double View gt To move around the tree using the Split View Screen 1 Click the plus sign icon to expand the next level 2 Click the minus sign icon to collapse the lower levels The Double View option allows you to view the Location tree on both sides of the screen The drag and drop feature is particularly useful when the tree is elongated Select the item items from the Location tree on the left hand side of the screen and drag to a new location in the location tree on the right hand side of the screen The operation can also be reversed i e rig
247. ems race etre E E E dame puso ome T E oie iden Ge niles A E 204 POS TAS IN CWS IC Scars tusrcaeyve siete tesco EEA miodent sabe smabiiveabderemesatacndontnett 204 Automatically Detecting aS With ess sscsccntecacscmastacvowehsceseuanacusancsxowaaied EEEE E 205 PEG ASS MMI SF cpa tars ct R E E ea e0 cians Sonics ded posh ome een ont E E 211 Manually Adding and Scanning a SWItchn cccccccceccccccccecceeceaeeeeeseseesseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaaaasssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaas 212 Adding a Router to LocalUser E SEE E EE E ESEU EN AE 219 Ada PE or HUD LOC O aa E E A EE E EE ET 220 A E E E E EE E E E E EE AAEE 221 Adding Terminal Eguipment to Location seriis niinen n EE EKE EEE EAA EEEE 221 ING LOCAT O ricsi EERE ES EE E EAEE 224 Adding Items to No Location J siucis cocadssgnntesntadnnetseascdoceasaeaedaaananacotadnned yacseneasauadsagsasaustgdobadnes apdQsuassonedsaaiesiensanees 224 TO OLOGY aa esas sdavestensaeesietaaa sev eusuauaseedsbeasensus eas esteaains 224 Detecting New Hardware in PVMax Topology ccccsssssssessesecccceeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeaeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaaas 225 Adding Updating and Removing Equipment in PVMax Topology ccccccccccccccccceeesssseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 230 U SOTS cascsustsneserssccscevecddussosessansesssoscninacesesseuuayasnesssuassceeaunescesssausduoavsnsisvensssanwescesarasssuddverssaeeedusescceauausssossanadcoeussaeese 232 Adding Editing Moving and Deleting Users cccceccccccc
248. ents for which the user should be notified and click the OK button The Add Events window closes and the Add Edit Notification to User window is updated with the selected events 6 If you want to configure filters for the event notification refer to Configuring Event Notification Filters on page 488 7 Click the OK button The event notification is updated and active Configuring Event Notification Filters To configure event notification filters 1 In the Add Edit Notification to Event window select the users for whom you want to configure a filter and click the Add Edit Filter button Or in the Add Edit Notification to Users window select the events for which you want to configure a filter and click the Add Edit Filter button The Add Edit Filter window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 488 PV4E User Manual V6 0 f A Add Edit Filter Webpage Dialog Eal User Name Administrator Event Name Catalog Item Added tedwie Devices Time start Week Day sunday Thursday Monday Friday Tuesday Saturday Le Figure 348 Add Edit Filter Window Filtering event notification by schedule You can send notification of events only if they occur on certain days of the week or at certain times of the day or only during certain dates See steps 2 to 4 m Filtering event notification by device You can send notification of events only if they occur on certain devices or locations See step 5 4 To filte
249. er 1 Station 2 davidr Room 103 Room 104 Room 105 Room 106 Room 107 Room 108 Room 109 c o a o i V6 0 TOOLSY SETTINGSY Single View Double View Swap Remove a9 Floor 2 Move Swap Change requests demonstrations te Floor 3 Add request demonstrations REPORTSY sharonk General Adapters Functional Type Station Class Catalog Name Status CPU Manual Monitor Arm Side No of Slots Serial No Location Events Info Date Time Event Code 06 09 2009 11 28 User Logged In Figure 236 PV4E Main Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 326 Default Station Default Station W Logout Administrator FOR THE Enterprise Software Last Activity Date RAM Power W Weight KG USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 1 Room 101 Event Category License PV4E User Manual V6 0 You can also drag and drop the device to its new location The Single View window is used as an example When the item items are moved to the new location in the Location tree the following Move Equipment screen opens g Move Equipment Webpage Dialog Move Equipment _Equipment List _Location Tree Name From To Location gt sharonk USA Atlanta Bidg A Floor 1 Roon USA Atlanta Bidg A Floor 1 Roo UK USA Fh Atlanta fF Bldg A a Floor i CRi Room 100 Room 101 Room 102 Ff Outlet 3 Room 105 Room 104 Room 105 Room 106 Room 107 E Ep a 23 9 3 d Remove From List
250. er results and place them in the location tree If a device was not previously defined in the location tree then it will be placed in No Location Note It is recommended to only Auto Detect Switches and Routers RiT Technologies Ltd 405 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To open Auto Detect 1 From the Tools Module select Auto Detect The Auto Detect dialog opens WORK ORDER TOOLS SETTINGS Location Top 0 lon aaa PBX Import Patchview Subnet CF Topology El 40 100 0 0 104 Import from a File Export to a File tf 00 01 66 2C C5 4E EISI cutem Status A 00 07 6E 02 00 0F 10 100 20 Device Authorization amp 00 07 6E 02 08 20 10 100 40 f 00 0B B3 00 03 51 10 100 40 158 amp 00 08 83 00 0E SE 10 100 50 24 f 00 0B B3 1F B4F5 10 100 40 152 00 0B B3 98 D8 AE 10 100 40 156 A 00 0C 29 C1 0D 80 10 100 39 W 00 10 83 F4 91 33 10 100 10 21 Figure 313 Selecting Auto Detect 2 Select Switches and Routers 3 Click Detect Auto Detect The selected Items will automatically be inserted under No Location Td Switches and Routers 2 i Stations Detect 3 Figure 314 Auto Detect dialog The Process will be logged in the Event Log RiT Technologies Ltd 406 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The discovered switches and routers will no longer have the red cross icon showing These devices have been placed in No Location and need to be dragged
251. er a description Vendor Name From the drop down list select the name of the vendor You can click Add to enter a name that is missing from the list Vendor Part Number Enter part number if known Image Name Enter image name or click ellipsis to view full list 6 In the Ports tab Enter the name of the port and select the connector from the drop down menu this is applicable for both front and back ports x General Service Name Front 01 RJ 45 Back 01 Internal select service Port Naming Port Duplicate RiT Technologies Ltd 447 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Defining a Chassis in the Catalog The following section of this user guide explains how to add enclosure items to the Catalog gt To define a new chassis in the Catalog do the following 1 From the Setting menu select Catalog SETTINGS Y 2 From the Catalog tree click the Terminal Equipment node Expand until you see the Station node Alternatively you can drill down to any of the classes below a Station node before you move to the next step T Adapter ed Terminal Equipment IP Phone 1 KVM Device 0 EA Ad l Printer 1 Station 41 IG Li mr BE i e Telephone 1 3 Stand on Station and right click select Add Chassis from the context menu Terminal Equipment i IP Phone 1 KVM Device 0 A E Printer 1 Station 41 Telephone Jo va Be if L Netwo
252. er to address switch traps sent from the switch This is the default setting Note The Monitor Traps field will only be ticked if the switch traps scheduler is enabled and the Discovery Module Switch Traps are activated 3 To disable switch traps for the selected switch click Edit The Add Edit Inventory Switch dialog opens 4 Uncheck the Monitor Traps checkbox to set if the system not to address the switch s traps 5 Click OK to continue Verify that the physical switches in the network enable switch traps Inserting Switches to Inventory Using LAN Mapper After a switch is detected by LAN Mapper and added to the Topology Subnet tree the switch needs to be added to the inventory There are two methods Insert RiT Technologies Ltd 400 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Insert and Copy Structure gt To insert a switch into the inventory The Insert procedure inserts switches into the inventory that were detected and scanned by LAN Mapper without scanning them a second time ile From the Topology tab select the Subnet radio button The Topology tree structure is displayed Right click on a switch with a red cross on it and choose Insert Loca ton PatchVview Topology Subnet Topology 10 100 0 0 104 g z i P z r G 2 m Z in z i o 2 E z 00 00 0C 07 AC 01 10 100 40 21 00 01 E6 20 C5 4E 10 100 10 3 00 07 GE 02 00 0F 10 100 20 201 0
253. eration or Consolidate to perform the multi NIC consolidation m When the consolidation process ends all the devices in the location tree will be merged into a single device The NIC cards of the consolidated device appear in the Adapter tabs of the new device The following figures illustrate the final result RiT Technologies Ltd 440 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Hh Atlanta El ih NYC E DCi El Floor 1 El a Halli Row A H a Rows Elf RowC El Bl Cabinet 5 Hel ci Es C2 E DCIHIC PP20 Ge DCIHICPP21 O DcHic 525 DCH1IC 325 General Adapters Software Owner Notes Slot Functional Type Name ae NIC Bas 1 00 00 00 00 00 01 2 MIC 10 Base T i 00 00 00 00 00 01 No of Ports MAC Service 5 ID t i Any Servi F E The manual consolidation does not allow you to run this procedure for a single NIC card Any attempt to perform this operation will result in the following error message Microsoft Internet Explorer ed A Please select at least two stations for the consolidation operation RiT Technologies Ltd 441 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Automatic Virtual Server Support The Automatic Virtual Server Support feature enables the discovery of virtual machines and their host server PC as well as consolidation of virtual machines with their physical host server This solution can be confi
254. erreerssssssssssssseeetereressssssssssssssseeeereeeeo 296 View Lak On Pane ana n E E EE E E a E e E E ie 297 Viewing Information about an Item in the Link 20 0 0 ccccccsssesssseseseeeeecceeeeeeeeseaaaaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 298 RTA Eaa 6 r A E A I A A A E A E E E AAE OI E A E E 299 SPH TEMAS osse EEEE EER 300 Ey EDE Se E E E E E E E E S 301 CHAPTER 7 AUTOMATED PROVISIONING ccccsescceesecseseeenseeeeeeseeseseeneees 302 E T EAN EN ccs PA A E A E O E N E O E AA E A N A A AE A A 302 EEA D i E A EN EEES E EE EN O ENE A N N I E A VE E AA IEE A A A 302 Morks pace DCN OD recne e E E E E E E 303 BEC TS IB CIN E E E A E E E A A E E A E E O 303 Connectivity Zone DEHN OMS rensei on OEA E EEEE EESTE 304 Provisionina RUlCS sssini aaa 304 PUG TN ROI e ce E E E E 304 OT RU a E E E E E 304 Operation Generation RUNS soy aenssanccrcsias aae E E r E EEEa 306 OED Ran E E E E E E TA A E E E E A A T 306 RiT Technologies Ltd x PV4E User Manual V6 0 Work Orders and Task Sissis aaaeaii aE a Nae 306 Provisioning module General orientation sssssssssssecccccccccccssssssesccecececccccssssossssssscccccceccccccossssssescececeeeosse 306 Location TEA sje tee straw seater te tara ese E dew scawe bees twat osetia vatatinn sleds ees pede bie buuiaasiebetnaseesweecoee 306 Locanon TS ots states etarsite E E 307 IV UTS SS CIC CH ONS sissies stem ncaiietasaizteebeci EE E stains ee bisigauieeadwasieret anced a Ta 307 Single View Double View in th
255. ery Module indicator button is greeni The LAN Server will run automatically at the selected time During its activation a tooltip indicate the percentage of switches the discovery module scanned so far The LAN Server can also be activated manually gt To activate the LAN Server manually 1 From the Settings module select P LET from the drop down menu 2 Select the LAN Server tab 3 Click the Start Scanning button to start the manual scan RiT Technologies Ltd 409 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 The results of the scan are noted in the Event Log gt PV4E Windows Internet Explorer PVMAX Alarm Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY i FOR THE Enterprise Catalog Scheduler Permissions Msg Filtering System Tables Work Order PatchView Elements PBX Mail Configuration Event Notification Cable Test Results Connectivity Zone Call Manager Software Upgrade Metric Specifications JALG 4 Info Date Time Eve Je Event Category 07 09 2009 14 01 P LET Process Completed P LET 07 09 2009 14 01 P LET Statistic Information P LET 07 09 2009 14 01 LANServer Unauthorized Devices Summar Device Locator 07 09 2009 13 59 P LET Process Started P LET 07 09 2009 13 50 Batch Completed Successfully DB 07 09 2009 13 50 Batch Process Started DB Figure 318 Activating the LAN Server LAN Server Results There will be two types of results Devices that were successfully manage
256. es the name of the device the date and the time Unmanaged Devices Note When the Managed Unmanaged Devices process is running the Discovery Module indicator button is yellow O When running the LAN Server PV4E automatically detects and places all the devices within the network creating a full link for each device Devices that have certain information missing not allowing a full link to be created are called unmanaged devices RiT Technologies Ltd 422 PV4E User Manual V6 0 This missing information can be Missing IP check for subnets that did not have access permission or were not located by the LAN Mapper Invalid link A link that is not valid A valid link starts with a switch port and terminates with an outlet port or starts with a switch port and terminates with a panel that is designated as a link terminator This is where a panel is used for multiple outlets See Setting Up Projects Chapter Adding a Patch Panel You can view the Unmanaged Devices and choose to add them to the location tree and or link them manually gt To view Unmanaged Devices 1 Open the Maintenance Module 2 Select P LET from the bottom toolbar 3 Select Unmanaged Devices from the menu D PY4E Windows Internet Explorer PVMAX Alarm gt Refresh W Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY FOR THE Enterprise Location ie Jy Users DC2 Tree Telecommunicaton Infrastructure General i
257. essssssoocccecesseessssssssoososececssscseeesssssssssssssesee 13 DETR SY T WN EA E E E E E E E E EE E E E 14 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED nannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nne 17 MUTED TL a T D A A E A A P A E AE E A E A E 17 E A A a e AT N ie A vs pk E ein toad E TE N EE E 17 Ee in Ee E Ml ae eee E N E ee te E A A N ny ee re eT re 19 IPVGE Graphie User Interi ite sissors anena aea EEEE nE AAEEen VESNE nasaan 19 ADO I e E E E E E E edoniveceseniaeeenesecetet 21 D T E E E ackyoqemietes 21 STNG DV e N E A E A E T E E E E A E 21 Na BE O arae N E E E i 21 BVO T E NE AE E E E E AE E E T E A E EA E ET 22 Ala W armine adC Ois essene a a a E e E aee E oien ae 23 Refresh and Logout TSU ONS vores cassucsscicarcacdnadacasasdtecosdackatusatsieseaswasacdaesceagnacacersanadardencndhaenesdasdonumsbesusatcwmposenss 24 Tue Toolbar sch cha canctcanpencncaatonateaesotenebapcant checasawsiesonsscencescnceagsect ceeaataven atsscacuurescvte Error Bookmark not defined PACTE IVLCTIU S E cbsaudontuaeteneteravstacdiaieanceecucardd 24 Pop up VECSS AS eSa 24 Selecting Events to Appear as Pop Ups ssssssssssssssseeereresssssssssssssseeeeresssssssssssssssertrereeessssssssssssseerrresesesssssssees 24 RiT Technologies Ltd iv PV4E User Manual V6 0 Popup e amp lEn E E E 2 Selecting the Hardware ENnvironmMenl cccccccccccssssssssssssssssssssccscccccccccccccscssssssssssssscsssscccccccssssscssssssssscscceees 27 SC AF CHI
258. est Source Path 1 To change the path Click Edit The following screen opens G Edit Cable Test Result Webpage Dialog F Cable Test source path specification Cable Test tree path C1 RiT Technologies Ltd 261 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Figure 189 Edit Cable Test Result Path The path is entered in a text edit box manually You do not choose the path from a directory tree dialog The path change takes effect immediately Click OK in the Edit dialog box PV4E checks if the directory exists and is accessible If an invalid string is entered or PV4E detects a problem in the GUI a proper message will appear Viewing a Port Cable Test Results There are two options for viewing cable test results 1 The first is from a menu in the View Link This is a new menu that opens when you right mouse click on the port View link Webpage Dialog 1 Toa EE Til Ada a Hilal ti F i oe Fee e Egem col FF i ata B E2 0 El F i cc B F Lu LL LS tf Module A1 Optic Panel X3 Cable Y X 41 Optc Panel 2 Optic Panel 1 Cable 7 1 Optic Panel 71 Station Servic TE amir aa End 1 Port 01 Port 03 End i Port 07 Port 01 Show Link Test Results Figure 190 View Link Note The Show Channel Test Result option does not apply to Panels but only for switches and outlets 2 The second is from switch gt panel gt outlet properties view RiT Technologies Ltd 262 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 PV4E
259. esunee 445 Pass through Modules assisas aa E aa 445 Adding an Item to Pass through Class 5 2cicsca 2cacectinconsscustenumsencanandengatenasnceeas tos snseuteaaaceeaadeebnrond tea alebamcdaionendanends 445 Defining a Chassis m the Catalog iussisse 448 General Chassis SHINES susnnsserssamcancncansrwoeauvenictanestootedextenismoutcausouensennassdmctenuesnsecnautesearersenataianceusueaeansmetancanass 449 Setune the Bay Layout 1m the Chassis siccacsscicondtsaddeadsaduatanpsinntonssiss nowanlhdiunitlennnsakewetaianbonesuasadeubilentmannadsiecbonhwonmetwausetds 450 Setting the Number of Connectivity Modules and Management Modulles ccccccccecccceeenssseeeeeseeeeeeeees 451 Adding Modules to a Chassis sscanaseavensaverieanonsesetinetonsueanussinssasentanaselansbenabaduauiehtankvaasnhndoanhaNedsiatiaanaioubiantsoamedandns 452 RiT Technologies Ltd xiii PV4E User Manual V6 0 Linking Bays to Connectivity Modules cccccccccccssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesauaeasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 454 Adding Adapters to the CASSIS v 2 5 scene ssansastennsantdnenesneseonedaaganaguannannadsessansuvegsauadensaedadebsdenadNecdunopansivnedeaadesicntauees 456 Adding a Blade Chassis and Blades to the Inventorry cccccccssssssssssssssssssssssscssccccccccccccccccssssssssssscscsccoooes 456 Adding a Blade Chassis scsivcivvecesaesoosavguvvebsdesavsasveavenesseaveisdnasuvehavesdeaksnasvesbsVeeveeeknasnivesvaavenbiwstanssaven
260. eters Deleting an Item An Item can only be deleted if it has not been referenced in the inventory gt To Delete an Item 1 In the Catalog tree locate the Item you want to delete RiT Technologies Ltd 48 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The Delete command can be accessed in two ways 1 Right click on the Item in the Catalog tree and select the Delete function from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Delete button in the Catalog Toolbar A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion Click either the OK or the Cancel button to proceed The selected Item will be deleted from the Catalog tree and from the database gt To Delete a Multiple Selection of I tems L 2 In the Catalog tree locate and select the first Item that you want to delete For a consecutive list hold down the lt Alt gt key and select another item on the list All items between these items will be selected For a non consecutive list hold down the lt Ctrl gt key and select the individual Items The Delete command can be accessed in two ways 1 Right click on the selection and select the Delete function from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Delete button in the Catalog Toolbar A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion Click either the OK or the Cancel button to proceed The selected Items will be deleted from the Catalog tree and from the database RiT Technologies Ltd 49 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Sp
261. etwasniwenwedsuees 456 Adding a Blade to an PAClosure i sscessssvoctivsssveivenncocsbesassaasosebveiavenvensdiesveudsweavesad ecb aa EEA a K e A aa a Eat 458 Auto Populating Enclosure with Blades by the Discovery Module cccccccsssssssssssssssssssssscscccccccccossoes 460 pettme Links and Viewing Links to Blades sscccsescsss ossseceseeesecss cusseuseseessesssessstuesteseuns sesasueestvesunssesasteestewecsscusesues 461 CHAPITER TI SECURTEY rrie a E 462 Device Local or Si cdcicssasaccstoasassatesacvestatsueveseseusunses seuss suseatestuasdcuusuasaucnbeasaeusbasnssuasssvasctuasaatessascadustesenteatestaviancsvassess 462 CHAPTER 12 IMPORTING PBX DATA ccccscceesecenseceeeeenseceseeeneeeeneseneeoaees 467 PTA OLE Preparations wsccccscscescsssacescestaceccestanssassiansevousensccweduasacsosavensuuneueecustevensnasatesssetanessusiaasecontessaasesuseussedavesnenss 467 port Data Fe Torniin E 467 DATEL a o yoscanscuaen saanccencacimepenacoiesgarantantosmseu tuners tonuebsansuagaennesacmepeaesoagucnenceeneimaneseannes 468 ITT TE TE ereenn sauce pe yasaaw eas aeasmeasachsenaeacontaneseearaneusesteanecbyenconsarantesnesannessennsees 469 CHAPTER 13 PV4E SYSTEM SET TINGS weisiscevecccncicecesecnciecenncecesesecasvecenscecenesesssecs 471 PV4E System SOLEUS SCV CE CY episoade pace scene oe paces EA RE AEE EREE 471 Secure Links Schedull T asarna ia eaaa a saaie ena ia aae eiaa 472 Seting the Sec re Links SCHCCUIED asirispa aaa e r Saa 412 Defini
262. etween a device is under an exported sub tree and a device is outside the sub tree the link information is not exported m If during data export a user logs off their session expires or the browser window shuts down the process continues Import from an Export File Work Flow and User Interface Please note that prior to initiating an import operation PatchView and PVMax must be in offline mode from the topology screen PV4E will verify this A new Import from a File option has been added to the Tools menu This option appears only for users with Edit Delete permission to import Auto Detect System Status Device Authorization Figure 177 Import from a File Tools Menu When selecting Import the following Import screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 239 PV4E User Manual V6 0 import Webpage Dialog EA Figure 178 Import Window Click Browse a file dialog box opens that allows you to select the file to import Look ir Local Disk T f e E Client TA Components My Recent Import Documents Server G Share a ApplicationTrace bet Deskto m 9 My Documents PE My Computer 3 o bly Metwork File name ne Places Files of type All Files Cancel RiT Technologies Ltd 240 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Figure 179 Choose File Window A validity check is performed after a file has been selected A window is displayed showing a progress bar and a Stop but
263. etwork Refer to the manufacturer s documentation for details RiT Technologies Ltd 397 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note You must configure the physical switches in your network for the PV4E switch trap feature to operate If you do not configure the switches the switch trap feature will not work gt To Activate the Discovery Module Switch Traps 1 From the Settings Menu select P LET The Discovery Module view appears Click the Switch Traps tab The Switch Traps settings appear Click Edit to edit the monitor link traps The Edit Switch Trap Settings dialog appears he Edit Switch Traps Setting Webpage Dialog r Settings m Monitor link up traps All stations Only new stations fd Monitor link down traps 4 5 Figure 310 Edit Switch Trap Settings Select the required type of events The events can be reported for link up link down or both You can also select if you want to monitor all stations that connect from the network or only new stations as yet undefined in then system By selecting only new stations this reduces the number of connect events that appear in the Events window Only events for new devices added to the network in this case are generated Click OK continue RiT Technologies Ltd 398 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To Set the Switch Traps Scheduler You can schedule when the switch traps mechanism is active When active events are generated as a resul
264. evice is manually deleted or discovered in another location How to View Links passing through an Access Point The View Link screen displays all end devices that are connected to the Access Point To view all links do the following 1 Stand on an Access Point in the Location tree gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer PVMAX Alarm x Refresh Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY A FOR THE Enterprise Catalog Access Point 7 Catalog amp SS Vendor Functional Type Telecommunication Infrastructure Class cm Connector Rack Equipment Software lt Adapter Terminal Equipment Network Equipment E fff Switch 273 E PBX 0 H amp Router 1 Hub 1 PatchView Equipment BF Connecting HW 49 Data Center Equipment Description Type Size U P LET Supported Power W Arm Side Vendor Name Vendor Part No Image Name Access Point Events Info Date Time Event Code 07 09 2009 14 50 User Logged In Event Category License Since an Access Point is connected to multiple devices PatchView represents them in the view link pane using the split link icon RiT Technologies Ltd 431 Fe F PV4E User Manual V6 0 a View link Webpage Dialog Boi ee tah eee ae 355 oe j iE F SE F Ez 1 o ah Le F im 00 16 SF 2 BFICR1 Al BF ICR 1 A2 Outlet 205 AP Outlet 205 Port O51 Port 01 R020101 Port O1 Port 1 A fork link
265. ff or Pulse Delay Time Pulse delay time in hh mm ss time format Pulse Time Set by the user in hh mm ss time format to determine the pulse duration Event Check box Check mark port events to be shown in the event log The default is checked Clear Location The Clear Location button clears the device location of the selected ports RiT Technologies Ltd 171 PV4E User Manual V6 0 I O Tab E oe i Fra F i rh Te oa a ic TE Eyt e O 1 G Add Edit Inventory PVMAX Controller Webpage Dialog x SC 322 General Rack Indicator Activator Tf Notes Gri EF 4 Port Appliance Location Se 1 0 1 iz 1 0 2 1 0 3 I O 4 I O 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 Tit 29 Off Status ER ERE Bees PES FsSsP sesso 2RRRR23233 5 Set ee Figure 134 I O Tab Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller Screen Columns The following table lists the Column name and the function in the above I O tab of the Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller screen Appliance A user defined name for the port default 1 O n Location Device location Set The Set Location button sets the device location On Status Status of the device The default status Is On Off Status Status of the device The default status is Off Check box Check mark port events to be RiT Technologies Ltd 172 PV4E User Manual V6 0 shown in the event log The default is checked RiT Technologies Ltd
266. file has a BOT extension 9 Click the Upgrade button to start the Upgrade process The software Upgrade process begins You cannot stop a download process that is in progress The progress box on the lower right shows the total percent of the software download completed The progress box next to each Master or Master Expander shows the percent of the software download completed for the devices under that Master or Master Expander If the upgrade process fails the progress boxes turn red When the upgrade completes the progress boxes turn blue 10 Click the Cancel button to close the window and the Events log is updated Location Access Permission General The Location Access Permission feature is a new option that has been designed to grant PV4E user groups and also individual users various levels of access rights to edit links The Edit Link operation is restricted for users without the relevant access permissions Access Permission can only be granted by the Administrator or a user with Administrator rights Note This feature refer to Edit Link permission only Group Level An Access tab has been added that stores information regarding the locations to which the user has access Individual User Level An Access tab has been added to the Users pane The tabs content is the Same as the group s content The user s permissions are a subset of their personal permissions and the permissions of the groups to which the
267. from the drop down menu Click OK The screen will return to the Content tab of the Properties screen Events Device Authorization activates the following events RiT Technologies Ltd 415 PV4E User Manual V6 0 New Device Authorized The New Device address authorized event is received when a MAC address is added using the Add Devices dialog The event includes the following information fields E MAC address m The user causing the event Device Authorized for Existing Device An event is received for Device authorizated for existing device for any of the following scenarios m A user authorizes an existing MAC address using the MAC authorization editor E A MAC address is automatically authorized The event includes the following information fields not all fields have values MAC address IP address Host name Location Functional type Inventory name The user causing the event Unauthorized Device Detected The Unauthorized MAC address detected event is received when a network component with an unauthorized MAC address is detected by the server The event includes the following information fields m MAC address Always available m Event severity Always available Error For detection in a location with high security level Warning For detection in a location with medium security level Info For detection in a location with low security level or when adding new MACs The following
268. g up the database Restarting the server Restoring the PV4E database Stopping the server and restoring the database Running PV4E When PV4E has been successfully installed you can log into the application via your browser Logging into PV4E To login open PV4E 1 Open the Internet Browser and type the path into the Address window 2 If you are working on the computer where PV4E server is installed type http local computer name pv4e If you are working from a client type http host name PV4E Press Enter the PV4E login window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 17 PV4E User Manual V6 0 i T FOR THE Enterprise User Name Figure 3 PV4E Login window 3 Type in your User Name and Password The default settings are below and are case sensitive We strongly recommend that you change these settings as soon as possible User Name Administrator Password blank 4 Click the Login button When launching PV4E for the first time a message appears Internet Explorer Security Warning Do you want to install this software E Name editlink cab Publisher RiT Technologies Ltd y More options Install while files From the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm vour computer Only install software From publishers you trust What s the risk Figure 4 Internet Explorer Security Warnng Message RiT Technologies Ltd 18 PV4E User Manual V6 0 5 Click In
269. gium Brussels City Towers Floor 03 Top to bottom Bottom to top Assign Figure 103 Add Edit Inventory Rack Dialog 1 Select the Catalog Name of the rack by clicking the button next to the Catalog Name field and choosing the rack from the available list or add a new item by clicking the Add button 2 Inthe Name field type the name of the rack The following table explains the method for naming Racks BUTTON OK Auto Naming Duplicate Save As New TO Add a single item Type in the information required for the single item and click the OK button Automatically names multiple new Racks WITHOUT THEIR CONTENTS in a pre defined sequence Duplicate existing Racks using their definitions but WITHOUT THEIR CONTENTS by using the Auto Naming feature Duplicate existing Racks using their definitions and the content if specified RiT Technologies Ltd 134 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The size of the rack is added by the system according to the definition in the Catalog 3 Select the Class by clicking thel button next to the Class field and choosing the class from the available list or add a new class by clicking the Add button 4 Click OK to proceed Adding a Cable Organizer to Location gt To add a Cable Organizer to Location 1 Select the Rack in the Location Tree where the Cable Organizer is to be assigned 2 Right click the selected Rack A drop down list appears Location To
270. grade oy lt Properties PR UPR x BB PP SPR Logical 7 Master 1 Site 1 Events fe Date Time Event Code Event Category is P 09 10 2009 14 10 PVMax Connectivity Statistics PVMax 09 10 2009 14 10 PVMax Device Connected PVMax 09 10 2009 14 10 PVMax Server is Online PVMax 09 10 2009 14 08 PVMax Device Disconnected PVMax 09 10 2009 14 08 PVMax Server is Offline PVMax 09 10 2009 14 08 PVMax Connectivity Statistics PVMax 09 10 7009 14 08 PVMax tinscheduled Ports Connected PVMax RiT Technologies Ltd 226 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Figure 165 PVMax Topology Online 5 Select and right click PVMax Topology and select Detect Master from the drop downlist The Auto Detect PVMax Master dialog box opens Y Auto Detect PVMAX Master Webpage Dialog General IP Address o 0 0 0 Get Community TLC Set Community seeeeee Timeout ms 250 Retries 2 Figure 166 Auto Detect PVMax Master Dialog 6 Enter the following information Settings Default Explanation Parameter IP Address ee The IP Address of the new Master Get Community The string used as the community Public name in SNMP Get and Get Next request The string used as the community Set Community Public name in SNMP Set and Set Next requests The number of milliseconds after which the PVMas waits for the Timeout mseconds 25 Master For detecting new hardware set the parameter to at least 200 The number of times within the timeout period the
271. gured to support different Virtual machine vendors for more information please contact RiT customer support team How it Works Virtual Server support identifies virtual computers based on the MAC address If a computer is identified as a virtual station it will have a catalog item which can be found in the PV4E catalog See the following Telecommunication Infrastructure Connector Rack Equipment Software Adapter Terminal Equipment IP Phone 1 gt F KVM Device 0 lA Printer 1 E Station 39 Li Blade Server 23 Default Station 4 Other 1 fu ver Virtual Station 4 MS Virtual Station Unknown Virtual Station Virtual Host Station JJ VMware Virtual Station f Workstation 0 The Content tab displays all stations associated to the virtual station Virtual Machine Consolidation The system will automatically consolidate a virtual machine with a physical server PC in cases where a virtual MAC addresses and one physical MAC address are identified together The host server PC is added using the catalog item Virtual Host station Select the Virtual Devices tab to view all devices associated with the virtual server See the following RiT Technologies Ltd 442 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Tree Telecommunicaton Infrastructure General Adapters Software Owner Virtual Devices El Ei yc SM oc ears s e El 3 Hloor 1 10 100 20 17 00 16 65 04 AD D9 DCH1C 5 El ca Halli
272. h Floor CR 8E WS F5541 2 Module SwO1Module01 2345678 1 1 Link Information Record Structure Each element of a link is represented by four fields 1 Item Type Link 2 First Container Name RiT Technologies Ltd 245 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 First Container Type Connecting HW Network Equipment Network Equipment Module First Container Location Full Path without slot no First Container Parent Location Type Location Rack First Port Type Front Back First Port Number Second Container Name es SS SS Second Container Type Connecting HW Network Equipment Network Equipment Module 10 Second Container Location Full Path without slot no 11 Second Container Parent Location Type Location Rack 12 Second Port Type Front Back 13 Second Port Number A link information record is made up of a record type field and a pair of link elements A link between Switch 3750 port 05 to a patch panel 2F PP2 P1 48 port 03 will appear as Link Switch 3750 Network Equipment Switch 2 UvKs hondonm Al 3ra Floor Communication Room 1 Rack01 Rack Front 5 2F PP2 P1 48 Connecting HW U K London Al 3rd Floor Communication Room 1 Rack20 Rack Back 3 CSV File Validity Tests General The verification process may take several minutes During this time you will not be able to perform any tasks An error will be generated for a conflict that cannot be ignored and will lead to the cancellation of the process
273. h does not exist 3 The item s port path is inaccessible Cable Test Result Storage Path The storage path is the path to a root directory of the place where the cable test result files are located The storage path is stored in the database RiT Technologies Ltd 266 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Links Links Overview A link is the physical connection between two components Links can be created in either the Edit Link Module or the Work Order Module A Work Order can be created from an Edit Link Worksheet PV4E s network management system monitors and manages existing links and any changes in wiring configuration that connect items together Defining and monitoring links can be done either with the system on line or off line The Edit Link Worksheet is designed to work on line in real time You can create links directly in the Edit Link worksheet and send them for immediate implementation to the PatchView scanners This is especially useful for site configurations The Edit Link worksheet graphically represents the physical links between items in the network It is in this worksheet that you create and define the connectivity of the different items and how they relate to each other PV4E allows the network manager to define change and monitor links between components in real time The number of components that can make up a link is unlimited The following diagram shows an example of a full lin
274. h the end devices are polled to detect changes in secure links See Secure Links Scheduler H Permissions The IT Manager uses Permission Settings to define the parameters for specific groups and users who have access to PV4E Permissions are explained in this chapter See Defining Permissions Event Notification Allows the selection of which events will be sent to a user via email and or SMS Event Notification is explained in this chapter E Message Filtering Allows the selection of which event messages will be sent to the user Message Filtering is explained in this chapter See Message Filtering m System Tables System Tables allows the option to make additions to the system These include additional Icons specific Work Order tasks and Location Types See System Tables ial Work Order ID Work order IDs can be allocated automatically by the system according to a pre defined template or given manually by the user when creating the Work Order See Creating a New Work Order RiT Technologies Ltd 471 PV4E User Manual V6 0 P LET See Chapter 9 Discovery Module P LET Chapter 9 PatchView for the Enterprise features the P LET technology Pro active LAN Equipment Topology P LET discovers all active devices in the network their subnets and identifies the following device parameters Call Manager See The Call ManagerThe Call Manager The Call Manager which processes information from IP Phones must be defined with it
275. he P LET scanning process RiT Technologies Ltd 205 PV4E User Manual V6 0 fe Switch Detection Webpage Dialog x Switch detection scanning process was started Select the display for the detection scanning process result Display in the Event Log only D Display in the Event log and a Popup message E Do not show this message during this PV4E login session Figure 150 Switch Detection Message Box 4 You can display the detection scanning process results in the Event Log only or in the Event Log and a popup message dialog Once you ve selected your prefered display you can check the Do not show this message during this PV4E login session checkbox to keep this message dialog from appearing again 5 Click Yes Once the scanning process has completed the Event Detail dialog is displayed showing the result Event Detail Webpage Dialog A Event Code Switch scanning process completed Date Time 09 10 2009 10 38 Source P LET Administration User System Account Computer techsuppos Description Switch scanning process completed Switch ID 10 100 20 28 IP Address 10 100 20 28 Status UNASSIGNED Location Figure 151 Even Detail Screen The IP Address of the switch is displayed as well as its Status and Location gt To view the properties of a switch 1 From the Location tab tree click on a switch listed under the Switch node You can then change the respective data as desir
276. he Switch The Ports tab opens showing the Ports information RiT Technologies Ltd 78 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit Catalog Router Webpage Dialog GTS Model 314 Ports Notes GTS Model 314 choice Description GTS universal broadband router Type Stand Alone Module Chassis No of Slots 6 Size U 1 Power W 0 gt P LET Supported Arm Side None Weight KG Vendor Name Chaice Vendor Part No Image Name Figure 57 Add Edit Catalog PBX Ports Tab 7 Type in the port ID select the service type POTS ISDN or Other and select one of the options available in the Connector window by clicking on the button 8 Click on the Add button to insert more ports if required 9 To remove a port click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 10 Click on the Additional Fields tab to allow the importing of additional fields for the selected PBX The Additional Fields tab opens showing the required information RiT Technologies Ltd 79 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FY Add Edit Catalog PBX Webpage Dialog General Ports Additional Fields Notes Field Name Default Value Department Budget Num Figure 58 Add Edit Catalog PBX Additional Fields Tab 11 Click on the Add button 12 Enter the Field Name and the Default Value for the field if one exists A default value is entered into the PV4E database when t
277. he network Right click the desired Port and select Add Sub Link The split link appears in the Edit Link Worksheet with at link symbol A Edit Link Webpage Dialog D o B E D 2 T ie Lg ae A fs a 2s g 0 100 20 21 M Pot04 Back04 Panelli Pots PotO4 Panel2 Back04 Back0l Outlet04 Pot0l Back1 AP DutletO4 Porti Pot Ol IS TSTTLAB162 Split Link J Auto Flip na Figure 216 Edit LInk Window Split Link 2 To view the details of the split link right click the Port and select View Split The details of the split link appear in the View link window RiT Technologies Ltd 300 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E View link Webpage imase N fiew y k nk 1 100 20 21 M 0 Po A o T A H Aei To B B A p ED race 10 100 20 21 Panel 1 Panel 2 Outlet 04 AP Outlet 04 IS TSTTLABIE Port 04 Port 04 Port 04 Port 01 Port 1 Port 01 a View link Webpage Dialog _ X Ra w lir S ik AP Outlet NA i Dart a Vie 2 AP L Uet US POFrt E morn es eet he tae T T ee o a AP Outlet 04 IS TSTTLABIE Port 1 Port 01 m ET Fo F AP Outlet 04 TSTLABI62 Port 1 Port 01 Figure 217 View Link Window Split Link KVM Links KVM devices enable a station and monitor to be connected even if they are not in the same location 1 After the KVM device and the station have been added to the Location tree in the Edit Link Worksheet create a link between the KVM device and the station The KVM li
278. he selected port See Auto or Manual Flipping of Links 2 Select the cells containing the ports that are to be linked Edit Link Webpage Dialog Fe Saas Seas ee es a es ees ee FS ee ee es Ss eee ee ee Back 01 Panel 01 Pot 01 Port 07 Panel 02 Back 07 yd Auto Flip Eea Figure 202 Creating a Dynamic Link 3 Click on the Link button The Link Status Symbols change from d Fio 4 Create a Work Order optional Click on the Apply button The Link Status Symbols change from tot only if PatchView is on line 6 After the links have been physically created on the Panels the Link Status Symbols change from T Fto The Link Status Symbols change from tot only if PatchView is on line After the links have been physically created on the Panels the Link Status Symbols change fromt to gt To create a Static link 1 In the Location or Topology Tree locate and drag and drop the item s you want to link into the Edit Link worksheet or select the item and click on the Edit Links button Ensure that the ports are correctly aligned Either use Auto flip enabled or manually flip the selected port See Auto or Manual Flipping of Links Select the cells containing the ports that are to be linked 3 Click on the Link button The Link Status Symbols change from d Fio 4 Create a Work Order optional Click on the Apply button The Link Status Symbols change from to gt To create a Mixed link
279. here is no value for a switch port in the PBX dump The default value is optional When no value is specified the value for that switch port is left blank 13 Click on the Add button to insert more ports if required 14 To remove a port click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 15 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding a Router to the Catalog A router is located at any gateway where one network meets another including each Internet point of presence A router is often included as part of a network switch Routers must be defined in the Catalog as they are not automatically defined by P LET gt To add a Router to the Catalog 1 In the Catalog tree under Network Equipment right click on Router 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Router dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 80 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FY Add Edit Catalog Router Webpage Dialog GTS Model 314 General j Ports Notes Name GTS Model 314 Functional Type choice Description GTS universal broadband router Type O Stand Alone O Module Chassis No of Slots 6 Size U Power W 14 gt P LET Supported Arm Side None Weight KG Vendor Name choice Vendor Part No Image Name Figure 59 Add Edit Catalog Router dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Ite
280. hnologies Ltd 65 PV4E User Manual V6 0 M Add Edit Catalog IP Phone Webpage Dialog Cisco IP Phone 7960 10 Ki 12 13 Software Hotes No of Ports Description iaa Remove h es eee T Service Name Connector Figure 44 Add Edit Catalog IP Phone Adapters tab Click on the Add button to insert the adapter information Select one of the options available in the Functional Type and Name windows by clicking on the button Type in a description if required To remove information from this slot click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button Click on the Software tab Optional Click on the Add button to insert the software Select one of the options available in the Functional Type and Name windows by clicking on the bd button To remove information from this slot click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 14 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding a KVM Device to the Catalog A KVM device allows you to connect between a station and a monitor even if the station and the monitor are in different locations RiT Technologies Ltd 66 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To adda KVM device 1 In the Catalog tree under Terminal Equipment right click a KVM device 2 Click Add Item from the right click menu The Add Edit Catalog KVM Device dialog opens
281. hone subnet it will appear as an IP phone throughout all these subnets e g a device is associated with subnet 100 and subnet 101 Only subnet 100 has the IP Phone as its defualt device However the device will appear as an IP Phone both on subnet 100 and subnet 101 Hub WAP Support A new enhancement has been added to the network discovery module that identifies existing Hub WAP devices A new catalog type has been created under the Hub functional type The new item is called Access Point When a switch port connectivity analysis implies that there is a hub WAP device connected the Discovery Module automatically creates a new inventory item of type Access Point The new item appears in the link starting from the switch point The Access Point will be added to the location tree where t he outlet link terminated panels are located IP devices connected the Access Point will be discovered and will appear in the same location The following sections describe the process of identifying various switch ports in your network how to view them and also how to change their status Note WAP is discovered by this feature only in cases where the MAC addresses of the devices connected to it are listed on the switch port Access Points Access Point can be either a WAP or a hub and has one port connected to the Switch port and one split port connected to all devices found on the switch port Automatic Discovery of Hub and WAP Access Points
282. how Link Test Results 08 Port 08 Back 08 Back 08 Room 101 9 Any Servi Port 09 Port 09 Back 09 Back 09 AG Edit Link In Amn Coens be Eriak A epi raced Pinca 2 Outlet 1 g iew link Webpage Dialog x View link Panel 01 EES FB puo Fe Panel 01 Port 01 ine L l ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Panel 01 Port 02 Panel 01 Port 03 Figure 212 View Link View Link from a Panel gt To view the View Link Window from a Panel 1 Select and right click on a Panel in the Location or Topology Tree A pull down menu will appear 2 Select Show Panel The graphical representation of the panel will open 3 Click on a Port to open the View Link Window RiT Technologies Ltd 297 PV4E User Manual V6 0 ZE P 4E Windows Internet Explorer P MAX PY Alarm K Refresh ORETUT Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLS Y SETTINGS REPORTS Y HELP Y 3 FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Ports Connectors M Location oe Japan T Frank a Bark 5 Tokyo Service 5 ID Name ID Name E Building T A gp Floor 01 of Room 100 E 3 Cabinet 1 g CAB 01 M Panel 01 Webpage Dialog X Ma m nm 2 i e eee ets ete Ts Ts HAHHEEAEHHEHA Me lets alale slat Panel 02 Show Panel a g Rack 1 1 4 Room 101 fe Outlet 1 Edit Link H Room 102 Duplicate m 1 Any Servi F Port 01 Port 01 Back 01 Back 01 2 Any Servic Port 02 Port 02
283. ht to left and left to right The following screen displays the Double View option screen MAINTENANCE TOOLS SETTINGS REPORTS HELP Work Order Location Location Tree Single View Tree 0 Location Location Eg K Eer N G usa Eg usA ee cto tree E Atlanta E Atlanta E Bldg A Bldg A El ga Moori El gap Floor 1 El sg Ri El a Rii El Room 100 O Room 100 El lt 8 Room 101 El ff Outlet 1 E IP Phone 2 E am Room 101 fh Outet 3 E Room 102 03 Printer 1 E Room 103 El Station 2 E Room 104 david i Room 105 sharonk Location tree Room 102 lt lt Room 103 Room 104 Info Date Time Event Code Room 105 06 09 2009 11 28 User Logged In Room 106 1 Room 107 Figure 224 Split View Screen Working with the Provisioning Tool Defining Services gt To define a service 1 Select Settings gt System Tables RiT Technologies Ltd 310 PV4E User Manual V6 0 MAINTENANCE TOOLS SETTINGS REPORTS HELP Catalog Work Ord ors ork Order Location mee Tree ee eh Permissions 7 Location Msg Filtering Location System Tables El Atanta Bex Cree Atlanta E Bldg A PatchView Elements E Bldg A E gp Floor 1 PEX El a Foor 1 Ham Ri Ham Ri a Mail Configuration Ppi t am Room 100 C 3 Room 100 El a Room 101 Barc Ef outlet 1 He IP Phone 2 Cable Test Results H Room 101 Outlet 3 Connectivity Zone a Room 102 1 Station 2 E Room 104 davidr Call Man
284. hysical Logical Offline Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category i 09 10 2009 11 07 Work Order Task Created Work Order 09 10 2009 11 06 Ports Disconnected Manualy System 09 10 2009 11 06 Ports Connected Manualy System 09 10 2009 09 43 Work Order Task Created Work Order Figure 163 Topology Window Detecting New Hardware in PVMax Topology Once the Master and its associated hardware have been physically installed PVMax can automatically determine what hardware is connected to a Master PVMax must be in online mode to detect the new hardware PVMax can only detect new PVMax panels Non PVMax panels must be added to the Topology tree For instructions refer to Topology on page 299 gt To detect new hardware RiT Technologies Ltd 225 PV4E User Manual V6 0 1 Select and click PVMax Topology The Edit Topology dialog box opens PVMAX Topology re a ee Figure 164 PVMax Topology Offline 2 Click Edit The Setting Topology dialog box opens Uncheck the offline box 4 Click on the OK button The PVMax Indicator button is now green r p Lear pars ety oes gt gt PV4E Windows Internet Explorer EN x PVMAX P LET Alarm ta Refresh O Logout nini Al WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELP Y FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users PVMAX Topology PatchView Subnet General PVMAX Topolc Mode Physical Detect Master z L Offine ha Nees Software Up
285. hysical layer network management application Enterprise PV4E Physical layer The seventh layer of the OSI communication model referring to the physical means of putting the data on the network Policies Provisioning A set of rules required by the system for the calculation of the required patch work and any additional considerations required for the creation of the Work Order MACs operations and are device oriented Pro active LAN Equipment Topology A network tracking system that discovers and recognizes connectivity changes of all active Stations in the network Profiles Provisioning A template for the MACs operation Typically each department has its own profile for the department Project The Project is the logical representation of your entire network All network components including hardware software and connecting components are defined and stored in the Project database PSAP Public Safety Answering Point PV4E PatchView for the Enterprise Security Controller Enables control of various sensors and remote controlled devices from the PatchView Management Station RiT Technologies Ltd 528 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Security Group User rights to system resources are assigned to a group for security purposes Each user in the group has the rights given to the entire group Security Settings Security Settings control which users or groups of users are authorized to use the system and its resource
286. i Serial No Power W Arm Side Non Weight KG Locabon 5 Choose the catalog name from the Catalog Name drop down menu and click Apply If the preferred switch does not exist in the drop down menu add it to the catalog See Adding Editing and Deleting Items for further information on adding to the catalog RiT Technologies Ltd 214 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit Inventory Switch Webpage Dialog Modules VLAN Setiinds Notes Class Cisco Devices Catalog Name choice WS 3524 1 Chassis IP WS C2900 Chassis MAC WS C2926 Chassis AEA Ja Fi T No of Slots Wo Lseog Chassis Serial No Arm Side Weight KG Location 6 Select the Modules tab and click Add to add modules and chassis to the switch structure The Add Edit Inventory Module dialog is displayed Type a name in the Name field for the module you want to add 8 Choose the class name from the Class drop down menu RiT Technologies Ltd 215 PV4E User Manual V6 0 9 Add Edit Inventory Module Webpage Dialog Ports Notes Functional Type Class choice Catalog Name Alcatel Devices s hs ec gee E A Ss S Slot No D Link Chassis Name Foteracwe iewires Chassis Slot No T Location Switch 21 9 Choose the catalog name from the Catalog Name drop down menu If the prefered module does not exist in the drop down menu add it to the catalog See Adding Editing and Deleting Items for further informatio
287. ices Swap RiT Technologies Ltd 302 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Allows you to generate a Work Order or partial Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for performing a swap between two devices or two workspaces Remove Allows you to generate a Work Order or partial Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for removing device s When a provisioning request is fully processed a Work Order is automatically created The Work Order contains all relevant tasks for the specific request The tasks are generated according to specific rules you can also pre configure some of these rules Graphical features of the automated provisioning module include a drag and drop functionality that allows you to simply drag and drop any terminal equipment device or workspace from one location to another The point and click function using the right mouse click can also be used Workspace Definition The automated provisioning module introduces the Workspace terminology A workspace is a logical attribute which can be associated with any location of type Room Cubicle Other When any of the location types above is decorated with this attribute PV4E knows that it can refer to the decorated location as container of potentially provisioned items Therefore the decorated location can be part of provisioning request which applies for all the relevant devices hosted in this location For example when moving a workspace t
288. ick OK The file opens Each row in the file represents a single offline tasks for specific request type and device type For example the first row is an offline task which tells you to physically move a station from location A to location B Therefore the tasks refers to Move request of device of type Station For every new task add an additional row and fill it with information according tom the file structure defined above For example if you would like to add a new offline task for a printer The task tells the technician to move the spare tuners with the printer itself Take the following steps to do define the task E Set the ID value to 25 The next available ID in the file Set the operation Id to 3 Refers to move request for printer m Set the order to be 2 The second offline task which refers to the printer m Set the IsTaskReferToLink to O the task refers to the printer itself and not to its links m Type in the description of the task e g Move the spare tuners box of DEVICE NAME to TO_LOCATION The automated provisioning module will automatically replace then place holders with the actual printer name and target location E Set the values in the lsAvctivated column to 1 active task RiT Technologies Ltd 324 PV4E User Manual V6 0 m Set the Task Type column to 7 9 After you have entered in the new offline task click OK the following message box appears Mic
289. icking on the lbutton or add a new item by clicking on the Add button 6 Type in the name of the Shelf The Size of the Shelf will be added by the system according to what is defined in the Catalog There must be enough room in the Rack for the Shelf otherwise the Shelf is not accepted 7 Select the Class by clicking on thel button or add a new class by clicking on the Add button Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Click OK to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 138 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding a Spacer to Location gt To add a Spacer to Location 1 Select the Rack in the Location Tree where the Spacer is to be assigned 2 Right click the selected Rack A drop down list appears Location Topology Users Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Location 3 9 Amber Inc E Belgium E Eh Brussels City Towers size U am Alor 01 Power Limit 2 Room 101 Recepbon Power Usa am Alor 02 FS Cabinet 1 Sagi busi ba S Rack Mi Se Meee Add Rack Equipment t Cable Organizer 2 Floor 05 Add Terminal Equipment Shelf Belgium Add Network Equipment Demo Demo Add PatchView Equipment Florence Add Connecting HW Events l BLD1 BLD 2 BLD 3 Add Data Center Equipment info Date Figure 108 Add Rack Equipment from Location 3 Select Add Rack Equipment A drop down list appears 4 Click Spacer The Add Edit Inventory Spacer dialog will open RiT Technol
290. ii naissteichonnnseutausadainnsacsamusdinsdandoubeuniedoeevntiasiidenddoes bedcoulstuputatsndneaiaeemaddeeadeiienvbiveanddiendwenness 389 LAN Mapper Scheduled Scan ccccccccccccccssssssssssssseseeseeeeceeeceeeeeeaaeeesnsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaqags 392 MO ONO SY cece ca xacescecse cane A E E S 392 Viewing the SU OCU ss xeccteotanioasne camociad anuansaauinvsdiennetecandcusenbe saaneosnd snncadinenanense duauahieuanbeamasaanessnoamuagnsqunedenaaaneantecsnest 392 MOT OOO E E E AAA E E NE E EN 393 Adding a Subnet Manually cccic0 sncssonasaranzacsacaamansnioannsquansnnsnineagndonnndehonashoouneasieasnodnadianneauiressheasbeuwausuenasiveanndesmecitees 394 Scanning Selected Subnets Manually co ico csvacssvesenzernavnndacanionsnscuawsadwnrevsannsannean staneasnasaassuoweeanecanonadleaeninnabecuaeaunes 396 Adding Removing Selected Subnets from the SCan cccccccccccccccccceesssssesseeeeeceececeeeeeeaaeaassssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanaas 397 SA DE CAINS onea EE 397 Inserting Switches to Inventory Using LAN Mapper cccccccccssssssssssseeeececeeeeeeeeeeaesessssseeeeeceeeseeeeeeeaeaqags 400 ADCC easa EE 405 LAN SOLVET sisisi aa a aaa aaia 407 LAPKE T o e r E E E eee 407 R n tHe LAN SCV eea E S EEE SAE S SEE aSa 409 LAN Seer AR UES e E E E acco deaentetadeateeeetaeest 410 Pern eA ONZA a E A A AS 410 Authorize Unauthorized MAC Editor 2 0 ccccccccsssssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee
291. indows Internet Explorer PVMAX P LET Alarm x Refresh Logout Adm WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY s F 1 FOR THE Ente Location Topology 2 Users O PatchView Subnet Topology q 10 100 40 21 Default SNMP Settings Version SNMPv1 Timeout ms 2000 Start Scanning Retries 2 Stop Scanning Figure 299 Opening the LAN Mapper To activate the LAN Mapper scan the following settings need to be defined LAN Mapper Settings Message Filtering LAN Mapper Scheduler See LAN Mapper Scheduler Note Set the LAN Mapper Scheduler before continuing with LAN Mapper Settings LAN Mapper Settings This is done so that the LAN Mapper can automatically scan the network to detect its entire structure including devices These settings define the active Routers and Subnets in which the Discovery Module will detect the existing devices There are two options for the LAN Mapper Settings These are either Use Current Topology or Initiate Topology Discovery They are used as follows CONFI GURATI ON EXPLANATI ON Use Current Topology This is used on a daily basis once the subnet topology is correct It is important to select this option after Initiate Topology Discovery has run Initiate Topology Use this the first time or to overrides the existing Discovery subnet topology The existing subnet topology will be deleted gt To define the LAN Mapper Settings This operation is performed when PV4E is installed for
292. ine of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 9 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding a PBX to the Catalog PV4E contains the PBX module that allows users to map PBX port information with the associated telephone devices When importing data from the existing PBX there may be additional fields in the PBX file dump that you may wish to import into PV4E While PV4E already contains a number of standard parameters you may wish to add additional parameters as required If you are not licensed to use the PBX module you can still gain basic connectivity information as an offline device RiT Technologies Ltd 77 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To adda PBX 1 In the Catalog tree under Network Equipment right click on PBX 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu 3 The Add Edit Catalog PBX dialog opens FY add edit Catalog PBX Webpage Dialog Central PEX General Ports Additional Fields Name Central PBX Functional Type choice Description Sales Divsion PBX system Type Stand Alone Module Chassis No of Slots 1 Size 1 Power W 0 gt SW Ver Arm Side None Weight KG Vendor Name choice Vendor Part No PBX 345 Image Name Default Equipment Figure 56 Add Edit Catalog PBX dialog 4 Enter the relevant information Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 6 Click on the Ports tab to insert the Ports for t
293. information on any change or problem that occurs on the secure link or on its end devices station and switch port This gives a higher level of control and management for vital links in the network alerting you of any change in the secure link and minimizing the ability of unauthorized persons to make modifications to the connectivity You receive an immediate indication on changes to vital links A secure link is defined as a link that has a switch port on one side and terminal equipment on the other side and does not contain elements of an existing broken secure link One or more links in the organization can be defined as secure links An alert is issued and logged before performing activities on a secure link or when changes are physically performed in the field on any of the secure link devices See Secure Links Link Status I ndicator The Link Status Indicator is found in the same window as the Control Pad indicators There are three different statuses for the links These are In Progress This means that the process of creating or breaking links has begun Pending The links have been assigned in either an Edit Link Worksheet or Work Order Task Off There are no links Links that have been created but not sent to the scanner can be cancelled See Canceling a Dynamic Link RiT Technologies Ltd 276 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To view the Link Status Indicators 1 Click to select the Topology Tab 2 Select the site gro
294. ing a patch cord to a secure port breaks the secure link The Events view displays the appropriate event and the system administrator can quickly trace the problem In the patch panel above if a patch cord connecting ports 7 and 23 is disconnected from either port the lock on the port turns from blue to red 4 5592 pp01 Web Page Dialog a REESE es ee af OO ge Figure 207 View panel showing location of broken secure links The red lock icon is also displayed when viewing or editing the broken links as indicated by the arrow This immediate detection allows the administrator to quickly assign resources to investigate and resolve the break Breaking of Secure Links Breaking links are generally generated either when the actual physical connection is removed from the panel or a PV4E user removes the link in the application Edit Link A warning message is immediately issued as soon as a secure link is broken If the link is broken the event is logged ie p Attempting to break a Secure Link To break this link the system will unmark the Secure Link Are you sure you want to conntinue Click OK bo continue or Cancel to abort operation cence Figure 208 Warning message Attempt to Break Secure Link Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category 09 10 2009 12 03 Secured Link Disconnected by P YMAZX PYMAX RiT Technologies Ltd 292 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Figure 209 Event Log Secure
295. ing is a list of items and information required Site map A site map of buildings and floors e g CAD List of room numbers Number of outlets in each room Communication rooms and their contents racks patch panels and equipment Network Information Schematic drawing of the active network topology switches routers Type of Switches IP addresses of Switches Read community name of the Switches Type of Routers IP address of the default gateway router Read community name of the Routers DNS server parameters WINS server parameters Note Switches and Routers must be SNMP enabled for the P LET discovery The PV4E server must be included in the Access list for all the P LET scanned Switches and routers RiT Technologies Ltd 98 PV4E User Manual V6 0 List of connectivity List of connections of patch panel ports to outlet ports List of connections of patch panel ports to Switch ports List of connections of telephones to outlet ports List of any other devices that do not have a network interface card and their connectivity to the infrastructure Naming conventions The Organization naming conventions for all entities starting with Campus down to outlet port Note Naming conventions should be as short as possible with the required information Additional Items Any additional items required by the Organization in the database which are not included in the default settings Pa
296. inventory PVMAX Controller Webpage Dialog eal 2 Rack Indicator Activator Name SC 322 Functional Type Catalog Name Serial No Type Size U Power W Loca ton Figure 129 Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 168 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt Rack Indicator tab Command A ports Ga Add Edit Inventory PVMAX Controller Webpage Dialog x IC_3423 General Rack Indicator Notes Port RadkName RackLocation Figure 130 Add Edit Inventory PVMax Controller Screen 1 To assign a Rack to a Rack Indicator click Assign The following Assign Rack to Rack Indicator screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 169 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E a Assign Rack Webpage Dialog Assign To Rack Indicator Florence BLD 1 Hlorence BLD 2 Alorence BLD 3 Total Records 17 Search Now Assign Eee re aiy PA e yi h iem eei i A ie i fo r i ee i gt ja el e araa er ri ere Figure 131 Assign Rack to Rack Indicator Screen 2 Click Search Now to view all available racks for assignment E Assign RACK Webpage Dialog Assign Rack To Rack Indicator select the rack by clicking the field f Functional Type Rack Catalog Name choice Indude Sub Location a Name Location Rack 41 01 Belgium Building 1 Floor 4 Room 41 __ Rack 41 02 Belgium Building 1 Floor 4 Room 41 Rack 41 03 Belgium Building 1 Floor 4 Room 41 Rack 41
297. ion To find the location of a device Station IP Phone or Printer right click on the device in the Location tree and choose the Locate option RiT Technologies Ltd 462 PV4E User Manual V6 0 a Bars New York No Location O Station 2 DCS 950 GANDAIE View Link Edit Link Locate Edit Print Full Links Labels Figure 329 Locate Terminal Equipment If the selected device does not have an IP address the system returns the message The station doesn t have an IP address Action can not be done If the IP address is present and the device is found a message box appears RiT Technologies Ltd 463 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FY Event Detail Webpage Dialog Event Code Device not found Date Time 09 08 2009 08 45 Source PLET Administration User System Account Computer ecs _lab i Description Device not found IP Address 15 1 1 110 Figure 330 Event Details Message Box An alternative way to locate terminal equipment is to click on the Locate button in the terminal equipment s Property pane If present the IP address is displayed in the properties of the terminal equipment RiT Technologies Ltd 464 PV4E User Manual V6 0 GANDALF General Adapters Software Owner Notes Functional Type Station Class Default Station Catalog Name Default Station 15 1 1 110 Manual Last Activity Date 1 26 2009 5 51 CPU RAM Monitor Power W Arm Side Weight KG No of Slots Serial
298. ion Virtual Devices The PV4E server identifies virtual devices by their MAC address prefix and associates them with a physical host connected to the same switch port Virtual devices are ignored regarding MAC authorization Their addresses do not appear in the MAC authorization editor and MAC authorization related to these events are not received Inactive Device Module Designed with asset management in mind the Inactive Device module improves the accuracy of your network information by automatically eliminating devices which are no longer connected to your network This is done by periodically comparing the last activity date of each IP driven device with the time of the scan The Inactive Device module allows you to keep continually updated and detailed information about your IP driven assets in terms of their activity Status The Inactive Device module automatically manages the following four time stages for IP driven devices The time limits are set by the user per location or at one central place for the entire system The stages are 1 Active 2 Idle 3 Dormant 4 Decommissioned Note For manually entered devices the status is set to Manual and is never changed by the system If at any given time the device has been detected by the Discovery Module then the above mentioned status applies active idle dormant and decommissioned When scanning PV4E compares the difference between the current time and the last tim
299. ion Webpage Dialog Router 2 mr Seige Add Network Equipment f g Room 201 Add Terminal Equipment Sree Add PatchView Equipment Telephon iii Add Connecting HW General Inactive Device Environmental Add Data Center Equipmen Name Duplicate Type Edit Description Delete Security Properties Parent Location Show CAD Refresh Figure 85 Adding a Location under a Parent Level Window Type in the name of the Location Add the Description optional To use the Auto Naming facility See Auto Naming Feature To assign a new icon please see the Assigning New Icons Section SF eS Select OK or one of the other buttons to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 114 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Editing a Location You can edit a Location at any time When a Location is selected in the Location tree information will appear in the Data Area There are two Tab options available E General A brief description of the Location Content Provides a list of Items listed under this Location Note The Content tab will only appear if there are items listed under the Location This list cannot be edited gt To Edit a Location 1 In the Location tree click on the name of the Location that you would like to edit The information will appear in the Data Area Location Topology Users Belg ium Tree O Telecommuncaton niastrutre arahe Belgium Name Ho Location m Building 1 BP panel 1 D Prin
300. ion Optional Select one of the options available in the Functional Type and Name windows by clicking on the button Type in a description if required To remove information from this slot click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button Click on the Software tab Optional Click on the Add button to insert the software installed on the Printer Select one of the options available in the Functional Type and Name windows by clicking on the 7 button To remove information from this slot click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button Type in a description if required Select OK or another of the options to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 70 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding a Station to the Catalog A Station refers to any computer or other desktop Equipment on the network used as a workstation When PV4E runs the P LET Module all Stations in the network are automatically located The located Stations are included in the database Note If you are using P LET there is no need to define a Station in the Catalog as it is automatically discovered by P LET Tip When selecting Adapters and Software for a Station make sure the relevant items have already been added to the Catalog If not they will not appear on their respective lists for selection gt To add a Station 1 In the Catalog
301. ion Amber Inc Figure 88 Adding a Country Window 6 Click OK to proceed Adding Cities to the Location Tree ts Either one city or multiple cities can be added to the location tree gt To add a City 1 Select and right click on the Country in the Location Tree RiT Technologies Ltd 118 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A pull down menu appears Move the cursor over the Add Location and a second menu appears 2 Select and click on City The Add Edit Location dialog will open 3 Type in the name of the Location 4 Add the Description optional A Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog 4 Inactive Device Environmental Brussels Desonipton Security Normal Parent Location LAmber Inc Belgium Figure 89 Adding a City Window 5 Click OK to proceed Adding Buildings to the Location Tree Some enterprises are operated on a campus where many buildings are connected This example uses only one building but it is possible to add as many buildings as required gt To add a Building 1 Select and right click on the City in the Location Tree A pull down menu will appear Move the cursor over the Add Location and a second menu appears 2 Select and click on Building The Add Edit Location dialog will open 3 Type in the name of the building RiT Technologies Ltd 119 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 Add the Description optional Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog x General
302. ion Rec On Pending LED on the control pad starts to blink indicating that there is a link task waiting to be implemented when the control pad is connected The technician can now activate the link change process from the control pad The LEDs on the patch panels turn on to guide the technician through the process Three options Enabled Disabled and Bypass are available for the Control pad In the Enabled and Bypass options you can manually scan or browse the patch panel ports by pressing the Manual Scan button on the control pad The following table describes the function of each option Configuration Control Pad is Enabled Activated and link tasks are not Indicated on the patch panels until the technician presses the Reconfig On button on the control pad Disabled Deactivated Disregarded and link tasks received by the scanners are Bypass immediately indicated by the LEDs on the panels The system is managed based on sites A site is usually a single Communication room or a data center Scanners together with the patch panels which they monitor are installed in wiring racks located in the communication room of each site The number of sites that can be managed by one Server is virtually unlimited Remote sites can be connected to the centralized database by using additional Masters at each of the remote sites A site is one patching area There can be many patching areas sites in a Communication Room Each site is conne
303. ise Scheduler tem Tables Permissions Icon Image WO Task Msg Filtering Name Desciption System Tables Any Service Work Order No Service No Service Red Blue PatchView Elements PBX Mail Configuration Event Notification Cable Test Results Connectivity Zone P LET Call Manager Software Upgrade Metric Specifications Info Date Time Event Code Event Category 06 09 2009 11 28 User Logged In License Figure 228 Add or Edit Catalog Items Screen 2 Select terminal equipment gt station gt default station gt default station 3 The Add Edit Catalog screen is displayed 4 Click the Adapters tab RiT Technologies Ltd 313 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Default Station General dapters Notes Slot Functional Type No of Ports Description Service Name Connector Any Servic Port 01 Pw a SS ae ee Save As New sera Ot ps bet ot ee Figure 229 Add Edit Catalog items Screen 5 Via the Adapters tab select any of the previously defined Service from the drop down list box 6 Repeat step 5 for any of the network adapters whose service needs to be changed Click Apply 8 Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box Note To save the catalog item as a new entry in the catalog items list click Save As New before clicking OK in step 4 Defining Service for Inventory Items The Inventory items for which a Service can be defined are instances of any of the catal
304. it Port 20 Port 20 Back 20 Back 20 Room 200 Any Servit Port 21 Port 21 Back 21 Back 21 E Rack 1 Any Servii Port 22 Port 22 Back 22 Back 22 Front l Back nG ap ee ee eee ee aa g Edit Link Webpage Dialog E ack 01 Panel 01 Port 01 k E Back 02 Panel 01 Port 02 fe z 4 Panel 01 Port 03 Port 19 Panel 01 Back 19 Hs z i a Panel 01 Back 20 T Panel 01 Back 21 fd Auto Flip BB Tooltip Figure 200 Moving Ports around in a Worksheet Window Cutting copying and pasting selected ports within the worksheet gt To cut copy and paste Ports in the Worksheet 1 Select the Ports and right click 2 Select Cut or Copy from the pull down menu 3 Move the cursor to the required cell and right click 4 Select Paste from the pull down menu The ports will be positioned in the new cells RiT Technologies Ltd 283 PV4E User Manual V6 0 P 4E Windows Internet Explorer PYMAX PY Alarm K Refresh O Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLS Y SETTINGS v REPORTS HELP Y FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Connectors l ff Room 100 E Cabinet 1 ma m E CAB Ri 5 Siaka Bai TJ HN ll coe wT iala BE Panel0i Any Servii Port 16 Port 16 Back 16 Back 16 S Rakii Any Servii Port 17 Port 17 Back 17 Back 17 2 Room 101 Any Servic Port 18 Port 18 Back 18 Back 18 Room 102 Any Servic Port 19 Port 19 Back 19 Back 19 Floor 02 Any Servii Port 20 P
305. ividually if a record of them is required When assigning Terminal Equipment owners users can be defined for each piece of equipment It is necessary to define the users in the User Tree in order to access the list of Users See Users Adding Terminal Equipment to Location gt To add Terminal Equipment to Location 1 Select and right click on the Location Type in the Location Tree where the Terminal Equipment is to be assigned A pull down menu appears 2 Select Add Terminal Equipment and open one of the Items The Add Edit Inventory dialog box opens RiT Technologies Ltd 221 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit Inventory Station Webpage Dialog x Camare Front 1 Adapters Software Camare Front 1 IP Camera IP Camera Sony hd Last Activity Date RAM Power W Weight KG Serial No Demo Room 201 Figure 160 Add Edit Inventory dialog 3 Type in the name of the Item The Auto Naming feature can be used See Auto Naming Feature Select the Class by clicking the drop down arrow optional Select the Catalog Name by clicking the drop down arrow Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item oe a Select the Owner Tab to add the Owner details optional Tip This can be done at a later stage if Users have not been defined See section Users 8 Click Add to add a User The User dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 222 PV4E User Manual V6 0
306. k Patch Patch Network Station Outlet Panel Panel Equipment 3 i aN Dynamic Static Dynamic Static Link Link Link Link Figure 192 Example of a Full Link Window A common link contains two different types of connections These are referred to as either Static or Dynamic links A Static link is usually a fixed connection also referred to as an off line link These are fixed connections and are rarely changed Examples are Connections between Network Equipment and Patch Panels Connections between Patch Panels and Outlets A Dynamic link refers to the connection made by a patch cord or cable between equipment and is moved according to certain requirements and specifications This is also referred to as an On Line link vvv An example of a Dynamic link is the connection between the two Patch Panels Note A static link can be connected to a Dynamic link For example the connection between a Patch Panel and Network Equipment Links must be properly established or they are considered untraceable An untraceable link will not function and needs to be corrected Different types of panels have different link requirements as follows RiT Technologies Ltd 267 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Panel 24 Ports 48 Ports With Splitter When working in the Edit Link worksheet the PatchView System must be on line Links that are defined are sent via the scanners to the Patch Panels Using the Control Pad th
307. k Equpment Hip Softwar lt 3 Adapter 2 Temra Epira mi Metreork Equipment Enterasys f 25 Patchvew Equipment E Fetreme 125 Connecting Hi ET Foundry Data Center Equipment E HP Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category Catalog Items Items in the Catalog have been divided into four different categories The Item Type is the first level in the tree The order of the next three levels is Functional Type Class and finally Item PV4E has predefined the Catalog Item Types and Functional Items These are automatically installed in the database during the installation of the system 7 Catalog item Type i Vendor Telecommunication O E Telecommunication Infrastructure Infrastructure o Er Horizontal and Vertical 11 100 new 3 _ ba Copper 6 Horizontal Cable STP Horizontal Cable UTP Mult Pair Cable 25 Pairs Multi Pair Cable 50 Pairs RiT Technologies Ltd 37 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Figure 24 Example of Catalog Items in the Tree Item Type Item Type is the classification according to which you sort Catalog items and is the first level of the Catalog tree hierarchy The Catalog is divided into default Item Types Additional Item Types cannot be added to the list The user inserts Classes or Items directly under Vendors and Racks only The Catalog is divided into the following Item Types I tem Type Vendor Telecomunication Infrastracture Connector Rack Equipment Software Ada
308. k Finish Note When swapping workspaces the swap operation can still be performed even if one item cannot be assigned Remove Functionality Allows you to generate a Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for removing any terminal equipment device and to free network resources Note This action will not delete objects from the Location database until the Work Order has been completed by the technician gt To remove terminal equipment perform the following 1 From the Work Order screen gt Location tab gt Select the equipment to remove and right click gt select Remove from the context menu gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer Alarm K Refresh Orr Administrator MAINTENANCE TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY 5 FOR THE Enterprise Work Order Location AndyD Tree Single View Double View General Adapters Location es UK USA Atlanta Bldg A l Floor 1 Functional Type Station Class Default Station Catalog Name Default Station Status Manual Last Activity Date CPU RAM Monitor Power W Arm Side Weight KG No of Slots Serial No Floor 2 Move Swap Change requests demonstrations fi CR2 lt Room 200 P Outlet 4 Station 4 Location USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Move Swap Change reque ez Move meu Change 4 trevorS Room 201 Room 202 Events Room 203 Info Date Ti ime Event Code Event Category Room 205 07 09 2009 08 38 Batch Completed Successfully DB Room 210
309. k a static off line link prior to implementation a The item has a reserved status created in a work order RiT Technologies Ltd 371 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Bue An existing dynamic on line link Blue A reserved dynamic on line in a work order it is reserved and cannot be used in another link task A pending dynamic on line in the scanner Blue A request for a new dynamic on line link prior to implementation Blue A pending dynamic on line link in the scanner it is reserved and cannot be used in another link task A dynamic on line port reserved in a work order ee A pending dynamic on line port in the scanner Blue A request to break a dynamic on line link prior to implementation a Blue A pending dynamic on line link in the scanner it is reserved and cannot be used in another link task e The item is connected in an untraceable connection Green The item has a reserved status created in a work order This iakeneee only appears in View Link RiT Technologies Ltd 372 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Canceling and or Deleting a Task A Link task can only be cancelled if it has not been sent to the scanner If it has been sent to the scanner see Edit Link Chapter for canceling a link gt To cancel a task 1 Open the Work Order Module 2 Select the Work Order The Tasks tab of the selected Work Order opens in the Information Pane 3 Select the task or tasks To select all the tasks
310. k module 10 ports A Dlink module 10 PEP aa Demo J lt Comm Room E Cabinet 9 g Demo Rack H PP OPR H PP SPR Scanner 1 T Masteri 10 100 20 22 a Room 201 5H Room 205 Demo2 t Florence Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category f e 09 1 10 I 2009 11 07 Work Order Task Created Work Order A 09 10 2009 11 06 Ports Disconnected Manualy System 09 10 2009 11 06 Ports Connected Manualy System 09 10 2009 09 43 Work Order Task Created Work Order Figure 153 PV4E Maintenance Windw Location Tab If a module has not been manually added it is automatically added to the system as an Unknown module with the number of ports detected on the switch Setting Up Projects PatchView for the Enterprise 4 1 3 Click the hyperlink of a module from the list The View Inventory Module dialog is displayed RiT Technologies Ltd 207 PV4E User Manual V6 0 e Wis Inventory Module Webpage Dialog Dink module 10 ports A General Ports Notes Functional Type Class Catalog Name P LET Status Type Slot No Chassis Name Dink Switch Chassis Slot No 1 Location Demo Comm Room Demo Rack Dlink Switch 1 Figure 154 New Inventory Module 4 From the View Inventory Module dialog click on the Ports tab The ports are displayed as well as the VLANs defined on the switch with the device MAC address When a switch is detected all MAC addresses of the devices on the onnected switch ports will b
311. k the OK button to return to the Add Edit window 4 Click the OK button to exit this dialog international Switch Manufacturer fuer real C cil arts HH ia Interna tonal Sewiihch Maqufachares fy Active Runna ii css Coomprebensve Company Supper Limprhe me Lepan Sacer 01 M eien a ey aT i Inbermetonal Swsbch Manukectarer i om Ce ADC krone E k alil Mauntry Sorte a Carpi samih Ahraz FAAS Fahory k x wapa E Ubm conna Ei Enterasys Erime T A ATEN hp Figure 31 Example showing the Item under a different Class Editing an Item An Item can be edited at any time When an Item is selected in the Catalog tree information will appear in the Data Area Pane The tabs available in the dialog will vary depending on the Item selected To Edit an Item 1 In the Catalog tree click on the Item that you would like to edit The information will appear in the Data Area pane 2 The Edit Item dialog can be accessed in three ways 1 Right click on the selected Item in the tree and select Edit from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Action button in the Catalog Toolbar and Edit Or 3 Click on the Edit button in the Data Information Pane The Add Edit Class dialog will open 4 Edit the information Click on the Save As New button to save the information as a new item This function allows you to create a new item using all the existing information of an existing Item and only changing one of the param
312. l Panels 3 The technician makes the new links or breaks links according to the LEDs on the panel 4 The database is updated The System Manager checks the task and closes See Closing a Work Order When a Work Order is carried out each task is has its own status You can close the Work Order only after all tasks have been completed There are six different statuses of Tasks and Work Orders These are Status In Work Order Means In Task Means Created It has been created but no It has been created but no work has been carried out At work has been carried out At this stage it can be cancelled this stage it can be cancelled In progress Work has begun on one or Work has begun on the task more of the tasks This is applicable to additional tasks and not link tasks Send to Scanner Does not show on the Work Links have been sent to the Order scanner Completed The tasks have been For Link tasks this changes completed automatically when the links have been carried out at the scanner Status needs to be changed for additional tasks Cancelled The Work order has been The task s were cancelled cancelled Closed The Work order has been Does not show in the tasks checked and approved by the manager who has closed it RiT Technologies Ltd 374 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Changing the Status of a Link Task 1 Select the Work Order in the Work Order Module 2 Select the task or tasks To select all the tasks
313. ll the Add processes in this topic chapter Both options will open the Add Edit Class dialog M Add Edit Catalog Station Webpage Dialog x General Adapters Notes Name Functional Type Class choice Description CPL RAM Weight KG Power W Arm Side Monitor No of Slots size U Type Vendor Part No Vendor Name choice Image Name Default Station Horizontal 1U Figure 28 Example of an Add Edit Catalog Item Screen 3 Type in the relevant information for the selected item in the various tabs See Edit Items for information on the different tabs 4 Select OK or another of the options to proceed To Add an Item to a Class Items can be added directly under a specified Class in the Catalog tree 1 Select the Class in the Catalog tree to which you want to add an Item 2 Right click on the selected Class and select the Add Item function from the pull down menu RiT Technologies Ltd 45 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 Select the Class that you wish the item to be listed under by clicking on the x button and select a class from the pull down list If the specific class has not been defined it can be done now by clicking on the Add button and filling in the required information for the new class Click the OK button to return to the Add Edit window el Add Edit Catalog Horizontal and Yertical Webpage Dialog General Notes Name Functional Type Class Copper Use this
314. lly known as P LET Pro active LAN Equipment Topology The Discovery Module discovers all active devices in the network their subnets and identifies the following device parameters m Host Name E P Address m MAC Address m System Service Type With some exceptions Using these parameters devices are added to the PV4E database and placed in the correct location All connectivity changes of the devices are recognized The Discovery Module consists of a number of elements which divide the operation into simple tasks These are m LAN Mapper AutoDetect m LAN Server m Unmanaged Devices m Utilization module The Discovery Module indicator button changes colors depending on the current task being performed These are Button Color Means The Gray ty Not Active Discovery Module Blue E LAN Mapper Active Yellow Unmanaged device process running Green g LAN Server Active LAN Mapper LAN Mapper is the first operation that needs to be run in order to start working with the Discovery Module It discovers all active devices in the network and their subnets The LAN Mapper returns the MAC Addresses IP Addresses Host Names and System services In some cases some of the devices will be missing information this due to connection issues like DNS and the device itself RiT Technologies Ltd 383 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note In order for The Discovery Module to operate correctly the LAN Mapper must be configured co
315. log General Permissions Members Access Permission View Edit Delete Figure 336 Adding a New Group Editing a Group To Edit a Group Select the Groups tab Select the Group to be edited Click the Edit button The Add Edit Security Groups dialog opens aS a a Make the required changes Adding Editing a New User You can add new users to the system and authorize them to use the system resources To add a new user 1 Select the User Tab in the Permissions Screen Select an existing user from the list if you wish to edit that user s permissions 2 Click the New button to add a new user click the Edit button to edit an existing user The Add Edit Security User dialog opens 3 Fill in the User Name of the New User in the Name field RiT Technologies Ltd 476 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 Fill in the User s full name 5 Allocate a Password if required and confirm it Tip Keep a list of all passwords as they are not retrievable from the system Passwords can be changed if required 6 Add a Description optional Click the Notification Only box to enable the user to receive event notification emails or SMS without providing the user access to PV4E 8 Click on the Email tab to add the user s email address and select the type and format of the messages the user receives optional Note The User can be assigned to a group at this point See Assigning a User to Group 9 Click th
316. log will close gt To enter new hardware in the inventory database 1 Right click in the Topology Tree and select Insert from the dropdown list The Insert dialog box opens RiT Technologies Ltd 228 PV4E User Manual V6 0 e Add New PYMAX Panel s Webpage Dialog default No Location Type Default Catalog Name Inventory Name Figure 168 Add New PVMax Panels dialog 2 Enter the catalog name location and inventory name It is not necessary to enter the location If the location is not entered the default value is No Location 3 Click OK The device is added to the inventory database The device s icon no longer appears with a question mark gt To enter multiple new hardware items in the inventory database at one time 1 Press the ALT key and click multiple in the Topology Tree Right click the selected icons and select Insert from the drop down list The Insert dialog box opens RiT Technologies Ltd 229 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add New PYMAX Panels Webpage Dialog x Catalog Name default Location No Location Ghost Name Type Default Catalog Name Inventory Name Figure 169 Add New PVMax Panels 2 Enter the catalog name and location It is not necessary to enter the location If the location is not entered the default value is No Location Note that all items must have the same catalog name and location 3 Enter the inventory names To use the Auto Naming
317. logies Ltd 181 PV4E User Manual V6 0 ey Ga Add Edit Inventory Outlet Webpage Dialog Copper ad Add Double 5e 2 Port STP Add Amber Inc Belgium Erussels City Towers Floor 01 ba t Me i 4 A fit 7 j Pa ee ka k E i eer tet lies a eee r F OK Fani Can a F s i ee ld Figure 138 Add Edit Inventory Outlet dialog 3 Type in the name of the Outlet The Auto Naming feature can be used See Auto Naming Feature 4 Select the Class by clicking on thel button or add a new class by clicking on the Add button 5 Select the Catalog Name by clicking on thel button or add a new class by clicking on the Add button 6 The location can be changed by clicking on the E button See To change the Location of an Item 7 Click OK to proceed Adding Patch Panels to Location gt To add a Panel to Location 1 Select the Rack in the Location Tree where the Panel is to be assigned Right click on the selected Rack A pull down menu will appear 3 Select Add Connecting Equipment and click on Panel The Add Edit Inventory Panel dialog will open RiT Technologies Ltd 182 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Inventory Panel Webpage Dialog R RB 11 PP01 Ports Connectors Notes RB 11 PP01 Copper SMART 32 UTP P Amber Inc Belgium Brussels Gity Towers Floor0 Figure 139 Add Edit InventoryPanel dialog 4 Type in the name of the Panel The Auto Naming fea
318. loors and premises Location Tree The hierarchical representation of all the locations in your organization s network Logs Logs record events occurring in the system The events are displayed in Log files MACSR Moves Adds Changes Swap Remove of items in the network MAC Address Media Access Control A protocol that defines the way workstations are identified within the LAN Modular Scanner Electronic scanners scan all panels in the network System and receive information from the ports about port connectivity The scanner system includes both Master Scanners and Satellite Scanners Navigation Tree A graphic representation of the hierarchy of the database It is divided into two main subtrees namely Library and Inventory Network Management Network Management refers to the broad subject of managing computer networks NIC Network Interface Cards RiT Technologies Ltd 527 PV4E User Manual V6 0 NMS Network Management System A PC running PatchView for the Enterprise Outdoor backbone Satellite Scanners and their associated patch Connectors panels located elsewhere in the project organization For example in different buildings P A BX Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange PatchView Components PatchView items patented by RiT such as Masters Scanners Expanders Master Expanders Patch Panels security controllers and the Smart cabling system PatchView for the A p
319. lows E Company Name m City New York E Building 1 E Floor 1 m Floor 2 m Building 2 Floor 1 m Floor 2 m Floor 3 You can continue defining lower levels for individual rooms The defined locations appear in the Location tree Defining the physical location is the first step in Setting up a Project This is done in the Location Tree RiT Technologies Ltd 96 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Once the physical locations have been defined Network Items that were defined in the Catalog can now be referenced and assigned to a specific Location in the Location Tree The second step in Setting up a Project is to position the Network Items in the Topology Tree according to their logical order both in the Communication Room and individual racks This section defines the logical hierarchy of the Network Equipment It defines how the Connecting Hardware is connected to the PatchView and Network Equipment Different types of sites are defined It should be noted that when an item is allocated to a location this unique item is using the Catalog item as a reference In this way a multiple of the Same network item can be allocated to a specific location s Items and classes can be added edited or deleted directly from the Location and Topology Trees without having to re enter the Catalog Specific Items can be defined and stored in the No Location folder of the Location Tree until such time as they are allocated to a specific location A
320. ls Linking the Switch to the I nterconnect Panel Create offline links between the panel and the switch All of the switch ports meaning ports of switch modules that appear in the inventory should be linked to Interconnect panels None of the Interconnect Panels ports should be connected to any other device but to the switch modules However note that some of the Interconnect Panels may be empty Attaching a Switch to an Interconnect Panel Rules Check the Interconnect check box in the switch edit properties frame The system then identifies the related Interconnect Panel by interpreting the offline links It searches for all offline links pointing to one or more Interconnect Panels When connecting to an Interconnect panel the following three rules apply 1 All ports of the switch are linked 2 Added ports are linked to Interconnect Panels one or more 3 Added interconnect panels are linked to the switch and not to any other item gt To add an Interconnect panel do the following Note You can either add a new panel or assign a ghost panel detected by the master 1 Stand on a Rack in the location tree right click and select gt Add Network Equipment gt Switch gt Auto Detect RiT Technologies Ltd 196 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Topology Users Cabinet O Telecommunication Infrastucture General J Belgium HA Brussels City Towers Floor 01 i Room 101 Reception ja Floor 02 S E Cabnet 1 pg Show
321. ly about this class optional RiT Technologies Ltd 42 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note The Content tab will only appear if there are items listed under the class To Edit a Class 1 In the Catalog tree click on the name of the class that you would like to edit The information will appear in the Data Area Catalog Active Equipment General Content Notes Catalog NI Vendor Name Desc iption Telecommunication Infrast ucture e as 5 Active Equipment 0 a P lt Cuppe LY is Fo R Patch Cord 4 SQ Pathway 0 S Trunk Cable 0 Connector Rack Equipment Software Adapter Terminal Equipment Figure 27 Editing a Class 2 The Edit Class dialog can be accessed in three ways m Right click the selected Class in the tree and select Edit from the pull down menu Or Click on the Action button in the Catalog Toolbar and Edit Or E Click on the Edit button in the Data Information Pane The Add Edit Class dialog will open 3 Edit the class and click on OK to save and exit from the dialog Deleting a Class Classes can be deleted from the Catalog Note When deleting a class ensure that no items are listed under that class If there are any items listed under the class move them to another class or delete them from the database before attempting to delete the class To Delete a Class 1 In the Catalog tree locate and select the Class you want to delete 2 The Delete command
322. m n i FORTH Ee terprise Figure 8 Help Webpage Dialog box Alert Warning I ndicators There are four alert warning indicator buttons located in the menu bar below the navigation buttons The following table defines their relevance Button Color LED Means PV Green System on line Red System off line PVMax Green System on line Red System off line P LET Gray Not Active Blue s LAN Mapping Active Yellow Unmanaged device Green LAN Server Active RiT Technologies Ltd 23 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Button Color LED Means Alarm Green No new events have been added Red New events have been added Note When standing on a P LET LED indicator a tool tip appears and displays the IP address and subnet for that item and also shows the progress status Note The Alarm indicator is green when you log into the system It changes to red when events have occurred and reverts to green only when these events are viewed in the Event Log or when you restart the application Refresh and Logout Buttons W Logout The refresh button updates the GUI with changes made to any items in the database The Logout button when clicked gives you an option box Click OK to exit logout or Cancel The Toolbar A toolbar which contains labels for frequently used menu commands is located at the bottom of the screen The toolbars vary according to the active module The function of each label and its submenu is discussed in th
323. m a specific port presents only the link of that Specific port Location Tndude Sub Location a Secure Link Trclude Port Name Figure 18 View Link to Specific Port In the event that the checkbox is marked an edit box field is displayed enabling the user to search for a specific port name Location Ingude Sub Location ie Secure Link Incude Port Name Port Neme Catalog Name Figure 19 Edit Box Field Display All regular grid options such as resize columns sort etc will be available RiT Technologies Ltd 32 PV4E User Manual V6 0 WO Reports Note The PV4E reports not report center are no longer a suppored feature of PV4E WO Task Reports The PV4E update includes an enhancement to the WO task report module The WO task report has been modified to appear in landscape layout and the tasks are presented in tabular layout not as one task per page A checkbox has been added to the first column of every task The Sort Order field has been renamed to Task Sorting Order and a Scanner Execution option has also been added to it The tasks will be sorted in the following order m Link tasks connect disconnect will be sorted in the order they are performed by the scanner relevant to the time the report is generated in PVMAX all pending tasks are at the beginning followed by tasks that have not been sent to the scanner E All non link tasks are sorted in the order entered by the user Wo
324. m or Class 5 Click on the Ports tab to insert the Ports for the Router RiT Technologies Ltd 81 PV4E User Manual V6 0 ke Add Edit Catalog Router Webpage Dialog GTS Model 314 General Ports Service E Connector Fast Connect 8 Post Remove 5elect service Port Naming Port Duplicate Figure 60 Add Edit Catalog Router Ports tab 6 Type in the name and select one of the options available in the Connector window by clicking on the 7 button Click on the Add button to insert more ports if required 8 To remove a port click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 9 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding a Hub to the Catalog gt To add a Hub to the Catalog 1 In the Catalog tree under Network Equipment right click on Hub 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Hub dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 82 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FY Add Edit Catalog Hub Webpage Dialog Name Functional Type choice Desoription HUB UTP Type Stand Alone O Module Chassis Size U 1 Power W 0 gt P LET Supported Arm Side None Weight KG Vendor Name chaice Vendor Part No AG 165 6 Image Name Default Equipment Figure 61 Add Edit Catalog Hub dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 5
325. m to get the shortcut menu specific to that object The Menu Bar The Menu bar is located below the application title bar and contains the navigation buttons for the different modules alert indicator buttons and the Refresh and Logout radio buttons Navigation Buttons The navigation panel fonts are red when active and white when inactive When clicking on the Maintenance Work Order or Reports links labels you are taken directly to their relevant modules The Tools Settings Reports and Help labels have dropdown menus This is shown by the white triangle in each button The dropdown menus become active when you click the label on the menu The dropdown menus are RiT Technologies Ltd 21 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PBX Import Import from a File Permissions System Tables Export to a File System Status Device Authorization Work Order PatchView Elements PBX Mail Configuration Event Notification Call Manager Metric Specifications Figure 7 Tools Settings and Help dropdown menus The options in the dropdown menus for Tools and Settings are described in detail in their relevant sections Help Help provides information about PV4E and on line help The Webpage Dialog box contains information about the version you are using RiT Technologies Ltd 22 PV4E User Manual V6 0 About Webpage Dialog Version 6 0 Build 100 14 Copyright C 1998 2009 Ril Technologies Ltd wwww Ril Tech co
326. ment Environmental Control Classes can be added to the Catalog tree either directly under the Item Type as in the case of Vendor and Rack or under Functional Types A Class is added and named by the user in order to categorize items for easy reference Each specific item can be sorted according to its appropriate class You can add additional classes as well as edit or delete classes as and when required Classes for certain Item Types and Functional Items have been installed in the database during the installation process PV4E has predefined all the items that are necessary to build your project or Enterprise Network An Item is the actual product either software or hardware that is used in your network Items can be allocated to specific classes Additional items can be added and all items can be edited or deleted as and when required RiT Technologies Ltd 40 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Editing and Deleting Classes The following section explains in detail how to Add Edit and Delete Classes in the Catalog Adding a Class Classes can be added to the Catalog tree A Class is added and named by the user in order to categorize items for easy reference Items can then be listed under a specific class in the Catalog Tree To Add a Class 1 Select the Item Type to which you want to add a Class 2 The Add Class dialog can be accessed in the following manner Right click the Item in the Catalog tree and select the Ad
327. minal Equipment Servers PCs telephones IP phone printers etc through the Physical Connectivity Component patch panels and cables to the Network Equipment LAN switches PBXs Hubs etc The network administrator is provided with real time network visibility of the physical layer including a combined view of the horizontal and vertical cabling subsystems The combination of the graphic images and real time information assist the administrator in making critical decisions about Moves Adds Changes MACs In addition PV4E also supports extended provisioning operations including swap and remove These decisions are made for the daily maintenance of the infrastrucutre network troubleshooting and documentation procedures The network database is consistently updated to reflect the MACs of the network devices PV4E together with RiT s patented PVMax components Masters Expanders Master Expanders Scanners and SMART Patch Panel technology will RiT Technologies Ltd 1 PV4E User Manual V6 0 efficiently manage your infrastructure and substantially reduce your network ownership costs Key New Features The following new features have been added to PV4E V 6 0 New Feature Function Discovery Module P LET Inactive stations feature gt The inactive station removal function sets a device status according to its activity time and removes inactive devices from its previous location gt This feature does not work on virt
328. ms not in succession hold down the Ctrl key and select using the mouse Single View Double View in the Work Order Location Tree Single View Double View There are two options in the Location tab window for moving devices RiT Technologies Ltd 307 PV4E User Manual V6 0 m Single View m Double View Single View The Single View screen opens by default gt To move around the tree using the Single View Screen 1 Click the plus sign icon to expand the next node level 2 Click the minus sign icon to collapse the lower levels Using the Single View option select the device from the Location tree on the left hand side of the screen and drag it up or down to a new location in the tree The General tab on the right hand side of the screen displays the device properties The following screen displays the Single View option and the General tab attributes MAINTENANCE TOOLS SETTINGS REPORTS FOR THE Enterp The General tab displays device Tree properties Work Order Location Adapters H uk El g USA E Atlanta E Bldg A O m Floor 1 H am CRI E am Room 100 El Room 101 E E IF Phone 2 Outlet 3 Printer 1 E Station 2 i 1 Room 102 Room 103 Room 104 Room 105 Room 106 Room 108 Room 109 Functional Type Class Catalog Name Status CPL Monitor Arm Side No of Slots Serial No Location Events Info Date Time Station Default Station D
329. n TP Address MAC Address 6 Figure 326 Utilization search window A table appears with details of the Unutilized Ports and Devices You can sort the table according to each particular parameter by clicking on the header of the column by which you want to To work with Unutilized Ports and Devices The table of the unutilized devices is divided into two main areas On the Left side is the switch port information area On the right side the device information showing the last active day and the informartion of the end device which was the last to be connected to the switch port From this view we can see which ports and devices are unutilized Instructions can be given according to this list to break the links of the unused switch ports and reutilize them The ports and or devices can be reallocated You can select each Unutilized Device separately or using either the lt Alt gt or lt Ctrl gt keys make a multiple selection 1 Select View Link to View the links of the Unutilized devices and return to the search 2 Select Edit Link to open the Edit Link Worksheet Complete the necessary changes and return to the search Select the ports or devices to be removed from the list optional 4 Click Remove A warning message appears Click OK to continue Note If you select Remove the ports devices are removed only from the unmanaged list RiT Technologies Ltd 426 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Switch Device IP Addres
330. n on adding to the catalog RiT Technologies Ltd 216 PV4E User Manual V6 0 be Add Edit In ventory Module Webpage Dialog cal Notes Cisco Devices Catarog Name choice 5 WS 3512XL Module Serial Mo miasan cre in i Ela j IEA x FOGU SRN WS F5541 Module Chassis Name WS F6RMSFC Module Chassis Slot Mo WS F6KMSAC2 Module Location Switch 21 10 Click Apply and click OK The Add Edit Inventory Switch dialog is re displayed with the defined module appearing in the list on the Modules tab Addiedit Inventory Switch Webpage Dialog x Switch 21 General WS 3524XL Module tee dpe Figure 157 Add Edit Inventory Switch RiT Technologies Ltd 217 PV4E User Manual V6 0 11 Click OK The defined switch is added to the Location tree gt To scan an offline switch 1 From the Location tree listed under the Switch node right click on the switch you defined and choose Scan I 7 T x i PV4E Windows Internet Explorer es x PVMAX P LET Alarm K Refresh O Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Switch 21 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Modules Settings E Cabinet 1 E g Demo Rack P PP OPR H PP SPR Dlink Switch T Sc nneri Master 1 10 100 20 22 Functional Type Switch Class Cisco Devices Catalog Name WS C2926 Chassis IP 0 0 0 0 MAC
331. n the rack 2 Select Show Rack The following diagram will open showing the contents of the rack 3 In the Rack drawing double click the panel you want to enlarge d I SJddddudy 99993904 93444494 Sdddgdadd 99999990 99999444 vvvvvove VPVVPOVP AAAA ee LAA AAAA AAA AAAAZ 7 PP SPR Webpage Dialog rir H A HA A AH A GA leluieiotls Hi i 4 4 a il SMARTS a i ars Saery r 4 E n s O BROS Beane ee Bea aes Figure 111 Rack Contents Window Moving Items within a Rack If an Item has been placed in the incorrect slot when allocated to a specific rack it can be moved to any empty slot in the Rack There are two methods of moving items within the rack These are m To drag and drop the items in the Show Rack window m To use the Add Edit Inventory dialog gt To move an Item in a Rack 1 Select the Item in the Rack and choose the Edit mode The Add Edit Inventory Item dialog opens Click on the amp button to change the location A dialog with the Location Tree will open N RiT Technologies Ltd 142 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E Change Location Webpage Dialog Location H fa Amber Inc Belgium E Ft Demo 3 Comm Room E Cabinet 1 Bil Demo Rack o Room 201 S of Room 205 Demo Florence Israel Spain Figure 112 Location Tree dialog 3 The next available slot will be displayed in the Slot No window If this is not the slot require
332. n the same physical location in the network and attach it to the appropriate existing devices An event description appears in the Events pane Right click the device s icon in the Topology Tree and select Replace from the drop down list The new device appears in the same location in the Topology Tree All of the links related to the old Scanner or Expander apply to the replacement Scanner or Expander gt To show an existing Panel 1 Right click the panel icon in the Topology Tree and select Show Panel from the dropdown list RiT Technologies Ltd 231 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A picture of the panel will appear showing all of the ports on the panel gt To determine if an existing device has been removed L Right click the device s icon in the Topology Tree and select AutoRecognize from the drop down list The device appears in the Topology tree with an X next to its icon This indicates that while the device has been uninstalled it is still in the inventory database If you are unsure which existing device has been uninstalled right click a higher level device s icon in the Topology Tree and select AutoRecognize from the drop down list Any devices under the higher level that have been unplugged appear in the Topology tree with an X next to their icons This indicates that while the devices have been unplugged they are still in the inventory database gt To remove an existing device 1 Users Remo
333. nal Equipment b 2 Event Code Network Equipment Connecting HW Work Order H Master Expander Data Center Equipment Ki Local Scanner Location PVMAX Control Pad Global PYMAX Scanner PYPLAX Controller 2 Select the item you wish to search for The following screen opens Site Name 3 Enter the Name Location Catalog Name and Serial No and click Search Now RiT Technologies Ltd 153 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note The search form does not include Site name criteria Adding PVMax Security and Indicator Controllers PVMax Security Controller The PVMax Security Controller enables control of various sensors and remote controlled devices from the PatchView Management Station Sensors such as temperature humidity floods etc and remote devices such as rack indicators door locks door switches fans can be physically connected to the PatchView system using the PVMax Security Controller One PVMax Security Controller supports up to 32 external devices and sensors as described below 8 dry contact ports these ports are used as an electric switch which can open close a circuit The ports support up to 3 amp load each 16 I O ports Digital ports that support input and output This port sends an event to the management system if a circuit was opened or closed Different sensors can be connected to these ports when for example the temperature exceeds a threshold the electric circuit closes
334. nd a list is displayed You can then select which result to display Location Tree Association Changes in the PV4E location tree will not affect the storage directory tree However changing the name of an item or moving it will cause a mismatch between the trees item names As a result the cable test results will lose their association RiT Technologies Ltd 256 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Cable Test Results Storage In a file system accessible by PV4E create a directories tree with the Same structure as the PV4E Location Tree The lowest level of the directories tree will be the device gt panel gt outlet port Beneath the above directory create two more directories to contain the cable test result files One named Link and the other Channel These two directories will hold the file link cable test results and the channel cable test results respectively RiT Technologies Ltd 257 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note There is no need to create the Channel directory for panel s ports The follow screen displays the directories tree Se C CableTestResult Israel RiT Floor Comm Room Racki P File Edit Whew Favorites Tools Help amp Back EJ F Search E Folders a G gt lt e Address Cable TestResulk Israel Rit Floor 1 y omm Room Racki Pa Folders gt CableTestResulk Israel E ic Rit C Floori LC Comm Room C Outlet 01 C Port 01 C Channel i Link C Cutle
335. nders or directly to the Master Each PVMax Scanner can monitor up to 24 Patch Panels PVMax Local Scanner PVMax Local Scanner is a stand alone device that manages the physical layer network It is connected directly to the network and is able to monitor up to 6 panels PVMax Local Scanner scans and processes the panels physical connectivity information and sends it via the network to the PV4E server The Local Scanner also controls and manages the scanning algorithm PVMax Indicator Controller The PVMax Indicator Controller is used solely to activate the Rack Indicators The Indicator Controller supports up to 8 Rack Indicators PVMax Splitter Splitters increase the capabilities of the Scanner by allowing a PVMax Scanner to be connected to twice as many ports Two Smart Patch Panels each of either 24 or 48 ports are connected to these Splitters which are connected to the PVMax Scanner As a result each PVMax Scanner can be connected to 24 Smart Patch Panels Splitters are used only with existing Smart Patch Panels 24 of the new Smart Patch Panels are able to attach directly to one Scanner without using Splitters RiT Technologies Ltd 11 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The PVMax Scanner System In the modular scanner system the Master monitors a site containing a large number of ports The Expanders and PVMax Scanners are stacked at the site and report to the Master The system supports scattered sites communication centers
336. ndow If the total number of items in a statistic information line is zero the line Should not appear at all RiT Technologies Ltd 254 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Export Process Completed Event ie G Event Detail Webpage Dialog ID 1826 Event Code Export Process Completed Date Time 09 13 2009 15 38 SOUnce PV4E Server User Administrator Computer yarivl Description Export Process Completed Root Location Belgium Exported File Belgium 200909013 1537 ex Figure 182 Export Completed Event Detail Window The exported file is saved on the server To download to the client click the hyperlink Export Process Completed with Conflicts Event If errors occurred during an export operation an Export Process event completed with errors is fired Import Events Together with the import started event a pop up message appears notifying you that the operation has started The process is the same for completed events If the import process completes with a warning the yellow warning icon appears in the event window A red error icon appears for errors RiT Technologies Ltd 255 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Cable Test Results General Cable test results provide connectivity information regarding links between ports to the customer The information also contains data for electrical cable tests for each port The Cable Test Results are stored on the PV4E server or in a place accessible by the PV4E file system
337. ne To assign a Rack click Edit in the Information pane 4 The Add Edit Inventory Rack screen is displayed There are two additional buttons in the Add Edit Inventory Rack screen Assign and Remove Assign opens a new screen that searches a Security Controller to assign to the selected Rack Remove clears the association Note The Rack Indicator edit box cannot be changed manually 5 Click Assign in the Add Edit Inventory Rack screen The following Assign Rack Indicator to Rack screen opens 6 From the drop down menu in the Catalog Name field select PVMax Security Controller and click Search Now The Assign Rack Indicator to Rack screen opens To view all the relevant Security Controllers click Search Now The upper grid displays all available Security Controllers The lower grid displays the Rack Indicator To assign the Rack 1 Select the Security Controller from the upper grid 2 Select the Rack Indicator from the lower grid by placing the mouse curser on the field The icon indicates the active row Click OK 3 The Add Edit Inventory Rack screen opens showing that the Rack Indicator has been assigned Remote Software Download RSD The PV4E Server will perform the RSD for the Security Controller as it does for any other PVMax device Adding a Control Pad to Location Control Pads are not assigned to specific racks Each site has one Control Pad which will be connected to the first Scanner in each site
338. need to set the deafult device type of the Subnet s as IP phone subnet s See the following section Marking a Subnet as an IP Phone Subnet To mark a subnet as an IP phone subnet do the following 1 In the Topology tab of the Maintenance screen select the Subnet radio button A list of Subnets appears in the tree Click a Subnet RiT Technologies Ltd 428 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Location Topology PatchView Topology 10 100 0 0 104 15 1 1 0 5 100 10 0 0 0 192 115 241 0 0 10 100 40 21 Default SNMP Settings Version SNMPvi Timeout ms 2000 Start Scanning Retries 2 Stop Scanning 2 The following Add Edit Subnet window opens i Add Edit Subnet Webpage Dialog 10 100 0 0 General Routers p Network Information E Subnet Discovery Settings fd Enable Subnet Discovery Scan by Router Local Scan Default Type Default Station 3 Change the default device type to any of the predefined IP Phones in the catalog 4 Click OK Run the LAN Mapper Once the process has completed all the devices that are associated with Subnet s marked as IP Phone subnet will appear in the application as an IP phone RiT Technologies Ltd 429 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note The extension numbers of IP phones using this method are not identified Note If an IP phone is associated with multiple subnets where at least one is marked as an IP p
339. ng Permissions sssssccsssacesssonstecscecsasaszsesssastecevesssuneceesissassesisassuachaseceucensashgaaecessessseastocsxneeotaatasabonioussessioosieoes 473 TEET a N ON EAEE E EEE E E IAEE E E 413 Ade a N A TO a E E E E E E A E E eer emt S 414 BS MN e a E T EE E A E E AAE E 476 Addino Editing a New USET vive ccdscsssccewstvisstveiesassvoastcterqseasaseelwtcubne nace NEEE A EAOa E a NaS 476 Assisninge g User to GrOUD scivecsdeoiens sveawadsbeetaccnsnatvccubeobuasssyesvecideaines NENA R E NAR ENEE EN 477 Changin a User Pass w Ord essernida E EENE A ETA 478 Delete d Grou or CU SCE ece r E E E tt yeaneeyaeuss Wesmedieesaeets 479 PEMS ONS ace sates ee dadingi sda centre te hues E E teoduabyieesseseecaneos 479 Adin Sator RONE aisia gua E E O E 479 PSS Vy OL a E A E A A O E A A A N E E 480 Password Expr O eiee EO E E E EO EEE EE E e 480 PPS SOLES Sl LCL OIA ee E E E E E E E E e 481 Nom Administator TN ONG osser a AEE ETE EE ENEE 481 BEV GIG NONDGCAU ON sonseras E E EEEE 482 Seluna up he Email SELVET sses aaa aaa aaa aa kaara aaa 482 Assionine Eyent NO CLG AU OR aes aes as Nes aca a reco occ ea tea cee a AEAEE ca tec E E AE EAEE EPERE eaii 483 Assigning Event Notification by Event cccccccccsssssssssseeeeccccceecesusaeeessssseeeseecccceeeesssaaeesasssseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeneaaas 484 Assigning Event Notification by User sicccssccxconsiedscsnitacwansbovederancadsewsasedsoweddansevebeoahconnieasenasoudessaaveesesanevadenanends 486 Configuring Event Notifi
340. ng accuracy The Provisioning feature provides a simple method for planning and executing MACs moves adds changes and also includes Swap and Remove operation requests Features The provisioning module includes a host of innovative features such as Next Available Service Algorithms Work Orders and Customer Configured Policies These features support the execution of the provisioning operations described below E Move Allows you to generate a Work Order or partial Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for moving a selected device s from an A to B location The Move request keeps the same services that were associated with the moved device s m Add Allows you to generate a Work Order or partial Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for adding a new device s into location The Add request sets the services to the newly added device s according to its equipment type and customer request For the datacenter environment the Add request also supports the service of cabinet selection based on both predefined and user defined policies PV4E version 6 0 also supports the option to provision a new device while utilizing only part of its network adapters m Change Allows you to generate a Work Order or partial Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for changing a service or VLAN of device s PV4E version 6 0 also allocates new links for unused network adapters for existing dev
341. ng device Device found without a specific location Device located Device not found Device Status Changed To Dormant Environmental Controller Scanning Completed Su User Name Nam Filter Environmental Controller Scanning Failed Environmental Controller Scanning Started Error in Batch Operation Events Export Process Completed Export Process Completed with Conflicts Info Date Time Event Code Event Category i Export Process Started iid are Export Process Stopped Export Statistic Information Import Process Completed Import Process Completed with Conflicts Import Process Started Tmnart Pracecss Stanned lt Figure 343 Events Window 2 Select an event from the Events tab and click the Edit button in the Information pane The Add Edit Notification to Event window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 484 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E A Add Edit Notification To Event Webpage Dialog Catalog Item Added General UserName a Full Name Figure 344 Add Edit Notification to Event Window 3 Click the Add User button The Add Users window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 485 PV4E User Manual V6 0 ial Add Users Webpage Dialog J ey Fae Ts Ae ee ol ee Full Name E Aa Maarn Administrator Test Figure 345 Add Users Window 4 Select the users who should be notified for the event and click the OK button The Add Users window closes and the Add Edit Notification to Events window is updated wi
342. ng file Either the folder does not exist or there is no write permission Error reading from the database Error connecting to PV4E components Error The file is empty Error E Event Detail Web Page Dialog zs Previous log Next log item number 2 imported successfully c3 tem name Undia item number 4 imported successfully tem name ndiatBombay item numbers imported successfully tem name UndiaWagra item number amp imported successfully tem namei ndiatAgraiTaj MWahal item number T imported successfully tem namei ndiatAgraiTaj MahaliFloor 1 item number 8 imported successfully tem name ndiaAagraiTaj MahahFloor 2 item number 9 imported successfully tem name ndia agraiTaj MahahF loor 2 Comm Room Invalid item tem number 10 tem Mame lndiaibombayiiepal Conflict description Location Type does not meet PY4E Location Tree policies item number 13 imported successfully tem name UndiaWagrallaj MahaltFloor AComm Roomicsy Racka Invalid item tem number 14 tem MamewNepalcoy Rackil4 Conflict description Location does not exist Missing Location Mepal tem number 15 imported successfully tem name UndiaWagralTaj MahaltFloor 2 Comm Roomcsy RackOsicsy Fanelli tem number 16 imported successfully RiT Technologies Ltd 251 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Event Detail screen legend F No errors were found _ Warning encountered conflict can be skipped fg Critical error Cancels
343. ng or Other Vendor Name Enter the Vendor name from the drop down menu Image Name Enter image name this is an editable field 2 Click Apply to save the newly entered information Setting the Bay Layout in the Chassis Note This section applies only for chassis with a Pass through connectivity type 3 Edit the chassis you want to change by right clicking it gt edit or pressing the edit button Click the setting tab to enter information about the Bay layout RiT Technologies Ltd 450 PV4E User Manual V6 0 C7000 Chassis General retti Modules Cooling ay of Bays of Rows of management slots Of connectivity Mod Slots of ports per bay Bay Direction Left To Right O Right To Left Bay Order Top to bottom Bottom to top In the Number of Bays field set the number of bays in the chassis using the up down arrows or manually enter the number In the Number of Rows field enter the number of rows over which the bays are distributed using the up down arrows or manually enter the number Select the applicable radio button next to the Bay Direction field to determine whether the bays ordinal numbers are set from right to left or vice versa Select the applicable radio button in the Bay Order field to determine whether the bays ordinal numbers are set from top to bottom or vice versa Note This field is relevant only if the No of Rows is more than 1 Setting the Numbe
344. nging a User Password Tip Keep a list of all passwords as they are not retrievable from the system Passwords can be changed if required To change a User Password 1 Choose Permissions from Settings menu 2 Select the Users Tab in the Permissions Screen 3 Select the User 4 Click the Edit button The Add Edit Security User dialog opens Click inside the Password box A 6 A confirmation message opens Click the OK button to confirm The Password fields will clear 7 Change the Password and confirm it RiT Technologies Ltd 478 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Tip For more information about password Restriction refer to the following paragraph Permissions 8 Click the OK button G X PYPLAX Pi Alarm a Refresh W Logout Admina ator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTS HELPY Fon THE Enterprise Groups l may Administrator General Membership Emad EA i a Ba Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator J v System Administrator T General Hembership Emai Access PatchView A Name Adminstrator Wi spite a s nterne lE MploOMer Full Hare Administrator 2 Do you want to change the password Password eea Trt Tt Confirm Password eee ee ee eee J Password Expires After 4 Edit Password Never Expres wf Change Password at Next Loge Desripton System Administrator i Event Code Event Category Notification Oriy Figure 339 Ch
345. nk appears in the Edit Link Worksheet with a link symbol 3 Edit Link Webpage Dialog 3 Be Be nto 15 1 1 150 M 1 Pot 05 Back 05 Panel 01 Outlet Port 05 Pot0S Panel02 Sw Back0S BackO1 Outlet205 Pot0l Pot0li STOO KVMO02 KVM 01 KYM 01 lv uto Flip T Tooltip Figure 218 Edit Link Window KVM Link 2 To view the details of the KVM link right click the Station or KVM device and select View Link The details of the KVM link appear in the View link window Avi View link Webpage Dialog xi ye VY mA Vie W HIN i a BE gt i F B B F F E B 6 f faces ft m B F A 15 1 1 150 M Panel 01 Outi Panel 02 Sw Outlet 205 ST 001 KYM O1 Port 05 Port 05 Port 05 Port 01 Port 01 KYM O01 Figure 219 View Link Window KVM Link RiT Technologies Ltd 301 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 7 Automated Provisioning The PV4E solution offers a fully automated integrated Provisioning tool RIT s automated Provisioning tool enables you to assign system resources in a fully automated environment and has been designed to significantly improve the planning and implementation of the provisioning process for data centers and people space environments General The Provisioning module provides you with various tools that speed deployment and reduces the amount of time spent on planning and implementing tasks therefore reducing the number of errors and the time needed for manual work while increasi
346. nnected to switch port with VLAN 111 or switch port with VLAN s 111 and 112 The provisioned device fits the two of them however the system will favor the switch port with service 111 This will allow future provisioning requests with VLAN 112 to be addressed rather than denied Original outlet filtering rule The purpose of the automated provisioning engine is to ease the provisioning process as much as possible Therefore IS a Specific request can be addressed while not moving the device to a different outlet then the system will favor this outlet m Least popular outlet port Consider the following provisioning scenario illustrated in the figure below a N d a N d The illustration describes three devices being provisioned simultaneously to a room with 3 outlets Device 1 can be provisioned to either outlet A or B Device 2 can be provisioned to outlet B or C and Device 3 can be provisioned to outlet C solely Since the request are being executed simultaneously there might be a case where Device 1 is connected to outlet B device 2 is connected to outlet C and device 3 will not be allocated with an outlet This RiT Technologies Ltd 305 PV4E User Manual V6 0 rule overcomes this problem by allocating the least popular outlet In this case Outlet c before every other outlet Operation Generation Rules The operati
347. ns The location access for a user is derived from the user location permissions and the group location permissions to which the user is assigned A user can access a location if they have the following access permissions E as a member of a group to which they are assigned as an individual user E or have their own access permissions Edit Link Users can only edit a link if they have access to ALL the devices that create a link The links to which the user does not have permissions i e the user does not have access permissions to one or more items in the link will be disabled and marked with no entry signs in the Edit Link window The following example shows a user with no access permissions to the location in which Switch 01 is located The tool bar command options at the foot of the window are disabled The dark red no entry sign indicates an item to which the user does not have access permissions i EE The light red no entry sign indicates an item that is connected to an item with no location access permissions See the follow example link S Edit Link Web Page Dialog Fz PC Pat mm E Back Di at AS Pol iee i j ooo Pot u tr Biel Back oe Po 0 Swede Figure 361 Edit Link Location Tree Figure 91 shows a situation where the user has access permissions since there are no no entry signs See following explanation Edit Link Web Page Dialog E am E E E E E m 4 Erez PC
348. ns and terminology used within context of the PatchView for the Enterprise application Adapter Auto Detect Auto Naming Wizard Break link Adapters such as Modems and Network Interface Cards NIC are assigned to stations to enable the stations to connect to the network A feature of the application that automatically detects the connectivity of the LAN Equipment devices in the network A wizard that allows you to automatically give each item in a group of similar items a unique name The parameters have to be specified Breaking a link means disconnecting an existing link between network components Call Manager Catalog Channel Client Components Client Server SQL Relational Database Connecting Hardware The Call Manager processes information from IP Phones The Catalog of PV4E contains a detailed list of all available components that can be assigned to a specific location A communication path between the user station and the switch at the wiring closet The channel includes the connecting elements Item types are subdivided into classes Each inventory item is classified according to classes The PV4E client is an application that runs ona personal computer or station and relies on a server to perform some operations PatchView for the Enterprise components installed on Client stations A database management system DBMS that can respond to queries from client stations PatchView for the Enter
349. nual V6 0 Note The copper fiber type will be used to validate the connection of the physical link i e fiber won t be connected to copper gt To add a Connector 1 In the Catalog tree right click on a Connector Functional Type i e Copper or Fiber Optic 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Connector dialog opens J Add Edit Catalog Fiber Webpage Dialog LC Fiber Optic General Notes Name Functional Type Class Description Vendor Name Vendor Part No LC Fiber Optic choice RiT LC 359 FO N A Type No of Contacts i E Figure 39 Add Edit Catalog Connector dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Select either N A Male or Female for Type by clicking on the radio button If relevant enter the correct number of contacts for the Connector 6 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class Select OK or another of the options to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 58 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Rack Equipment to the Catalog A rack is a frame where equipment that manages your enterprise is housed Rack equipment includes the racks cabinets themselves as well as equipment installed on the racks The Rack Equipment is divided into five Functional Types Cabinet Cable Organizer Rack Shelf Spacer Note Before adding rack equipment to the Catalog know the U measurement of each item gt To add Rack Equi
350. o remove The indicator moves to the active address line Click the Remove button 9 Click the Contact tab to add further information to this Vendor Optional 10 To assign a new icon please see Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 11 Select OK Apply to finish the procedure 5 Vendor The haw Vendor Herm will be leted under the f Coomprehensive Company Supober 1 selected Vendor Class E oe n in the C atalog tree C Internatonal Svwtch Manufacturer F Com 7 ADC Krone fT Alcatel Figure 34 Example of Item listed under Class Adding Cable Patch Cord Horizontal and Vertical to the Catalog Cables are used to connect all the components of the network gt To Add a Telecommunication Infrastructure Item 1 In the Catalog tree right click on a Cable Functional Type 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Cable dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 51 PV4E User Manual V6 0 CLASSix SMART UTP Jumper P C Ends Motes CASSix SMART UTP Jumper P C Copper Description Blue Wire Media Type COPPER Length 2 m Diameter 0 02 in Vendor Name choice Vendor Part No R32 28x Figure 35 Add Edit Catalog Cable dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Select the Ends tab to enter the Connector information RiT Technologies Ltd 52 PV4E User Manual V6 0 choice Port Naming Port Duplicate Figure 36 End
351. o 002 Port04 3544 ISDN HelpDesk1 PBX Mo 002 Port05 3545 POTS HelpDesk1 PBX Mo 002 Port06 3546 POTS Unassigned PBX Mo 002 PortO7 3547 POTS Cooper PBX Mo 002 Port08 3548 POTS Black Importing PBX Data gt Importing the PBX data 1 From the Tools menu select PBX Import The Import dialog opens 2 Import Webpage Dialog Import General ID Location File gt W PBxo1 Country PBX Gty PBX Rack Figure 333 Import dialog 2 Select one or more PBXs for importing data by clicking in the box alongside each PBX ID 3 Click the Browse button to locate the PBX data file for each selected PBX This file must be located on the PV4E Server RiT Technologies Ltd 469 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 Locate the file and click Open You return to the Import dialog 5 Click the Import button The system processes the input data and generates a message box showing the results of the import If the number of telephone extensions in the import file is greater than the number of PBX ports in the PV4E database an error message appears describing the problem If the message appears check the data file to ensure it is formatted correctly If the problem persists ensure that you have defined all the links between the PBX switchboards and the associated outlets 6 Check the results of the import process Click the Maintenance button on the top navigation bar Double click on the Import even
352. o a new location all associated items are moved for example IP phone printer etc However you can also select one or two items under the selected workspace and move them separately A location that has been defined as workspace is identified by a checkmark in the Workspace field See the following screen Location Topology Users Comm Room At Tree Telecommunicaton Infrastructure General Content Inactive Device Location Ef USA Type Room Eii NYC Description El Bldg A Security Normal Floor 1 Workspace Av Comm Room Al Parent Location USA NYC Bldg A Hoor 1 Room 100 Room 101 Room 102 Room 103 Room 104 4 Floor 2 Environmental i i ai a ie a Figure 220 Work Order Screen General screen Services Definitions A Service is a tag which sub divides the physical layer into separated segments RiT Technologies Ltd 303 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Defining Services adds a filter to the rules embedded within the system You can only connect ports such as outlets switch ports or network adapters that are defined with the same service type Devices by default are defined with the Service type Service Any You can connect Service Any to all other service types and all other service types can be connected to Service Any Another service type which comes out of the box is the No service service which is being used to disqualify specific adapter from a provisioning request Connectivity Zone Definitions A Conn
353. o be assigned to RiT Technologies Ltd 362 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 Click the New Task button to open the Work Order task Worksheet 3 The Add Edit Work Order Task dialog box opens PV4E Windows Internet Explorer DER PVMAX PV MAINTENANCE TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELP Y Work Order Location Wo 06 08 2009 00001 All General Operations ID Engineer ee ee x iS SSE aa Description Name a _ Status Due Date Priority gt 1 Move Server gt WO 06 08 2009 00001 Created 08 06 2009 1 2 _ Remove PatchCord d Assign To am Y Delete New GA Add Edit Work Order Task Webpage Dialog General Links Notes Type choice Time Allocated Due Date 0907 2009 Due Time Description Start Date Date Comp Location A Time Elapsed Location B Alarm K Refresh W Logout Administrator Tasks Operation Status Edit FOR THE Enterprise Status Created idanb Created Administrator Assigned To status Perform Edit Work Order Assigned To Start Time Time Comp Figure 277 Adding a Link Break Link Task to a Work Order 4 Click on the next to the Type field and select either the Link or Break Link option optional The user can start from the link form and automatically the type will be set correctly RiT Technologies Ltd 363 PV4E User Manual V6 0 tl Add Edit Work Order Task Webpage Dialog i
354. o break a static off line link prior to implementation Black the item has a reserved status created in a work order Blue an existing dynamic on line link Blue a reserved dynamic on line in a work order it is reserved and cannot be used in another link task Blue a pending dynamic on line in the scanner Blue a request for a new dynamic on line link prior to implementation Blue a pending dynamic on line link in the scanner it is reserved and cannot be used in another link task RiT Technologies Ltd 286 PV4E User Manual V6 0 SYMBOL COLOR INDICATES f Blue a dynamic on line port reserved in a work order f Blue a pending dynamic on line port in the scanner Blue a request to break a dynamic on line link prior to implementation Blue a pending dynamic on line link in the scanner it is reserved and cannot be used in another link task that the item is connected in an untraceable connection Green that the item has a reserved status created in a work order This symbol only appears in View Link ae that the link is a secure link Edit Link Toolbar The following table explains the functions of the buttons available in the Edit Link dialog Clear All Clears all the Items in the Edit Link Worksheet Auto Flip When checked automatically flip the item so that the ports face the correct position when brought into the Edit Link Worksheet Tooltip When checked will show
355. o provision a new blade into an enclosure 1 Select the target chassis right click it and select the Add menu items a Aloor 1 El if Hall 1 z be Row A Cabinet 9 2 The Add equipment screen opens 3 Specify the exact type of blade that you would like to provision 4 Click Next the following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 341 PV4E User Manual V6 0 e Add Equipment Webpage Dialog Add To Location USA NYC Bidg A Floor 1 Hall 1 Row A A1 H1A1 BL S1 Id Name Catalog Name Height Bays Width Bays _Blade Chassis Name 5 Within this screen you can specify the target bay where you would like to place the blade The automated provisioning offers only available bays which fit the size of the newly provisioned blade 6 From this point onwards the provisioning process is identical to the steps described above Change Functionality Allows you to generate a Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for changing device attributes in its current location The Change functionality is limited to the boundaries of the original link outlet bay location For blade servers gt To change terminal equipment perform the following 1 From the Work Order screen gt Location tab gt Select item workspace to change and right click RiT Technologies Ltd 342 PV4E User Manual V6 0 P 4E Windows Internet Explorer 3 o iol x P LET Alarm R Refresh Logout Administrator MA
356. of access rights to edit links Device Authorization Enhances the system s security support functionality The MAC authorization module enables the user to approve existing unauthorized MAC address authorize new address prior to Discovery Module detection and receive alerts for new MAC addresses detected by the Discovery module E Incident Management An enhanced fault management for real time alerts that also contains effective troubleshooting tools Active Directory Integration A PV4E user authentication is performed against the organization s active directory or the PV4E local database Telecommunication Infrastructure Allows you to document and manage your telecommunication infrastructure s cables pathways and provides the ability to document the cabling topology for horizontal pathways and cabling and also backbone pathways and cabling Blade Server Support PV4E supports Blade Servers by automatically identifying consolidating and positioning Blades in the chassis Pop Up Messages Allows you to select events that you want to view as a pop up message E PVMAX Scheduled Unscheduled Events This feature has been developed to enable PV4E to differentiate PYVMAX events between planned links that are performed through WO Edit Link and arbitrary links performed in the field Inactive Stations Feature Improves the accuracy of your network information by automatically eliminating devices which are no longer conn
357. og item mentioned above that are located in the Location tree To add or edit service for Inventory items an outlet has been used in this example 1 Via the Maintenance menu right click an outlet from the Location tree and click Add The Add Edit Inventory Outlet screen is displayed RiT Technologies Ltd 314 PV4E User Manual V6 0 fe Add Edit Inventory Outlet Webpage Dialog General se lect service Figure 230 Add Edit Inventory items Screen Via the Ports tab select the Service from the drop down list box 3 Repeat step 2 for any of the network adapter whose service needs to be changed 4 Click Apply 5 Click OK to save and close the dialog box To save the inventory item as a new entry in the Location tree click Save As New before clicking OK in step 4 Click Duplicate to copy the entry to the Location tree with its exact attributes If you want to apply the same service for the entire network adapter then rather than allocating one by one you can tick the checkbox at the left top most corner of the grid and do the allocation only once Connectivity Zone The Connectivity zones window shows the different connectivity zones which have already been defined in addition to allowing to user editing adding new ones Each panel can be defined as part of one or many groups RiT Technologies Ltd 315 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Mohor Location HE AFI USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 1 CR 1 Rac
358. ogies Ltd 139 PV4E User Manual V6 0 j A Add Edit Inventory Spacer Webpage Dialog a Amber Inc Belgium Brussels City Towers Floor 0 Figure 109 Add Edit Inventory Spacer dialog 5 Select the Catalog Name by clicking on the lbutton or add a new item by clicking on the Add button 6 Type in the name of the Spacer The Size of the Spacer will be added by the system according to what is defined in the Catalog There must be enough room in the Rack for the Spacer otherwise the Spacer is not accepted 7 Select the Class by clicking on thel button or add a new class by clicking on the Add button Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Click OK to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 140 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Defining Rack Contents You can proceed to define the rack content A rack can contain any combination of Patch Panels from the RiT Smart Patch Panels family network equipment or scanners and stations r r r r r p r r a r r r r r p a r r r r r p r r r r r r p r r r r r r p r r r r r r r Figure 110 Rack RiT Technologies Ltd 141 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Viewing a Rack When viewing items in a Rack within the location tree its actual slot position is not shown In order to see its exact location within the Rack it is necessary to View the Rack gt To view a rack 1 Select and right click o
359. ollowing list highlights some of the Discovery Module s features Automatic Asset Assignment The Discovery Module software automatically discovers devices in the network including PCs IP phones printers switches and other equipment and assigns their locations down to the exact room and cubicle Automatically provides complete linkage information in graphical format granting full end to end visibility and automatically updates new locations when moves occur Warns of a mismatch between requested activity and real status through ongoing scanning activities RiT Technologies Ltd 4 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Real time accurate Mapping of the Network Switch traps provide real time indications of any terminal equipment connections link up or disconnect link down Scheduled Work Orders Allows you to create and assign Work Orders to technicians Using a PDA hand held device the technician is guided to the exact location Once a Work Order is assigned LED lights on your patch panel will light for a connection flash for a disconnection The database is automatically updated upon completion of the task SitePro SitePro software is installed on a hand held device PDA and provides the technician with detailed information about tasks that need to be performed in the communication room or data center or virtually anywhere else on site in real time SitePro guides users through their specific tasks stores and displays ex
360. on Tab gt Alternative options 1 Right click on the selected Security Controller from the Location tree to view the context menu RiT Technologies Ltd 166 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Location y Topology Users Tree Telecommunicaton Infrastructure C 3 Amber Inc Belgium el pyMax Controller 7 1C_3423 Show CAD Refresh Figure 127 System View Maintenance Screen Location Tab 2 Click Action to view the context menu i PV4E Windows Internet Explorer J x WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY a FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users SC 322 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Rack Indicator Activator Notes Location 3 Amber Inc Functional Type PVMax Controller e Belgium Class B J l pvMax Controller 2 Catalog Name PVMax Security Controller 1 IC 3423 Online Status Not assigned Ay SC_322 Serial No SW Ver Type Size U 1 Power W 45 Location Amber Inc Events Info Date Time EventCode Event Category Duplicate Delete Properties Show CAD Refresh FEISS Sn RE _ Action 2 Delete Figure 128 System View Maintenance Screen Location Tab The Add Edit PVMax Security Controller screen opens 4 The Add Edit PVMax Security Controller screen contains five tabs General tab The following tabs in the Add Edit Inventory screen can be edited RiT Technologies Ltd 167 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit
361. on To pology Users Tree Telecommunicaton Infrastructure Septet i Demo W Comm Room E Cabinet 1 BB pPp oPR RP pp spr TT Dlink Switch FP Scanneri F EE ry Masteri Figure 145 Panel View r Web Page Dialog Figure 146 Rack View Location Tree and Searches A new Panels Connected field has been added when performing a Switch search with the following options RiT Technologies Ltd 202 PV4E User Manual V6 0 All shows all switches m Interconnect shows only switches attached to interconnect panels E Non Interconnect shows only switches not attached to interconnect panels Search for Panel Since the Interconnect is now attached to a Switch it will not appear in the Location tree To perform a Search do the following Stand on the Search For button at the foot of the screen select gt Connecting HW gt Panel Rack Equipment Demo Comm Room Den User Software Adapter Telecommunication Infrastructure Terminal Equipment Event Code Network Equipment B rk Equipmen Ts PatchView Equipment Connecting HW Outlet Work Order Data Center Equipment Loca tion Global The following Search window opens ocetion Indude Sut Location Scanner Name Senel ink Scanner Serial No FV Not Used idut Pu Ll Narre Catalog Name Figure 147 Search for Panel Window Enter the details of the item being searched for and select Search Now The
362. on generation rules generate a list of tasks for each request based on the relevant information For example if a workstation and printer are selected for move the rules for workstation and printer are executed The output of this process is a Work Order containing operations that contain tasks You can sort the Work Order tasks according to one of their properties e g type assignee etc The Work Order production is ruled by the defined policies in the system User Defined Rules In addition to the out of the box rules the automated Provisioning module has a highly flexible engine which allows adding user defined rules to the system without a need of rebuilding the application For additional information contact a RIT representative Work Orders and Tasks The output of a provisioning request is a work order A work order is a set of tasks that have to be carried out in order to implement Move Add Change Swap Remove activity to one or more terminal equipments The tasks are divided into two major categories 1 Online tasks Tasks which can be automatically monitored by RiT s smart cabling These tasks are the Break Link and Link tasks 2 Offline tasks Tasks which can not be automatically monitored for their completion You have control over the offline tasks and can set new tasks without the need for R amp D intervention Provisioning module General orientation This section gives an overview of the provisioning module m
363. on predefined policies or profiles according to its equipment type and customer request T Adding Single or Multiple Items to Location gt To add single or multiple items to a Location 1 From the toolbar select the Location tab Right click on an area in the Location tree and select Add from the context menu RiT Technologies Ltd 334 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Work Order Tree Single View Double View Change Swap Remove Figure 247 Add to Location Screen The Add Equipment screen is displayed Add To Location Omri provisioning Country Floor 1 Room 1 Name Functional Type Class Catalog Name PortName O O Sevi Any Service Add To List Remove From List Additional Info Figure 248 Add to Location Screen 2 Device 1 is the default name that appears in the Name field and can be changed Complete the information from the drop down menus for each subsequent field in the order that they appear You cannot skip a RiT Technologies Ltd 335 PV4E User Manual V6 0 field The drop down lists take you through the process of defining the exact device to be provisioned 3 Override the predefined services in the Service field 4 To override the default VLAN definitions click the ellipsis g button The following VLAN List screen opens Category Added Manually Added Manually Added Manually Added Manually Added Manually Indicates that the VLAN is not in use
364. ons Tasks General R Refresh x ORE Administrator fag FOR THE Enterprise WM Desciption Operation Status Assigned To E Name Status W0 06 08 2009 00001 Created gt WO 07 09 2009 00003 Created Due Date Priority z i Connect Switch Switch Mo 08 06 2009 1 3 3 A Connect Switch Switch Mo Connect Switch Switch Mo itch Switch Mo Created Created Created Created 09 07 2009 1 b G View link Webpage Dialog View link Switch Module 01 Port 01 J ilaia FYE p Fo Switch Module Panel 0i Port 01 Port 01 lt Perform Edit Work Order Events Event Code Info Date Time 09 07 2009 11 32 Work Order Task Created 09 07 2009 11 32 Work Order Task Created 09 07 2009 11 32 Work Order Task Created 09 07 2009 11 32 Work Order Task Created Event Category j Work Order Work Order Work Order Work Order 09 07 2009 10 33 Batch Completed Successfully DB 09 07 2009 10 33 Batch Process Started DB lt Figure 286 Viewing a Link Note The status of the Link shows an R Refer to the following table for all the symbols and their meanings Blak An existing static off line link Black A reserved static off line link in a work order It is reserved and cannot be used in another link task Black A request for a new static off line link prior to implementation en o Nee A static off line port reserved in a work order Black A request to brea
365. opology Tree A pull down menu will appear 2 Click on Edit Link Note The first set of ports or single port will be placed in the first column with the Static ports on the left and the dynamic ports on the right With Auto Flip enabled ports brought into the 2nd column will be correctly aligned allowing linking to take place between two dynamic ports The Edit Link worksheet opens RiT Technologies Ltd 277 PV4E User Manual V6 0 S5 P V4E Windows Internet Explorer PYMAX py Alarm K Refresh W Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLS v SETTINGS v REPORTS v HELP v y A FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Connectors Notes Room 100 E Cabinet 1 S caBol BB Panelg A Rack 1 Room 101 Room 102 Size U 1 Functional Type Panel Class Copper Catalog Name SMART CLASSix UTP 24 Status Unconnected Scanner Name 4 Floor 02 Link Terminator No Room 200 Location Japan Tokyo Building T A Floor 01 Room 100 CAB O1 HN Rack 1 BB Panel 01 BB Panel 01 BB Panel 01 Panel 01 ie Panel 01 e Panel N1 iv Auto Flip E Tooltip Figure 195 Edit Link Worksheet Note All subsequent items or ports necessary to complete the linking process must be dragged and dropped into the worksheet See Adding Additional Tasks to the Work Order in the Work Order and Managing Links chapter Open Edit Link from the Ports Tab
366. opology Users Tree Teecommunication Infrastructure Loca thon Amber Inc Belgium Demo Ph EH D Comm Room _ Cabinet 1 Ei Demo Rack he Dm Change Catalog Settings The following Edit Link screen opens for editing at the foot of the screen P Edit Link Web Page Dialog Fort O1 E 0 100 20 22 i Port 02 E 0 100 20 22 M Port 03 BEE 0 100 20 22 M Port 04 FE 0 100 20 22 M Port 05 Figure 143 Edit Link RiT Technologies Ltd 200 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Link View To view link click the port in the panel window In the View link similar to the Edit Link the switch and panel are presented as one unit Connected Disconnected Ports Events and Mail Notifications When a user connects disconnects ports from an Interconnect panel that is attached to a switch the event contains information about the port of the Switch rather than the port of the panel A mail notification event contains the same data Interconnect Panel Views Switch View The Show Switch is a newly added feature and can be viewed in several different ways to view Show Switch m Right click on the switch in the Location Tree gt Show Switch See figure 155 m The Show Switch can also be viewed through the Link View window by clicking on the switch m The Show Switch can be viewed by clicking the switch in the rack view RiT Technologies Ltd 201 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Loca t
367. or Duplicate and Save as New The Duplicate and Save as New function creates a new copy of the inventory item Note Some fields are cleared during the copy When a Rack is created using the Duplicate or Save as New option the original association to the Security Controller Commands is lost Events PV4E Security Controller activates the following events PVMax Controller port changed to on off Event is sent when a PVMax Security Controller port changes its status to on or off The initiator of the event can be a user or a device PVMax Controller port is already in status Event is sent when a PVMax Security Controller port is asked to change into its current status The initiator of the event is the user PVMax Controller port error RiT Technologies Ltd 178 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Event is sent when a PVMax Security Controller port returned error The initiator of the event is the user PVMax Controller Configuration Download Failed Event is sent when the configuration file download fails Assigning a Rack Indicator to a Rack The following instructions describe how to assign a Rack Indicator or any other device to a Rack RiT Technologies Ltd 179 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note All Rack assignments are performed in the Location tab of the Maintenance screen 1 Select a Rack to be assigned from the Location tree in the System View window The Rack properties are displayed in the Information pa
368. or 03 E Floor 04 Duplicate Patch Cord H g Fooros Edi Pathway Trunk Cable Show CAD Events Refresh r Info Date Time 3 The following screen opens at the General tab RiT Technologies Ltd 184 PV4E User Manual V6 0 General Tab E Cable Z X 1 Functional Type Class Catalog Name Length End Of Warranty start Point End Point Location 4 ma g kE C Po ee ipi ite el n ere Add Edit Inventory Horizontal and Vertical Webpage Dialog x Emgs Paths Notes Cable Z X 1 m o in 09 07 12009 Last Updated Florence BLDG 7 Cabinet 71 Florence BLDG X Cabinet X1 Florence BLDG Z 4 Enter the following details in the General Tab Name Functional Type Class Catalog Name Media Type Length End of Warranty Last updated Start End Points Location Enter name Completed by default from context menu selection Use the drop down list to enter class Use the drop down list to enter catalog name Entered by default from the Class field Enter the length of cable See Measurements section on how to change from Feet to Meters Warranty expiry date Date the record was last updated Is set automatically to the cable s location and updated according to the cable link terminating points The user has the capability to override the system settings Is set automatically to the cable s location and the user RiT Technologies Ltd 185 PV4E User Manual
369. or Controller Ie e The PVMax Indicator Controller is a subset of the PVMax Security Controller and works independently when connected to a PVMax Master Expander or Master Expander It is used solely to activate the Rack Indicators Control Pad The PVMax Control Pad is connected to a PVMax Scanner via the Control Pad Port Using the Control Pad the technician is guided through the process of connecting and disconnecting the cables to complete the links defined in the system Adding Connecting Hardware to the Catalog Connecting Hardware refers to such items as communications outlets patch panels and connectivity modules These can be either copper or fiber optic A comprehensive list of Connecting Hardware has been included in the database and additional items can be added to the Catalog Adding an Outlet to the Catalog a An Outlet is a connecting device in the work area A comprehensive list of outlets has been included in the database Additional Outlets can be added to the database gt To add an Outlet to the Catalog 1 In the Catalog tree right click on an Outlet 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Outlet dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 86 PV4E User Manual V6 0 FA Add Edit Catalog Outlet Webpage Dialog Double 5 1 Port STP Ports Motes Double 5 1 Port STP Copper Description Comm outlet Vendor Name ADC Krone Vendor Part No K 12344 Figure 63 Add
370. or provides the last connecting hardware in the link as the device location Once the device has been identified take the appropriate action to determine if the intruding device is valid or not RiT Technologies Ltd 466 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 12 Importing PBX Data PV4E considers a PBX as offline equipment You can update the PBX information to ensure that PV4E continually represents the present network situation PV4E takes the information acquired from the PBX ports and maps the full connectivity between the PBX switch port and the telephone end device This includes for example the phone s physical location With a PBX module license you can import the PBX data directly into the PV4E database A PBX creates a data dump file containing the connectivity information of the different ports PV4E requires the importing of a simple file format that is based on this data file You may need to modify this file slightly to make it ready for import Note You must have previously defined the PBX in the Catalog You must follow the various import preparation steps before performing the actual import procedure of the PBX data Depending on the frequency of updates to your telephone extensions you Should update the PBX data by reloading the updated data file to represent the new situation This topic chapter includes the following sections Import Preparations E Import Data File Format Importing PBX Data Import Pre
371. ored results in the cancellation of the process Warning A conflict that can be ignored and does not affect the rest of the process The line is skipped and the import continues in the next line RiT Technologies Ltd 249 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The following table lists all the possible conflicts and their error type error or a warning Conflict Description Type Invalid Item Type Warning Wrong number of fields Warning Invalid Functional Type Warning Class Name does not exist Catalog Name does not exist Related item does not exist Example Vlan of Network Equipment is not in the destination Warning database Catalog Name exists with different properties Location does not exist Location Type does not exist Warning Location Type does not meet PV4E Location Tree policies Warning Example Trying to place a country inside a city Invalid value for field Example Value aaa for Rack U Order field valid values are Warning Top Bottom Duplicate item in location Value exceeds maximum length Warning Example Item name length is more than 50 characters The file version does not match the destination database Error version The file could not be read The file may be corrupt or created Eor using a different PV4E version RiT Technologies Ltd 250 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Conflict Description The file has been changed since exported by PV4E and cannot be imported Error creati
372. ort 20 Back 20 Back 20 Room 200 Any Servit Port 21 Port 21 Back 21 Back 21 E Rack 1 Any Servic Port 22 Port 22 Back 22 Back 22 Front Back Meds GA EE E Po ek Pa a E ke Edit Link Webpage Dialog i Gut Port 19 Panel 01 Back 19 Gopy ILER z f F ack 01 H B 4 Back 02 Panel 01 Port 02 Panel 01 Port 01 i q Select Link Back03 PanelOl Port 03 SEEREN Paste View split i Flip Select Link Ce Viey split j Break Link Flip Link Break Link fidd Sub Link Link Gantel Sub Link dd Sub Link Cancel Sub Link Mark Secure Link v Auto Flip Unmark Secure Link Mark Secure Link Unmark Secure Link Figure 201 Copying ports in a Worksheet Auto or Manual Flipping of Links When links are created the correct ports of the two items to be connected need to be positioned in adjoining cells With the Auto flip feature enabled the items are flipped so that the ports will automatically be correctly aligned Links can be manually flipped Note The Auto flip feature flips the ports so that either static links are aligned next to each other or dynamic links are aligned In the case of a link between a Patch Panel and a Switch static and dynamic ports are linked and you must manually flip the link Using the Auto flip Feature This Auto flip feature is either enabled or disabled by clicking on the button in the toolbar This is located at the bottom of th
373. ory do the following 1 From the Maintenance tab stand on the Location tree and select either a cabinet or rack Right click and select Add Terminal Equipment gt Station RiT Technologies Ltd 456 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Tree Telecommunicaton Infrastructure General Location EMT Ear Bristol Ear London fi pci ae Floor i Halli Row A Cabinet 14 FI Add Rack Equipment al Add Terminal Equipment i E Add PatchView Equipment Add Data Center Equipment Add Network Equipment f Row B fs Row C 2 The following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 457 PV4E User Manual V6 0 J Add Edit Inventory Station Webpage Dialog General Name Functional Type Class Catalog Name Status CPU Monitor Arm Side No of Slots Location Adapters Software Owner choice choice B Last Activity Date RAM Power W Weight KG Serial No Japan TA Note When entering the Catalog Name for a catalog item in the above Add Edit Inventory Station screen new tabs appear on the tab bar Use the forward backward arrows to view all tabs Modubes Rlacdhes Coolimn 3 Enter the name of the enclosure and using the drop down menus where applicable enter information 4 Ifthe selected enclosure has a pass through Connectivity type then the Modules tab appears If the selected enclosure has a Switching or Other connectivity type then the Adapte
374. oup screen is displayed Groups BLDGA Zone A g Add Group Webpage Dialog Te e gt BLDGA Zone A CZ F2 CR2 CZ F3 CR3 DC1 H1 CZ DC1 H1 CZ B2 DC H1 CZ B5 Port Name DC H2 CZ1 uM 17 A Port 17 DC H2 C72 A Port 18 Z Port 19 Z Port 20 A Port 21 nta Bidg A Floor 1 CR 1 Racl Items nta Bidg A Floor 1 CR 1 Racl Connectivity Zone Event Category License Figure 232 Add Group Screen 2 Type a name in the Name field and a description in the Description field to describe the new group Click Apply Click the Items tab Click Add The Add Panels to Group dialog box opens RiT Technologies Ltd 317 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Panels Webpage Dialog Add Panels To Group Indude Sub Location 1 choice Catalog Name choice Functional Type Class Catalog Name Location Enter details of your search in the Name Location and Class fields and click Search Now The following Add Panels To Group screen opens A Add Panels Webpage Dialog Add Panels To Group Devices Name Location Indude Sub Location Class choice Catalog Name choice Name Functional Type Class Catalog Name Location gt AF1PP1 Panel Copper SMART 24STP USA Atlanta Bidg A Floor 1 CR 1 R AFIPP2 Panel Copper SMART 24 STP USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 1 CR 1 R Bi PP 1 Panel Copper SMART 24 UTP USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 2 Add r B1 PP 2 Panel Cop
375. pan Export to a File Functional Type Station Russia Device Locator Class Default Station 3 UK Catalog Name Default Station USA Le 15 1 1 110 New York Manual Last Activity Date 1 26 2009 5 5 No Location RAM Station 2 Monitor Power W 0 ocs 9506 Arm Side Weight KG 0 E GANDALF No of Slots Serial No Location No Location Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category RiT Technologies Ltd 511 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Appendix A Backing up and Restoring the PV4E Database This section provides a step by step guide to backing up the PV4E Database with MS SQL PV4E is based on a SQL relational database which requires that the database has to be backed up occasionally to save your data These functions are conducted through the MS SQL Enterprise Manager and must follow a specific procedure The PV4E Service must be stopped prior to backing up the database Stopping the PV4E Service The PV4E service can be stopped from either the PV4E Server Control icon or from the Control Panel To stop the PV4E Server from the PV4E Server Control icon 1 On the Status Bar double click the PV4E Server Control icon at 1S pate 9 20 AM The PV4E Server Control window opens 2 Click the Stop button PY4E Server Control Time Categon Description ater i 009 07 04 02 09 18 03 PW4E Ser Service started u pde 07 04 02 09 75 50 PY4E Ser Service stopped Stop a O0F 07 04 02 09
376. parations The main steps to import the PBX data are summarized as follows For the initial definition of the PBXs in your network refer to Chapter 4 The Catalog on page 36 This includes defining any additional fields for the PBX module that are not part of the PV4E default template Before the PBX data is imported you must create all the matching links for each extension as described in Error Reference source not found on page Error Bookmark not defined Import Data File Format PBXs provide information on the configuration of the PBX switch via data dump files These data files for PBXs vary from system to system PV4E recognizes a simple file format that can be easily extracted from this data file You need to edit the data file based on the description below The result will be a comma delimited text file that you can import directly into PV4E Different PBX vendors include variations to these fields and you may need to do some manual editing to make the data file conform to the specification in the following table PV4E requires the data to be imported in the following format RiT Technologies Ltd 467 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Top level PBX PBX lt PBX name gt Each file can contain only information one PBX row The row must start with the word PBX For example PBX PBX 01 Multiple Module Module lt Module Name gt Each file can contain one or Modules information more modules The row must start with the wo
377. per SMART 24 UTP USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 2 Add r B1 PP 3 Panel Copper SMART 24 UTP WUSA WYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 2 Add r B1 PP 4 Panel Copper SMART 24 UTP USA NYC DC1 Hloor 1 Hall 2 Add r Ai_f lt po_1 Danaol Canmor LMADT WA IITE WAL Lied lene d H OO AA e Page 1 of 2 Pages Total Records 60 Figure 233 Add Panels Screen 6 From the list select the panels that you want to include in the group and Click OK RiT Technologies Ltd 318 PV4E User Manual V6 0 7 To select several items that are not in succession hold down the Ctrl key and select using the mouse To select consecutive items stand on the first item hold down the Alt key and click the last in the selection Click OK The following screen opens he Edit Group Webpage Dialog Tocsin i JAFIPP1 USA Atlanta Bidg A Floor 1 CR 1 Rac fine fe AFIPP2 USA Atlanta Bidg A Floor 1 CR 1 Rac Port Name F Fort Name Port Name a z p 7 a ee ae ae Port 01 Port 02 Port 03 Port 04 l Port 09 Port 10 Port 11 Port 12 Paes i 5 i l N tji eo ad Port 17 Port 18 Port 19 Port 20 Figure 234 Edit Group window 8 Select the panel from the top half of the screen The lower half shows which ports are included in that connectivity zone To deselect all click the All check box dal If you want to deselect a few click the check mark box next to the port RiT Technologies Ltd 319 PV4E User Manual V6 0 he E
378. pment Add Network Equipment Add PatchView Equipment Expander Add Connecting HW H Master Add Data Center Equipment Master Expander Local Scanner PVMAX Control Pad PVMAX Scanner The Action button can be used as an alternative to the right click See the following screen Add Rack Equipment Add Terminal Equipment Add Network Equipment Add PatchView Equipment Expander Add Connecting HW Master Add Data Center Equipment Master Expander Local Scanner PVMAX Control Pad PYMAX Scanner Show CAD Refresh 4 Select PVMax Security Controller in the Catalog Name context menu 5 The Rack Indicator Activator and I O tabs can also be viewed Click OK RiT Technologies Ltd 165 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Edit an Existing I ndicator Controller 1 Select the Security Controller from the inventory and Click Edit WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY Topology Users Location SC_322 Tree O Telecommunication Infrastructure _ Location O amber Inc fF pymax Controller 2 t 7492 Rack Indicator n HELP Y FOR THe Enterprise Activator Notes PVMax Controller gt PVMax Scourity Controller Not assigned amp se 322 Spa u UK H USA T No Location 6 A Printer 1 Router 1 Station 4 Switch 1 Telephone 20 Size U Power W Location Events Info Date Time Event Category Edit Links NE Eventlog Figure 126 System View Maintenance Screen Locati
379. pment 1 In the Catalog tree right click a Rack Equipment Functional Type 2 Click Add Item from the right click menu The Add Edit Catalog Rack Equipment dialog opens FY Add Edit Catalog Rack Webpage Dialog Dimensions Motes Rack 45U Functional Type Class thoice Description Size U 45 i Power Limit W o Recommended VW Arm Side None Weight KG Vendor Name choice Vendor Part No U Order Top to bottom O Bottom to top Figure 40 Add Edit Catalog Rack Equipment dialog RiT Technologies Ltd 59 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 Enter the relevant information specifically the size U of the equipment 4 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or 5 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding Software to the Catalog ro Software that is defined in the Catalog can be assigned to any Station in the Catalog The Item Type Software has been divided into two Functional Types Application OS gt To add Software 1 In the Catalog tree right click on a Software Functional Type i e Application or OS 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Software dialog opens M Add Edit Catalog Application Webpage Dialog _ Motes Office 2007 choice Description Office 2007 Vendor Name _ choice Vendor Part No Figure 41 Add Edit Catalog Software dialog 3 Enter the relevant information RiT
380. pology Users Tree O Teecommunicaton Infrastructure Loca ton 3 Amber Inc 3 Be igum Mi Cty Towers Em Foor 01 Room 101 Reception L L Zee Add Rack Equipment d Cable Organizer Shelf Juul Add Terminal Equipment Add Network Equipment b Add PatchView Equipment b Add Connecting HW Add Data Center Equipment Spacer ral Duplicate rl a Edit EEI Delete LELDE M eoD Figure 104 Add Rack Equipment from Location Window Properties 3 Select Add Rack Equipment A drop down list appears 4 Click Cable Organizer The Add Edit Inventory Cable Organizer dialog will open RiT Technologies Ltd 135 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit inventory Cable Organizer Webpage Dialog x Hotes iame Functional Type Sr Class choice Catalog Name choice Size U Location Amber Inc Belgium Brussels City Towers Floor 0 F T i al e i i z ee kan eT ae Sj aa K S I o a a Ts Figure 105 Add Edit Inventory Cable Organizer dialog 5 Select the Catalog Name by clicking on the button or add a new item by clicking on the Add button 6 Type in the name of the Cable Organizer The Size of the Cable Organizer will be added by the system according to what is defined in the Catalog There must be enough room in the Rack for the Cable Organizer otherwise the Cable Organizer is not accepted 7 Select the Class by clicking on
381. prise uses the Microsoft client server database application called SQL Server Refers to copper or fiber optic hardware items such as communications outlets and patch panels used to physically connect components of the network RiT Technologies Ltd 525 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Connectivity A device s ability to link with other devices in the network Connector The part of a cable that plugs into a port to connect one device to another Control Pad A device connected to a scanner that allows the person performing the on site wiring changes to activate the physical link change process Equipment Equipment includes network elements such as hubs switches routers as well as telephone network elements PatchView Master Scanners Satellite Scanners Master Expanders Expanders and peripheral equipment such as control pads and security controllers are also classified as Equipment Full link A link from a Station or Device to the Network Equipment is defined as a Full link Indicator Controller The PVMax Indicator Controller is a subset of the PVMax Security Controller and works independently when connected to a PVMax Master Expander or Master Expander It is used solely to activate the Rack Indicators Indoor Backbone Satellite Scanners and their associated Patch Panels located in other communication rooms within the same organization Inventory The Inventory contains all the network components actually used in your p
382. pter Terminal Equipment Network Equipment PatchView Equipment Connecting Hardware Data Center Equipment Functional Type Every Item type in the Catalog is subdivided into Functional Types with the exception of Vendors and Racks For example PatchView for the Enterprise has subdivided the Item type Terminal Equipment into the following Functional Types IP Phone KVM Device Printer Station and Telephone Functional Types are predefined and installed with PV4E Additional Functional Types cannot be added Both Classes and Items can be listed under a Functional Type Item Type Functional Type Vendor Telecommunication Horizontal and Vertical RiT Technologies Ltd 38 PV4E User Manual V6 0 item Type Infrastracture runk Cable Connector Copper Fiber Rack Equipment Cabinet Cable Organizer Rack Shelf Spacer Software Application Operating System Adapter NIC Modem KVM SCSI Monitor Terminal Equipment IP Phone KVM Device Printer Station elephone Network Equipment Switch PBX Router Hub RiT Technologies Ltd 39 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Class item Item Type Functional Type PatchView Equipment PV IPV Control Pad Master Scanner Satellite Scanner Security Controller PatchView Equipment Exander PVMax Local Scanner Master Master Expander PVMAx controller PVMax Control pad PVMax Scanner Connecting Hardware Outlet Panel Pass through Data Center Equip
383. r Refresh Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY 3 FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology GANDALF Tree Telecommunication Infrastru arcs eal General Adapters a ae TOES are Location es Export to a File Functional Type Station Russia aL Class Default Station o HES UK Catalog Name Default Station ef USA Le 15 1 1 110 New York Manual Last Activity Date 1 26 2009 5 5 No Location RAM Station 2 Monitor Power W 0 ocs 9506 Arm Side Weight KG 0 GANDALF No of Slots Serial No Location No Location Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category RiT Technologies Ltd 510 PV4E User Manual V6 0 System Status The System Status tab contains information about the current state of your system Stand on an item in the System Status tree The information pane on the right hand side displays information relating to the selected item Click the hyperlink to open the View Inventory dialog box to get more information To view the System Status click the Tools tab and select System Status from the drop down menu gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer PVMAX PV Alarm Refresh W Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY 4 FOR THE Enterprise Auto Detect Location Topology User PRX inapert GANDALF Tree D Telecommunication Infrastru At a Import from a File General Adapters Software Owner Notes Location ee Ja
384. r Manual V6 0 Figure 254 Add Equipment Operations Tab The symbol gt indicates that the action could not be performed as the recommended link could not be allocated See Error Messages Examples for more information on errors The symbol ty indicates that the add operation was successful The symbol indicates that a multi NIC server has been provisioned but the system could only suggest part of the link 16 Click Modify Work Order to change an operation or task of the selected Work Order Adding Part of Device Network Adapter The automated Provisioning allows you to add new devices without allocating connectivity to all of their network adapters This is done by specifying the No service service to any network adapter that should not be part of the current request Note If you set all the links of the newly added device to the No service service then the provisioning module will block you from progressing with your request From this point onwards the application acts in the same manner and allocates resources other than the link which were marked with a No Service service In order to allocate connectivity resources to the network adapters that were not provisioned at the very first time use the Change functionality Adding New Blade into Blade Enclosure The automated provisioning module allows you to plan the additions of new blades into an existing chassis The following steps are to be taken in order t
385. r a Location Point eee ae Florence BLD B 2 To edit the branching points click Edit 3 To adda branching point expand the Location Tree on the right hand side Select a location and click the arrow f The Location appears in the Branching Points list on the left hand side Repeat the process to add more branching points You can use the up down arrows to move locations in the list Notes Tab Use the notes screen to make any useful notes that you may need RiT Technologies Ltd 192 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding a Cable to a Pathway To add a cable to a pathway do the following 1 Click the pathway on the Location tree The Properties screen for the selected pathway appears on the left hand side Location Topology Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Location Amber Inc 1 Belgium Demo2 Florence T B01 BLD1 BLD2 General Dimensions Cables Functional Type Pathway Class Catalog Name Material Type Maximum Capacdty Capacty Horizontal and Vertical 2 Start Point Florence BLD 1 WS Pathway 1 End Point Horence BLD 2 SS BLD1 BLD2 Location Florence BLD 1 BLD 2 V BD3 BLD A BLD B BLD C 2 The following screen opens at the General Tab Select the Cables tab E Ir i a F ea Add Edit Inventory Pathway Webpage Dialog x Outdoor Cable Z Y General Dimensions Cables Branching Pts Notes Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex
386. r a similar map layout of the buildings and floor will be sufficient If the enterprise is a Data Center managing networks for multiple companies then it is necessary to define each company name at the first level of the hierarchical tree Naming Locations and Items in the Location Tree All Locations and Items added or assigned to a specific Location must have a unique name or ID Note Items and Classes that have not been defined in the Catalog can be added to the Catalog directly from the Location tree Every Add Edit dialog has an Add button next to the Class and Catalog Name fields These can either be added or assigned in single or multiple units The method of naming single units is the same as that used in Catalog Items Detailed examples can be found in Adding a First Level Location on page 112 Locations can be Auto Named or Duplicate Locations or Items can be created These features are used as follows Button To Auto Naming Automatically names multiple new Locations in a pre defined sequence Duplicate Duplicates existing Locations by using the Auto Naming feature Note The maximum characters allowed in the path name are 255 This is the accumulative sum of the location and sub location ID names The individual location ID field allows a maximum of 50 characters Auto Naming Feature When you have many similar Locations and Items to add to the Location tree you can use Auto Naming to automatically c
387. r erent 253 Ppor stan ie Inrormat om EVEN seiere E E E EEE E E E 254 Ppor Process C ompi eE VONT arrie E E E E 255 Export Process Completed with Conflicts EVent ccccccccccccsssssssssseeeeeccceeeeeeeeaaeeeaaaeesessseeeeeeceseeeeeeeeaeaaags 255 Dapon TMS sat E cote tee ee eased eabadncee petaine sed ous be sbsiomaceade mane A 255 CADIS TOERE enaa N A 256 Eie e E E E E E E EE E E E E E A 256 aei e e O E A E E E A E A EE E E E E E 256 E anpe U UE eee r vane otalteseticern lemtaeiarsesaesa deieainnsava etivmpedemelan dates tieenetevme dene tateweueratewaandaves Suc 256 Location Tree Association ccccccececcecccccceeeeenenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaausessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeqaaas 256 Cable Test 8 CoN Rogie 0 12 pe rr nr rr A 257 Pinc k AI OV ICUS ots sarsreanccrctiaa ep cesta Pend eaecra E dunende auto E R E E E 258 BS AE EE E E pat E E E E A A E E E E E E A A 259 Build PCCW NY szsces Ses cetecesss xcs cesneseceeezewes E EEEE eoseusanecceunetcaceetenscdeanehssccaewsccenetccceetensccenc 259 MS NO E E O PI E PE EE E E E A P E AE S P A E T S E 260 Set Cable Test Results Storage Root Patt x xosesovssssacsannsmessnshessiacudiwunovalulenuhiascentetiabuaatinunduonsdisntelcantiakinwnuiabeasendadiens 260 Viewing a Port Cable Test Results i occascsusesacswntavenecanmnsanan dsnniweanndadocnbebeanemuciebsinpnasumiacentlanstessbecuanirbisatoannndadeanbes 262 Show Fort Cable Test Results coression nnn neiaa aneen a raaa E a
388. r events by time of day in the Time area enter the starting time in the Start field and the ending time in the End field Times Should be entered in hours and minutes using military time 5 To filter events by day of the week in the Week Day area select the days when the user should be notified Ay appears next to each selected day 6 To filter events by date select Calendar In the Calendar area select the field Include following dates to select dates when the user should be notified or select the field Exclude following dates to select dates when the user should not be notified Enter the starting date in the From field and the ending date in the To field Dates should be entered in month day and year order 7 To filter events by device select the Devices tab Select the specific device from the list and click Add Enter the device name functional type and location RiT Technologies Ltd 489 PV4E User Manual V6 0 i Add Edit Filter Webpage Dialog x User Name Administrator Event Name Catalog Item Added Scheduler Devices Device Name a Functional Type Locaton IP MAC Addresses Subnets Locations Ports Controllers Figure 349 Add Edit Filter Window Devices Tab 8 Click the OK button The Add Edit Filter window closes Message Filtering The Message Filtering Setting controls which messages received from the system are displayed You can choose that all messages are displayed or you can
389. r of Connectivity Modules and Management Modules 1 Note This section applies only for chassis with a Pass through connectivity type Select the Settings tab In the Number of Management Slots field enter the number of the management modules using the up down arrows or manually enter the number RiT Technologies Ltd 451 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 Inthe No of connectivity Mod Slots field enter the number of connectivity modules using the up down arrows or manually enter the number 4 Click Apply Adding Modules to a Chassis Note This section applies only for chassis with a Pass through connectivity type 1 Go to the Modules tab of the enclosure and click Edit The following screen opens J Add Edit Catalog Station Webpage Dialog General Settings Modules Cooling SlotNo CatalogName Mode Bay Assignment 2 Click Add The following menu opens Add Mng Module Add Conn Module Note If the number of management connectivity modules was set to 0 then the respective menu items are disabled 3 Select Add Conn Module from the context menu RiT Technologies Ltd 452 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4 The following screen opens H Add Connectivity Modules Webpage Dialog General Catalog Name a Class Name t HP Ethernet Pass Through Module Copper HP FC Pass Through Module F O 5 Select the required connectivity module and click OK
390. r stage gt To add a Company 1 Select and right click on the Location folder in the Location Tree The Add Location pull down menu will appear 2 Select Other as the Location Type as there is not a company category The Add Edit Location dialog will open Type in the name of the Company 4 Add the Description optional A Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog x Amber Inc i Inactive Device Environmental Name Amber Inc Type Description Network Management Company Security Normal Workspace d Parent Locaton Pia ae z i j oe E C FE A T a obra Figure 87 Adding a Company Window Note The Parent Location field will be empty as this is a first level location It cannot be edited 5 Click OK to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 117 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Countries to the Location Tree As PV4E can be managed from remote locations multiple countries can be added to the Location Tree gt To add a Country Select and right click on the Company name in the Location Tree N A pull down menu will appear Move the cursor over the Add Location and a secondmenu appears 3 Select and click on Country 4 The Add Edit Location dialog will open 5 Type in the name of the Country 6 Add the Description optional aA Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog x General Inactive Device Environmental Name Belgium Type Description Headquarters Security Normal Parent Locat
391. r using the drag and drop method directly in the Location Tree or in the edit mode by changing the Location Adding Editing Moving and Deleting I tems in Location Before continuing with this section it is advisable to have available the information as to where Outlets both network and telephone are situated Further information regarding the communication rooms containing Racks Scanners Patch Panels and equipment will be needed Tip As the Communications Room is most frequently used it is suggested that it be positioned at the top of the tree Hame M id Pe dam ataza PALE E Tae DIRE P P k 7 a I AERTIEN Mediae A A A EA E E TIE un o l m T E ai a AURU SR SP Pane TLesrack gt P P pael o a pael tpe U ors For Exampk TUF RP 110 Mar r Mastr Mame F For Frampe Mazer Wed SA HeT Amalla 0 A e a Demora oeae O B g ra fo SSS be Phos Me de ack bo SSC be Po For Eampk Big ise Hote Fm Mame H O1Comm Rm 030 om m Fim 030 om m Fim RiT Technologies Ltd 128 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Babe TL PPpanel no pael tpe U ors For Ecampk TL11PP 110 Mark r Maser Mame F For Frampe Mazer Wed SS He ma CK bo a e bo gt Demo creck bos tCo ee bo i g ra ho SSe Phos Be he ac bo Seta be Po For Eampk Big i302 Note Fm Mame H Dicom m Fm O30 om m Fm O30 om m Fm Quantity amp Mame gamata a BASLE FE Sart LEW cL A ORE Po marta x10 REP PIi iD 7 re aT
392. r your restore operation To database PY4E To a point in time Most recent possible Source for restore os Specify the source and location of backup sets to restore From database Pe From device C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 1 MSSC Select the backup sets to restore Restore e Names Component Type Server Database Position PV4E Full Database Backup Database Pe 2 PME Connection Server TESTLAB15 Connection a View connection properties 10 Make sure that you check the radio button for the backup you wish to restore see above 11 Go to the Options tab RiT Technologies Ltd 521 PV4E User Manual V6 0 T Restore Database P 4E Mil Es Script TE Help Restore options Preserve the replication settings Prompt before restoring each backup Restrict access to the restored database Restore the database files as Original File Name C Program Files Microsott SOL ServerM C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server Recovery state oO Leave the database ready to use by rolling back uncommitted transactions Additional Seer transaction logs cannot be restored RESTORE WITH RECOVERY Leave the database non operational and do not roll back uncommitted transactions Additional Connection rc transaction logs can be restored RESTORE WITH NORECOWER 23 f View connection properties Leave the database in read only mode Undo
393. rd Module For example Module Module 01 Multiple Extension lt Module name gt lt Port Specify a row for each PBX Extensions information name gt lt Extension port in each module The row number gt lt User defined must start with its Module fieldl1 gt lt User defined name For example field2 gt etc Module 01 PortO1 3550 POTS An example structure may look as follows PBX Information Module Information Extension Information Extension Information Extension Information Module Information Extension Information Extension Information Extension Information Module Information Extension Information Extension Information Extension Information Data File Example The following is an example of an import data file for a PBX with 2 modules and 8 telephone extensions on each module PBX PBX 4 214 Install Date 02 01 2005 Upgrade Date 10 01 2005 Module PBX Mo 001 Install Date 10 01 2005 PBX Mo 001 PortO1 3550 POTS Reception 3rd floor PBX Mo 001 Port02 3551 POTS Smith PBX Mo 001 PortO3 3552 POTS Hussein PBX Mo 001 Port04 3553 POTS Thompson PBX Mo 001 Port05 3554 POTS Singh RiT Technologies Ltd 468 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PBX Mo 001 Port06 3555 POTS Tanaka PBX Mo 001 PortO7 3556 POTS Chen PBX Mo 001 Port08 3557 POTS Leblanc Module PBX Mo 002 Install Date 10 01 2005 PBX Mo 002 PortO1 3541 Other PBX Mo 002 Port02 3542 POTS IT PBX Mo 002 PortO3 3543 POTS Jones PBX M
394. rder and the date and time of completion automatically appears 7 Click the OK button PVMAX PV Alarm K Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY Work Order Location Wo 07 09 2009 00003 FOR THE Enterprise WO0 07 09 2009 00003 W0 07 09 2009 00003 WO0 07 09 2009 00004 ID WO0 07 09 2009 00003 W0 07 09 2009 00005 Description Priority 1 Due Date 09 07 2009 Due Time Status Created v Perform By Date Edit Work Order T Close Event Category l Work Order System System _ Reset 2 Apply System ed System 09 07 2009 13 05 PVMAX Unscheduled Ports Disconnected PVMAX 99 07 2009 12 05 PVMAX linccheduled Ports Dicconnected PVMAX Figure 295 Closing a Work Order 8 The Work Order status will now be closed Work Order Location W0O 07 09 2009 00003 All General Operations Tasks ID O Engineer SR rE O WE 4 Descipton Operation Status AssgnedTo _ Namea CS tats __OueDate Priority rae a Connect Switch Switch Mo L Comite fisen aanre ntact WO 06 08 2009 00001 Created 08 06 2009 a eer a aaa WO 07 09 2009 00003 Closed 09 07 2009 LEED ATLA PTT EEK es WO 07 09 2009 00004 Creat 09 07 2009 Connect Switch Switch Mo Completed WO0 07 09 2009 00005 Compl 09 07 2009 or Perform Edit Work Order Figure 296 Closed Work Order RiT Technologies Ltd 379 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PVMAX Scheduled Unscheduled Events The Scheduled Unscheduled Event
395. rder is created by the System Manager and used to assign and track different tasks issued to technicians and technicians These tasks can vary from creating and editing links to installing software and relocating terminal equipment Work Orders can be created either from the Edit Link Worksheet or in the Work Order Module The Work Order Pane contains a list of all existing Work Orders and their tasks Work Orders are defined according to their status These are Created In Progress Completed and Closed A list of all the Work Orders appears in the Work Order Pane when the Work Order Module is opened The user has the option of viewing Work Orders with a specific status A further option allows the user to view the work orders according to either the Work Order ID or the technician that the Work Orders have been assigned to The Information Pane shows all the tasks assigned to the selected Work Order It is here that can view create and work with a selected Work Order and its task s Each individual task has its own status When a task is opened it receives the status Created This status is changed to In Progress or Send to Scanner depending on the task and then to Completed by the technician or technician or by PatchView Once the Work Order is issued the person assigned to each task documents the progress of the individual tasks perform at the site When the status of each task in the Work Order is changed to Completed the sta
396. re Link button This marks the entire link as a secure link The Always On field in the General tab of the Terminal Equipment is not ticked An event is generated in the log file g Edit Link Webpage Dialog pn gt L gt gt BLE LEN ad i gt z 15 1 1 150 M 1_ Port05 Back 05 Panel 01 PortO05 Panel02 Sw Back 05 Back 01 Dutlet 205 melee Port 01 ST 001 Ti Auto Flip eis Figure 204 Mark a Partial Secure Link Window The lock link status secure icons are now shown on the secure links ff i i a E a He a 15 1 1 150 M 1 Port05 Back 05 PanelO1 Outlet Pot05 Pot0S Panel02 Sw BackO5 BackO1 Oullet205 PortO1 Pot STOMI Figure 205 Link path showing secure link icons RiT Technologies Ltd 291 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Viewing the Status of Secure Link Ports To view the status of each port in a secure link on the panel display go to the panel in the Location Tree right click on the panel and select Show Panel The virtual panel displays a blue lock as indicated by the arrow for a port that is part of a secure link A 5592 aeea Web Page Dialog ee ee ee G Figure 206 View panel showing secure links PV4E constantly monitors the integrity of secure links If the patch cord ona secure link is disconnected or if a static part of the connectivity is damaged an alert message is generated warning the IT Manager of a connectivity problem in the secure link For example disconnect
397. reate and name the items in a pre defined sequence Up to 1000 entries can be defined in a single Auto Naming procedure The ID is limited to 50 alphanumeric characters For example if you have 10 patch panels you can instruct PatchView for the Enterprise to name each patch panel sequentially as PP1 PP2 PP10 Note The Auto Naming dialog has three text fields The limit of 50 alphanumeric characters applies to the total letters numbers in all three fields RiT Technologies Ltd 101 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The Auto Naming Window The Auto Naming window can be accessed either when a Location or Item is added or edited gt To open the Auto Naming Window 1 Open an Add Edit dialog in the Location Tree or Topology Tree d Add tait inventor Panel vebpage HEJJ Connectors Florence BLD A Cabinet Big A Figure 73 Auto Naming Button on Panel Window 2 Click the Auto Naming button The Auto Naming dialog will open iE AUTO Mamina WeDbpape Dialog P s Template 1 Template 2 1 Wo of Items 1 No of Items 1 No of Items Figure 74 Auto Naming dialog RiT Technologies Ltd 102 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The following example is based on Auto Naming 64 panels connected to one PVMax Scanner In the first Text field type in the PVMax Scanner Tip After typing the PVMax Scanner press the spacebar once This inserts a Space between the word S Scanner and the number in the final stage
398. rinters and Stations are all linked via outlets to the switches These will automatically be traced by the P LET Module if full links have been defined It is only necessary to define these elements individually if your system is not using the The Discovery Module see Error Reference source not found KVM Devices are connected to Stations and need to be listed individually if a record of them is required Telephones are connected to PBXs which currently cannot be accessed by P LET and therefore need to be listed individually if a record of them is required Adding an IP Phone to the Catalog IP Phones are full feature telephones that provide voice communication over an IP Internet Protocol network It is only necessary to define the IP Phone in the catalog if P LET is not used gt To add an IP Phone 1 In the Catalog tree right click on IP Phone 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog P Phone dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 64 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit Catalog IP Phone Webpage Dialog Adapters Name Functional Type choice Description CPU Power Wi Monitor No of Slots Size U Type Vendor Part No Vendor Name _ _choice Image Name Default IP Phone Figure 43 Add Edit Catalog P Phone dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 5 Click on the Adapters tab Optional RiT Tec
399. rk Equip PatchView Equ add Chassis Connecting Hi Data Center E The following screen opens at the General tab RiT Technologies Ltd 448 PV4E User Manual V6 0 4dd Edit Catalog Station Webpage Dialog C7000 Chassis General Settings Modules Cooling Name C7000 Chassis Functional Type Class choice Description Connectivity Type Pass Through Weight KG 0 Power W Arm Side Size U Type Vendor Part No Vendor Name choice Image Name Default Blade Server General Chassis Settings 1 Enter the following information in the General tab The chassis Model Name Class Blade Server by default can be set to another existing class or a new user defined class Description Description for the blade chassis This is a free text field Connectivity type Specify the way in which the enclosure is connected to the network You can select any of the suggested values e Pass Through e Switching e Other Weight KG Enter the weight of the chassis enclosure Power Enter the power consumption of the enclosure RiT Technologies Ltd 449 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Specify the height of the chassis in Us Arm side Specify the type of cable management arm of the cassis if exists The default value IS none No of Bays Specify the number of bays incorporated into the chassis This filed is applicable only if the connectivity type specified above Is either Switchi
400. rk Order Detailed View General Criteria WO ID Created By Priority Status Created Date Due Date WO Sorting Order Due Date Priority Task Sorting Order Task Due Date TaskStatus Locaton Steps Figure 20 Work Order Tasks Report Setting dialog RiT Technologies Ltd 33 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Work Orcder Tasks Detailed View Search Criteria EAT DD Eragin Tark Tipt Tiik Siilin Tad Dur Date Al Toring Criteria Primary Scanner Eeerubon Secondary Teck StebuslDef suk Matching Items Found Lo WO ib Takk Gescripben Enpinier ar im Dat dab Created Date Task Type bLotabie A Let obe A Owon Der onmact Pare p Canceled OOF 1205 SNOT IOS 205 Greek link iran Laion iran Laion Sj RIL a Fark E Prem Pare pl Port 22 LL PO Jaah L Beonitaet Pare pz Caed Dalan eHe aS Jee Break Link Riin URSE OLS Amn DREE OLS wr r P t jd Frai Pard gpz Pori O ethan 2 Dhioma Pared pl Canceled UIE 1208 Galerie 12 08 Break link lio Lowe lio Lobe Tis l z Peet 15 Frrr Fama p Port ol Oosa 2 Darom et Paerd pi Caska QAAN GAG C2505 164 Fresk lini Royn DiRi O02 orn OiR oo 3 5 il r Port 15 Fri Pard pt Port i Figure 21 Work Order Tasks Report Work Order Report The report has been modified to appear in landscape layout and the tasks are presented in tabular layout A checkbox has been added to the first column of every task The Sort Order field has been renamed to WO Sorting
401. rk Order task hyperlink is clicked the relevant Work Order task opens at the Links tab in read only mode RiT Technologies Ltd 380 PV4E User Manual V6 0 cca Event Detail Webpage Dialog x Event Code PVMAX Sched Ports Connected WO Date Time 09 07 2009 13 03 SOUrCE PV4E Server User System Account Computer TECHSUPPOS Port 1 Item ID Panel 01 Port ID Port 04 Location UK Show Room Demo Rack 3 Port 2 Item ID Panel 02 Port ID Port 04 Location UK Show Room Demo Rack 3 WO Name WO 07 09 2009 00005 Task 3 General Notes Panel 01 Panel 02 Port 04 Port 04 Figure 297 Add Edit Work Order Task dialog box Scheduled Edit Link Apply Links In the event of a link connection disconnection that was performed as a result of the Apply function of the Edit link the following events will be executed and carry an Information event type RiT Technologies Ltd 381 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E PVMAX sched ports disconnected Edit link m PVMAX sched ports connected Edit link The following event fields have been added to PV4E V 5 0 m Anew User field displays the PV4E logged in user performing an Apply link command m An event type labelled Information applies to both events RiT Technologies Ltd 382 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 9 Discovery Module P LET Discovery Module Overview PatchView for the Enterprise features the Discovery Module A technology forma
402. rner You can click on results that appear in blue to display the properties in the properties pane for the specific device or user Catalog Name Type Address Lotion Horizontal and Vertical Foremce BLE A Horizontal and Vertical Fioremce BLD A Horizontal and Vertical Florence BLD A Horizontal and Vertical Florence BLD A Horizontal and Vertical Florence BLO A Horizontal and Vertical Florence BLD A Horizontal and Vertical Foremce BLD A Horizontal and Vertical Florence BLD A Page 3 of 8 Pages Total Records 396 i F a Figure 17 Search Results Window Different options are available in the properties window depending on the items being displayed For example most items have an Edit button available while a network item has a Ping button available where applicable At any time you can change the search specifications by clicking the Criteria button and changing the search details Subsequently clicking on the results button returns the previous search results GUI Related Issues Rack Presentation U Counting Order A new feature has been added to configure the measurement method of the U position in the rack Currently PV4E measures the U position in the rack from top to bottom This feature supports configuration of the measurement method from both top to bottom or bottom to top The order can be set in either the catalog as default or in the inventory if the need arises to overwrite
403. roject IP Address A numerical identifier for a computer or device on a TCP IP network An element of the network Item type An Item type is a classification according to which you sort Library and Inventory items KVM Keyboard video A device that enables a station and monitor to be mouse connected even if they are not in the same location LAN Local Area Network LAN Equipment Device Devices used to connect the Local Area Network such as Switches and Routers LANMapper A module of the P LET feature It discovers all active devices in the network and their subnets RiT Technologies Ltd 526 PV4E User Manual V6 0 LANServer LANServer will locate all the devices that were detected by LANMapper License Agreement The Agreement signed with RIT to register the PatchView for the Enterprise application Each client server component is assigned a License Number Link Alternative An alternative link is given to the user for Moves Adds Changes Swap and Remove operations Link Concept Links refer to the physical connection between items in the network such as between a Station and an Outlet or between an Outlet and a Patch Panel Local Connectors Satellite Scanners and their Patch Panels connected directly to the Master Scanner usually equipment located in the same communication room Location Location refers to the physical location of each Inventory item in the project For example rooms f
404. rom the list in the Groups tab Running Provisioning Request in an Interconnect Environment The automated provisioning supports provisiong requets for interconnect enviromnet In order to suppoprt it the connectiviy zone needs to contain panels and switch module The following stpes are required in order to set connectivity zones between switch modules and panels 1 Under Maintenance tab select the switch which is connected in interconnect configuration 2 Click Edit 3 Navigate to the Settings tab and tick the Interconnect checkbox RiT Technologies Ltd 321 PV4E User Manual V6 0 he Add Edit Inventory Switch Webpage Dialog General Modules SNMP Settings Version Timeout ms Retries Monitor Monitor Traps Interconnect Say e e 4 From this point onward the switch s modules can be added to connectivity zones like regular panels Setting the Offline Tasks As mentioned beforehand you can modify the offline tasks which are being generated by the system for different provisioning request types and different terminal equipment type Enabling you to do these modifications allows you to create different profile for different request For example moving a printer requires a different set of offline tasks than moving a workstation This section elaborates about changing the offline tasks You must have a direct access to PV4E server machine in order to make the modifications Offline Tasks File St
405. rosoft Excel a X OffLineTasks csy may contain Features that are not compatible with CS Comma delimited Do you want to keep the workbook in this Format Jj To keep this Format which leaves out any incompatible Features click Yes To preserve the Features click Wo Then sawe a copy in the latest Excel Format To see what might be lost click Help 10 Click Yes 11 The following message box appears Microsoft Excel x AN Do you want to sawe the changes you made to OFFLineg Tasks esw Cancel 12 Click No 13 1n order for the changes to take affect you need to shut down the dilhost exe process Use the operating system s task bar to shut down the process It will restart itself automatically the next time that a provisioning request is launched Running Provisioning Request Move Request The Move feature allows you to automatically generate a Work Order that contains the specific tasks needed for moving a selected device s or workspace from one location to another TO move a selected device or workspace from one location to another 1 Right click the device i e a single device or multiple devices and click Move from the context menu RiT Technologies Ltd 325 PV4E User Manual D P 4E Windows Internet Explorer MAINTENANCE Work Order Tree Location P UK USA Ne Atlanta Bldg A Floor 1 CRi amp Room 100 i Room 101 IP Phone 2 Outlet 3 Print
406. rrectly LAN Mapper is accessed from two places in PV4E These are from m Settings gt P LET E Maintenance gt Topology Subnet gt To open the LAN Mapper from the Settings Module 1 From the Settings Module select P LET from the drop down menu The LAN Mapper Screen opens p P 4E Windows Internet Explorer PVMAX Alarm K Refresh OR Admi WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELP Y Catalog i Topol Users e Location opology er Schedaber R2 PP OPR oO icati 5 aD ene E Tree D Telecommunication Infrastructure Permissions zeneral Connectors Notes FOR THE Ente Location C UK 3 USA System Tables No Location Work Order BE Panel 6 g an PatchView Elements A on Msg Filtering Front Service 5 ID Any Servi Any Servi Any Servi Any Servi Any Servi Any Servi Any Servi Cable Test Results Aay Servis roy sera in Amres Cranes C Call Manager Software Upgrade Metric Specifications PBX Mail Configuration Event Notification won nw kt DUNK Figure 298 LAN Mapper Screen gt To open the LAN Mapper from the Maintenance Module 1 Open the Maintenance Module 2 Select the Topology tab 3 Click the Subnet button The LAN Mapper Screen opens and displays general information on the configuration of the LAN Mapper 4 The Discovery Module Indicator button EI will be blue when LAN Mapper is running RiT Technologies Ltd 384 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt P 4E W
407. rs on the PV4E Server icon in the Status bar indicating that the service has been stopped is al Backing up SQL Database versions 2005 and 2008 The procedure for backing up the database is the same for both SQL 2005 and 2008 To back up the Database 1 From the Start Menu select Programs RiT Technologies Ltd 513 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 Select Microsoft SQL Server 2005 3 Select and click SQL Server Management Studio Windows Catalog Windows Update Winzip m Te Programs b T Accessories b Administrative Tools t fe Documents d F Microsoft SOL Server 2005 Ea SOL Server Management Studia A _ p TI VMWare h Settings b am hy i 2 a Search u i 2 Help and Support lt j Run Log OFF tstlab Shut Down Figure The SQL Server 2005 screen opens Microsoft iat Windows Server System SQL Server 2005 Serer type Database Engine Serer name TESTLAB1 5 Authentication SOL Server Authentication aa Login z Bocce Cancel Help Options gt gt Figure 4 Enter the Server type Server name Authentication Login and Password Click Connect The following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 514 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Ba Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio File Edit Yiew Tools Window Community Help Dow query OS SIG FAa PORBA Object Explorer xX ee Conect Sx m 2 T Eust Repot E amp
408. rs tab appears Click Apply Adding a Blade to an Enclosure To add a Blade to an enclosure do the following 1 Click the Blades tab of the Add Edit Inventory Station screen The following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 458 PV4E User Manual V6 0 J Add Edit Inventory Station Webpage Dialog BladeServerl General Modules Blades Cooling Bay No a Name Catalog Name Width Height 2 Click Add The following screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 459 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Y Add Edit Inventory Station Webpage Dial g General Adapters Name Functional Type Catalog Name choice CPU RAM No of Slots Power W Serial No Type Chassis Bay No gt Location BladeServerl 3 Enter the details of the Blade using drop down menus where applicable and click OK The following screen opens the Blades have been added and can be viewed in the Blades tab General Modules Blades Cooling an Blade 1 1 1 Auto Populating Enclosure with Blades by the Discovery Module The Discovery Module supports the detection and creation of Blades within a chassis This is only applicable for chassis s with the pass through connectivity type RiT Technologies Ltd 460 PV4E User Manual V6 0 For this enclosure type the Discovery Module recognizes which network adapter creates a specific Blade and consolidates it into a single device It then places it in the correct bay
409. rt is issued and logged before performing activities on a secure link or when changes are physically performed in the field on any of the secure link devices You set secure links by marking links as secure during the Edit Link process when the links are defined or by editing existing links and marking them as secure There are two reasons for creating a secure link However both require that a full link is initially defined A full secure link from a switch port to specific terminal equipment This monitors for every component on the link A partial secure link from a switch port to an outlet This monitors all components on the link apart from the terminal equipment RiT Technologies Ltd 290 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To mark a Link as a Secure link 1 In the Location or Topology Tree locate the items you want right click and select Edit Link In the View Edit Link dialog select an entire valid link 3 To make a full secure link select the full link and click on the Mark Secure Link button The entire link is marked as a secure link The Always On field in the General tab of the Terminal Equipment is ticked In the Edit Link dialog blue lock icons indicate secure links An event is generated in the log file fe Edit Link Webpage Dialog y4 Auto Flip Tooltip Figure 203 Mark a Full Secure Link 4 To make a partial secure link select the link from the switch to the outlet and click on the Mark Secu
410. ructure The file has the following structure 1 The ID column is a serial sequential number Applicable values are 25 and onwards 2 The Operation ID column specifies the request type to which the Specific row refers The following table details the different operation D s These are the only applicable values for this column Operation ID Refers to RiT Technologies Ltd 322 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Operation ID _ Refers to i esate station eauest Add station request Obsolete 8 PD Remove station request Remove IP phone request Remove printer request Obsolete Change service to station request Change service to IP phone request Change service to printer request asap nin rages 21 22 23 24 Swap station request Swap IP phone request Swap printer request 20 Obsolete Swap station request As part of workspace Swap Swap printer request As part of workspace Swap Obsolete Swap IP phone request As part of workspace Swap 3 The Order column lets you set the order between multiple offline tasks which refers to the same provisioning operation ID Applicable values are 2 onwards You can re order tasks by changing their values in this column 4 The lsTaskReferToLink specifies to whether this task refers to a specific link of the device e g Wrap a label around the patch cord or to the device as a whole e g Place the workstation s monitor 10 inches form the left en
411. s Enable LAN Server Scheduler Time Frame FY Edit Scheduler Webpage Dialog hr LAN Server _ hr S Thursday every 03 00 hr hr SA Friday every 03 00 hr hr Saturday every 03 00 hr hr gi CEnable LAN Server Scheduler Time Frame Start 08 00 End 17 00 E gt currence Pattern BB Daily Basis every hr Edit W Sunday every every 03 00 hr IY EE very every 03 00 hr A Tuesday every every hr o EvetCode EventCategory T Wednesday every 009 13 50 Batch Completed Successfully 7 ae 009 13 50 Batch Process Started DB Figure 316 Defining the LAN Server Scheduler 8 Check the specific weekday checkbox if you want to set the scheduler to run on a specific weekday or days 9 Enter the hourly interval required between LAN Server runs for each day selected 10 Click OK to continue RiT Technologies Ltd 408 PV4E User Manual V6 0 E Edit Scheduler Webpage Dialog gi CEnable LAN Server Scheduler Time Frame Start 08 00 End Recurrence Pattern Daily Basis every hr Li Sunday every hr v Thursday every 03 00 hr Ed Monday every 03 00 hr Friday every 03 00 hr Pd Tuesday every 03 00 hr Saturday every hr iv e every 03 00 hr re es a me Figure 317 Defining the LAN Server Scheduler Note If you run LAN Mapper and LAN Server on the same day they must not be run simultaneously LAN Mapper must be run first Run the LAN Server Note When the LAN Mapper is active the Discov
412. s Server Components PatchView for the Enterprise components installed on Server stations A locally defined area for network purposes SitePro A hand held device that gives the technician detailed information about tasks that need to be performed in the communication room or data center in real time SMART Patch Panels Intelligent Data Communication Patch Panels patented by RIT SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Split link A Split link is a link from two or more Stations to the same Connecting Hardware item outlet or panel Station A Station refers to any computer or other desktop equipment on the network used as a workstation Station Discovery The P LET module discovers all stations in the network and identifies each station by Host Name A task is an action performed by the user Topology The Topology of PV4E is defined according to the logical hierarchical structure of the essential equipment needed to operate PV4E Unique ID The Unique Identification of each item that is used as its reference throughout the database Unmanaged Devices Stations discovered by P LET and not identified as part of a Full link are classified as Unmanaged Devices Unutilized ports Switch ports where no activity has been detected for a specific period of time are defined as Unutilized ports RiT Technologies Ltd 529 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Utilization Module Using the P LET feature the system scans the ports of all the S
413. s Module ID Port ID IP Address MAC Address Device Name Last Activity Ex gt 10 100 20 19 Rikuz G M 0 Port 50 xj 00 0A E4 3F 06 16 02 2006 10 100 20 19 Rikuz G M 0 Port 50 00 1B 3F 44 23 16 02 2005 10 100 20 24 10 100 20 24 M 0 Port 01 YL 4re you sure you want to remove 00 0B B3 00 01 23 04 2005 10 100 20 24 10 100 20 24 M 0 Port0i 00 0D 60 6E 0A 23 04 2005 10 100 20 24 10 100 20 24 M 0 Port 01 a ae Cancel 00 0D 60 C9 18 23 04 2005 10 100 20 24 10 100 20 24 M 0 Port 01 00 11 25 53 39 23 04 2005 10 100 20 24 10 100 20 24 M 0 Port 01 UK London DC1 Floor 1 Hall 00 16 41 10 7F 23 04 2005 Iin inn 2N PA In inn PN 24 M N Dart Ni UMi nndinninr 1 Flanr 1 Hall NN 16A A1 17 AR 22 na zone es Total Records 36 Figure 327 Removing unutilized Ports and Devices IP Telephony PV4E supports IP telephony systems that are integrated within the enterprise s network The application interacts with the IP Telephony Call Manager through SNMP to provide up to date connectivity information and the extensions of the IP telephones in the network Presently the Cisco IP phone is supported The Call Manager The Call Manager which processes information from IP Phones must be defined with its IP address and other information before you run the LAN Mapper In order for the Discovery Module to detect create and place IP Phones in their correct location in the database the Call Manager needs to be defined Note If clustering i
414. s Adding a Master to LO CAM OM gscsocesesesiccvscenenacnacent bseneutvaldoaedcusmqentadadendypioreutielancaransonamtedenttmbeceutendiahnoessiatanens Adding an Expander to Location scesesasicentcarccrdhenondyoseretvcassaantsasenenbvalascnildetecestaesaventstieasibeneutdaloceseeehaoestiatanens Adding a Master Expander to Location ccccccsesessseeeeececcceeceeceaaesesssseeseeecceeeeeeeessaaaaasssscseeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaas Adding a PVMax Scanner Mini Scanner to Location eeseseessssseseseeeeeressssssssssssserrerreesssssssssssseerreeesessssss Addins 3 Local SCAMMNGD sssini savas scssstvaesevsnenesaecoasucsscusssscvanveaceess Detecting a Master Local Scanner in TOpology cccssssssssesseccccceeeeeeeeeaneaeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeaseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas PGS UID E I A E E A E A O EE E E E N EE NCICC HMO a Search Pi Aes essre ne EEEE AEE EE EEEE a EOE aE Ea Adding PVMax Security and Indicator Controllers cccccccccsssssssssssssssssssssscsccscccccccsccccccssccssssssssssseseees Py Max Security Contollei seserinis PPO D 8 r E E E E E E T EEEE OCMC ET A A I IE A A OETI TS E NIEN A A E ATI T TAE TNI Adding and Editing PVMax Controllers nnnneneessessseeseeeeeneesssssssssssssecereeesssssssssssssseeteeeressssessssssssserereesesesss PV Max Sectinty Controller Funcihionality seeresersisiiin na E r A E N ANOR O D a E E E oaendtieaeenies BT ed a1 6151 9 E E E E N EE er EE O EE E AE E EE AT N E ear Inserting a Ghost adding i
415. s IP address and other information before you run the LAN Mapper Software Upgrade Allows the download of new software to PatchView hardware elements Software Download is explained in this chapter See Software UpgradeUpgrade Secure Links Scheduler The Secure Links Scheduler defines how frequently the polling mechanism pings all the end devices in the secure links The default and minimum interval is five minutes Any detected Secure Link anomalies are logged and an alert message Is generated allowing the System Manager to investigate the detection In order to validate the integrity of secure links the system will send a ping for stations with Always connected status at the end of every time period as defined in the secure link scheduler If the station receives no response an appropriate event will be fired Setting the Secure Links Scheduler To Set the Secure Links Scheduler 2 From the Settings menu select Schedule The Schedules area appears Click on the Secure Link tab The switch trap details appear Click the Edit button to change the settings The Edit Scheduler dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 472 PV4E User Manual V6 0 LAN Mapper LAN Server Secure Link Switch Traps Ei Enable Secure Link Scheduler L Time Frame start 08 00 Recurrence Pattern __ Daily Basis every _ Sunday ery OO 5 SA Thursday Cal Monday very A Friday WA Tuesday em _ __ Saturday a
416. s Software Notes Functional Type Name Descripton E aaa i 0s Windows 2008 Ser l Application PatchView for the Figure 51 Add Edit Catalog Station Software Tab 10 Click on the Add button to insert the software installed on the Station 11 Select one of the options available in the Functional Type and Name windows by clicking on the button 12 Type in a description if required 13 To remove information from this slot click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 14 Type in a description if required 15 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding a Telephone to the Catalog gt To adda Telephone 1 In the Catalog tree under Terminal Equipment right click Telephone 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu 3 The Add Edit Catalog Telephone dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 73 PV4E User Manual V6 0 ke Add Edit Catalog Telephone Webpage Dialog Default Telephone Description Vendor Name choice Vendor Part No Tel543 Image Name Default Phone Figure 52 Add Edit Catalog Telephone dialog 4 Enter the relevant information 5 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 6 Click on the Ports tab to insert the required information RiT Technologies Ltd 74 PV4E User Manual V6 0 A Add Edit Catalog Telephone Webpage Dialog General Connector
417. s Tab 5 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 6 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding Trunk Cable to the Catalog Trunks are grouped cable gt To Add a Trunk Cable 1 In the Catalog tree right click on a Trunk Cable Functional Type 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Cable dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 53 PV4E User Manual V6 0 i Add Edit Catalog Trunk Cable Webpage D k J General Cables Name Functional Type Class Description Material Type Length Diameter Vendor Name Vendor Part No Figure 37 Add Edit Catalog Cable dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Select the Cables tab to enter the bundled Cable information RiT Technologies Ltd 54 PV4E User Manual V6 0 i Add Edit Catalog Trunk Cable Webpage Dialog General Notes choice choice Cablel Figure 38 Ends Tab 5 Type in the name and select one of the options available in the Class and Catalog windows by clicking on the button 6 Click the Add button to insert more ports if required To remove a port click on the relevant line of information The indicator moves to the active line Click the Remove button 8 Select OK or another of the options to proceed Adding a Pathway to the Catalog 1 Right click Pathways and select Add Item from the context menu The following screen opens at th
418. s Window opens Select the Image tab Select the Image to be deleted Click the Delete button A confirmation message opens Click the OK button to confirm Adding and Deleting Work Order Task Types To add Work Order Tasks oe ee E From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Tables Window opens Select the W O Task tab Click the Add button The Add Work Order Task dialog opens Type in the name of the new task Click the OK button to continue RiT Technologies Ltd 493 PV4E User Manual V6 0 system Tables Icon Image W oTask Location i sates 1 Link F Break Link F A Add Work Order Task Type Webpage Dialog i al ha i danac a Event Category Figure 352 Adding and Deleting Work Order Task Types 8 The new task will be included in the list To delete a Work Order Task 1 From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Tables Window opens Select the W O Tasks tab Select the Task to be deleted Click the Delete button A confirmation message opens Click the OK button to confirm a ee oe Adding and Deleting Location Category Type To add Location Category 1 From Settings select Systems Tables from the drop down menu The System Tables Window opens Select the Location tab Click the Add button The Add Location Category dialog opens 4 Type in the name of the new location Click the Browse button to locate icon for
419. s and hot fixes m Language Pack m Driver Pack m CAD Version If configuration of both servers does not correspond the user is notified and the import operation cancelled Permissions An Import permission category has been added to a permission group The import operation is only available to users with Edit Delete permission to import The export operation is available to all users RiT Technologies Ltd 236 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Admin General ermissions Members Permission gt Administrator Settings Catalog Device Authorization Device Locator Event Log Import inventory Link P LET Settings ee ee ee S Figure 173 Permissions Window Export to an Export File Work Flow and User I nterface A new Export to a File option has been added to the Tools menu MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLS Auto Detect PBX Import es rt from a File n Sarton at System Adm POTE roa a t Admin ieee re eee Device Locator Read only Read only gi pliers Grah Report Center Report Centi Device Authorization Sec group Figure 174 Export to a File Tools Menu When selecting Export the following Export screen appears RiT Technologies Ltd 237 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Export Webpage Dialog eal Root Location Figure 175 Export Window When selecting browse E from the Root Location field a Location dialog box opens allowing you to choose the root location to export After yo
420. s generated in the following cases m If an inventory item name and catalog functional type already exists A Slot No contains an occupied slot no in its container Error Handling All conflicts encountered during the validity check are saved to build a conflict report Conflict Report A conflict report provides you with information regarding conflicts that were found in the CSV file The report states for each conflict the conflict type warning or error the line number field name and field data that caused the conflict and a short conflict description Import from a CSV File Work Flow and User Interface See Work Flow and User Interface RiT Technologies Ltd 242 PV4E User Manual V6 0 CSV File Structure General The first line of a CSV file is the header composed of PV4E CSV File The first field of an inventory item record holds the following item types L PE a Location Location Connecting HW Rack Equipment Network Equipment Link information Record Structure The record structure is as follows 1 Item Type Location Location Type as defined in PV4E e g Country building floor etc Location Name up to 50 characters 2 3 4 Security level High Normal Low default Normal 5 Parent Location full path of the parent location Example Location Country U K Normal Location City London UK 1g S quivalent to Location City London Normal U K Location
421. s has been developed to enable PV4E to differentiate between PVMAX events and planned links that are performed through the Work Order Edit Link and arbitrary links performed in that field This feature is able to track the type of each connect disconnect port event received from PVMAX In order to provide this functionality the existing PVMAX events PVMAX ports connected disconnected are replaced by the following new events these events are supported by the event notification event filtering mechanism as with all events Unscheduled Links In the event of an arbitrary link connect disconnect that is performed in the field without a Work Order or a link command from PV4E the following events will be generated and will carry a Warning event type m PVMAX unscheduled ports disconnected m PVMAX unscheduled ports connected Secure links As secure link disconnection is by definition unscheduled it is disabled in the Edit link the Secure link disconnected by PV PVMax Scheduled Work Order Links In the event of a link connection disconnection that was performed as a result of a Work Order the following events will be executed and carry an Information event type m PVMAX sched ports disconnected WO m PVMAX sched ports connected WO The following new event fields have been added to PV4E V5 0 m Anew hyperlink field for Work Order tasks m An event type labelled Information applies to both events When the Wo
422. s no specific Location Type defined for desk The Add Edit Location dialog will open Type in the name of the Desk 4 Add the Description optional Change the Icon to the Desk Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or RiT Technologies Ltd 125 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Location Webpage Dialog Eal General Inactive Device Environmental Name DO1 Type Description Receptionist Desk Security Normal Workspace Parent Location Amber Inc Belgium Brussels Gity Towers Floor 0 Figure 96 Adding a Desk Window 6 Click OK to proceed Repeat the process until all desks are named Note The Auto Naming feature can be used to name the desks if desired RiT Technologies Ltd 126 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Extended Location Tree The Location Tree extended to show its hierarchical structure Location Topology Users Tree D Telecommunicaton Infrastructure Location is 3 Amber Inc Te Belgium Eii Brussels ffl City Towers a Aloor 01 4 Room 101 Reception El fel cor El DO Floor 02 Floor 03 Floor 04 Floor 05 Figure 97 Extended Location Tree Assigning I tems to Location All Items need to be defined in the Catalog of PV4E prior to defining them as inventory in the location tree It is in the Catalog that general definitions and vital information is stored for a particular catalog item and is used as a template for the inventory items defined in the loc
423. s that you first create a Work Order and then create your links See creating a Work Order in the Work Order and Managing Links Chapter Creating a Link Static Dynamic and Mixed links can be created These links can be regular or secure links If a link is created between static ports or a combination of ports i e a mixed link the P pending symbol will not appear It only appears for dynamic links where PatchView is on line and the instruction has been sent directly to the panels When the new link has physically been created on the Panel the symbol changes to a solid line to indicate that a physical link exists If PatchView is off line the blue P symbol will not show in the Edit Link Worksheet A secure link is defined as a link that has a switch port on one side and terminal equipment on the other side and does not contain elements of an existing broken secure link One or more links in the organization can be defined as vital links RiT Technologies Ltd 288 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Attempts to change a secure link will result in the Administrator being prompted to confirm the change All secure link activity is logged gt To create a Dynamic link 1 In the Location or Topology Tree locate and drag and drop the item s you want to link into the Edit Link worksheet or select the item and click on the Edit Links button Ensure that the ports are correctly aligned Either use Auto flip enabled or manually flip t
424. s used then more than one Call Manager can be defined for redundancy Defining the Call Manager gt To define the Call Manager 1 From Settings select Call Manager from the drop down menu The Call Manager Screen opens Click New button to open the Add Edit Call manager dialog 3 Fill in the IP Address Accept the default of the Timeout Retries and Community fields or change them optional Click OK to save the information 6 The information of the Call Manager is listed in the Info pane The Call Manager Screen opens RiT Technologies Ltd 427 PV4E User Manual V6 0 D PV4E Windows Internet Explorer a 5 PVMAX P LET Alarm xR Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY FoR THE Enterprise Call Manager IP Address Timeout ms Retries Get Community M Add Edit Call Manager Webpage Dialog 5 IP Address Timeout ms Retries Get Communi Figure 328 Defining the Call Manager Enhanced IP Phone Discovery The Discovery Module now recognizes IP phones including those that are connected to call managers that do not reveal its unique information This update enables you to recognize any type of IP phone which is associated with a specific subnet s However extension information can only be extracted from the Cisco Call Manager For the Discovery Module to identify all devices associated with any of the subnet s IP phones you first
425. saa ei aa a e s 71 Adding a Router to the GALAN ossissscesssdsisserior nitende si n e aa aaia iaka da dasi 80 Adding a Hub to the Catalog sessir ranna e a a e a aie 82 Adding PVMax Equipment to the Catalog ccccccccssssssssssseeececeeeeeeeeeeaaeesssssseeeeeeceeceeeeseseeeesaaagaasssseeeseeeeeeeeaqags 85 RiT Technologies Ltd Vv PV4E User Manual V6 0 IVS UCL sa sadangaa tac saoaasaced snes sosnseavan T E 85 NS MC EPEE E E E A E T A EA EET 85 Malr E DAN C8 eeen E a E i 85 S T eee E A E A E E 85 DOC Ale C i E E E E AEAEE EE A AEA A EEA E 85 PNE Or ea E EE E E A 86 OA TU TPA eaen a n E E E E E E E A E A A 86 Adding Connecting Hardware to the Catalog ccccccccccccccceccccceeeesssnsesseesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaaassssesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 86 Adding an Outlet to the Catalog cinscsccaiaccvescdencdocccescegeseiavtdeccunnsadawebed aadcoeseuaasdecsunadaneabaneduceseacuadidevtbacansnduecedawts 86 Adding a Panel to the Catalog sissassuccinscnncascecdeniucnssvoatbashinicnnsaddoudundoesdesiouavebecsunndnesdbdaebucceuiuaeladenteenadansabantbnds 88 Adding a Panel to the Catalog sn ccicassucanssuiercaicwcddeiuwasecewsh scnbaidunsabdoidendoesdabsebevtbacsuaddnecdidmeducdeeiuaelwensaieadansaidechess 90 Adding Datacenter Equipment to the Catalog ccccccsssseeecccceccceeceeaaseesssesseeeecceeeeeeseeaaaaessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaas 90 Adding an Environmental Control to the Catalog cccccccccccccccccccessssseseeeeeececeeee
426. scanning process stariP LET sabe emia eimai cata ee aiai RiT Technologies Ltd 210 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Port Assignment You can edit the port assignments of a switch The Edit Port Assignment window is divided to two parts Inventory Switch Port and P LET Detected Port listing ports that are unassigned All inventory ports will be displayed according to the modules to which they belong Based on this list you can correlate the switch ports retrieved by the DefaultSwitch Driver to the physical configuration modules ports Note To select a list of consecutive ports left click the first port hold down the lt Alt gt key and left click the last port To select ports that are not consecutive hold down the lt Ctrl gt key and left click on each port During automatic switch detection the assignment of the modules is done automatically by the application to Slot 0 The real slots are not identified If there are ports that you do not want to assign e g trunk port you can move the selected ports to the P LET Detected Port column and choose Ignore Port A Edit Port Assignment Webpage Dialog Dlink Switch Port Assign _Inventory Switch Port _ _P LET Detected Port _ Modules Dlink module 10 ports A Slot 1 X Modules Module Slot 0 ee Name Detected Name Detected Index Slot Status WM Detected Name Detected Index Interface Name Slot Status Port 01 gt RMON Port ilonUii si O k f RMON Port 10 ont 10 RMO
427. se any other outlet in the target location is to be eliminated Grading Rules This set of rules is intended to filter the resources that apply to specific provisioning requests The provisioning module calculates a grade per resources The grade is a mean average of the entire set of grading rules The automated provisioning is deployed with the following grading rules by default RiT Technologies Ltd 304 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Minimum patching grading rule This rule give the highest grade to the link which require minimal patching For example if the system offers you two optional links for a move request and one of them is already patched then this rule will prefer it over the other one m Best fit service grading rule The purpose of this rule is to maximize resources Consider a scenario where a device with service Any service Is provisioned to a room with two outlets one offering the Red service and the other one offers the Any service service The provisioned device fits the two of them however the system will favor the outlet with the Red service Thus future provisioning requests to this room will not suffer from lack of service since the application left the Any service available for future provisioning requests Best fit VLAN grading rule The purpose of this rule is to maximize resources Consider a scenario where a device which requires VLAN 111 IS provisioned to a room Links from this room can be co
428. sensuduedessebeueeudeacewewiees boceenseceadendsecsunsees RiT Technologies Ltd Vil PV4E User Manual V6 0 Detechime Interconnect Panel ics crccsoscosateassenanssaconacnnsacadarasnadsenpasnaaseasiocdebeacatedsansaaadespaanannes asai iodin akanai anit 196 Assigning Interconnect Panel i c 2 cossssspuenannteadsesnnnaeneseongdarasnaiaannannedsednacsusegeauadesdsnniudssaboedeaciucestgeteaedeaadenienandaen 196 Linking the Switch to the Interconnect Panel ccccccccccccccccceeeesesesseeeececeececeeeeeeeeeeaeaesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 196 Attaching a Switch to an Interconnect Panel cccccccccccceccceeceeeessessseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeaaaaesseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 196 PUGS E EE E EOE A OE E AT TE PE E EE O E ES 196 Detaching a Switch from an Interconnect Panel cccccccccceccccceceeesesesesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeauaseasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaqaas 199 PTAA e E E E EA E E E T VE E S E EE E 200 El NIC Wy e E E E S NA E EA A E E A E EE E 201 Connected Disconnected Ports Events and Mail Notifications cccccccseeeecceeeececeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaas 201 Interconnect Panel VICWS wa sisasdirnccncwtbataus teat aa a EEEO A aaa a a 201 D 1G Ws A E A E AE O A A E E A S E 201 L ca on Tree and Searches essriarcoieds aa aA EOE S E EAEE 202 Adding Network equipments caxescicxciucivasdnncaisnchacdeetiwaseeeaedanbbaicuanadintducdeesduesecawstoucdsaaduncdddandncoue tdualedamcdsadoententodes 204 Darak Wyte Ue DE asec
429. ser Manual V6 0 W0O 12 08 2009 00170 General Operations W Descipton Operation Status Assigned To 1 Disconnect F2CR2 PP OPR 1 Move Station Created 2 Connect F2CR2 PP OPR Pi 1 Move Station Created 3 Move Seank from USA 1 Move Station Created 4 F Resources F3CR3 SW1 H 1 Move Station Created Resources FSCR3 S V1 M 1 Port 16 and Outlet 202 2 Port 0t are reserved Assign To assign Status status Perform Delete New Edit Edit Work Order Figure 266 Work Order Screen Rack space reservation is only relevant for requests where the destination location is a rack cabinet After the Work Order has been generated and stored the reserved items are displayed in the Show Rack functionality as follows 72 Webpage Dialog i OLS SETTINGS Y RE ud Gu stiddddddd dddddddd dddddddd aap ule Say ana Diack gra ee indicates that the rack cabinet space is reserved a Name Reserved Device 1 Location USA NYC DC1 Floor 1 Hall 1 Row C Cc2 Figure 267 Show Rack box The following screen displays a reserved port RiT Technologies Ltd 351 PV4E User Manual V6 0 F2CR2 PP OPR General Ports Front Connectors Motes Back fa tern frei Name l Service SD AnyServi Port 01 Any Servi Port 02 Any Servi Port 03 Any Servi Port 04 Any Servi Port 05 Any Servi Fort 06 Any Seni Portis Any Servi Port 08 Any Ser
430. sheet Selected ports can be moved within the worksheet in 2 ways Either drag and drop or to cut copy and paste them into the new cells Ports can either be selected using the mouse to highlight all the ports required or a single port can be selected by moving the cursor over the cell right clicking and choosing the Select Link option from the pull down menu Dragging and dropping selected ports within the worksheet gt To drag and drop Ports in the Worksheet 1 Select the Ports The selected ports will have a black background with a white border 2 Move the cursor to the white border and press the left mouse button The cursor changes from tot 3 Drag to the required cells and release the mouse button The ports will be positioned in the new cells RiT Technologies Ltd 282 PV4E User Manual V6 0 P 4E Windows Internet Explorer Iaj Xx P YMAX PY Alarm K Refresh O Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLS Y SETTINGS v REPORTS Y HELP FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Connectors a Room 100 S Cabinet 1 B Cabinet 1 Service 5 ID Name ID Name E CAB O1 tT Ally Ser ein Frurc Ts Furc Ty vack Tra pack TI HP Panel o1 Any Servit Port 16 Port 16 Back 16 Back 16 E Rack 1 Any Servit Port 17 Port 17 Back 17 Back 17 Room 101 Any Servit Port 18 Port 18 Back 18 Back 18 Room 102 Any Servit Port 19 Port 19 Back 19 Back 19 ag Floor 02 Any Serv
431. sirnar en a NE N NEES SNE 357 Work Orders Listed Under ID or Engine et ccccccccccccceececceceeeeeseeseessseeececeeeeeeeeeaeauaasessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 358 THEY Ork Ori Eana R E E 358 Creatine a New Work Ordesa ea eea E e Eae uisenatanemaestanonetogeawunseemiaucnntesanest 359 UT VV O o E E es cea carga E E E E E E E E 360 Deletint a Work Order a anatctacdaceo secant usanaicnncanaidacdcu tus uiasensduxdsascnandarsiuetanepasanibucaanddensieatehacseatuansusemiaaconedeeenets 361 CMA a E E E assess T E T E E T E 362 Creating A NCW TASE eero EEO A Oa EAEE ORENSE 362 Adding a Link Break Link Task to a Work Order cccccccccccccccccseeesssseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaaaaessesseseseseeeeeeeeeeesenaaas 362 Working in the Links Worksheet cccccccsssssesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeaaaeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeesaseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 365 RiT Technologies Ltd xi PV4E User Manual V6 0 Reserving Devices for Link TASKS voc sc2 seisnicanetssenscauvapeonedasaipacsaunamnednesioassaagtonsaneadanaadtaeesaatecedeaseadedsaadanadsagconties 366 Adding Additional Tasks to the Work Ordet ccccccccccccceceeceeeaaeessseseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeaaaaassseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaqaas 367 FA A pad oops oars a centers E E E E 369 NBS Wy dL AN eee coe eee A EE A A A EEE A E tenet E E 370 Canceling and or Deleting a Tas teeceversisnineresontsaiasentehdocesaseraeuwsanciaddaienltctteueptveldoenneateuentsebedesbbnteveidiaaveeiaqcaties 373 Cuor mE onea Ok
432. st Name George Last Name A Tite Mir Department aE A if wk fil oor ne Ez a TEL agir aBapiyeaiih foie A m Pas if a JR e Figure 172 Add Edit User dialog Fill in the ID First Name Last Name and Title fields 4 Select or Add a Department Click OK to proceed Note The Equipment will be filled in by the system if this is defined when the Item Equipment is added to Catalog I mport Export Feature The Import Export feature allows you to import and export off line data from and into the PV4E database You can import the data either from a CSV file created by the customer or from a temporary file generated by PV4E Export operation Feature Overview The CSV import file supports the following Import of Locations E Import of Connecting HW Inventory RiT Technologies Ltd 235 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Import of Rack Equipment Inventory Import of Network Equipment Inventory Import of Links Information Export supports the following and relative imports E Export of Locations E Export of Connecting HW Inventory E Export of PVMax equipment Inventory E Export of Network equipment Inventory m Export of Rack Equipment Inventory E Export of Terminal Equipment Inventory E Export of Links Information Scope Both servers the server from which the data is exported and the server to which the data is imported must have the same configuration as well as the same m PV4E Version m Service Packs update
433. stall to continue PatchView for the Enterprise opens gt P 4E Windows Internet Explorer WORK ORDER TOOL 5 SETTINGS Y RFRORTS Belgium Events Info Cette fie Figure 5 PV4E Opening Screen The default is set to open in the Maintenance window as it is here that most of the activity in PV4E occurs When this window opens for the first time after installation there is no information pane as this only appears after an item is added or defined within the database Logging out of PV4E gt To logout close PV4E D Logout Click the Logout Icon and confirm by clicking the OK button or Click the X icon located in the top right hand corner of the screen PV4E Graphic User Interface PV4E has an easy to use interactive GUI designed to allow the operation of the software to run with optimum efficiency and effectiveness RiT Technologies Ltd 19 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Menu Bar includes the Navigation Indicator buttons located buttons and menus within the Menu Bar Mr iS PVMAX P LET Alarm Refresh Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY a s FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Belgium Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Location Name ltems Property Pane Printer 1 Router 1 station 4 M Switch 1 8 Telephone 20 Events Info Date Time Event Category system Area View Event Log Pane PV4E Toolbar Figure 6
434. strator WORK ORDER TOOLSY SETTINGSY REPORTSY HELPY 5 FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology 00 15 E9 85 B7 1E PatchView Subnet General Modules Settings 7 Topology z 10 100 0 0 104 Functional Type Switch 00 00 0C 07 AC 01 10 100 40 21 Class Unknown 00 01 6 2C C5 4 10 100 10 3 Catalog Name Default Switch 00 07 6E 02 00 0F 10 100 20 201 IP 10 100 20 27 00 07 6E 02 08 20 10 100 40 10 MAC 00 15 E9 85 B7 1E 00 0B 83 00 03 51 10 100 40 158 P LET Status Online P LET Supported 00 0B B3 00 0E 8E 10 100 50 24 Serial No Type 00 0B 83 1F B4 5 10 100 40 152 No of Slots 1 Size U 00 0B B3 98 D8 AB 10 100 40 156 Power W 0 00 0C 29 C 1 0D 80 10 100 39 2 Arm Side ESA Weight KG 00 10 83 F4 91 33 10 100 10 21 Eai MoTo 00 11 95 E0 EA 9A 10 100 20 21 00 15 E9 85 B7 1E 10 100 20 27 00 15 9 85 B7 20 10 100 20 22 00 16 76 C 1 65 97 10 100 1 15 00 16 6 73 07 6A 10 100 40 27 Events 00 1B 3F 44 23 00 10 100 20 20 eee 00 1E 7A 9C E8 70 10 100 40 100 ae ee ee E 00 50 8B CF 5F BC 10 100 1 1 00 C0 B7 2A B4 56 10 100 40 47 albina t42 ritdomain co il 10 100 100 58 AMIB4 10 100 100 87 amib5 ritdomain co il 10 100 100 23 amitzxp ritdomain co il 10 100 100 72 o o o o o S o i S es il il m tf 2 Auto Detect Auto Detect is used to automatically detect devices from the LAN Mapp
435. system 1 attempts to receive an answer to a request from a Master before reporting a communiation error Retries RiT Technologies Ltd 227 PV4E User Manual V6 0 7 Click Detect As PVMax detects each device Expander Master Expander Scanner etc the Events Log is updated with a new event Once all of the devices are detected they appear in the Topology Tree with question marks over their icons This indicates that although the devices have been detected they have not yet been added to the inventory database You must add these devices to the inventory database To add the devices to the inventory database follow the instructions in To enter new hardware in the inventory database see To Enter New Hardware in The Inventory Database Loca hon PabtchView PY Topology Topology Subnet PVMAX Topology Physical SP 9147484579 10 100 20 31 1 ae a Figure 167 Example of Newly Detected Panels 8 Click Close ET 191333846 Port 1 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW 48 Ports SMART CLASSix STP 48 SW The Detect Master dia
436. t The Event Detail window appears m Click on the link that shows the Import log Note After completing the import procedure check the log for the message PBX data file import completed to ensure that the task has finished running RiT Technologies Ltd 470 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Chapter 13 PV4E System Settings PV4E System Settings Overview When setting up the PV4E system certain parameters need to be defined These include E Catalog See Chapter 4 The Catalog Items are added directly to the Catalog when installing PV4E This is referred to as the default Catalog Additional Items can be added to the Catalog manually During the Auto Detect process any items that are discovered via this process are added directly to the Catalog E Schedulers There are four schedulers LAN Mapper LAN Server Secure Link Switch Traps The LAN Mapper and LAN Server schedulers need to be set before P LET is run This is described in the P LET Chapter After running P LET the schedulers for LAN Mapper and LAN Server can be reset if your network requirements change Switch traps provide real time indications of any terminal equipment connections link up or disconnect link down A disconnection can be a regular disconnection or a failure in the physical communications link and the connection could be of an authorized or a non authorized device in the network The Secure Links scheduler sets the interval at whic
437. t 02 C Racki C Panel 0i C Port o1 gt Link C Porto yes E C Port 03 C Link C Port 04 C Link E gt Port 05 C Link Figure 183 Cable Test Results Directories Tree Note Functional types in the location tree are ignored in the directories tree Panels and Outlets Panels and outlets have sub directories named after their front ports inventory names See the following illustration Folders E 2 Demo Rack C Master 01 E i Port 01 3 Channel I Link 9 Panel 01 C Panel 02 C F LET Panel C Switch 01 Figure 184 Cable Test Results Outlet Folders Note RiT Technologies Ltd 258 PV4E User Manual V6 0 It is not necessary to create the Channel directory for a panel s ports Switches Switches have sub directories named after their switch modules The switch modules directories have sub directories named after their front ports See the following illustration Folders E 9 Demo Rack Master 01 9 Outlet 01 gt Panel 01 C Panel 02 I P LET Panel Switch O1 El Switch 01 M 1 C Port 01 O Channel 3 Link E O Port 02 Channel 3 Link E C Port 03 9 Channel 3 Link Fl Port o O Channel Link Figure 185 Cable Test Results Switch Folders Build Tree Utility This utility automatically builds the folders tree in the PV4E location tree to accommodate the Cable Test result files The location of the Build Tree utility can be found at PVE
438. t be of the same catalog type RiT Technologies Ltd 438 PV4E User Manual V6 0 m Click the Discovery Module at the foot of the screen and select the Consolidate menu item Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Hh Atlanta E NYC E DC1 C a Floor 1 O Halli E Row A Row B Row C 5 E Cabinet 5 E E Ci El Bl c2 DCIHIC FP 20 1 iT t Cn Gal Cn rl DC IH1C PP21 O pcHic s25 Hel c3 agl ca 4 I C5 Gl RowD Hall 2 Add requests Hall 3 E Hall 4 Hall 5 7 No Location El Panel 6 He Router 7 a es Dl ee SS SRE eal m The following screen appears RiT Technologies Ltd 439 92999 3 General Adapters Functional Type Stat Defa Defa Monitor Arm Side No of Slots Serial No Location Events Date Time Event 07 09 2009 18 04 Ports 07 09 2009 18 04 Ports 07 09 2009 18 03 Batch 07 09 2009 18 03 Batch oz Lie Tee 2 Unmanaged Devices Utilization Module PV4E User Manual V6 0 he Consolidate Devices Webpage Dialog Consolidate gt DCHIC 525 DCH1C S26 m The Consolidate Devices screen lists the name of all the devices which have been selected for the consolidation process The order of the names is according to the order in which they were selected in the location tree The name of the consolidated device will be the name with the arrow to its left Select name before clicking the Consolidate button E Click Cancel to abort the op
439. t of connecting and disconnecting devices in the network L From the Settings menu click Scheduler The Scheduler view appears Click the Switch Traps tab The contents of the Switch Traps tab appear M Edit Scheduler Webpage Dialog fitch Traps v Enable Switch Traps Scheduler Cd Daily Basis start 00 00 hr ll Sunday start hr E Monday start hr gi Tuesday start hr Wi Wednesday start hr O Thorsday start hr m Friday start hr W Saturday start hr Figure 311 Switch Traps Scheduler Switch Traps Click Edit to change the schedule for monitoring switch traps from the default setting of 24 hours per day The Edit Scheduler dialog appears Click Enable Switch Traps Scheduler checkbox in order to allow switch traps scheduling Make any time changes in the dialog and click OK The Switch Traps scheduler appears with the changes Click OK to continue To Set Switch Trap Properties for a Switch From the Location Tree click on a switch The switch properties view appears RiT Technologies Ltd 399 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2 Click the Settings tab The contents of the Settings tab appear FW Add Edit Inventory Switch Webpage Dialog 00 15 F9 B1 D8 AD General Modules Notes SNMP Settings Version Timeout ms Reties Monitor Monitor Traps Interconnect Se a ai oe ot US ee A oon g E E NEW Figure 312 Switch Settings Properties Click the Monitor Traps field in ord
440. t to the INyEntOry issisisiiesernareirn innsear i a Eaa Enot Assign Replace and Remove a Security Controller oo cccccccccsssssssssesseseeeeecceeceeeeeseaaaaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaaas BL P AA EEEE akon E EE ante ences E E E A E A T Adding a Security Controller to the Inventory cccccccccccccccceecceeeesssseseseeeeeceeeeeeeeesaueesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaags Edit an Existing Indicator Controller cccccsssssssseseeeccceeeeeeeeeeaaeaessessseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas View LTA CSI es cescise Se saa bionyesalenescnadsic ts E E N E Duplicate and Save as NOW scccsessesccsseavarvevecaasndevectsveotesaswasivcasvenvchadacssentiseayteiendsamesveiena eeseawen edema PN TRUS asec EE E A E oases a ewes once sin ae nee cee vague scenes edie oe T E TE Assigning a Rack Indicator to a Rack ccccccccsssssssseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeassesseeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas Remote Software Download RSD cccc cece ccccccceseccceceeccecesececeusecsceuececsusececsueecsceuecessueceseusesessueecesseecees Adding a Control Pad to Location 2 0 cccccssessssseesseeeececeeeeeeeeeeaaaeessesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesuaeeessusesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas Adding Connecting Hardware to Location cscssssseecccccececeeeeaaaesassesssseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaauaeaesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas Adding Outlets to Location cccccceeeccccccccccucneeesssssseeeeeccccceeeessneaeesssssseeeeececceeeeeessaaageasssseseeeeseeeeeseeeaaaas Ad
441. tab labelled Email Password Expiration A password expiry date has been added to the system For this purpose the following fields have been added to the password setting dialog Password expires after the number of days the password is valid since first initiation This parameter is relevant for the initial password settings as well as for passwords changed by users The default value is 90 days Password never expires when marked the Password expires after field is disabled Default unchecked When logging in the system tests whether the password is still valid In the event that the Password never expires the field is checked this test will not be performed RiT Technologies Ltd 480 PV4E User Manual V6 0 i eg Add Edit Security User Webpage Dialog General Membership Email Access PatchView O Active Directory Name Full Name Password Confirm Password Password Expires After Password Never Expires Change Password at Next Login Description Notification Only Figure 340 Permissions dialog Password Restriction The password should be a minimal length of eight characters and requires at least one letter and at least one digit Recently used passwords will be rejected by the system The user must enter a password that has not been used for at least five password changes Non Administrator Role When a non administrator login is performed the Settings Permission option will
442. tchView Information Locations of all PVMax Masters PVMax Scanners Expanders and Master Expanders detailing floors communication rooms racks and ladders in the racks Connectivity of all PVMax scanners to Expanders and all Expanders to Masters PV Hardware Previous Version If you have an older version of PV hardware you will also require Location Connectivity of all Satellite scanners to Master scanner detailing the Indoor backbone and Local bus connections Connectivity of all patch panels to the Master and Satellite Scanners detailing scanner connector numbers IP of all the Master scanners Community Name Serial number of all the Satellite Scanners Window Location is part of the Maintenance Module of PV4E The Location screen is divided into three windows These are E Location Tree gt All Locations and Items that have been allocated to a location can be accessed via this tree Items property pane Data changes to reflect the information of the item selected on the tree Events log pane This view lists all the activities that take place in the Network To open the Location Window RiT Technologies Ltd 99 PV4E User Manual V6 0 1 PV4E s system default opens the Maintenance Module with the Location Tree visible directly after log in To open the location tree from another module select and click Maintenance in the Top Menu Bar The Maintenance screen with the Location Tree will open
443. te a Multiple Selection of Items RiT Technologies Ltd 132 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Rack Equipment to a Location This section explains how to add rack equipment to a location Adding a Rack to Location gt To add a Rack to a Location 1 Right click the Location For example the Communication Room in the Location Tree where the Rack is to be assigned A menu appears Location Topology Users Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Location Amber Inc Belgium if Brussels Fil City Towers a Floor 01 amp Room 101 Recepton a Floor 02 Add Rack Equipment A Fe See pa Add Terminal Equipment Cable Organizer BLD A Add Network Equipment H Rack BLD B Add PatchView Equipment H Shelf BLD C Add Connecting HW Spacer BLD i Add Data Center Equipment BLD 2 Duplicate Tar Edit BLD A BLO B Delete BLD C Properties Figure 102 Adding Rack Equipment Window 2 Select Add Rack Equipment A drop down list appears 3 Click Rack The Add Edit Inventory Rack dialog box opens RiT Technologies Ltd 133 PV4E User Manual V6 0 ff B r Js ia E a eray E TY EN oe i i f eS a Add Edit Inventory Rack Webpage Dialog Name Functonal Type Class Catalog Name Size U Power Limit W Weight Limit KG Loca ten U Order Rack Indicator ts Items Environmental Notes Add Add is Provigonable Recommended Ww 0 e E None Amber Inc Bel
444. ted 10 Click OK to proceed Adding a PVMax Scanner Mini Scanner to Location gt To add a PVMax Scanner to Location 1 Select the Rack in the Location Tree where the PVMax Scanner is to be assigned Right click on the selected Rack A drop down list appears Select Add PatchView Equipment and click PVMax Scanner 4 The Add Edit Inventory PVMax Scanner dialog box opens RiT Technologies Ltd 149 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Inventory PVMAX Scanner Webpage Dialog Al Hotes Power W 0 Amber Inc Belgium Brussels City Towers Floor 0 Figure 118 Add Edit Inventory PVMax Scanner dialong 5 Type in the name of the PVMax Scanner 6 The Auto Naming feature can be used See Auto Naming Feature 7 Select the Class by clicking on the button optional 8 Select the Catalog Name by clicking on the button 9 Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item 10 Enter the Serial No Note The Type and Size U fields will be filled in automatically when the Catalog Name is selected The Panels will be added automatically when they are assigned to their scanner in the Topology 11 Click OK to proceed Adding a Local Scanner The Local Scanner is a single PV4E device that functions as a PV4E Master and a PV4E Scanner combined in one unit RiT Technologies Ltd 150 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PVMax Local Scanner is a stand alone device that manages the physical layer
445. ted Administrator Assign To e ha Status status lt Perform Delete New Edit Edit Work Order GA Add Edit Work Order Task Webpage Dialog xX General Links Notes Type choice Y Time Allocated Assigned To Due Date 0907 2009 Due Time Description Start Date wi Start Time Date Comp v Time Comp Location A Time Elapsed Location B Figure 281 Adding Another Task to a Work Order 4 Click on the 7l next to the Type field and select the type of task required RiT Technologies Ltd 367 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Links Hotes Type Cheice Time Allocated choice Due Date f Due Time Link Description Brea Link Inst d z Location A Location E Figure 282 Add Edit Work Order Task dialog 5 Inthe Description box type a description of the task 6 Select the Location where the task is to be performed Click the to open the location tree Select the location and click the OK button to return to the Task dialog 8 Ifa task is performed at more than one location select the second location in Location B 7 Location 1 Israel UK General Links Notes Type Install Time Allocated A BidgA Floor 01 4 Datacenter A Description a ip ERR ETD Due Date 09 07 2009 Due Time 5 gi 1 rak 3 1E Rakovi J J Rack 002 Location B 1 Raw2 Location A 1 Raw3 1 Raw4 OK Figure 283 Adding Another Task to
446. telligent physical layer management system IPLMS that can automate and simplify both the planning and day to day management of networks and their associated passive and active equipment and help you to streamline your network planning implementation and operational activities The application covers all aspects of operations including provisioning maintenance security asset management documentation and much more PV4E has been proven through successful deployments worldwide and is a comprehensive solution for automated real time location based control over connectivity and networked devices The software drastically soeeds up and Simplifies daily provisioning maintenance and security tasks It also provides the Infrastructure and IT manager with full control of network assets as well as an integration layer that provides an open bi directional interface to any network operations management system PV4E is a web based application on top of an SQL relational database All the components of the physical layer are part of the database The system provides real time updates to the database The software using a Web Interface facilitates easy access to all information including the ability to monitor and maintain the system from any remote location This solution provides real time end to end connectivity information whereby the entire network can be monitored and maintained PV4E s unique system tracks network connectivity from the Ter
447. tem Line Validity Test cccsssssasedenssancescahanecvas eusahassanneantetanenaptounssenacdaasteaedessanneanetannsaragesuasoatedsnseananes 242 C e E AE E E T A ETTE AE EET E 242 PEO N a E aosuneseaesanah eancsagness 242 Ga e TR A a EA E NE E T A A T E E NE EEEE O 242 Dopor c onma L Sy Pi e a 242 Work Plow and User Interface ccessssscsaswcivvwescsonawanbereedeadasagecieusiesieevenalunsveuto a a a a aa caes aaiae aaia 242 CoV EnG S T a AE 243 RiT Technologies Ltd viii PV4E User Manual V6 0 ATC MCT AL EE I E E A A E EA A A E EE 243 Location Record Stro ct rE seats ce codaasssinnscetpasncdaesioasesecdaiaanaeuannasnedseanansuvagsanedenaanniuetgawnadnesanaednneemaedeaadennansgeens 243 Connecting HW Record Structure as c cxesasesrcasccnnisedanentveddudeonstacentiacnedhneunptieiueaariatauentuandemncenesbveudiaatcabeecnines 244 Rack Eguipment Record StU Cte vasccccisasonenesahesopatesauasecasdadatdqentuabadesbtstonastiedancasansmessteebaneuduimueseeandoentiaiatens 244 Network Equipment Record Structure cccccccccssssssssssseeeccecceecceeeeaaaessesseeeeeeeeeeeeesesseaaaeasesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 244 Network Equipment Module Record Structure c ccccccccccccccceeessseseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeauaeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaqaas 245 Link Information Record SMUCIILC siesena nn aneka e aer aren reuntas 245 ESV Tie yadi T iS o r E E E r 246 Ee EEEE A A A A A A E E A N N E 246 Valid Parent Child Items iuicesiianiacoioissnn aaae aa a aaraa aaa SEE E 2
448. tems in Location caceenazeeernsoses velennsnsaneneuedtesaunwsesaxecindaalenneeaausenedsoouan eiyounnchtcenqeuin EERE aa gE 130 INV at hems In AOC ON sessies aiseee i AE RE A RE EE E EE EE E RAS 130 Deleting Items from Location facnsesenitsasatinsdcntaiedoienatnsitsshnentdacnataddmwbauabaanneimddettniceseumaliedadeasaneivncvenadanastedoontet 132 Adding Rack Equipment to a Location eeessesessssseeeseeeeterresssssssssssseectreerrssssssssssseseereeeessssssssssssseeeeeeresesssss 133 Adding a Rackto MOC AN OM case hace tb ee camnedi tusastaine scan ape ste turensOaateatia dans daleatciasvarna dae teisshdaainels decasametonemadiedoastecakcnamatanens 133 Adding a Cable Organizer to Location esi sncdantonedwcanadesticthnientdaaneadtnwsauaitdsandiSesinens oaveda doaebatcobeaneainatomhiessnadadoontel 135 Adding a Shelf t LOC AU OW essiri iape a a aie Eae Eana A s 137 Adding a Spacer ONO CAO Ms sissors ipic eiia aoa aip iari aeaa iai Eas 139 RiT Technologies Ltd vi PV4E User Manual V6 0 Defining Rack Contents pi ace cep nenacnascanadeas serena cee aeotanadneaccansamacanes tec saauteaeanaatanadantanasseacectigentedsandanadsaaecnee VT WS Fh TRACKS E once vencoasa T E E E E A TE A E EAT Moving Items Within SIR AC Kees sesso ve cisessairersercetiuaanice nbehttouersticu ialanewicaiem sent E A a riae E ENa EAEE Adding Patch View Equipment to Location cccccsssseececcceececeecaaaesssessesseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeauaaeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaqaa
449. tensive information and facilitates automated management and provisioning operations See above Scheduled Work Orders with hand held device CAD Module refer to CAD Manual Presents a visual representation of the PV4E locations and inventory items in 2 D maps Generates a full architectural view of the geographical setting of each asset in your entire network down to each room hall cubicle and desk in your enterprise E Enhanced Security Notifies you of any cable connection disconnection or user move in real time allowing you to prevent unauthorized activity mE Web based Application Allows you to access management data from remote locations Offers complete remote site management Fault Summary Provides true status of the network at any point in time Summarizes information in a tabular view allowing real time reporting of any configuration change and discrepancy Cable Test Results Provides connectivity information regarding links between ports to the customer The information also contains data for electrical cable tests for each port Import Export Capabilities Allows you to import and export off line data from and into the PV4E database m Interconnect Support PV4E supports Interconnect panels and manages them as it would with any cross connect panel RiT Technologies Ltd 5 PV4E User Manual V6 0 m Location Access Permissions Grants PV4E user groups and also individual users various levels
450. ter 1 ET Router i El Staton 4 M Swatch 1 T Telephone 20 Events Info Date Tine Event Code 09 08 2009 1506 User Logged In Figure 86 Editing a Location Window The Edit Location dialog can be accessed in three ways 1 Right click the selected Location in the tree and select Edit from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Action button in the Location Toolbar and Edit Or 3 Click on the Edit button in the Data Information Pane The Add Edit dialog will open 2 Edit the Location To use the Auto Naming facility See Auto Naming Feature 3 Select OK or one of the buttons to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 115 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Deleting a Location Locations can be deleted from the Location Tree Note When deleting a Location ensure that no Items or other Locations are defined under that specific Location If there are then move or delete them before attempting to delete the specific Location gt To Delete a Location 1 In the Location tree locate and select the Location you want to delete The Delete command can be accessed in two ways 1 Right click the Location in the Location tree and select the Delete function from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Delete button in the Location Toolbar A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion 2 Click either the OK or the Cancel button to proceed The selected Location will be deleted from the Location tree and from the datab
451. th the selected users 5 If you want to configure filters for the event notification refer to Configuring Event Notification Filters on page 488 6 Click the OK button The event notification is updated and active Assigning Event Notification by User To assign event notification by user 1 From Settings menu select Event Notification The Events window opens See figure below Click the User tab 3 Select a user from the Users tab and click the Edit button in the Information pane The Add Edit Notification to User window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 486 PV4E User Manual V6 0 PYMAX PV Alarm r gt Refresh Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY J A FOR THE Enterprise Events Users Administrator j User Name a j Full Name Notification gt Administrator Administrator p Event Name a Event Name a Event Code Event Category Figure 346 Add Edit Notification to User Window 4 Click the Add Event button The Add Events window opens RiT Technologies Ltd 487 PV4E User Manual V6 0 ai Add Events Webpage Dialog R Hame a eee n b Batch Cumgleted Sucnesshully Batch Completed with Errors Batch Process Started Catalog Item Added Catalog Item Deleted Catalog Item Updated Demo Time Expired Device authorized for existing device Device found without a specific location Device located i ee i ee A a Figure 347 Add Events Window 5 Select the ev
452. than the default can be set separately by entering its own SNMP settings RiT Technologies Ltd 387 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Fy Edit LAN Mapper Setting Webpage Dialog Use Current Topology Initiate Topology Discovery Default SNMP Settings Version Timeout ms O 2000 Start Scanning O Retries 2 Stop Scanning Figure 301 Defining LAN Mapper Settings Note In order for IP Phones to be detected by the LAN Mapper the Call Manager needs to be defined See Defining the Call Manager LAN Mapper Manual Scan The LAN Mapper scan can be activated manually for the first scan or it will scan according to the scheduler Subsequent scanning will be done automatically according to the times set in the scheduler See LAN Mapper Scheduler gt To start the Manual LAN Mapper Scan 1 Open the LAN Mapper from the Topology Tree by clicking on the Subnet button 2 Click on the Topology folder The General LAN Mapper window will open RiT Technologies Ltd 388 PV4E User Manual V6 0 3 Click Start Scanning The Discovery Module indicator button changes to blue aj If necessary the Stop Scanning button can be selected to stop the scan Events will be recorded in the Events Log 4 When standing on the indicator with the mouse arrow a tool tip appears supplying the current phase of the scan alongside with the precentage of progress The tooltip reports over then following phases E Subnet wake up Wi
453. the default order Enhanced Support of U Counting Order In order to enable more flexibility in defining the counting order every rack will be associated with its own counting order Changing the U order of an occupied rack will leave the devices in the same physical location but the U position naming will change For example a 45U rack with a top bottom order and a device is located in the highest position 1U Changing the U order will leave the device in the highest position but will now be called 45U RiT Technologies Ltd 31 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Edit Link Icons This update introduces a new enhancement to display user edited icons in the Edit Link module The icons loaded by the user will be displayed Connecting HW Default Tab View Search Upon selecting a connecting HW item panel or outlet the Properties view opens on the Ports tab instead of the General tab The Search module has been extended to carry an extended option to present and search ports for the relevant items using a wildcard Port side search for back or front is supported This option is implemented for the following search options Outlets m Panels Switch m PBX The Search option of the above elements has an additional Include port Name checkbox where the default value of the checkbox will be unchecked Once this option is checked an additional fields are added to the grid presenting the port name Activating the View Link fro
454. the tree and select Edit from the pull down menu Or 2 Click on the Action button in the Location Toolbar and Edit Or 3 Click on the Edit button in the Data Information Pane The Add Edit dialog will open 4 Edit the Item 5 To use the Auto Naming facility see Auto Naming Feature 6 Select one of the following options to proceed Moving I tems in Location You can move an item including a Rack with all its contents at any time There are two methods available to do this These are E Drag and Drop m Change Location gt To move an Item using the Drag and Drop method 1 In the Location tree select the Item that you would like to move and position the cursor over the icon Loca bon Topology Users Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure Location Amber Inc E g Belgium fh Brussels EE City Towers O a Hoori Gom Room 101 Reception E ge Alor 02 z Cabinet 1 El Rack oa Floor 03 Floor 04 t a Moor 05 Figure 99 Moving Items 2 Click and drag the item to the new location 3 Release the mouse and the item will be assigned to the new location RiT Technologies Ltd 130 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To change the Location of an Item 1 Select the Item and choose the Edit mode The Add Edit Inventory Item dialog opens a A Add Edit Inventory Cabinet Webpage Dialog x Items Environmental Data Cooling Name Rack 01 p Functional Type Class Catalog Name Size U
455. thout percentage indication m Routers scanning E Device information retrival m Writing device information to the database The following figure illustrates one of the tool tips P LET Alarm R Refresh wo Retrieving Devices Information 88 So RTS HELP Y Figure 302 LAN Mapper tool tips LAN Mapper Scheduler The LAN Mapper Scheduler defines the dates and times for the running of the LAN Mapper scanning process You can select the Start date and time of the run and how often the process Is to be repeated Note LAN Mapper will only detect devices that were recently active therefore it is advisable to set it to run during business hours To set the LAN Mapper Scheduler 1 From the Settings module select scheduler from the drop down menu 2 Select the LAN Mapper tab The LAN Mapper Edit Scheduler window opens 3 Click Edit Note It is not recommended to run both LAN Mapper and LAN Server simultaneously RiT Technologies Ltd 389 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt PV4E Windows Internet Explorer PYMAX P LET Alarm x Refresh W Logout Administrator MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTSY HELPY FOR THE Enterprise Catalog Permissions AN Server Secure Link Switch Traps Msg Filtering Enable LAN Mapper Scheduler System Tables i 01 01 2001 At Custom 00 00 0000 At Work Order PatchView Elements ecurrence Pattern PBX Mail Configuration Repeat Every 1 week s Event Notification
456. tion Item Types Functional Types and Items can be included The exact location of each end device can be defined PV4E is installed with a comprehensive list of Item Types Functional Types Groups and Items necessary to build your database Work Order Module PV4E s Work Order Module provides a comprehensive and user friendly system to streamline the Work Order process Planners create Work Orders which are then separated into individual tasks RiT Technologies Ltd 9 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Each task is assigned to a technician and a completion date for the task is determined Technicians take ownership and perform their assigned tasks Once tasks are completed the database is automatically updated eliminating the need for manual data entry From Work Order initiation to Work Order completion the status of a Work Order or of an assigned task can be monitored The Discovery Module PV4E includes the enhanced Discovery Module This is an innovative auto discovery network function combined with a connectivity and asset tracking system As the station to the connection link is dynamic the Discovery Module simplifies the tracking of your network connectivity and assets thereby considerably reducing maintenance costs and assuring 100 accuracy of your connections The Discovery Module discovers all active devices on the network and maps them with their location and link information Information about the Station is collected d
457. tlet 201 Port O1 Channel Step 2 D Bo Bo Be Be Be TESTLAB SW Panel 02 Panel 02 Panel 01 Panel 01 Outlet 201 02 Port 17 Port 01 Port 07 Port 23 Port 01 Show the Port s Cable Test Results When the file searching process is complete PV4E displays one of the following results 1 No files were found The GUI alerts the user with the following message Microsoft Internet Explorer x AN Mo test results were Found For this port 2 Only one file was found in the requested port directory In this case the file that was found will be opened automatically you may need to download the file before opening it 3 More than one file was found in the requested port directory n this case the GUI opens a dialog box with the list of files found by PV4E The list of files has a single selection Select the file and click Open to view The list will stay open until the Cancel button is clicked 4 Only one file was found in the counter requested port directory n this case the counter port s cable test result file will be opened 5 More than one file was found in the counter requested port directory In this case the flow continues as in 3 above 6 The storage path is not available RiT Technologies Ltd 265 PV4E User Manual V6 0 In this case the BL could not access the storage due to one of the following reasons 1 The storage path has not been set 2 The item s port pat
458. ton to cancel the operation The validity test can result in either success warning or error If the validity test is successful the import operation starts immediately as a batch operation running in the background A pop up message appears and an event fired indicating that the import process has been started Once the import process is finished two events are fired The first contains Statistic information of the import process and the second indicates that the import process is complete A pop up message appears for the user that initiated the operation If the validity test returns a warning a pop up warning box appears prompting you to confirm whether you wish to continue or cancel together with a link to the conflict report If you select OK the process continues If you select Cancel a conflict report is displayed If the validity test returned errors an error message displaying a notice of file errors appears the operation is canceled and a conflict report shown The user has an option to stop an import operation that has already started Once the import process begins the Import from a File option in the Tools menu changes to a Stop Import This option appears only for the user who initiated the import operation If the test you are performing returns a warning a pop up warning box appears prompting you to confirm whether you wish to continue or cancel the import operation Note If a user imports a file
459. ture can be used See Auto Naming Feature 5 Select the Class by clicking on thel button optional Select the Catalog Name by clicking on thel button Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Note The Ports will be filled in automatically when the Catalog Name is selected The Scanner Name and Connectors will be added automatically when the Panel is assigned to its scanner in Topology 8 Check the Link Terminator checkbox if the Panel is to be used as an outlet for directly connecting servers to it This option will allow the P LET to identify locate and link servers discovered during the P LET process 9 Click OK to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 183 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Telecommunication Infrastructure Adding a Cable Horizontal and Vertical Patch Cord 1 Select the Infrastructure radio button see the following Location Topology ISE D Tree Telecommnication Infrastructure 7 Location EI 3 Amber Inc 2 Stand on the location tree and right click a location e g room From the context menu select Add Tele Infrastructure gt Horizontal and Vertical OR Patch Cord The following example uses Horizontal and Vertical Topology Users Room 101 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General E Amber Inc i _Nan A Ci E City Towers a Floor Oi El fe cot H f Doi Add Location PER i ERDE A Cre ee Horizontal and Vertical rI Flo
460. tus According to port status you can tell if a port is currently linked to another item or not Only unconnected ports can be used in new links PORT COLOR INDICATES Grey The port is currently unconnected Green The port is currently connected to another port Yellow Untraceable connection ial eee Orange The port is currently offline m m m View Link from Location or Topology gt To view the View Link Window from the Location or Topology Tree 1 Select and right click on an Item in the Location or Topology tree or a Port in the Ports tab A pull down menu will appear 2 Select View Link The View Link Window will open RiT Technologies Ltd 296 PV4E User Manual V6 0 B P 4E Windows Internet Explorer PY YMAX PY Alarm x Refresh O Logout Administrator WORK ORDER TOOLS Y SETTINGS Y REPORTS Y HELP A FOR THE Enterprise Location Topology Users Panel 01 Tree Telecommunication Infrastructure General Connectors e Location E Japan es reon Dak Jf Tokyo t ona 3 Hama ID Hane Building T 4 Floor 01 gt 1 AnySeryi Port 01 Port 01 Back 01 Back 01 gt 2 Any Servit Port 02 Port 02 Back 02 Back 02 Room 100 Any Servic Port 03 Port 03 Back 03 Back 03 1E Cabinet 1 ort Se Porto4 Back04 Back04 E CAB a Edit Link Port 05 Back 05 Back 05 Panel 01 Labels Port 06 Back 06 Back 06 07 Port 07 Back 07 Back 07 mM EGD Show Panel i Me S
461. tus of the Work Order changes automatically to Completed After the completed Work Order has been checked and approved by the manager the status is changed to Closed A task can be cancelled prior to implementation RiT Technologies Ltd 355 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Note In order to monitor the task implementation process RiT recommends that as a rule you first create a Work Order from the Work Order dialog create your links as Work Order tasks This is an alternative to working in the Edit Link Worksheet which sends the instructions directly to the scanners The Work Order Window The Work Order screen is divided into three windows and are as follows Work Order Pane Work Orders that have been created are listed here The option to view the list according to the Work Order status is selected in this pane Viewing the lists according to the Work Order ID or the Engineer Location tab which shows the location tree This is used to select the items to be linked Tasks Pane Tasks are created and or edited in this area The statuses of the tasks are viewed in this pane Events Log Pane This view lists all the activities that take place in the Network Opening the Work Order Window gt To open and view the Work Order Window 1 Click the Work Order button located in the Menu Bar of PV4E The Work Order screen opens and the Work Order button turns Red to Show that it is the active window The Tasks Pane
462. tware Horizontal Cable Patch Panel Communications Network Equipment T z Tl EEEF gt Fast maiin E A ma HFHH HHA A Cable Wo rkstation j We eee ETETE Lo OO a a a a php E a eee G PV4E PV4E ae Client 1 Client 2 SQL Relational Database Figure 2 PV4E PatchView Interconnection Using the System This section provides an overall picture of how the system is used and what steps you normally need to take The use of PV4E follows this general outline m Set up the infrastructure This first stage involves the installation of the PYMax elements including components such as panels masters and expanders Subsequently you need to make all the physical connections to the PVMax system Please refer to the PVMax User Manual After completing the site preparation install the SQL database and PV4E software E Run PV4E and Configure the System Build the database Start by adding catalog items as required see Chapter 4 The Catalog In the maintenance window map your physical network by defining the locations of your inventory countries cities buildings floors rooms and cubicles Then stock your locations by assigning the assets in each location The auto naming function is a central tool that helps build the assets by allowing you to sequentially label assets such as modules and ports The infrastructure for input includes all elements between outlets and RiT Technologies Ltd 14
463. ty Pane 2 Click Edit The Edit PatchView Settings dialog opens Z Edit PatchView Settings Webpage Dialog x PatchView Settings PVMAX Enabled PY Enabled PYMAX and PV Enabled Figure 13 Edit PatchView Settings dialog 3 Select the required option The default option is PVMax Enabled 4 Click OK PV4E now shows only the selected functionality RiT Technologies Ltd 28 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Searching for Equipment The PV4E system includes a powerful search tool for finding any database items such as stations switches connecting hardware and users Search results display the exact location of the searched items This also allows the device to be verified or edited Search allows the System Administrator to quickly find assets in large networks speeding the process of resolving maintenance or security related problems There are different search options depending on the database item specified in the search The following general search instructions are followed by an example There are two main types of searches Specific item type For this search you need to select the item type for the search Global search Allows you to search for any equipment IP address or location This search is flexible in that you are not required to know the item type RiT Technologies Ltd 29 PV4E User Manual V6 0 gt To Search for a Specific Item Type 1 At the bottom of the Maintenance mo
464. u select a location click OK the export operation starts immediately as a batch operation that runs in the background An event will be fired indicating that the export process has been started An indication is shown on the screen when the export operation is in progress FOR THE Enterprise export operation in process Once the export process is complete two events will be fired One contains Statistic information of the export process and the other indicating that the export process is complete and the file is ready for use You have the option to stop an export operation that has already started Once the export process begins the Export to a File option in the Tools menu changes to a Stop Export This option appears only for the user who initiated the export operation If you select Stop Export from the pull down menu a pop up warning box appears prompting you to confirm cancellation and Stop Export operation RiT Technologies Ltd 238 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Auto Detect PBX Import Import from a File E Stop Export Device Locator System Status Device Authorization Figure 176 Stop Export Tools Menu Process Behavior m The export process generates a file for internal PV4E use with an exp extension m The file includes the inventory and link information for the items related to the selected sub tree the locations and all user defined catalog items in the Catalog m If the link b
465. ual V6 0 N ew Feature Function l Authentication Active Directory Integration PV4E user authentication is performed against the organization s active directory or the PV4E local database GUI New look and feel Tree position held when toggling between PV4E modules A new tool tip has been added to all combo boxes Selected Menu items have been moved The tree node will not collapse if you navigate to another screen The position is held until you return The new tool tip displays the entire string when the combo box is too small to contain all the information Event Notification from Tools to Settings Connectivity Zones from Tools to Settings Device Authorization from Tools to Settings System Info from Tools to Help Refer to User Manual Application View Link window modification The size of the View Link window can be changed includes full view Navigation Tree locations Location tree nodes can be deleted without first deleting its sub locations SMTP port Cables per conduit Multi Cable support The SMTP port can now be edited Default port is 25 Telecommunication Infrastructure Management PV4E now calculates the number of cables per conduit New support for trunk cables multi pair cables and multi fiber cables Blade Servers Blade Server Discovery The system automatically identifies consolidates and positions Blades in the chassis Available only for Blades with
466. ual machines Subnet scanning Scanning for both single and multiple subnets gt Single An option has been added to the context gt Selected menu that allows you enable disable a subnet scan gt Enable disable selected subnets HSRP support Improved support for HSRP allows you to associate multiple routers with the same subnet Device type resolution according to This enhancement requires changes in MAC prefix settings that are not exposed in the GUI and will need to be performed by RiT professional services The Discovery Module progress A new subnet scanning percentage progress tool tip has been changed bar displays the progress status A counter has been added to the The topology tree now shows the number of subnets in the subnet topology tree items per subnet Unmanaged devices connect a Detecting multiple IP phones and up to a series of IP phones in a daisy chain single PC will connect the IP phones in a daisy effect providing there is no more chain detecting more than a single PC will than one station on a switch port transform the connection to a hub Virtual stations Support for virtual stations requires the station to be connected directly to a switch and not through a hub or a wireless access port CAD Module Expanded CAD view CAD View has been changed and is now a floating window with an enlarged presentation space can open to full screen view RiT Technologies Ltd 2 PV4E User Man
467. uest Equipment Name Functional Type Printer Class i Catalog Name choice Location Indude Sub Location i Name a Functional Type Class Catalog Name Location PLT 1 Printer Default Printer Default Printer USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 pitin Printer Default Printer Default Printer USA Atlanta Bldg A Hoor 1 Room 1 GE Cs otal Records 2 Figure 264 Add Equipment to Request Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 349 PV4E User Manual V6 0 6 Hold down the Ctrl key and click the arrow 1 with the mouse to select the items you wish to add Click OK The following screen opens with the added item g Remove Equipment Webpage Dialog WO Name Operation Operation Description W0 07 09 2009 00182 Remove Station Remove Station AndyD from USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Move W0 07 09 2009 00182 Remove Printer Remove Printer PLT 1 from USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Move Remove From List Modify Work Order Figure 265 Remove Equipment Screen 7 Click Next to continue Click Finish to complete the task Reserved Resources When an item is reserved it cannot be assigned to an additional Work Order until the original Work Order is performed or deleted Whenever a Work Order is created and stored the system recognizes the components in the Work Order and reserves the resources The following screen displays a reserve task that is automatically generated by the system RiT Technologies Ltd 350 PV4E U
468. uncommitted transactions but save the undo actions in a standby file so that recovery effects can be reversed RESTORE WITH STANDBY Standby file ie E Mt 12 In the Restore options field select Overwrite the existing database 13 In the restore the database files as field the path must be in the same place where the PV4E SQL database resides 14 Click OK 15 A progress window appears on the left hand side of the screen Executing 1004 Stop achon now 16 If you encounter a database is in use error at this stage stop and then start the SQL server and restore the database Please refer to the Troubleshooting section for more information The following message is displayed after the PV4E database has been successfully restored RiT Technologies Ltd 522 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Microsoft SOL Server Management Studio i The restore of database PY4E completed successfully EE Troubleshooting If you receive the following error message after step 16 above you must stop and restart the SQL server Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio 6 Restore Failed For Server TESTLAB1S Microsoft Sgl5erver Smo Additional information iy System Data SqlClient sglError Exclusive access could not be obtained because the database is in use Microsoft SqlServer Smot o lt a Stopping the SQL Server Conmect nes Disconnect i Register D E i PL Ne
469. up in the Topology Tree where the links are located 3 The Information pane opens with the Link Status appearing in bold Edit Link Worksheet Links are created or modified for your assets in the Edit Link dialog This dialog contains the Edit Link Worksheet and the Function buttons used to access commands for creating editing and managing links The Edit Link Worksheet box can be accessed from either the pull down menu in Location or Topology or the Edit Link button in the toolbar Note Work Orders can be created directly from the Edit Link Worksheet The Add Edit Work Order Task Worksheet Similar to the Edit Link Worksheet is opened from the Work Order Module This is used to create a Work Order Task See the Work Order and Managing Links Chapter It is possible to display all of a selected Item s ports in the worksheet or select a specific port or selection of ports to appear The worksheet consists of columns and rows Each column is divided into three sections The item appears in the center section surrounded by its ports Items are usually linked at port level Opening Edit Link from Location or Topology Tree Open Edit Link from the pull down menu When the Edit Link Worksheet is opened from an item in the tree all the ports will appear in the first column of the worksheet gt To open the Edit Link Worksheet from the pull down menu 1 Select and right click on the Item to edit the links in either the Location or T
470. uring the discovery process which includes the IP address MAC address Host Name and Service type All this information is then entered into the database automatically and is available to the network administrator in a graphical representation The Discovery Module ensures the following added system features Network Equipment Discovery All Network Equipment in the network is discovered automatically no matter where it is physically located in the organization PV4E identifies each Station and automatically creates it in the Database and the related links for each Station Asset per Location The Terminal Equipment location is automatically assigned If for example an IP phone is moved from one room to another the Discovery Module automatically updates the system as to the new location mE Utilization Module The Discovery Module scans the ports of all the Switches in the network It collects information of the activity at each Switch port The system identifies the last date and time the Station was active The information is displayed either in the form of a report or dedicated screen and is valuable to the IT manager for management of unused ports on the Switches PV4E Related Hardware The following provides a brief explanation of the hardware used together with the PV4E system For full details please refer to the PVMax Hardware User Manual PVMax Master The Master includes the SNMP agent It collects saves and transmits
471. used directly after the Back up do not restart the PV4E server until the Restore process has completed Restoring the SQL Database for Versions 2005 and 2008 You must stop the PV4E server before starting the restore SQL database process Refer to the section Stopping the PV4E Service Note The Restore Function can only be used with backup files that were created using the same version of PV4E and SQL To restore the Database Verify that the PV4E Server has been stopped See above 1 From the Start Menu select Tasks gt Restore gt Database RiT Technologies Ltd 518 PV4E User Manual V6 0 New Database New Query Script Database as Detach Rename Take Offline Delete Bring Online Refresh Shrink d Properties pace Up Restore Database Files and Filegroups Mirror Transaction Log Ship Transaction Logs Generate Scripts Import Data Export Daca Copy Database 2 The following Connect to Server screen opens af Connect to Server Mimmsolt Microsoft AS Windows Server System SQL Server 2005 Server type Database Engine Serer name TESTLAB1 5 Authentication soL Semer Authentication Login Cancel Help Options gt gt 3 Enter Server type Server name of where the PV4E server is installed Authentication Login and Password Click Connect 4 The Restore Database PV4E screen opens at the General tab by default
472. uter to Location 1 Select and right click on the Rack or the Room in the Location Tree where the Router is to be assigned A pull down menu will appear 2 Select Add Network Equipment and Router The Add Edit Inventory Router dialog box opens E A Add Edit Inventory Router Webpage Dialog Eal Modules Hotes Cisco Router 01 Core Router Cisco 3600 Power W Type Size U None Weight KG Demo Comm Room Demo Rack Figure 158 Add Edit Inventory Router dialog 3 Type in the name of the Item The Auto Naming feature can be used See Auto Naming Feature Select the Class by clicking on thel button optional Select the Catalog Name by clicking on thel button Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item 2 vt e Fill in the IP address if Known Note The MAC Address will be added automatically when the system is scanned by P LET 8 Click OK to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 219 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding PBX or HUB to Location A Add Edit Inventory PBX Webpage Dialog x PBX and HUBs are not discovered by P LET The items can be inserted manually if required gt To add a PBX or HUB to Location 1 Select and right click on the Rack or the Room in the Location Tree where the Network Equipment is to be assigned A pull down menu appears 2 Select Add Network Equipment and open one of the Items The Add Edit Inventory PBX HUB dialog bo
473. uters to ensure that the information is correct and whether the Routers are available or not 10 Click Apply The settings for the Network Topology are defined and the Routers appear in the Network Topology tree each Router is identified by an IP Address RiT Technologies Ltd 395 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Subnet Webpage Dialog General ___P Address Interface SNMP Version Timeout ms ___Retries _ 0 0 0 0 0 SHMPV2 2000 2 Figure 308 Adding a Subnet Manually Routers tab Scanning Selected Subnets Manually The discovery module allows you to scan only selected subnet in amanula process gt Toscan selected Subnets Manually 1 Select one or more subnets from the topology tree Using the ctrl button 2 Right click the subnets and select the Scan Subnet menu item 3 The discovery module will scan once the selected subnets Topology gt 10 100 0 0 103 El 100 10 0 0 0 192 115 241 0 0 Scan Subnet Enable Subnet Discovery Disable Subnet Discovery Figure 309 Select subnets for manual scan RiT Technologies Ltd 396 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Removing Selected Subnets from the scan The discovery module allows you to exclude include multiple subnets in the scanning process To Add Remove multiple Subnets from the scan 1 Select one or more subnets from the topology tree Using the ctrl button 2 Right click the subnets and select the Enable Disabl
474. utomatically detected in the Topology Tree Tip It is recommended to insert the Masters Master Expanders Expanders PVMax Scanners and Panels in their correct order in the Topology Tree Unlike the Location Tree it is not possible to move the devices in the Topology Tree gt To add a new device 1 Place the new device in its physical location in the network and attach it to the appropriate existing devices An event description appears in the Events pane Click Refresh The new device appears in the Topology Tree with a question mark over its icon This indicates that while the device has been detected it has not yet been added to the inventory database You must add the device to the inventory database To add the device to the inventory database follow the instructions in To enter new hardware in the inventory database on page 217 gt To move an existing device L Remove the device from its current physical location in the network An event description appears in the Events pane Place the device in its new physical location in the network and attach it to the appropriate existing devices An event description appears in the Events pane Click Refresh The device appears in the Topology Tree in its new location gt To replace an existing Scanner or Expander L Remove the device from its current physical location in the network An event description appears in the Events pane Place the new device i
475. ve the device from its current physical location in the network An event description appears in the Events pane Click Refresh The device appears in the Topology tree with an X next to its icon This indicates that while the device has been physically removed from the network it has not yet been deleted from the inventory database You must delete the device from the inventory database Right click the device s icon in the Topology Tree and select Remove from the dropdown list Right click the device s icon in the Topology Tree and select Delete from the dropdown list The device no longer appears in the Topology tree The User Tree is found in the Maintenance Module and represents the hierarchical structure of the users in the company s enterprise There are three levels of definition available in the tree These are E Group m Department m User RiT Technologies Ltd 232 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Editing Moving and Deleting Users A Group Department and User can be added to the User Tree and edited at any time These can be deleted as long as no Users are listed in either the Groups or the Departments Users can be moved between the departments using the Edit mode Note In order to assign Terminal Equipment to their Location Users must be defined See Adding Terminal Equipment Adding a User Group There is no limit to the amount of User Groups that can be defined gt To add a User Group 1 Select
476. veral connectivity modules This process is alSo required for the purpose of placing blade in the right bays automatically by the discovery module Before you link bays to connectivity modules you must first define the maximum number of ports per bay To do this perform the following steps In the Settings tab enter the number of ports per bay in the No of ports per bay field This field sets how many links can be connected to a specific bay After you have completed this step do the following 1 Goto the Modules tab of the relevant chassis Click Bay Assignment RiT Technologies Ltd 454 PV4E User Manual V6 0 The following screen opens xi Bay Ports Assignment Port Assign Catalog Bays Ports Catalog Connectivity Module Ports Selected Bays Port Port 01 v Modules HP Ethernet Pass Through Module Slot 1 v PortName Bay Assigned Port Module Slot No E Port Index Back Port Front Port Module Slot No Port 01 Back 01 Port 01 Port 01 Back 02 Port 02 Port 01 Back 03 Port 03 Port 01 Back 04 Port 04 Port 01 Back 05 Port 05 Port 01 Back 06 Port 06 Port 01 Back 07 Port 07 Port 01 Back 08 Port 08 Port 01 Back 09 Port 09 Port 01 Back 10 Port 10 Port 01 Back 11 Port 11 Port 01 Back 12 Port 12 Port 01 Back 13 Port 13 Port 01 Back 14 Port 14 Port 01 Back 15 Port 15 Port 01 Back 16 Port 16 b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 O N om wf WS Ne wo N om Uw Sf WwW Ne m ee ce ce ed gt WwW nN S
477. ves to the active line Click the Remove button Select OK or another of the options to proceed RiT Technologies Ltd 68 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding a Printer to the Catalog Printers that are part of the network need to be defined If the printer has an IP address then it will be automatically detected by the P LET It is only necessary to define the printer in the catalog if P LET is not installed gt To add a Printer 1 In the Catalog tree right click on Printer 2 Click Add Item in the pull down menu The Add Edit Catalog Printer dialog opens M Add Edit Catalog Printer Webpage Dialog Laser Printer General 8 s_ Adapters Software Notes Name L aser Printer Functional Type Class choice Description CPL Power W Arm Side Monitor No of Slots Size U Type Vendor Part No Vendor Name choice Image Name Default Printer Figure 47 Add Edit Catalog Printer dialog 3 Enter the relevant information 4 Assign an Icon See Assigning Icons to a Catalog Item or Class 5 Click on the Adapters tab Optional RiT Technologies Ltd 69 PV4E User Manual V6 0 yy Add Edit Catalog Printer Webpage Dialog Laser Printer 10 Ki 12 13 14 15 Software Notes No of Ports Description iaa Remove h es eee T Service Name Connector Figure 48 Add Edit Catalog Printer Adapters Tab Click on the Add button to insert the adapter informat
478. vi Port 09 Jii Amar omame o Fima F i Oo Oo sy a n e Ww m Port 01 Port 02 Port 03 Port 04 Port 05 Port 06 Port 07 Port 08 Port 09 Whee el Aih BackO1 Backi Back 02 Back 03 Back 04 Back 05 Back 06 Back 07 Back 08 Back 09 Gk A imi Back 0i Back 02 Back 03 Back 04 Back 05 Back 06 Back 07 Back 08 Back 09 ea a Figure 268 Work Order Screen The following screen displays an example of an item that has been reserved If you try to run a provisioning request for a reserved item the Next button will be disabled g Move Equipment Webpage Dialog Equipment List Location Tree USA Atlanta Bldg A Floor 2 Mov _ Location G UK USA MA Atanta i Bldg A a Floor 1 a Floor 2 Move Swap Change requests demonstrz CR2 Room 200 Room 201 Room 202 Room 203 Room 205 Room 210 Outlet 2 a Floor 3 Add request demonstrations ot Indicates that station is reserved Remove From List Figure 269 Swap Equipment Screen RiT Technologies Ltd 352 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Error Messages The following section lists all error messages received in the Provisioning application An error is identified by the following icon To view the error point the mouse over the icon to view the tool tip error See example in the following screen e Add Equipment Webpage Dialog Operations Name a WONamee Operaion Operation Description E
479. w Query Start Pause Resume Restart Refresh Serr Properties 2 On the location tree right click the relevant server folder gt select Stop from the context menu The following prompt appears Microsoft SOL Server Management Studio ES Gre you sure you want to stop the MSSOLSERVER service an TESTLAB9 i EE 3 Click Yes to stop the Server 4 The following prompt appears RiT Technologies Ltd 523 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Microsolt SOL Server Management Studio Stopping this service Will also stop SQL Server Agent MSSOLSERVERD Do vou wish bo continue We 5 Click Yes The following dialog box appears Service Control Attempting to stop the following service on TESTLABY MSSULSERVER Hill ee r 6 Click Close after the server has been stopped Restarting the SQL Server 1 Open the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Connect Disconnect Register H r New Query Start Stop Pause Resume Restart Refresh Sec Properties 2 On the location tree right click the relevant server folder gt select Restart from the context menu The following prompt appears Microsoft SOL Server Management Studio i re you sure vou want to restart the MSSOLSERVER service on TESTLABS F 43 3 Click Yes to restart the Server RiT Technologies Ltd 524 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Appendix B Glossary This Glossary contains abbreviatio
480. witches in the network and collects information of the Station activity at each Switch port Work Order Work Order ID assignment Work Order Module Work Orders are instructions for implementing links and other tasks at a site The Work Order is made up of a series of tasks Work Order IDs can be allocated automatically by the system according to a pre defined template or given manually by the user when creating the Work Order A system where planners create Work Orders divided into tasks The module allows for the tasks to be managed RiT Technologies Ltd 530
481. x opens Modules PEX A03 Functional Type class Catalog Name SW Ver Type No of Slots Size U Serial No Power W Arm Side Hone Weight KG Location Demo Comm Room Denv Rack ae te 1 Appiy Eo UPE eg Figure 159 Add Edit Inventory PBX HUB dialog 3 Type in the name of the Item The Auto Naming feature can be used See Auto Naming Feature Select the Class by clicking the down arrow optional Select the Catalog Name by clicking the down arrow Change the location optional See To change the Location of an Item Select the Module Tab and add the necessary information Click OK to proceed a oe E RiT Technologies Ltd 220 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Adding Terminal Equipment All Terminal Equipment excluding POTS telephones will be discovered by the system when scanned with P LET Terminal Equipment is divided into five Functional Types These are IP Phone KVM Device Printer Station E Telephone IP Phones Printers and Stations are all linked via outlets or link terminator panels to the switches The P LET Module will automatically create link and insert them in the correct location in the Location Tree if full links have been defined They are automatically discovered if the subnet is accessible and listed It is only necessary to define these elements individually if you are not using P LET Refer to Discovery Module Chapter for more information POTS telephones need to be listed ind
482. y TOW OY SUG i E S 8 PA FW 1G yi AU EI 6 E E EE E E E E A E E A E 8 Web based Management System ccccccccccssssssssssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaageaeases 9 Asset Managemen cernteseceimeutloa meacinsisnasmanccescistecaaisceateeaattouncirssinenemensaliuanaiet ent Beeyesunewetinsenauaaeeneemapavnassubawsminass tinewiageuessieeds 9 Work Order Module sr yengeme rasno anemone slean eine TREE E EER EAEEREN 9 The Discovery Module osccaspastrcanneamuncanstins TA R EEEE EEA OE ENTA EEEO EEEE 10 PYARE R ated A Wy AM e 10 PNE AAS E e E E EN EE ET E EEE EENET ENET nema E E AES EE E EE 10 PYNE ma e E E E T E E OEE A E ETETE E 1 PN Va AT RS ca rae cesar cemarpnace E eemamadas teen E EE EE uns ei mean E E 1 BV NV e TE ss aceh crea T TEIN AT I T E IT E NIIE A TI IOA SEE PE EEI T ETE TO 1 Py IVa Eoc al aE crs pierse E E E E E sowed TE E T E ETE A E 1 Py Max Indicator OME OCF sasien nire E A EEA EE E R 1 PA Ma SP E reece een er cmt erent nee ee eee ee eee ere er ee re 1 UMM TP MIK UMNO yy SU ete ates cnc cae Gorka tase sine nmnssanine E E 12 SMART 21 06 6 Wag La ere me ere nee ee Be nee nes een acter en cD mmr Tee eer nee enn en nee reer nero ner ere mere 12 ME TM ONT sets ace cpca ssise tates eran toeccie eae ose EE aa wnond eee taaaarubaatonaternecepe 12 S E AEAN A A EE I NE E EAI I O E E N AAA AE E I N A E TE 13 Hardware Software Interaction ccescecsssssssssooocococcceesceessssooococcoccecess
483. y are assigned Setting the Location Access Permission From the Settings tab on the main tool bar select Settings gt Permissions RiT Technologies Ltd 501 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Figure 358 PV4E Screen Settings Permissions tab The Permissions tab opens by default To change Access permissions click the Access tab the following screen opens PV4E Windows Internet Explorer e PVIFMAX pi P LET Alarm r Refresh MAINTENANCE WORK ORDER TOOLSY REPORTS T HELP aw Fon THE Enterprise Admin 2 General Permissions Members ss ACCESS Description TER RM eS Location Tree System Administrator Data Center Manager Data Center Manager Location Read only Read only group 1 Be terse Report Center Report Center r ee UK IMG usa ER eee Events Info Date Time Event Code Event Category Figure 359 PV4E Screen Settings Access tab View only The Access Tab All checkboxes appear as disabled in the Access tab To view actual permissions click Edit The Access tab contains a tree with checkboxes next to each location that allows the Administrator to set the location access permissions for individual users and groups E A black checked box indicates that the user has access to a location and to all of its sub locations m A grey check indicates that the user has access to a location and to one or more of its sub locations but not all m An unchecked box indicates that the user does not hav
484. y location Is set automatically to the location where the pathway was entered with the user capability to override the system settings RiT Technologies Ltd 189 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Dimensions Tab Enter the dimensions of the pathway To change to your preferred measuring system see the Measurements section for options Add Edit Inventory Pathway Webpage Dialog General i 1 Branching Pts Notes Length Height Depth Cables Tab The cables tab displays a list of all cables installed in this pathway and should be equal to or under the maximum capacity RiT Technologies Ltd 190 PV4E User Manual V6 0 Add Edit Inventory Pathway Webpage Dialog Outdoor Cable 7 General Dimensions Cables Branching Fts Notes ion Nome tatalogName d s Cable Z7 X 1 Duplex F O gt Cable 7 1 Duplex F O Duplex F O Cable 7 x 2 Duplex F O Cable 7 X 4 Duplex F O Cable Z X 5 Duplex F O Cable Z X 6 F O Cable Z Y 2 Duple F O Cable Z Y 3 Duplex F O Remove Click Edit to add or remove cables For more information refer to the section Branching Points Tab Displays all the points where pathways pass and can also include other pathways 1 Click the Branching Points tab to view all branching points e g conduits and raceways RiT Technologies Ltd 191 PV4E User Manual V6 0 2B Add dit Inventory Pathway Webpage Dialog x A C Path General Dimensions Cables Orde
485. ype Time Allocated Created Due Date 08 06 2009 Due Time Description Move Server Start Date Date Comp Location A Time Elapsed Location B OK 3 Cancel Se Pena ILN Reset ae Y Net af XE SS ent oe PA Figure 285 Editing a Task or add a description Click the OK button to continue Viewing a Link The link status of a device can be viewed in a many locations in the PV4E application These links are displayed in a graphical representation and can Alarm Tasks Operation Status Edit Pta Refresh Status Created Created status Assigned To Start Time Time Comp W Logout Administrator Bay eal FOR THE Enterprise Assigned To i idanb Administrator Perform Edit Work Order be accessed either through the Maintenance module or the Work Order Module gt To view a link in the Work Order Module 1 Open the Work Order Module 2 Select the Work Order option The View Link dialog opens RiT Technologies Ltd 370 XJ a ek Make any changes necessary such as changing the assigned Engineer If the task is a link task and you want to view the link click the link tab Select the task and right click on the gt indicator and click on the New Link PV4E User Manual V6 0 MAINTENANCE Work Order Location All ID Engineer TOOLSY SETTINGSY PVMAX PV Alarm REPORTSY HELPY W0O 07 09 2009 00003 Operati

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

  5 KEBA Standard Protocol  Natural Induction Methods  DigiPower JS-TALK User's Manual  USER MANUAL  preset plus french.bk  Manual (English)  PDF  Laview LV-KDV1804B6BP  LG P925 Data Sheet  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file